\ at)
is
1)?
ite *y
Rie
haeee
fig.
&
Fee pots
Se hrmtac ee:
a
t ate
ahacprepiiateerni uomttrtaht
peedictiees en
pats Wes rw hire
-_
a
i Rs
i
|
3
4
PHOTOTYPE F.GUTEKUNST PHILAD'S
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES
PHIGADELPARA
Gat
1888.
COMMITTEE OF PUBLICATION:
JosEPH Lerpy, M. D., Gro. H. Horn, M. D.,
Epw. J. Noxtan, M. D.. THoMAs MEEHAN,
JOHN H. REDFIELD.
Epiror: EDWARD J. NOLAN, M. D.
PHIEAD EIR ET A:
AGA DEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,
LOGAN SQUARE,
1889.
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADRLPHIA, e
February 6, 1388.
Thereby certify that copies of the Proceedings for 1888 have been presen
at the meetings of the Academy as follows :—
Pages 9to 40 . 2 é . April 10, 1888.
‘“ Aton BTA we : F . April 24, 1888.
we io to, LO4aee F : . May 1, 1888.
Se 10antowl some. - : - May 5, 1888,
Sd 3ietonli2eue ~ : . May 22, 1885
— “153 to 165" - : F . June 26, 188s.
<<) 169 to} 2007 é . . August 7, 1888.
“Pe 20 tow2iG- | ; ; . August 28, 1888.
© (4217 tor24s) . . ¥ . September 25, 1888.
SOP 249 ston 2a. 7. : 5 . October 23, 1888.
<< Zipatoro0d as. ‘ : . December 11, 1888.
TE S105) (Ko) BR) e ; , . December 18, 1888.
337 to 363 (Ce : ; . January 8, 1889.
569) to) 400) 7 : = . January 15, 1889.
Ss 40leto 4165": A ; . January 27, 1889.
So MATT tod 327 <: . : . February 12, 1889.
‘© 6-438 to 464 5 ; . February 19, 1889.
EDWARD J. NOLAN,
G oH Recording Secretary.
/
HL
PHILADELPHIA :
HORACE BINDER, PRINTER.
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.
With reference to the several articles contributed by each.
For. Verbal Communications see General Index.
PAGE.
Allen, Harrison, M. D. The distribution of the color-marks of the Mammalia. 84
ilewalakalaeacdm Man....c....<.00...consomesnapecewecdnedeesaneen-ewsrecovecene 2S
-Chapman, Henry C., M. D. Observations on the female generative apparatus
of Hyzena crocuta. (Plates X, XI.).......cscsssearsceecsceecer eee reseessoecos 189
Chapman, Henry C., M. D. and Albert P. Brubaker M. D. Researches upon
the general physiology of nerve and muscle. No. L.......seeceeseeeeeeees 106
Researches upon the general physiology of nerve and muscle. No. 2.... 155
Fielde, Adele M. Notes on an aquatic insect, or insect-larva, having jointed
dorsal appendages. (Plate VIII.).............csssscceseccevesoscncsenscoence 129
Ford, John. Description of a new species of Ocinebra.......seeeeeeeeeereneeecees 185
Hartman, Wm. D., M.D. A bibliographic and synonymic catalogue of the
(Gams vATIm@LIGIIEN Bie Gegnecosasocdsecbeoseccos coanbonedpoddoncopacnBcnodcoddec 14
A bibliographic and synonymic catalogue of the Genus Achatinella,
(label We) ectaaseareedcannsneccneecaveeoceeronnsencersansiecns-edn0cnnessenaeacspaeente 16
New species of shells from the New Hebrides and Sandwich Islands,
(Plate MTLT2) rece... ce. ccsscescncensenaesscscrcesseseneceeseconstsscaccecasenses 250
Heilprin, Angelo. Contributions to the natural history of the Bermuda Is-
lands. (Plates XIV, XV, XVI.)..ccocccccssscseeescccerccessesccernccarseccnas 302
Ives, J. E. On two new species of Starfishes..........sssseesenceerseecerecesoncnees 421
Jordan, David Starr. Description of a new species of Etheostoma (E. longi-
mana) from James River, Virginia........ccseeceeccceeceeesecneeteseeenesenens 179
On the generic name of the Tunny........cessseccecrcecececcnvesscscscsseseseonss Isp)
Kelley, Edwin A. Notes on the Myology of Ursus maritimus........s:seeeeeees 14]
Keyes, Charles R. On the fauna of the lower coal measures.......-.s+eseseeeee 222
Descriptions of two new fossils from the Devonian of Iowa. (Plate
NOM) ewetweisiesnaassisissne saison sus vacsineaceiseravsacpeseiunsvossaceceessuncceeesscsesannm 247
Leidy, Jos., M. D. Distinctive characters of Odontaspis littoralis.......0..+00 162
arasitics Crustacea c.n.cencereeraceccereoascceensneasssssiascovcionseesennite acasoscacno, Hes
Meehan, Thomas. Contributions to the life-histories of plants, No. II. Some
new facts in the life history of Yucca. A study of the Hydrangea in
relation to cross-fertilization. On the forms of Lonicera Japonica;
with notes on the origin of the forms.......++. ER oc sencccine bone aoa 274
Contributions to the life-histories of plants, No. III. | Smilacina bifolia.
Dichogamy and its significance. Trientalis Americana. On the
glands in some Caryophyllaceous flowers....-..ssesseseeeees spoeengncccoce Sil.
McCook, Rey. Henry C., D. D. Descriptive notes on new American species
of Orb-weaving SPiders.......<---++scocceseeoseacseoses eee Bae a saeneeemaone 193.
A new fossil spider, Eoatypus Wood wardil..........-+ss-seecesereceesesereesees 200
Nesting habits of the new American Purseweb Spider............2-++eeeeeeee 203.
Ochsenius, Carl. On the formation of rock-salt beds and mother liquor salts. 181
Osborn, Henry Fairfield. Additional observations upon the structure and
classification of the Mesozoic Mammalia......0...c0c.cscssceseecsscsreesence . 292
Pilsbry, Henry A. On the Helicoid land Mollusks of Bermuda, (Plate
PROWL) ace sae aces dicavcnedc dase saspeemeer sents Seesneience nea dnemt= ate aan . 285:
Ringueberg, Eugene N. S., M. D. Some new species of fossils from the
Niagara Shales of Western New York. (Plates VII.) .......00.22csesee0s - 131
Ruschenberger, W. S. W., M. D. Biographical notice of Geo. W. Tryon Jr.
(With portrait.)....... ssisbesdentecslst dsdevedesccacssesnsonecceee sce ss teceee eam - oo
Wachsmuth, Charles and Frank Springer. Discovery of the ventral structure
of Taxocrinus and Haplocrinus and consequent modification in the
classification of the Crinoidea. (Plate XVIII.)......ccsssescsecseceeceeeee 337
Crotalocrinus ; its structure and zoological position. (Plates XIX, XX.) 364
Wright, Berlin Hart. Description of new species of Uniones from Florida.
(Plates 1D, TET; DW, Ws Vis )\ececre ses tevcensab tenses anvede such aas saeep eeceeem cone 113
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES
OF
PHILADELPHIA.
LSSS:
JANUARY 3, 1888.
The President, Dr. JosrPpH LeErpy, in the chair.
Twenty-one members present.
The death of Andrew Garrett, a correspondent, was announced.
——_—___——.
JANUARY 10.
The President, Dr. JoserH LeErpy, in the chair.
Twenty-four persons present.
On a fossil of the Puma.—Pror. Letpy directed attention to a spec-
imen recently sent to him for identification from Sparta, Illinois.
It is the cranial portion of a skull of the Puma, Felis concolor, and
was found under about thirty feet of earth, when digging in the bed
of the Kaskaskia river, for a bridge pier. It accords with the cor-
responding part of recent animals, though presenting some slight
ditterences from a number of skulls of our museum. The most strik-
10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
ing difference is in the interparietal crest which is higher and of
more uniform height and is especially higher in front. The narrow
part of the cranial case is narrower and the forehead is more mesially
depressed between the angular processes. Comparative measure-
ments with two recent skulls of about the same size are as follows:
Fossil Recent Recent
Length of interparietal crest 98 108 94mm
Height of interparietal crest 10-15 9-12 8-12
Height, on line of lower part .of coronal
suture 15 10 5
Breadth at narrow part of cranium 37 42 AT
Breadth at centre of squamosals 74 7) 79
Breadth at zygomata 150 = 150 145
Breadth at frontal angular processes 74 80 81
Breadth of narrow part of forehead 42 52 44
Length of forehead to post-nasal depression 41 48 48
Height of inion from occipital foramen. 62 63 62
—
JANUARY 17.
Dr. A. E. Foore in the chair.
Eight persons present.
A paper entitled “Some new fossils from the Niagara Shales of
Western New York” by Eugene N. S. Ringueberg M. D., was
presented for publication.
JANUARY 24.
Mr. Gro. W. Tryon, Jr. in the chair.
Twenty persons present.
A paper entitled “The Distribution of the Color Marks of the
Mammalia” by Harrison Allen M. D., was presented for publica-
tion.
The death of Wm. L. Mactier, a member, was announced.
On the relation of Sarracenia purpurea to Sarracenia variolaris.
—Prof. W. P. Witson remarked that Sarracenia purpurea produces
two kinds of leaves. As the young plantlet first develops itself from
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11
the seed it forms a few leaves which differ widely from those which
appear on the same plant a little later. The adult stage of these
first leaves is from a twentieth to a tenth smaller than the adult
stage of the second or later developed leaves. Generally only from
five to ten of these first-leaves are produced.
After the second leaves begin to appear, then no more of the first
form are grown by the plant.
In the ordinary leaves of S. purpurea it is well known that the
hood surmounting the hollow leaf is erect and in no wise protects
or covers its opening. In S. variolaris this is just the opposite—
here the hood, a little above and back of the opening, makes a
sharp bend forward and not only covers over the whole orifice but
projects beyond it on all sides nearly 2 inch.
These first or seedling leaves of S. purpurea resemble in form not
the later and adult leaves on the same plant, but those of S. vario-
laris. The hood is not erect but arches over the hollow leaf in pre-
cisely the same manner as in the adult leaves of S. variolaris.
There are also two forms of leaves in S. variolaris. In this plant,
however, the differences are not so much a matter of shape as appar-
ently of arrested development. The first leaves are very much like
the adult form on the same plant only being from ten to twenty
times smaller.
But the important fact remains to be stated :—the first leaves from
each of these plants are perfect miniatures of each other. It would
be next to impossible for an expert to separate them, should they
happen to become mixed, and to accurately say which belonged to
the one or which to the other of the two species.
The production of this first set of leaves by S. purpurea which so
very closely resemble the ordinary leaves of S. variolaris had led him
to believe that the species purpurea is a retrograde development from
variolaris.
His belief in this is, however, not wholly based on the production of
the early leaves, but rests upon several other important facts.
S. variolaris is avery highly specialized plant for the purpose of
catching and digesting insects. Up and down the margin of the
wing and around the mouth of the protected pitcher are numerous
honey glands. In the interior is the smooth surface and also the
hairy ones to prevent the escape of insects which have fed up to the
top of the leaf and then fallen into this treacherous opening. These
special adaptations are all present in S. purpurea, but the honey
glands seldom secrete any nectar and are sometimes even rudi-
mentary. Again the fluid found in S. variolaris contains a consider-
able quantity of a digestive ferment which acts directly upon the
entrapped insects. This is not so in the fluid excreted by the leaves of
S. purpurea. Only a trace of this ferment could be found after the
most careful chemical search for it.
%
12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
JANUARY 31.
Mr. CHarves Morris in the chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.
Mimiery among Plants—Pror. J. T. RorHrock remarked that
among animals mimicry is usually related to the safety of the indi-
vidual, or less frequently to the ease by which it may conceal itself
and thus more readily capture its food. Whatever may be the cause
of mimicry among plants, or by whatever governing forces one plant
in the long run, may come to resemble another more or less remotely
related to it, it is clear that neither of the causes which are associated
with mimicry among animals can obtain in the vegetable kingdom.
These mimetic cases may conveniently be ranged under two heads.
1. Those in which we find the resemblances between plants in
groups clearly distinct. The lower of these may sometimes well be
called anticipating or prophetic types.
2. Those found between plants in the same natural family, where
the descent within recent period, of one from the other, may rea-
sonably be supported by all who admit the doctrine of evolution.
This resemblance is of course often merely external, disappearing
under even the slightest examination; as, for example, when one
glances hastily at a specimen, particularly an herbarium specimen,
of Zygadenus elegans Pursh, and then compares it with a narrow-
leayed specimen of Swertia perennis. There are few who will not be
struck with the likeness, yet the former is a well marked represen-
tation of the monocotyledonous group, and the other as evidently one
of the dicotyledonous plant. It is somewhat startling to find
along with marked points of distinction that there exist certain struct-
ural resemblances ;_ thus one may well compare the unusual mark-
ings found on the bases of the perianth divisions in Zygadenus
with the equally unusual gland found at the base of the petals in
Swertia. There is in these resemblances nothing which can in any
sense be called prophetic, because the relationship between the ex-
amples is quite too remote.
The case is, however, somewhat different when one compares the
shape of some of the young liverwort with the prothallus of some
ferns. Here the resemblance is often very marked and the line of
relationship not so distant. It might almost be said that the perma-
nent form of the liverwort clearly resembled the early, transient
form of the fern.
Or, as another instance, compare the protonema of a moss before
the shoot appears which is to develop into the erect aerial branch,
with one of our filamentous algz. Here again we have so marked
a general resemblance that it may well enough be classed with the
prophetic types.
1888, ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 13
The second group to which allusion has been made—those in which
the resemblance is between related plants, may be fairly illustrated
by the resemblance between Nepeta Gilechoma and Lamium am-
plexicaule, especially when (as is often the case in Nepeta) the petioles
are very much reduced in length.
Another unusual resemblance comes to mind. One may easily
understand why the cup found about the base of the stigma in so
many of the Lobeliaceae should be so exactly repeated in the allied
order of Goodeniaceae. » But how are we to explain its appearance
in Gaura (one of the Onagraceae) which can hardly be regarded as
closely related to either of the above orders. These resemblances
and the questions growing out of them are to be further considered
in a paper in course of preparation.
Messrs Lawrence J. Morris, Stewart Culin and Roberts Le Boutil-
lier were elected members.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
A BIBLIOGRAPHIC AND SYNONYMIC CATALOGUE OF THE
GENUS AURICULELLA, PFEIFFER.
BY W. D. HARTMAN, M. D.
Genus AURICULELLA, Dr. L. Pfeiffer.
A. amena, Pfeiffer. (Frickella.) Proc. Zool, Soc. t. 30, p. 3, 1855.
Frickella amena, Pfeiffer, Mal. Blatt. 1i-1855, 166-1856.
Auriculella amena, Gul. Proce. Zool. Soe. 91-1875.
Sandwich Islands.
A. ambusta, Pease. Jour. Conch. 345, 1869. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649, 1869.
Sandwich Islands.
TA. auricula, Pfr. (Partula.) Fer. System, 66, No. 6.
Auriculella Auricula, Kust. t. 3, p. 14-16.
Auriculella Owaihiensis, Chem.
Tornatella Owaihiensis, Pfeiffer, 1842.
Partula Dumartroy, Souly.
Partula Auricula, Albers.
Achatinella Auricula, Pfeiffer, 1855.
Auricula Sinistrorsa, Chem. In Kiist. t. 7, p. 14-16.
Bulimus Armatis, Migh. Proc. Bost. Soe. I, p. 19, 1845.
Tornatella Sinistrorsa, Pfr., Mon. Hel. viv; 652.
Hawai, Sandwich Islands.
TA. brunnea, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soc. t. 10, f. 23-1873.
Molokai, and Kauai.
TA. Cerea, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. t. 20, f. 21-1855.
Achatinella Cerea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt,—1855.
Auriculella Cerea, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
A. Chammissoi, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 98-1853.
Proce. Zool. Soc. Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 1855.
Auriculella Chammissoi, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
A. Crassula, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soc. t. 10, f. 22-1873.
Makawao, East Maui.
TA. diaphana, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soc. t. 10, f. 25-1873.
Oahu.
Proc.Acad.Nat.Sc1. Phila. 1888. | Hedi
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15
TA. expausa, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869. Jour. Conch. xvi. t. 14, f. 8.
Sandwich Islands.
A. jecunda, Smith. Nomen in Ann. Lyc. N. Y. x. 331-332-1873,
West Maui.
yA. lurida, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Mon. Hel. Viv. iii, 552.
Tornatellina Castanea, Pfr. Mon. Hel. Viv. iv, 570.
Balea Castanea, Adams.
Tornatella Castanea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 166-1856.
Auriculella lurida, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 304-1881.
Sandwich Islands.
A. Obeliscus, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Mon. Hel. Viv. iii, 563.
Balea Newecombia, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 67-1852.
Temesia Newcombia, Bourg.
Auriculella Obeliscus, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 166-1856.
Sandwich Islands.
A. patula, Smith. Proce. Zool. Soc. t. 10, f. 24-1873.
Sandwich Islands.
TA. petetiana, Pfr. (Tornatellina.) Mon. Hel. Viv. ii, 399.
Auriculella Petetiana, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 4-1855.
Sandwich Islands.
A. perpusilla, Smith. Proc. Zool Soc. t. 10, f. 26-1873.
. Sandwich Islands.
fA. pulchra, Pse. Jour. Conchyl. xvi, t. 14, f. 6-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
There is little difference between type examples of S. pulchra, Pse.
and A. auricula, Fér.; the former are somewhat larger in size.
A. pusilla, Gld. (Partula.) Expd. Shells, t. 9, f. 90.
Achatinella pusilla, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 166-1856.
Auriculella pusilla, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 304-1881.
: Matea Island.
A. solida, Gul. Nomen in Ann. Lye. N. Y. x, 331-332-1873,
Kanailola, Oahu.
A. solidissima, Smith. Nomen m Ann. Lye. N. Y. x. 331-352-1873.
Makawao, Oahu.
A. tenuis, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soc. t. 10, f. 27-1873.
Sandwich Islands.
A. triplicate, Pse. Jour. Conch. 346-1859.
Maw.
TA. uniplicate, Pse. Jour. Conchyl. xvi, t. 14, f. 7-1869.
Maui.
16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
A BIBLIOGRAPHIC AND SYNONYMIC CATALOGUE OF THE
GENUS ACHATINELLA,
BY W. D. HARTMAN, M. D.
The genus Achatinella,* embraces a group of small, beautiful and
variously colored land shells, peculiar to the Sandwich Islands.
Mr. Swainson first introduced the genus to the notice of naturalists
in Brand’s Journal, in 1828, and in 1831 the same author assigned
it a position in the systematic arrangement of species, under the
above name. Since that period many new species have been describ-
ed by naturalists. Dr. L. Pfeiffer in the Malakozodlogische Blatter,
and subsequently others have proposed sub-divisions for the numer-
ous and diversified forms embraced by the genus. In some
instances the lines of these sub-divisions are well-defined, while in
others they are less marked. They have been generally adopted by
conchologists, as they are found convenient for the arrangement of
a collection. Mr. Thomas Bland says “the distinctions derived
from the consideration of the form of the shells are arbitrary, and the
limits are not well defined.” His classification of the sub-divisions
of the genus, is chiefly founded on the structure of the lingual den-
tition, “which indicates three groups, a. Partulina and Achatinella
b. Newcombia and Laminella, and c. Leptachatina ; judging from the
shells alone, Bulimella and Apex belong to group a, while Labiella
belongs to group 6 or ¢ rather than to a.” This arrangement is
chiefly in accord with that of Dr. Pfeitfer and Mr. William H. Pease,
for the details of which I must refer the reader to their several pa-
pers. I agree with Dr. Pfeiffer in eliminating Carelia and Auricu-
lella as separate genera from Achatinella, and I also concur with
Dr. Gulick in the opinion that Frickella should be added to Auri-
culella. Jam also in accord with Mr. Lovell Reeve in the opinion
that the small common shells for which Dr. Gould proposed the
name of Leptachatina, should be removed from Achatinella, as they
are more nearly allied to the Oleacinide than to the Bulimide, and
they differ from Achatinella in being oviparous while the latter are
viviparous. In consequence of the connection heretofore existing be-
* Although Azzziculella possesses the same form of dentition as Partula
and Achatinella, Dr. Pfeiffer has placed it in a separate genus, on conchological
grounds, in which I concur. These minute shells, would seem to have no place
in a serial arrangement of the genus Achatinella. Species marked Ff are in the
author’s collection.
>
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 17
tween Achatinella and Leptachatina, the latter has received especial
attention in the preparation of this paper, and for the present it has
been retained in the genus Achatinella. In analyzing the species
of Leptachatina proposed by Dr. Gould, of which L. acuminata Gld.
was designated as the type, they are found to be divisible into three
groups. In the first may be placed the elongate or cylindrical and
semi-transparent varieties, as L. acuminata, striatula and cerealis
Gould, gracilis Pfeiffer, tenebrosa Pease, terebralis and exilis Gul.,
and fusca Newe. In the second, the short oval clear and polished va-
rieties, as cingula Migh. saccata Hartm. brevicula Pse. and nitida
Newe. And in the third, the larger inflated and more stout species, as
Hartmanii Newe. M.S. suecincta, fumosa, and vitrea Newe, fusca and
resinula Gul. together with corneola and pyramis Pfr. The major
part of the species are terrestrial in their habits, while a few are
arboreal. In my examination of the Achatinellz, I have also inclu-
ded the allied genus Auriculella. The generic name of Achatinella
has been used by all authors previous to Dr. Pfeiffer’s sub-division
of the genus in Malakozodlogische Blatter in 1854 and 1856. Owing
to several causes the species have been burthened with numerous
synonyms, many of which have been herein omitted, to avoid a
needless repetition of names. Their variability in form, age and
color, has misled naturalists into the error of multiplying the spe-
cies, and a change of environment Dr. Newcomb informs us, is
known to so alter the appearance of some, as to cause them to be
mistaken for distinct species. A change of environment and mal-
nutrition materially modifies the growth of all animals, and no-
where is it more observable than in the molluscan fauna. The
different appearance of depauperized or aberrant forms of shells is a
prolific source of error, and often of embarrassment to the student of
natural history, since corrections can only be made by the examin-
ation of types in scattered collections. Mr. Geo. W. Tryon Jr. in
his recent books on conchology, has relegated to synonymy many
shells heretofore considered of specific value, some of which are
doubtless the result of environment or hybridization. In the early
history of the genus Achatinella, naturalists in different parts of the
world were engaged at the same time in describing the species, and
some of the names then given have only been established by priority
of publication. The application of boiling water to remove the an-
imal, materially alters the color of the shell, changing a green or
bright green to a dirty yellow; and the manufacture of species by
18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
scraping, has also been resorted to, to increase the number of com-
mercial species.
Hybridization may have been a factor in the origin of some va-
rieties as occurs in the allied genus Partula. The preservation of
the species in the lower animals is due in a great measure to animal
instinct, but where nearly allied species are thrown together, as often
happens in the involuntary change of position of Achatinella, or the
proximity of broods, as occurs with Partula, hybridization may take
place. It is well known that embryonic young are priceless to the
biologist, and since the tissue cells of species evolute from pre-exist-
ing germs and do not originate de novo, the shape of the embryonic
or apical fold of each species of viviparous mollusk, should be the
true index of a species, except in the case of hybrids, when it would
take the form of one or the other of the parents, and would be far-
ther distinguished in the adult, by the form, size and color of the
predominating parent, a law always observable in hybrids.
Dr. Isaac Lea has always maintained the importance of the shape
of the apical fold, for a correct determination of a species of Unio,
I have said elsewhere, that viviparous hermaphrodite mollusea (being
cold blooded animals) would probably more readily hybridize than
warm blooded, which might in a measure account for the numerous
forms and varieties of Unionide and Strepomatide in the rivers of
the United States. The late Prof. Haldeman believed that hybrid
Unios existed, and farther that individuals between Melantho decisa
and M. ponderosa Say are often found, which look very much like
hybrids of these species. It is well-known that fish, frogs and toads
(which are cold blooded animals) hybridize, and recently some spe-
cies of salmon have been successfully and profitably hybridized.
So far as known the food plants of the Achatinella have no in-
fluence in the coloration of the shell; those species -~possessing a
black, dark or slate colored mantle, secrete a variegated shell, while
others with a greenish, bluish, light yellow or flesh-colored mantle,
secrete a shell with different shades of yellow. The varied and gor-
geous tints of the shells of Achatinellz, are probably owing to the
action of light and oxygen on the secretions from the glands of the
mantle; the striations and variations of color, are probably due to
the chemical composition of a fluid from a different set of glands;
hence the painting of the arboreal species is more bright and pleasing
than that of the terrestrial, which are generally of uniform and somber
hues. The surface of all the porphyroid and gaily painted species,
exhibit under a glass, waved spiral strize, similar to Partule. These
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19
lines commence at the termination of the first one-and-a-half whorls
of the apex, which corresponds to their embryonic age. The apices
of some of the Amastra are coarsely plicate, in this respectresem-
bling Laminella. This is especially noticeable in the elongate spe-
cies, as A. magna, assimilis, biplicata, Huchinsoni, turritella and some
others which have been classed with Laminella by Dr. Pfeiffer ; in
others the plice of the apex are small wrinkles, and in A. farcimen,
reticulata, tristis, elliptica, and some others, the apex is smooth and
rounded, forming a sub-group of Amastra. A more constant char-
acter is found in the species of Amastra being destitute of spiral
striae, differing in this respect from the porphyroid Achatinelle.
The Amastra being ground species and living beneath dead leaves
and other debris, when the shells are deprived of the animal and are
exposed to the atmosphere, the epidermis is more readily, detached
than in other Achatinellee.
“The facts relating to the geographical distribution of Achati-
nella, and the development of so large a number of species within
the limits of small areas, are very remarkable and _ interesting,
and have presented problems bearing or. the theories of evolu-
tion. Each island has its own peculiar species, and not only species,
but its own peculiar types, or groups of species, of similar form.
Again, on islands where there has been a full development of Acha-
tinella, each principal mountain ridge and valley has its own pecu-
liar species which are found nowhere else; the species of each ridge
or valley being often connected with those of the next—by intermediate
varieties. Another important fact observed in the distribution of the
Achatinella is, that on a mountain chain with many culminating
peaks, the tendency is to divergence of species, while on an indi-
vidual mass of mountains concentrating towards a single culminating
peak, the tendency is to a convergence of species.” ‘* The structure
of the Hawaian Islands is voleanic; and in studying the distribution
of shells over them, it is important to note the relative ages of the
several islands. Geologically speaking, Kauai is the oldest; next
in the series is Oahu; then Maui with the adjoining islands of
Molokai and Lanai; and last comes Hawaii, in the southern por-
tion of whieh volcanic fires are still raging.”
“Oanu. The development of Achatinella on this island, both as
regards number and variety of form and color, has been greater than
on any other island of the group. Unlike most of the other islands
which have individual mountain masses, Oahu has two true ranges
or chains of mountains, a longer and a shorter one, with many in-
20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
dependent culminating peaks. The aggregate length of the two
ranges is 50 miles. The sides of these ranges, their entire length,
are furrowed by deep valleys separating ‘lofty ridges. These val-
leys and ridges are the home of Achatinella: each valley and
ridge has its ‘own distinct species which are connected with those of
the next valley and ridge, by a multitude of intermediate varieties,
presenting minute gradations of form and color, These two ranges
of mountains have already furnished 227 distinct described species
of Achatinella, the number of varieties has been estimated as high as
800 or 900. All these species and varieties, are found in an area of
less than 120 square miles; and a considerable portion of the longer
range remains yet to be explored. These species have all the va-
rious shapes from globose to conic, ovate and elongate-conical, and
present almost every possible shade and variety of coloring, from
pure white to jet black, and all the shades of green, rose, yellow,
brown and ash; sometimes several of these colors are combined in
one species, either in regular or irregular bands, or tessellated, mar-
bled or zigzaged designs.” :
“West Maur. On this part of Maui we have the converse of
Oahu. Its individual mass of mountains, clustering around one com-
mon centre peak, 2000 feet higher than any part of Oahu, furnishes
only 30 described species of Achatinella, each principal valley and
ridge has its own peculiar species or varieties; but all the arboreal
species can be referred to seven leading types, these differ much from
the Oahu types, and do not present the same varieties of form or
color. The prevailing colors are white and dark brown with all the
intervening shades of either, plain or variously arranged in bands
or zigzaged lines.”
“East Maur. The distribution of Achatinella on this part
of Maui is not fully known. All its mountain gorges and ridges
concentrate around the rim of the immense crater of Haleakala, a
circumscribing bound of nearly thirty miles in extent. The almost
impenetrable forest on the mountain slopes to the east and south
of the crater comprising a belt of twenty miles long and six miles
wide, remain unexplored, and its molluscan life is unknown. The
woodlands on the north-west slope of the mountain facing West
Maui furnish 29 described species of Achatinella; but they are the
same or unmistakable counterparts of those found on West Maui.
The narrow depression of land between East and West Maui has
led many to infer that they were originally separate islands, this
5
*
f
ie
i
«
( t
'
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21
similarity of shell-types would seem to indicate that, if ever separate,
they must have been united before the development of molluscan
life ; otherwise we should expect to find the types of East and West
Maui differing as much from each other as do those of Maui and
the contiguous islands of Molokai and Lanai.”
“Morokal. The distribution of Achatinella on this island pre-
sents some new features not observed on any other island. The
island is forty miles long with a width of only seven miles, it is
about one-third the size of Oahu, and like it has a mountain range
extending nearly thirty miles through its length. The range is fur-
rowed on each side by deep valleys. Some of these mountain
gorges are very wide and cut deep into the narrow axis of the island.
The larger ones have proved an effectual barrier to the migration
of the shells. The island is thus divided into three natural sections,
and each section retains its own peculiar species without intermin-
gling with those of the next section.” “ Molokai furnishes 25 de-
scribed species which are about equally divided between the three
sections of the island, these shells exhibit more variety of form and
color than those of Maui, and have peculiarities which separate
them entirely from types of other islands.”
“DLanar. This is the smallest and most arid of the shell produc-
ing islands. Its area is 100 square miles, of which probably not
over one tenth is suited for the support of mollusks. The island is,
however notable as the home of A. magna Adams, the largest shell
of the whole Achatinella family. Specimens in our cabinet measure
12 inches long, the whole number of species of Achatinella on Lanai
is 13, and they exhibit peculiarities of type.”
“Kauat. This is the oldest and most verdant island of the group.
It lies to the west of Oahu, and is separated from it by a channel
wider than occurs between any of the other islands. Its extensive
forests, luxuriant vegetation and moist climate render it peculiarly
adapted for the abode of Achatinella; and one would naturally ex-
pect to find here a larger, and if possible, higher development of the
family. But we are doomed to disappointment, the island yields no
arboreal species, the shells are terrestrial, and those classed with
Achatinella belong to the plainest forms of the Amastra and Lepta-
chatina groups; 5 species to the former and 18 to the latter.
Kauai, however, does furnish a very peculiar and interesting group
of large terrestrial shells, remarkable for their elongate turretted
form. The generic name of Carelia has heen provided for the group;
22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
it embraces some seven species. Specimens of Carelia turricula
Migh. in my cabinet measure three inches long. This group has no
place in the Achatinella family, as classed by M. Gulick. It lacks
the peculiar spiral twist of the columella and other generic charac-
ters of that family; living specimens of Carelia are now very
rare, but at some period in the history of Kauai they were exceed-
ingly abundant. The alluvial deposits near the coast portions of
the island, contain multitudes of these shells in a semi-fossil state,
which have been washed from the mountains by the freshets of ages
past. The small neighboring island of Nihau also has a single
species of Carelia found in sand and mud deposits ; no living speci-
mens are found there now.”
“Hawa. This island embraces within its bounds two-thirds of
the total area of the whole group. It is also supposed to be the most
recently formed of the islands. The volcanic forces are still at work
here. The extensive forests are as well adapted for the support of
Achatinella, as those of any of the other islands, but it furnishes
only a single arboreal species, and five terrestrial. The arboreal
species is A. physa; it was first described by Dr. Newcomb in the
Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London in 1853. In asub-
sequent number of the same Journal, Mr. Wm. H. Pease refers to
this same shell as a “species rarely met with on the mountains of
Hawaii.” The centre of production is the Kohala range of moun-
tains, notably the most ancient portion of the island; and it exists
there now in unparalled abundance. During a recent visit to the lo-
cality in a few minutes I collected several hundred specimens, picking
them from treesand low bushes as rapidly as one would gather huckle-
berries from a prolific field. The shell appears to be slowly migra-
ting into the adjoining districts of Hamakua and Kona, and assu-
ming new shapes and varieties of coloring. One of these varieties
in our cabinet is almost worthy of assignment as a new species. The
conchologist of a few centuries hence will no doubt be naming A chati-
nella from the different districts of Hawaii of manifold forms and
gaudy colors, which have developed through the mysterious pro-
cessses of evolution from the humble A. physa of the Kohala Moun-
tains.”
“The discovery of so large a number of land shells of the same
genus within limited island areas was unprecedented, and at once
induced the belief that the “completion of a collection of the genus
had been sealed,” this is a mistake. The homes of Achatinella
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23
are on rugged mountains, densely covered by vegetation and their
sides furrowed by deep and almost inaccessible ravines and large
districts on Oahu and East Maui which have never been visited by
white men, remain yet to be explored. It will require years of re-
search and study, before the number and exact distribution of the
remaining species can be ascertained. It is also generally supposed
that these shells are becoming extinct by the ravages of cattle through
our forests. This is true in respect to a limited number of species
on the island of Oahu whose habitats were the forests on the lowest
range of hills. Some of these hills have been denuded of woods, not
only by cattle, but the woodman’s axe, and certain species are be-
coming rare. The favorite resorts of many species are the Ki (Dra-
cena terminalis) and the Olona (Boehmeria stipularis) both excellent
fodder plants. But in localities where these plants have been entirely
destroyed by cattle, the shells have generally selected homes on other
adjoining plants. The ravages particularly of wild cattle in our
mountain forests are certainly to be deprecated, nevertheless by
clearing the under brush they render the forests more accessible for
the collection of known species; and by opening the paths to higher
and more dense forests they facilitate the discovery of new species.
The agencies now threatening the wholesale destruction of these little
gems of the forest are the rats and mice, which have become very
abundant in mountain forests, particularly where there are no cattle.
Their ravages are not confined to the shells whose habitats are on the
ground, but extend to those found on trees. It is not uncommon to
find around the charnal cells of these noxious little animals hundreds
of empty, mutilated shells. Notwithstanding these threatening agen-
cies, the Achatinelle are still quite abundant on Oahu and Molokai,
where cattle have the widest range, though not so abundant as for-
merly on West Maui where the cattle ranges are somewhat limited
and the mice enjoy greater immunity. In a recent excursion with
a friend through a portion of the mountain forests between Ewa and
Waialua on Oahu more than 3000 shells were collected in a few days
embracing over fifty species of Achatinella, some of them new to
science. In a similar trip around Molokai nearly 5000 were collec-
ted, embracing thirty species, some new.”
To Wesley Newcomb, M. D. more than to any author on Achati-
nella, we are indebted for a correct knowledge of the described spe-
cies of this beautiful genus of shells. During a residence of nine
1Mr. D. D. Baldwin in Hawaian Almanac and Annual.
24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
years in the Sandwich Islands he collected and reared large numbers
of the different species and observed the numerous varieties from a
common parentage. When in Europe in company with the late
Dr. A. A. Gould he examined the types of Dr. L. Pfeiffer and others
which enabled him to correct the synonymy of many doubtful spe-
cies; all of which he has embodied in his Synopsis of the Genus,
which entitles him to the designation of authority on Achatinella
“ par excellence.”
For convenience of reference I have arranged the species alpha-
betically under the several sections, rather than in a connected series,
as was attempted by Mr. Pease. The sections of Achatinellze being
more or less artificial, authors are not always in accord as to which
certain species should be assigned. In the majority of instances, I
have followed Dr. Pfeiffer or Mr. Pease in the distribution of the
species among the sections, being guided in the main by authentic
examples, or by figures and descriptions of authors; the sub-section
Helicterina adopted by Mr. Pease from Baron Ferussac, has been
supplanted by Partulina, the former having been preoccupied.
In the preparation of this paper I am indebted for aid to several
friends. To Prof. A. Agassiz for the loan of the entire Pease collec-
tion of Achatinella together with all his duplicates amounting to
near two bushels of examples, I have had in my possession several
entire suites of Achatinellz, kindly loaned to me by Prof. James Hall,
Dr. Lea, Mrs. George Andrews and Mr. R. Ellsworth Call, by which
I was enabled to identify types from authors hands. Recently, at
the invitation of Dr. Newcomb I spent the greater part of two days
in the examination of his collection of Achatinella made some years
ago in the Sandwich Islands. My acknowledgements are also due him
for assistance in the determination of many varieties. When in
Europe in 1883 I purchased some of the species of Messrs Gulick and
Smith from G. B. Sowerby Jr. Recently I have been favored by
Mr. D. D. Baldwin of the island of Maui with written catalogues of
the localities of the Achatinelle of the Sandwich Islands, together
with numerous examples of Achatinella and especially with spec-
imens taken from the determined type examples of Mr. Gulick, in
the Hawaian Museum. The geographical distribution of the Acha-
tinellee in those islands together with their habits, which has been
embodied in this paper was expressly prepared by Mr. Baldwin for
the Hawaian Almanac and Annual. I am also under obligations
to Mr. Geo. W. Tryon Jr., for his uniform courtesy in aiding me in
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25
the examination of books and examples belonging to the Academy
of Natural Sciences.
The following references have been abbreviated in the Catalogue:—
Monographia Heliceorum viventium and Nomenclator Heliceorum
viventium by Dr. L. Pfeiffer; Proceedings of the Zoological Society
of London, containing the papers of Drs. Newcomb, Pfeiffer and
Gulick; Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History,
containing the papers of Drs. Gould and Mighels; Contributions to
Conchology by C. B. Adams; Proceedings of the California Academy
of Sciences ; the American Journal of Conchology, containing the
papers of Dr. Newcomb, and also the Journal de Conchyliologie,
containing many of the papers of Mr. Wm. H. Pease.
Species marked } are in the author’s collection.
The arrangement of the sub-groups of Achatinella herein adopted
is as follows:—
Partulina Perdicella
Bulimella Newcombia
A 2 Achatinellastrum B Labiella
Eburnella Laminella
Apex Amastra
Carinella
C | Leptachatina
Section PARTULINA Dr. L. Pfeiffer.
P. aptycha, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. tab. 30, f. 1-1855.
Newcombia aptycha, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165, 1856.
Helicter aptycha, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 615-1869.
Perdicella aptycha, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 315-1881.
Sandwich Islands.
TP. cinerosa, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. tab. 30, f. 5,-1855.
(Helicter perversa, Pse.) Proe. Zool. Soc. 645-1869. (Non Swains.)
Sandwich Islands.
TP. compta, Pse. (Partulina.)
Partulina compta, Pse. Jour. Conchyl. xvii-1869.
Molokai.
JP. crassa, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 24, f. 71-1853.
Bulimella crassa, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 124-1854, 163-1856,
Partulina crassa, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Lanai.
3
26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
P. dolium, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. tab. 30, f. 15-1853.
Bulimella dolium, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856.
Partulina dolium, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 647-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
+P. dubia, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. tab. 24, f. 65-1853.
Achatinella radiata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 116-1854. Non Gould.
Bulimella dubia, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 162-1856.
Achatinellastrum dubium, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Partulina dubia, Pfr. Nom. Helie. Viv. 305-1881.
Maui.
P. Dwightii, Newe. (Achatinella.) Amer. Jour. Conch, ii, pl. 19, f. 9.
Partulina Dwightii, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 162-1856.
Molokai.
P. Gouldii, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 22, f. 1-183.
Achatinella talpina, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 7, 138-1856.
Partulina Gouldii, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 116-1854; 162-1856.
Waialuku Maui.
TP. grisea, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 24, f. 60-1853.
Achatinella dubia, Pfr. Var. 7. 1854.
Partulina grisea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 117-1854.
Achatinellastrum grisea, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1869.
East Maui.
+P. marmorata, Gld. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soc. p. 200-1847. Expd. Shells
tab. 7, f. 94. .
TAchatinella Adamsii, Newe. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 19-1853, Proce. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f.
20-1853.
Achatinella induta, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 207-1856.
+Achatinella ustulata, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 11, p. 37-1856,
(reversed ex.)
Achatinella plumbea, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 11, f. 39, 1856.
Laminella marmorata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 126-1854.
Bulimella marmorata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 163-1854.
Bulimella marmorata, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 306-1856.
Partulina marmorata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Partulina perdiz, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 116-1854. (Non Rve.)
Haleakala Waialuku and Kula E. Maui.
Obs. The variable coloration of this species has been the source
of its numerous synonymy.
P. morbida, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Mon. Helic. vi-167,
Helicter morbida, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Achatinellastrum morbida, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 306-1881.
Sandwich Islands.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27
TP. perdix, Rve. (Achatinella.) Mon. tab. 6, f. 48a, 43b, 1850.
Achatinella pyramidalis, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 7, p. 32-1856.
Achatinella undosa, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 7, f. 33-1856.
Partulina perdiz, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 116-1854.—marmorata, Newe.
Partulinu marmorata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Lahaina and Kula, E. Maui.
Obs. Dr. Newcomb in his excellent synopsis of the genus Acha-
tinella, has described the animal of A. perdix Pfr. which materially
differs from that of A. perdix Rve.; they are doubtless specifically
different.
TP. proxima, Pse. (Partulina.) PI. f. 1-2.
Partulina proxima, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 6-1862.
Bulimella proxina, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 807-1881.
Molokai.
TP. radiata, Gld. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soc. 27-1845.
Partula radiata, Pfr. Mon. Helic. Viv. iii, 454.
Partula densilineata, Rve. Mon. Part. pl. 2, f. 9-1850.
Bulimus Gouldii, Pfr. Mon. Helic. Viv. ii, p. 74.
Achatinella dubia, Pfr. (Non. Newe.) Mall. Blatt. 116-1854.
Achatinella grisea, Pfr. (Non. Newe.) Mall. Blatt. 117-1854.
Achatinellastrum radiatum, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 646-1869.
Partulina radiata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 162-1854.
Maui.
TP. Redfieldii, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. tab. 22, f. 5-1853.
Partulina Redfieldii, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 115-1854.
Bulimella Redfieldii, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 163-1856.
Molokai.
P. rufa, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f. 83-1853.
Achatinellastrum rufa, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 137-1854-164-1856.
Partulina rufa, Pse, Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Molokai, E. Maui.
TP. splendida, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. tab. 22, f. 4-1853.
Achatinella Bayleana, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y.; 202, pl. 7b, 31a.
31b-1858.
Partulina splendida, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 115-1854, 162-1856.
Waialuku, Maw.
TP. Tappaniaua, C. B. Adams. (Achatinella.) Conch. Cont. 126-1850.
tAchatinella eburnea, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y.199, f. 28a, 28b, 1856.
tAchatinella ampulla, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 200, f 29, 1856.
28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1888.
+Achatinella fasciata, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 201, f. 30, 1556.
Bulimella Tappaniana, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Maw.
TP. tessalata, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. t. 23, f. 28-1853.
Achatinella insignis, Mighls.? (Pfr.)
Partulina tessalata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 115-1854, 162-1856.
Molokai.
TP. virgulata, Mighl. (Partula.) Proc. Bost. Soc. 20-1845.
Bulimus Rohri, Pfr. Zeitsch. 1846.
Achatinella Rohri, Rve. Tab. 1, f. 83-1850.
Achatinella insignis, Pfr. (Newc.) In schedule. (Pfr. & Rve.)
Partulina Rohri, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 114-1854, 162-1856.
Partulina virgulata, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 305-1881.
Molokai.
Section BULIMELLA, Dr. L. Pfeiffer.
TB. abbreviata, Rve. (Achatinella.) Mon. pl. 3, f. 19, April 1850.
Achatinella clementina, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 205-1855.
Achatinella nivosa, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 12, f. 6-1853.
(Manufactured.)
Bulimella abbreviata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 135-1854.
Achatinellastrum abbreviata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Bulimella abbreviata,=bacca, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Palolo, Oahu.
B. bacca, Rve. “(Achatinella.) Mon. pl. 6, f. 45.
Laminella bacca, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 135-1854.
Achatinellastrum bacea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Bulimella bacca, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Palolo, Oahu.
TB. bulimoides, Swains. (Achatinella.) Zool. Illus. ii, 450.
Achatinella bulimoides, Rve. Mon. t. 4, f. 28.
Achatinella obliqua, Gul. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 245, f. 63, 1858.
Achatinella odmorpha, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 246, f. 64, 1858.
Bulimella bulmoides, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 119-1854, 162-1856.
Kahana, Oahu.
7B. Byronii, Gray. (Helix.) Woods Index, Suppl. pl. 7, f. 30.
Achatinella melanostoma, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f. 7,-1853.
Achatinella limbata, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 8, f. 70-1858.
Achatinella pulcherrima, Rve. (Non Swains.) Mon. pl. 3, f. 23.
Laminella Byronii, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 136-1854.
Bulimella Byronii, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 346-1869.
Ewa, Oahu.
a ee ee
=
eee SOU Ae.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29
7B. decipiens, Newe. (Achatineila.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 24, f. 68-1863.
Achatinella planospira, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 30, f. 8-1855.
+ Achatinella cuneus, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 205, 1858. Sinistral.
+ Achatinella torrida, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 8, f. 68-1858.
Sinistral.
Achatinella corrugata, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 8, f. 66, 1858.
(Short var.)
Achatinella scitula, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 8, f. 61. (Reversed
smoothe var.)
Achatinella herbacea, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 8, f. 52. Var.
Bulimella viridans, Pfr. (Non Mighl.) Mall. Blatt. 121-1854,
163-1856.
Bulimella decipiens, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 646-1869.
Bulimella decipiens, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 306-1881.
Koolauloa, Oahu.
Obs. This is a species affected by environment, hence its protean
forms.
TB. elegans, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. tab. 24, f. 57-1853.
(Bulimella elegans, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 163-1856.
Hanula, Oahu.
B. faba, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 30-1859.
Bulimella faba, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 646-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
B. Forbsiana, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 30, f. 16-1855.
Bulimella Forbsiana, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 163-1856.
Palolo Oahu.
’ TB. glabia, Newe. (Achatinella.)* Proc. Zool. Soc. tab. 23, f. 23-1853.
Achatinella elegans, Pfr. (Non Newe.) Mon. Helic. iv—520.
Achatinella platystyla, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. Pl. 6, f. 25-1856.
Bulimella glabra, Ptr. Mall. Blatt. 124-1854.
Kawaiawa Oahu.
B. Hanleyana, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 202-1855.
Bulimella Hanleyana, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 163-1856.
Bulimella Hanleyana, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 646-1869.
B. Lehuiensis, Smith. (Achatinellastrum.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 9, f. 8-1873.
Achatinellastrum Lehuiensis, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viy, 308-1881.
Lehwui Oahu.
Obs. This shell may equal Bulimella multicolor, Ptr.
B, morbida, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 30-1859.
Helicter morbida, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Bulimella morbida, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 306-1881.
Sandwich Islands.
30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
+B. multicolor, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 30, f. 11, Jan’y 1855.
Achatinella oviformis, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soc. 208, Nov. 1855.
Bulimella multicolor, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856. Oahu.
+B. multlineata, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 22, f. 23-1853.
Helicter multilineata, Pse. Proe. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Achatinella monacha, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 30, f. 9-1855, var.
Bulimella multilineata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 163-1856.
Kolaupoco Maui.
+B. ovata, Newe. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lye. N. Y. 22-1853. Proce. Zool. Soc. tab.
22, f. 2-1853.
Achatinella Wheatleyi, Newc. Ms. Syn. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 147-
1855.
+ Achatinella candida, Pfr. Proce. Zool. Soc. pl. 30, f. 4, 4a—1855.
tAchatinella Frickii, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 30, f. 7, 1855.
small var.
tAchatinella vidua, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 30, f. 10-1855.
}Achatinella rotunda, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 249, pl. 8, f. 67—
1868.
Achatinella cervina, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 241, pl. 8, f. 62-1868.
+ Achatinella spadicea, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 214, pl. 7, f. 65—
1868.
Achatinella phaeozona, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 214, pl. 7, f. 40,
1865, immature.
Achatinella lorata, Rve. Non Fér. Mon. pl. 1, f. 6.
Bulimella ovata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 119-1854, 163-1856.
Koolauloa Oahu.
Obs. This is a very variable species in size and coloration.
TB. rosea, Swains. (Achatinella.) Zool. Illus. ii, tab. 123. f. 1.
Bulimella rosea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 119-1854, 163-1856.
Obs. Recently I have received from Mr. D. D. Baldwin of
Honolulu a small white variety with a yellow lip, see pl. I, fig. 4.
Waialua, Oahu.
7B. rutila, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f. 21-1853.
Achatinella macrostoma, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 30, f. 6-1855.
Achatinella viridans, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 120-1854. Non Mighl.
Bulimella rutila, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 646-1869.
Palolo and Niu, Oahu.
7B. rugosa, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. tab. 22, f. 22-1853.
Bulimella rugosa, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 123-1854, 163-1856.
Ewa, Oahu.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31
B. solitaria, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 24, f. 60-1853.
Achatinellastrum solitaria, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 163-1856.
Bulimella solitaria, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Palola, Oahu.
7B. sordida, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 25, f. 27-1853.
Achatinella Swainsonii, Pfr. Proce. Zool. Soe. pl. 30, f. 13-1855.
Bulimella sordida, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 163-1856. Lehwi, Oahu.
Obs. I have followed Dr. Newcomb in placing Swainsonii as a
synonym of sordida, Dr. Pfeiffer in Nomen. Helic. Viv. gives it as
a variety of sordida.
+B. Sowerbiana, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 30, f. 14-1855.
{Bulimella fuscobasis, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 9, f. 15-1873.
Bulimella Sowerbiana, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 163-1856. Oahu.
¢B. subvirens, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f. 21-1853.
Bulimetla viridans, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 163-1856. Non Mighls.
Bulimella subvirens, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 640-1869.
Niu, Oahu.
+B. taeniolata, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 38-1846.
Achatinella rubiginosa, Newe. Proce. Zool. Soe. pl. 24, f. 59-1853.
Bulimella taeniolata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 124-1854, 163-1856.
Pulolo, Oahu.
7B. terebra, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 23, f. 40-1853.
Achatinella attenuata, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 39, f. 12-1855.
Achatinella lignaria, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 7, f. 35. (Var.)
Achatinella crocea, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 7, f. 36.
Bulimella attenuata, Pfr. Nom. Helic. Viv. 307-1881.
Bulimella terebra, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Waialuku, Maui.
Obs. I have followed Dr. Newcomb in referring Mr. Gulick’s
species to terebra, it varies in size and color; some are attenuate
while others are large and inflated.
{B. viridans, Migh. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. Jan’y 1845.
Achatinella radiata, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. Aug. 1845.
Achatinella cuneus, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. 205-1855. Sinistral.
Achatinella rutila, Pfr. Var. 8. Mall. Blatt. 1854. Non Newe.
Achatinella subvirens, Pfr. Var. 2. (Non Newe.) Mall. Blatt.
1854.
Achatinella decipiens, Pfr. Var. 8. (Non Newe.) Mall. Blatt.
1854.
Bulimella viridans, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 646-1868.
Kouahuanui, Oahu.
32 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Section ACHATINELLASTRUM, Dr. L. Pfeiffer.
TA. adusta, Rve. (Achatinella). Mon. tab. 4, f. 30-1850.
Achatinellastrum adusta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 138-1854.—164-1856.
Oahu.
yA. ampla, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. tab. 22, f. 19-1853.
Achatinellastrum ampla, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 185-1854.-164-1856.
Kolau Oahu.
TA. bella, Rve. (Achatinella). Mon. Tab. 3, f. 17-1850.
Achatinellastrum bella, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 135-1854,-165-1856.
Achatinellastrum pulcherrimum, Pfr. Mon. Helie. B. ii, 237.?
Laminella bella, Rve.—=Polita, Newe. Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 648—
1869. d Molokai.
+A. bellulae, Smith. (Achatinellastrum). Proc. Zool. Soc. t. 9, f. 8-1873.
Sandwich Islands.
+A. Buddii, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. Tab. 9, f. 8-1873.
Achatinella pexa, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 196-pl. 6, f. 26-1856.
tAchatinella plumata, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 217. pl. 7 f. 41-
1856.
Achatinella papyracea, Gul. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 207, pl. 8, f. 48,
1856.
Achatinella caesia, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 234, pl. 8, f. 53, 1856.
(Junior Ex.)
Laminella Buddii, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 138-1854.
Achatinellastrum Buddii, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Achatinellastrum fuscozona, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 9-f. 9-
1873. Pololo Oahu.
Obs. This species is very variable in texture and coloration.
TA. castanea, Rve. (Achatinella). Mon. Tab. 2, f. 24-1850.
Achatinellastrum castanea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 139-1854,-164—
1856. :
Achatinellastrum castanea, Rve.=adusta, Rve. (Pse). Proce. Zool.
Soe. 646-1869. Oahu.
TA. colorata, Rve. (Achatinella). Mon. Tab. 3, f. 18-1850.
Achatinellastrum colorata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 184-1854.
Laminella colorata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Laminella ustulata, Newe. M. 8. (Pfr.) Mall. Blatt. 136-1854.
Bulimella colorata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 646-1869.
Achatinellastrum colorata, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 308-1881.
Ahuimanu Oahu.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39
+A. concinna, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. Pl. 24, f. 79-1853.
Achatinellastrum econcinna, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 137-1854.-164 *
=1856.
Laminella concinna, Pse. Proc, Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Lana.
+A. consanguinea, Smith. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. Pl. 9, f. 3-1878.
A. concolor, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soe. Pl. 9, f. 1-18
wee Oahu.
Obs. These two species of Mr. Smith, are probably only varieties
of colorata.
7A. cucumis, Gul. (Achatinella). Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 7, f. 45-1858.
Achatinellastrum cucumis, Pse. ee Zool. Soe. 646-1869,
Kaliua Oahu.
A. formosum, Gul. (Achatinella). Ann. Lyc. N. Y. pl. 8, f. 55-1858.
Achatinellastrum formosum, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 646-1869.
i Oahu.
tA. fulgens, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f. 24-24a, 1853.
Achatinella diversa, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 222-1858. (Junior
Ex.)
tAchatinellastrum angusta, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soc. 74, pl. 9, f£. 7-
1873.
Achatinellastrum fulgens, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 137-1854, 164-1856.
Waialua, south east end of Oahu.
+A. fuscolineata, Smith. (Achatinellastrum.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 75, pl. 9, f. 2—
2a-1873.
Achatinellastrum fuscolineatum, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv, 307—
1881.
Kaialua, Qahu.
Obs. A large quantity of duplicates of this species was contained
in the collection of Wm. H. Pease. Mr. Smith designates versipellis
Gul. as its nearest affinity, while Dr. Newcomb thinks it is one of
the innumerable varieties of vu/pina Fér.
+A.fuscozona, Smith. (Achatinellastrum.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 9, f. 9-1873.
Makiki and Palolo, Oahu.
Obs. Judging from a suite of all ages, this may be a good species,
although it approaches very near to fuscolineata, Smith.
+A. germana, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 24, f. 62-1863.
Achatinellastrum germana, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 185-1854, 156-1856.
Bulimella germana, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Makawao, Mau.
34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
JA. Johnsoni, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 50-1853.
Achatinella aplustre, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 51-1853.
Achatinellastrum Johnsoni, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 134-1854.
Palolo Crater and Kolau, Oahu.
A. lilaceum, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Mon. Helic. Viy. vi 175.
Achatinellastrum lilaceum, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 308, 1881.
Sandwich Islands.
fA. ligatum, Smith. (Achatinellastrum.) Proc. Zool. Soe. t. 9, f. 13-1873.
A, diluta, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soe. t. 9, f. 14-1873.
Waimula, Oahu.
Obs. Examples of the above in the Pease collection marked “new
species” equal a dextral variety of vulpina, Fér.
tA. Nattii, Baldw. Nobis. (Achatinellastrum.) pl. I, f. 3.
Shell dextral, turbinate, spire half the length ; whorls 5, polished,
the two last rapidly enlarged and inflated. Suture impressed, col-
umella yellow, stout and twisted. Color bright gamboge yellow,
with one white and three wide chestnut bands beneath the suture,
the latter visible from within the aperture ; aperture round ovate,
white, labiam white, slightly thickened within, L. 16, D. 10, L, Ap
8, D. 5 mill.
Makawao, E. Maui.
Obs. This shell was found at the above locality by D. D,
Baldwin, Esq. of Lahaina Maui, who has devoted much time and at-
tention to the Achatinella of the Sandwich Islands. He has known
of similar examples being found at the same locality. The shell is
not quite mature, and at first sight has the facies of an Apex.
fA. olivaceum, Rve. (Achatinella.) Mon. tab. 3, f. 20-1850.
Achatinella prasinus, Rve. Mon. Tab. 4, f. 27.
Achatinellastrum olivaceum, Pfr. Mall. Blitt. 138-1854, 164-1856.
. Sandwich Islands.
TA. polita, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 37-1853.
Achatinellastrum polita, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 134-1854, 164-1856.
Laminella polita, =bella, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Molokai.
Obs. Polita Newe. and bella Rve. are doubtless distinct.
TA. productum, Rve. (Achatinella.) Mon. tab. 2, f. 13-1850.
Achatinella venulata, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 23, £. 48-1853.
Achutinella hybrida, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 22, f. 52-1853.
Achatinella bilineata, Rve. Mon. Tab. 3, f. 22.
delta 2a ere
a
“>
ie
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 35
Achatinella Dunkeri, Cum. (Pfr.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 208-1855.
Achatinellastrum productum, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 154-1854, 163
—1856. Kolau, Oahu.
fA. pulcherrimum, Swains. (Achatinella.) Zool. Illus. pl. 123, f. 2.
Achatinella napus, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. f. 19-1855.
Achatinella mahogani, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. f. 72-1858.
Laminella pulcherrima, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 185-1854.
Achatinellastrum pulcherrima, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Ahonwi, Oahu.
tA. trilineatum, Gul. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 7, f. 46-1858.
Achatinella zonata, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 8, f. 58-1858, (var.)
Achatinellastrum trilineatum, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 646-1869.
Oahu.
tA. versipellis, Gul. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lye. N. Y. vi, pl. 7, f. 44a, b.
Achatinellastrum versipellis, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 646-1869.
Kailua, Oahu.
fA. vulpinum, Fér. (Helix.) Hist. Mol. tab. 155, f. 1.
Achatinella vulpina, Rve. Mon, Tab. 4, f. 29.
Achatinella livida, Pfr. Non Swains.
Achatinella Stewartii, Green. Maclur. Lye. i, pl. 4, f. 1-2.
Achatinella Stewartti, Rve. Mon. tab, 4, f. 26,
Achatinella virens, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj, f. 47.
Achatinella varia, Gul. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. vj f. 43.
Achatinella crassidentata, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 30, f. 23-1855.
Achatinellastrum tricolor, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 9, f. 6-1878.
Achatinellastrum ligatum, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 9, f. 12-18,
1873. (Dextral var?)
Achatinellastrum longispira, Smith. Proc. Zool Soe. pl. 9, f. 2-
1873. (Var. Stewartii.)
Eburnella vulpina, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 1389-1854.
Achatinellastrum vulpinum, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 189-1854.
Oahu.
A. zebra, Newe. (Achatinella). Ann. Lye. N. Y. 142-1853.
Achatinellastrum zebra, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 508-1881.
Laminella zebra, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
East Maui.
36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Section EBURNELLA, Wm. H. Pease.
TE. casta, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. tab. 22, f. 12-1853.
Achatinella dimorpha, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 8, f. 56-1858.
Achatinella juncea, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 7, f. 49-1858.
(Dwarf.)
Achatinella cognata, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 7, f. 60-1858
Achatinellastrum casta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 138-1854,-164—-1856.
Eburnella casta, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Ewa, Oahu.
Obs. I have followed Dr. Newcomb in assigning Mr. Gulick’s
species to casta, Mr. Gulick admits E. dimopha as a synonym, see
Proce. Zool. Soc. 90-91-1873.
TE. curta, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. tab. 23, f. 43-1853.
{Achatinella delta, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 231, pl. 8, f. 50-1858.
Achatinella contracta, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 237, pl. 8, f. 57,
1858.
{Achatinellastrum rhodoraphe, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soc. 74, pl. 9,
f. 10-1873.
Eburnella pygmea Smith. Proc. Zool. Soe. 75, pl. 9, f. 11-1878.
Laminella curta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 139-1854.
Achatinellastrum curta, Pfr. Mall. Blitt. 164-1856.
Eburnella curta, Pse. Proe. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Waialua, Oahu.
Obs. In a large number of duplicates, contained in the collection
of the late Wm. H. Pease, the above synonymy was illustrated.
TE. livida, Swains. (Achatinella). Zool. Illus. p. 108, f. 2.
tAchatinella viridans, Rve. Mon. Tab. 4, f. 25. (Non Migh.)
Achatinella Reevii, C. B, Adams. Conch. Cont. 128.
tAchatinella Emersonii, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 24, f. 74-1853.
Achatinella glauca, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. f. 47-1858.
Eburnella livida, Pse. Proe. Zool. Soe. 647-1869.
Kalaikoa and Waialua, Oahu.
Obs. About two quarts of duplicates, in the collection of Wm.
H. Pease, exhibited considerable inosculation of the above so called
species, A. vulpina Fer. which Dr. Pfeiffer places under Eburnella
as a synonym of livida Swains, has no affinity therewith.
TE. porcellana, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc pl. 23, f. 27-1863.
Bulimella porcellana, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 123-1854.
Eburnella porcellana Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
East Maui.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37
fE. recta, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f. 45-1853.
Laminella recta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 136-1854.
Achatinella nympha, Gul. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 251, pl. 8, f. 9-1858.
Eburnella recta, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Waialua, Oahu.
E. saccata, Pfr. (Achatinella). Mon. Helic. vj.-175.
Eburnella saccata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
E. semicarinata, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 24, f. 76-1853.
Bulimella semicarinata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 124-1854.
Eburnella semicarinata, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 309-1881.
Lanai.
fE. undulata, Newe. (Achatinella). Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. 218-1855. Amer.
Jour. Conch. pl. 13, f. 15-1866.
Laminella curta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 189-1854.
Achatinellastrum curta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Eburnella curta, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
; Waialua, Oahu.
Obs. I think this a variety. of E. curta, Newe.
tE. variabilis, Newce. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 24, f. 70-1853.
Achatinella fulva, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soc. 208-1855.
Achatinella lactea, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 6, f. 27-1856.
Bulimella variabilis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 124-1854.
Eburnella variabilis, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 647-1869.
Lanai.
Section APEX, * Albers._1860.
*The species of the Section Apex, are involved in almost inextricable confusion.
Authors in many instances, have not given the localities of the species, and the
great variability in size and color of many species, added to the many intermediate
varieties, entails an almost endless task to separate them. To arrive at a certainty,
the color of the anmmal and mantel must be observed, and local suites should be
collected by which critical comparisons could be instituted. It is to be regretted,
that species have been multiplied on slight grounds. In my endeavours to arrive
at a correct synonymy, I may have erred by restricting the species within too
narrow limits, which will be for future observers to correct. The Section Apex
exhibits four prevailing types, as illustrated by the species éurgida, mustellina, per-
versa and Swi/tiz, from which all others seem but modifications.
tA. cestus, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. t. 22, f. 8-1853.
Bulimella cestus, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 125-1854.
Helicter cestus, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Apex cestus. Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 310.
Palolo, Oahu.
38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
{A. concavospira, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 36-1859. :
Laminella concavospira, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Achatinellastrum concavospira, Pse. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 307.
Sandwich Islands.
+A. decora, Fer. (Helix). Hist. Moll. t. 155, f. 5-7.
Achatinella decora, Gray.
Bulimus decorus, Beck, and Anton.
Achatinella vestita, Migh. Proc. Bost. Soc. 1845.
Achatinella lugubris, Pfr. Non. Rve.
Achatinella vittata, Pfr. Non. Rve.
Achatinella simulans, Pfr. Non. Rve.
Laminella decora, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 140-1854.
Helicter decora, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Apex decora, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 310.
Kaliakoa and Ahouin, Oahu.
tA. flavida, Gul. (Apex). Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 10, f. 1-1873.
Apex tuberans, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 10, f 83-1873.
Kaliakao, Ahouin and Waialua, Oahu.
Obs. This shell may—dextral Swiftii which often varies greatly
in color.
7A. Gulickii, Smith. (Apex). Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 9. f. 7-1873.
{Apex albofasciata, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 9, f. 29-1873.
tApex innotabilis, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 9, f. 23-1873.
tApex neglectus, Smith. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 9, f. 22-1873.
tApex coniformis, Gul. Proce. Zool. Soe. pl. 9, f. 17-1873.
tApex versicolor, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 9, f. 18-1873.
Kalikoa and Ahouin, Oahu.
Obs. About two quarts of the variety albofasciata was represen-
ted in the Pease collection. As I possess the other varieties, I can see
no difference in them. Dr. Newcomb places the above with perversa
of which he considers them only varieties.
TA. lorata, Fer. (Helix). Hist. Moll. t. 155, f. 9-10.
tAchatinella pallida, Nutt. Rves. Mon. pl. 1, f. 2a 2b.
Achatinella alba, Nutt. Jays Cat.
Helicteres loratus, Beck and Anton.
tAchatinella ventrosa, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. 6-1855.
_ Achatinella nobilis, Pfr. Proce. Zool. Soc. 220-1855.
Achatinellastrum lorata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 134-1854.
Bulimella lorata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 163-1856.
Helicter lorata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39
Obs. Lorata and alba represent the elongate varieties, and ven-
trosa with nobilis the short and inflated varieties.
{A. lugubris, Chem. (Turbo.) No. 2059-60, t. 8, f. 9-10.
Achatinella pica, Swains. Zool. Ill. pl. 99, f 1.
Monodonta seminigra, Lam. vii-37.
Bulimus seminigra, Menke. Syn. 26.
Helix apex-fulva, Dix, Voyage around the World, 1789.
Helix lugubris, Fér. Hist. Moll. t. 155, f. 8.
Helicter lugubris, Beck.
Achatina lugubris, Gray.
Achatinella lugubris, Pfr. 1841.
Achatinellastrum lugubris, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 140-1854, 164-1856.
Helicter lugubris, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Apex lugubris. Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 310, 1881.
Apex bicolor, Gul. Mon. Hel. Viv. 529.
Apex polymorpha, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soe. t. 10, f. 5-1873.
Apex leucozonus, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soe. t. 10, f. 6-1873.
Oahu.
yA. mustellina, Migh. (Achatinella.) Pro. Bost. Soc. 21-1845, Rve. Mon. t. 3,
f. 20-21a.
Bulimella mustellina, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 125-1854, 163-1856.
Helicter mustellina, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 645-1869.
Apex mustellina, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 309.
Waianea, Oahu.
A. ovum, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 336-1856.
Helicter ovum, Pfr. Proce. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Apex ovum, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 310.
Oahu.
tA. perversa, Swains. (Achatinella.) Zool. Il. pl. 99, f. 2.
Achatinella concidens, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 8, f. 54.
Achatinella cinnamomea, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. 22-1858.
Apex leucophea, Gul. Proce. Zool. Soe. pl. 9, f. 16-1878.
Helicter perversa, Pse.=cinerosa, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Apex decora, Pfr. Var. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 310.
Waianea, Oahu.
Obs. Dr. Newcomb remarks, “there are several varieties of this
species, one of which has a near affinity to decora which has led to
their having been confounded with each other.”
tA. pulchella, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. t. 30, f. 2-1855.
Helicter pulchella, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Apex pulchella, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 310.
Sandwich Islands.
40) PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
7A. simulans, Rve. (Achatinella.) Mon. pl. 2, f. 15.
Achatinella decora, Pfr. Mon. Hel. iv, 528. (Non Fér.)
Bulimella simulans, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 125-1854, 163-1856.
Apex tumefactus, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 9, f. 20-1873.
Apex simulans, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 310.
Wahiawa, Oahu.
tA. Swiftii, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f. 9-1853.
Achatinella apicata, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soc. 210-1855.
Achatinella valida, Pfr. Proce. Zool. Soe. pl. 30, f. 54-1855.
Bulimella apicata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 125-1854.
Helicter Swiftii, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Apex Swiftii, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 310.
Apex flavidus, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. x, f. 1-1, a-1873.
Apex lilacea, Gul. Proce. Zool. Soe. pl. x, f. 4-1873.
Apex leucoraphe, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. x. f. 2-1873.
Ewa, Oahu.
tA. turgida, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f. 10-1853.
Achatinellastrum turgida, Pfr.’ Mall. Blatt, 188-1854, 164-1856.
Apex turgida, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 310.
Apex turbiniformis, Gul. Proce. Zool. Soe. pl. x, f. 7-1873.
Apex albospira, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. x, f. 8-1873.
Ahouni, Oahu.
Obs. The two species of Mr. Gulick seem to be dextral varieties ~
of turgida.
TA. vittata, Rve. (Achatinella.) Mon. No. 9, Mus. Cunning. (Newe.)
Achatinella decora, Pfr. Var. Non. Fér. Mon. Hel. iii-465.
Achatinella globosa, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 30, f. 25-1855.
Helicter globosa, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 645-1869.
Apex vittata, Rve. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 310.
Sandwich Islands.
Section PERDICELLA, Wm. H. Pease.
TP. Helena, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 24, f. 63-1853.
Newcombia Helena, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 117-1854.
Perdicella Helena, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Molokai.
PR. Mauiensis, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. 207-1855. Amer. Jour.
Conch. pl. 13, f. 16-1866. ‘
Partulina Mawiensis, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soe. 91-1873.
Perdicella Mawiensis, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 315-1881.
Maui.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 41
P, minuscula, Pfr. (Perdicella). Mon. Helic. Viv. iv. 562.
Perdicella minuscula, Pse. Proc Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
+P. ornata, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 24, f. 55-1853.
Newcombia ornata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 118-1854.-165-1856.
Perdicella ornata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Maui.
P. zebrina, Pfr. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. 202-1855.
Newcombia zebrina, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856.
Perdicella zebrina, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
Section NEWCOMBIA, Dr. L. Pfeiffer.
+N. cinnamomea, Pfr. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. 22-1858.
Newcombia cinnamomea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 230-1853.
Molokat.
+N. Cumingii, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 24, f. 59-1853.
Newcombia Oumingii, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 118-1854.—165-1856.
Halea—Kala, Maui.
+N. Newcombia, Pfr. (Bulimus). Mall. Blatt. 119-1854.-165-1856.
Achatinella Pfeifferi, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 24, f. 58-1853.
Molokai.
+N. plicata, Migh. (Achatinella). Proc. Bost. Soct.-1848. Rve. Mon. pl. 6, f. 44.
Bulimus liratus, Pfr. Mon. Helic. Viv. ii, 235.
Newcombia liratus, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856.
Molokai.
N. Philippiana, Pfr. (Achatinella). Mon. Helic. Viv. iv, 559.
Newcombia philippiana, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 315-1881.
Sandwich Islands.
{N. sulcata, Pfr. (Achatinella). Proc. Zool. Soc. 22-1858.
Newcombia sulcata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Section LABIELLA, Dr. L. Pfeiffer.
L. callosa, Pfr. (Achatinella). Mon. Helic. Viv. iv. 531.
Labiella callosa, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Oahu.
TL. labiata, Newe. (Achatinella). Proce. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 33-1855.
Labiella dentata, Pfr. Proc. Zool.'Soe. pl. 30, f. 27-1855.
Achatinella legena, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 6, f. 35-1855.
(=var.)
42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF T1888.
Labiella dentata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 142-163-1856.
Lehui, Oahu.
L. pachystoma, Pse. (Labiella). Jour. Conch. xviij, 171-1869.
Kauai.
Section LAMINELLA, Dr. L. Pfeiffer.
TL. Alexandria, Newe. (Achatinella.) Cal. Nat. Hist. Soc. iii-1$2-1865.
Achatinella Alexandria, Newe. Amer. Jour. Conch. pl. 13, f. 14—
1866.
Perdicella Alexandri, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Laminella Alexandri, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 312-1881.
West Maw.
TL. citrina, Migh. MS. (Achatinella.)
Achatinella citrina, Rve. Mon. tab 5, fig. 33-1850.
Laminella citrina,—venusta, Pse. var. Proc. Zool. Soe. 648-1869..
Laminella citrina, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 312-1881.
Oahu.
L. erecta, Pse. (Laminella.) Jour. Conch. xvij-174-1869.
Maui.
TL. fusoidea, Newe. (Achatinella.) Amer. Jour. Conch. ii, pl, 13, f. 8-1866.
Achatinellastrum fusoidea, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 309.
Laminella fusoidea, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 648-1869.
Maui.
7. gravida, Fér. (Helix.) Hist. Moll. tab 155, f. 3. ,
Achatinella Dimondii, C. B. Adams. Conch. Cont. 126.
Laminella gravida, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 126-1854, 164-1856.
Sandwich Islands.
L. lutcola, Fér. (Helix.) Hist. Moll. tab 155, f. 12.
Bulimus lutcolus, Pfr. Mon. Helic. ii, 234-1841.
Amastra turritella, Fér.—=lutcola, Fér. (Pse.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 650—
1869.
Laminella luteola, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 312-1881. ;
Sandwich Islands.
Obs. . The small yellow shell figured by Férussac as Jutcola, has
never been identified by conchologists.
L. Mighelsiana, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 231-1849.
Laminella Mighelsiana, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 136-1854.
Achatinellastrum Mighelsiana, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 308—
1881.
Laminella Mighelsiana, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Molokm.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45
TL. physa, Newe. (Achatinella.) Pro. Bost. Soc. 218-1853. Proe. Zool. Soe. pl.
24, f. 64-1853. (Junior.) Amer. Jour. Conch. ii, pl. 13, f. 10 (adult).
Newcombia physa, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 117-1854, 165-1856.
Laminella physa, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Hawai.
Obs. Mr. Pease observes, “ this shell has no distinct allies” how-
ever he places it amongst the Laminella to which I assent. This is
an instance which exhibits the difficulties in many of the attempts
to classify these heterogeneous forms.
+L. picta, Mighl. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soc. January 1845.
Achatinella bulbosa, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 8, f. 71-1858.
Achatinella picta, Rve. Mon. tab 67, f. 28.
Laminella picta, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
East Maui.
L. Remyi, Newe. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 146-1855. Amer. Jour. Conch.
pl. 18, f. 13-1866.
Laminella Remyi, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 165-1856.
Lanai.
fl. sanguinea, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f. 15-1853.
Achatinella Férussaci, Pfr. (var.) Mon. Helic. Viv. iv, 546.
Laminella Férussaci, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 164-1856.
Laminella sanguinea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 156-1854,
Lehwi, Oahu.
+L. straminea, Rve. (Achatinella.) Mon. pl. 5, f. 38.
Laminella straminea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 126-1854.
Sandwich Islands.
Obs. This shell in the collection of the Jardin des Plants, is la-
belled A. gravida, Fér. var.; it is certainly distinct from gravida.
+L. subrostrata, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 31-1839.
* « Labiella subrostrata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Laminella subrostrata, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 314-1881.
Oahu.
Obs. My examples of this species, obtained in London, and said
to have been compared with the type, equals albolabris Newc. and
is an Amastra.
L. tetrao, Newe. (Achatinella.) Amer. Jour. Conch. ii, pl. 13, f. 11-12-1866.
Laminella tetrao, Pfr. Nomen. Helic. Viv. 314-1881.
Lanai.
+L. venusta, Mighl. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soct. 21-1825.
Laminella venusta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt, 127-1854.
Laminella venusta,=citrina, Mighl. Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-
1869.
West Molokai.
44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
L. zebra, Newo. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lye. N. Y. 142-1855.
Achatinellastrum zebra, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 308.
Laminella zebra, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Maui.
Section AMASTRA, H. and A. Adams.
A. accincta, Gld. (Achatina.) Proce. Bost. Soc. 20-1845. Gld. Expd. Sh. tab. 7,
£: 9%
Leptachatina accincta, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Amastra accincta, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 31-1881.
Obs. The figure of this shell in Chemnitz, represents an Amastra.
Oahu.
{A. affinis, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 35-1853,
+Achatinella goniostoma, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 203-1855.
Laminella afinis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856.
Amastra affinis, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
{A. albolabris, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe, pl. 24, f. 56-1853.
Achatinella nucleola, Rve. (Non Gld.) Mon. pl. 5, f. 39.
Laminella albolabris, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 132-1854, 165-1856.
Labiella albolabris, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Oahu.
A. amicta, Smith. (Laminella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 10, f. 20-1873.
Laminella amicta, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 314-1881.
Sandwich Islands.
Obs. This shell may equal A. petricola, Newe.
fA. Anthonyi, Newe. (Achatinella). Proc. Cal. Nat. Hist. Soc. ii, p. 93-1860.
Amer. Jour. Conch. ii, pl. 13, f. 2-1866.
Amastra Anthonyi, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Koloa..
A. assimilis, Newe. (Achatinella..) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 53-1853.
Laminella assimilis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 129-1854.
Amastra assimilis, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Amastra conicospira, Smith. Proe. Zool. Soe. pl. 10, f. 10-1873.
East Maui.
Obs. Dr. Pfeiffer considers this species to be a small variety of
A. nubilosa, Migh.
tA‘biplicata, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 24, f. 75-1853.
Laminella biplicata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 128-1854, 165-1856.
Amastra biplicata, Pse. Var. Deshaysii Morelet, Proce. Zool Soc.
649-1869.
Lanat.
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45
A. brevis, Pfr (Achatinella.) Mon. Hel. Viv. iii, 558.
Laminella brevis, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 315-1881.
Sandwich Islands.
TA, crassilabrum, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proce. Zool. Soe. pl. 23, f. 31-1853.
Labiella crassilabrum, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soe. 651-1869.
Laminella crassilabrum, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 180-1854-165-1856.
Waianea, Oahu.
+A. cylindrica, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 22, f, 11-1853.
Laminella cylindrica, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Amastra cylindrica, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 650-1869.
Watanea, Oahu.
A. conifera, Smith. (Amastra.) Proce. Zool. Soc. pl. 10, f. 11-1873.
Amastra conifera, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 314-1881.
Kula, East Maw.
tA. cornea, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 32-1853.
Laminella cornea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 182-1854, 165-1856.
Leptachatina cornea, Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
Obs. Dr. Newcomb pronounces this shell an Amastra, in which
T concur.
TA. ellipsoidea, Gld. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soc. 200-1847. Exped. Sh. tab.
7, f. 96.
Achatinella decorticate, Gul. Proe. Zool. Soe. pl. 10, f. 14-1878.
Achatinella pupoidea, Newe. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 23, f. 42-1853.
Amastra éllipsoidea, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 311-1881.
Maui.
TA. elliptica, Gul. (Amastra.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 10, f. 15-1873.
Laminella elliptica, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viy. 515-1881.
Waianea, Oahu.
TA. elongata, Newe. (Achatinella.) PI. I, f. 9, Ann. Lye. N. Y. 26-1853.
Achatinella acuta, Newe. Proe. Zool. Soe. 142-1853.
Laminella acuta, Pfr. = elongata, Mall. Blatt. 127-1854, 165-
1856.
Helicter Hutchinsonii, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 7-1862.
Newcombia Hutchinsonii, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Amastra elongata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Makawao, Maw.
Obs. Mr. Pease observes, this shell is the analogue of Amastra
obscura, Newe.; like many other species of Amastra, it possesses the
46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
plicate apex of Laminella, but wants the spiral striz, which is the
best evidence that it belongs to the section Amastra.
7A. farcimen, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Pl. I, f.5. Mon. Hel. Viv. iv, 552.
Laminella farcimen, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 315-1881.
Amastra farcimen, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Maui.
TA. flavescens, Newe. (Achatinella.)Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 24, f. 62-1853.
Achatinella tenuilabris, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 10, f. 16-1878.
Laminella flaveseens, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 130-1854, 165-1856.
Amastra flaveseens, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Hawaii, (Baldwin.) Wanoa, Oahu, (Newcomb.)
Obs. A comparison of types exhibits A. tenwilabris, Gul.—=
flavescens, Newe. The latter in the collection of the Jardin des
Plantes, is erroneously labelled A. modesta, C. B. Adams.
A. gigantea, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 20, f. 17-1853.
Laminella violacea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 141-1854.
Laminella gigantea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 140-1854.
Laminella gigantea, =violacea, var. Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 648—
1869.
Amastra violacea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Haleakala, Maui.
Obs. The only example of gigantea ever found is in the British
Museum. It probably equals a large example of A. violacea, Newe.
TA. humilis, Newe. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 143-1855. Amer. Jour.
Conch. 211, pl. 13, f. 4-1866.
Laminella humilis, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 313.
Amastra humilis, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Molokai.
TA. intermedia, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe, pl. 22, f. 13-1853.
Laminella intermedia, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856.
Amastra intermedia, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 650-1869.
Wainoe, Oahu.
A. irregularis, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Mon. Hel. Viv. iv, 564.
Amastra irregularis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1854.
Sandwich Islands.
A. inflata, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Mon. Hel. Viv. iv, 549.
Laminella inflata, Pfr, Nomen. Hel. Viv. 313.
Amastra inflata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
: Sandwich Islands.
A. luctuosa, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 204-1855.
Sandwich Islands.
¢
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 47
7A. magna, C. B. Adams. (Achatinella.) Conch. Cont. 125-1850.
Achatinella Baldwin, Newe. Proce. Zool. Soe. pl. 24, f. 72-1853.
Achatinellastrum Baldwinii, Ptr. Mall. Blitt. 140-1854.
Amastra Baldwinii, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Laminella Grayana, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 204-1855. (Junior.)
Amastra magna, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 311-1881.
Lanai.
Obs. Examples compared with Grayana, Pfr. in the British
Museum, exhibit Grayana as the junior of magna. Numerous ex-
amples of all ages in the Pease collection, confirm the diagnosis.
A. malleata, Smith. (Amastra.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 10, f. 18-1873.
Kula, East Maui.
7A. Mastersii, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proe. Zool. Soe. pl. 24, f. 67-1853.
A. rubens, var. Pfr. (non Gould.) Mon. Helie. iv, 552.
Laminella Mastersti, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 129-1854.
Amastra Mastersii, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Maui.
TA. melanosis, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 41-1853.
Laminella melanosis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 132-1854, 165-1856.
Amastra melanosis, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Hawai.
+A. micans, Pfr. (Laminella.) Pl. I, f. 10. Mon. Hel. Viv. vj, 179,
Amastra micans, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
7A. modesta, C. B. Adams. (Achatinella.) Conch. Cont. 128-1850.
Laminella modesta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 129-1854, 165-1856.
Amastra modesta, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Molokai.
A. moesta, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 24, f. 77-1853.
Laminella moesta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 128-1854.
Newcombia obscura, Newe.—mvoesta, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649—
1869.
Lanai.
7A. mueronata, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 49-1853.
Laminella mucronata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 129-1854-165-1856.
Amastra mucronata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Maui.
7A. nigra, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soc. 219-1855. Amer. Jour. Conch.
ii, pl. 13, f. 3.
Amastra nigra, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Maui.
48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
tA. nigrolabris, Smith. (Amastra.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 10, f. 11-1873.
Laminella nigrolabris, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 315-1881.
Wahiawa, Oahu.
+A. nubilosa, Migh. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soct. 20-1845.
A. nubilosa, Rve. Mon. pl. 1, f. 1-1850.
Laminella nubilosa, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 129-1854, 165-1856.
Amastra nubilosa, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Molokai.
Obs. Dr. Newcomb says nubilosa comes from Molokai, while
Mighels, Reeve, and Gould give Oahu as the locality. I have never
seen a shell that equals in size Dr. Mighels’ figure in Reeve’s Mono-
graph, and with Dr. Pfeiffer I incline to the opinion that it equals.
assimilis, var.
+A. nucula, Smith. (Amastra.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 10, f. 19-1873.
Lanai.
yA. nucleola, Gld. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soc. 28-1845.
A. brevis, Pfr.? Proc. Zool. Soc. 1845.
Laminella nucleola, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 142-1854, 165-1856.
Amastra nucleola, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Kavai.
+A. obesa, Newe. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 24-1853. Proc. Zool. Soe. pl-
24, f. 39-1853.
Amastra obesa, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Amastra obesa, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Haleakala, Maui.
TA. Peasii, Smith. (Amastra.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 10, f. 13-1873.
Laminella Peasti, Pfr. Nomenc. Hel. Viy. 313-1881.
Sandwich Islands.
TA. petricola, Newe. (Achatinella.) Amer. Jour. Conch. ii, pl. 13, f. 6.
Laminella petricola, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856.
Amastra petricola, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 650-1869.
Molokai.
7A. porphyrea, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 22, f. 16-1853.
A. grassa, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. 204-1855. (Var.)
Laminella porphyrea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 180-1854-165-1856.
Amastra porphyrea, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Manoa, Oahu.
TA. porphyrostoma, Pse. (Amastra.) PI. I, f. 6. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Amastra porphyrostoma, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 311-1881.
Oahu.
Obs. This shell resembles examples of A. farcimen, Pfr. in Coll,
Newcomb, from the Coll. Cuming.
é Ni AL SCIENCES OF DELPHIA.
1888 NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA 49
TA. pusilla, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 39-1853. Amer. Jour.
Conch. ii, pl. x, iij, f. 5.
A. pulla, Pfr. Proce. Zool. Soe. 209-1855.
Laminella pusilla, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 334.
Amastra pusilla, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Lanai.
TA. reticulata, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 24, f. 54-1853.
A. transversalis, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. 204-1855.
A. conspersa, Pfr. Proce. Zool. Soc. pl. 30, f. 26-1853.
Achatinellastrum reticulata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 141-1854.
Amastra reticulata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Amastra reticulata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Waianoe, Oahu.
tA. rubens, Gld. (Achatinella.) Pro. Bost. Soc. 27-1845. Rve. Mon. pl. 6, f. 42b.
Laminella rubens, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 129-1854—165-1856.
Amastra Mastersii, Pfr. (Non Newe.)
Amastra rubens, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Oahu.
fA. rubida, Gul. (Amastra.) Proc. Zool. Soe. pl. 10, f. 12-1873.
Laminella rubida, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 313-1881.
Kahuku, Oahu
fA. rudis, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 3, f. 17-1855.
A. chlorotica, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 205-1855.
A. albida, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 202-1855. (Rudis var. B.)
Laminella rudis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-156.
Oahu.
TA. rustica, Gul. (Amastra.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 10, f. 17-1878.
Kula, East Maui.
Obs. This species may be only a variety of variegata, Pfr. Mr.
Smith says rustica is allied to confiera, which latter may be another
variety of variegata.
TA. rugulosa, Pse. (Amastra.) Jour. Conch. xvij 95-1870.
Kula, East Maui.
Obs. This shell is near sphoerica, but the latter is larger and more
depressed than rugulosa.
TA. sericea, Pfr. (Laminella.) Mon. Hel. Viv. iv, 179.
Sandwich Islands.
TA. spirozona, Fér. (Helix.) Mon. tab. 155, f. 14-15.
A. boetica, Migh.
Laminella spirozona, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 127-1854-156-1856.
Amastra spirozona, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Oahu.
50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
A. sphoerica, Pse. (Amastra.) Jour. Conch. 1870. Jour. Conch. pl. 1, f. 5-
5a-1876.
Lanai.
Oahu.
TA. textilis, Fér. (Helix.) Pl.I,f. 8. Tab. Syst. Animal Moll, p. 56, No. 436-1819.
A. ventulus, Rve. Mon. No. 31 (non Fér).
A. microstoma, Gld. Proc. Bost. Soc. 25-1845.
Laminella textilis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 126-142-1854-164-1856.
Amastra textilis, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
+A. tristis, Fér. Helix (Cochlogena). Tab. Syst. Animal. Moll. p. 56, No. 435
1819.
Bulimus tristis, Pfr. Mon. Hel. Viv. ii, 240-1842.
A. fuliginosa, Gld. Proc. Bost. Soc. 28-1845.
Laminella tristis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 141-1854-164-1856.
Amastra tristis, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 649-1869.
A. solida, Pse. (Amastra.) Jour. Conch. xviij 173-1869.
Palolo, Oahu.
A. turritella, Fér. (Helix.) Hist. Moll. pl. 155, f. 13.
A. Oahuensis, Green. Mal. Lye. 1827.
Laminella turritella, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 313.
Amastra turritella, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 650-1869.
Sandwich Islands,
7A. umbilicata, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Pl. I, f.11. Proc. Zool. Soc. 205-1855. .
Laminella petricola, Pfr. Var. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856.
Sandwich Islands.
Obs. When in London I had the good fortune to obtain this rare
shell, for G. M. Sowerby Esq. Dr. Newcomb affirms it to be a good
species, in which I concur.
TA. uniplicata, Nobis. (Amastra.) PI. I, f. 7.
Shell dextral, solid, elongate oval, occasionally cylindrical, whorls
7, slightly rounded, the last somewhat inflated, suture impressed,
longitudinally striate, aperture sub-oval, white; a single white elon-
gate twisted plicee within; outer lip acute, color of the shell a pale
ochre-yellow, concealed by a black epidermis.
L 20. D 9. Aperture 28. D 4. mill. Molokai.
Obs. This shell is from a different island from A. biplicata, Newe.
which it resembles, the latter possesses more coarse longitudinal
strix, and has a double plicee within, and the aperture is red, while
uniplicata has a single plice, and the aperture is white. The Pease
collection contained a large number of duplicates marked “new
species” by Mr. Pease.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 51
7A. variegata, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Zeitsch. 90-1849.
A. variegata, Chem. Tab. 67, f. 14-15.
A, rubens, var. Rve. Mon. pl. 6, f. 42a.
A. decepta, C. B. Adams. Conch. Cont. 127-1850.
Laminella variegata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 128-1854-165-1866.
Amastra variegata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Head of Boothes Valley, Oahu.
Obs. This is a very variable species and the name may embrace
others herein enumerated as distinct species.
7A. ventulus, Fér. (Helix). Tab. Syst. Animal. Moll. p. 56, No. 437-1819. (Non
Rye).
Achatinella melampoides, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1851.
Amastra melampoides, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. viv, 311-1881.
Amastra ventulus, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 648-1869.
Manoa, Oahu.
Section CARINELLA, Dr. L. Pfeiffer.
7C. Kauaiensis, Newe. (Achatinella.) Syn. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. pl. 18, f. 1-1860.
Amer. Jour. Conch. ii, pl. 13, f. 1-1866.
Leptachatina Kauaiensis, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Carinella Kauaiensis, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 312-1881.
Kauai.
TC. obesa, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 23, f. 59-1853.
A. obesa, var. agglutinans, Newe.
Amastra carinata, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soc. 83-1873.
Carinella carinata, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 312.
East Maut.
Obs. Dr. Newcomb informs me that agglutinans and carinata are
local varieties of obesa.
Section LEPTACHATINA, Dr. A. A. Gould.
7L. acuminata, Gld. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soc. 200-1848. Expd. Shells t.
7, f. 100.
Leptachatina acuminata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 154-1854, -166-1856.
Leptachatina acuminata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Kauai.
TL. antiqua, Pse. (Leptachatina.). (Sub fossil.) Jour. Conch. t. 13, f. 6-1876.
Kauai.
TL. balteata, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Jour. Conch. t. 4, f. 4-1876.
Kauai.
TL. brevicula, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Jour. Conch. 169-1869.
Kauai.
52 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
+L. cerealis, Glad. (Achatinella.) Pl. I, f.13. Proc. Bost. Soc. 201-1848.
Newcombia cerealis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 119-1854.
Amastra cerealis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Leptachatina cerealis, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 166-1856.
Waianea, Oahu.
tL. cingula, Migh. (Achatinella.) Pl. I, f. 14. Proc. Bost. Soc. 21-1845.
Achatinella dimidiata, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. 205-1855.
Bulimus cingula, Chem., t. 67, f. 57.
Leptachatina cingula, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 144-1854-166-1856.
Oahu.
Obs. Achatinella dimidiata, Pfr. equals cingula, Migh. in Coll.
Newcomb, ex Auct. The figure of this shell in Chemnitz does not
represent the species, but equals an Amastra.
L. clausiana, Migh. (Bulimus.) Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. 20-1845.
Hawaii.
TL. compacta, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Jour. Conch. xviij—1869.
Labiella compacta, Pfr. Mon. Hel. Viv. viij 219.
Mau.
TL. corneola, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. 90-1845.
Leptachatina corneola, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 144-1854, 166-1856.
Labiella corneola, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
TL. coruscans, Nobis. Pl. I, f. 16.
Shell dextral, ovate, very thin and polished, spire one third the
length ; apex obtuse, whorls 42, rounded, the last one and a half in-
flated ; suture impressed, aperture semi-ovate, with a very thin white
lamellar tooth near the base; labium slightly thickened within and
white, color amber.
L 9. Diam 4}. L. apt. 3}. Diam. apt. 23.
Molokai.
Obs. This shell was received from Mr. D. D. Baldwin, it has the
outline of L. brevicula, Pse. but is much larger and more polished.
TL. costulosa, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Jour. Conch. xviij—90-1870, t. 3, f. 4-1876.
Kauai.
Obs. Near L. striatula, Gld.
L. cylindrata, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Jour. Conch. 1869.
Kauai.
L. exilis, Gul. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj t.6 f. 15.
Leptachatina exilis, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soe. 651-1869.
Oahu.
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 53
L. extensa, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869. Jour. Conch. 1870.
Kauai.
+L. fumosa, Newe. (Achatinella,) Proc. Zool. Soc. t. 23, f. 28-1853
Leptachatina fumosa, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 143-1854-166-1856.
Labiella fumosa, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 651-1869.
Manoa, Oahu.
+. L. fusca, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc.. Zool. Soc. pl. 33, f. 44-1853,
Achatinella striatella, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. t. 6, f. 6-1856.
Achatinella petila, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. t. 6, f. 17-1856.
Laminella fusea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856.
Leptachatina fusca, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 651-1869.
Manoa, Oahu.
L. fuscula, Gul. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj, f. 8.
Leptachatina fuscula, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Molokana, Oahu,
TL. gracilis, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. pl. 30. f. 22-1855.
Achatinella elevata, Pfr. Proce. Zool. Soc. 209-1855.
Achatinelia subula, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj, f. 19-1856.
Leptachatina elevata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1856.
Achatinellastrum elevata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 164-1854.
Leptachatina gracilis, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soe. 651-1869.
Oahu.
L: glutinosa, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 204-1855.
Achatinella lachryma, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 6, f. 4-1858.
Achatinella glutinosa, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856.
Leptachatina glutinosa, Pse. Proe. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Lehui, Oahu.
TL. guttula, Gld. (Achatinella.) Proc. Bost. Soc. 201-1845. Expd. Shells, t. 7, f.
98.
Leptachatina guttula, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 144-1854-166-1856.
Achatinella gummea, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj pl. 6, f. 10.
Achatinella fragilis,Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj pl. 6, f. 11.
East Maui.
TL. grana, Newe. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj 29-1853. Proc. Zool. Soc.
pl. 23, f. 46-1853.
Achatinella granifera, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 6, f. 13-1858.
Achatinella vitriola, Gul. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. pl. 6, f. 23-1858.
Achatinella parvula, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 6, f. 24-1858.
Leptachatina grana, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 144-1854, 166-1856.
East Maui.
54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF a
{L. Hartmani, Newe. (Leptachatina.) Ms. Coll. Newcomb.
Achatinella extincta, Pfr. (sub fossil.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 204-1855.
Laminella extincta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 165-1856.
Leptachatina extincta, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Oahu.
Obs. Dr. Newcomb having recent examples of this shell, has
changed the name, the former being a misnomer.
fL. laevis, Pse. (Leptachinata.) Jour. Conch. xviij-91-1870. 97, pl. 4, f. 6—
1876.
Kauai.
{L. lineolata, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. t. 23, f. 29-1853.
Laminella lineolata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 128-1856.
Amastra lineolata, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Mawi. ©
Obs. Examples of this shell from Dr. Newcomb, exhibits it as
a Leptachatina.
S. lucida, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Kauai.
tL. margarita, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 206-1855.
Achatinella granifera, Gul. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1873.
Leptachatina margarita, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 166-1856.
Oahu.
TL. nitida, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. t, 23, f. 30-1853.
Achatinelia crystallina, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj pl. 6, f. 14.
Leptachatina nitida, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 144-1854-166-1856.
Maui and Oahu.
TL. obclavata, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Mon. Hel. Viv. iv, 568. :
Achatinella octogyrata, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 6, f. 18-1856.
Achatinella turrita. Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. pl. 6, f 20-1856.
Leptachatina obclavata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 166-1856.
L. obtusa, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 209-1855. One
Leptachatina obtusa, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 166-1856.
Sandwich Islands.
L. oryza, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 206-1855.
Achatinella tritacea, Gul. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. vj t. 6, f. 12.
Leptachatina oryza, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 166-1856.
Oahu.
TL. pyramis,) Pfr. Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 90-1845.
Achatinella pyramis, Rve. Mon. t. 6, f. 41-1850.
Achatinella leucocheila, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj t. 6, f. 1. (dwarf.)
Leptachatina pyramis, Pse. Proce. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Kauai.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 5D
L. resinula, Gul. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lye. N. Y. Vj. t. 6, f. 2.
Leptachatina resinula, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Oahu.
L. saccula, Nobis. (Leptachatina.) pl. I, f. 15.
Shell dextral, ovate conic, thin and semi-pellucid, spire more than
half the length. Whorls 6, slightly convex, the last inflated, suture
well impressed, surface coarsely striate. Aperture roundly ovate,
sub-umbilicate, columella white, with an oblong plice within ; inte-
rior of labium white and slightly thickened ; color pale green.
L 10. Diam. 6. L aft. 4. Diam. 23 mill.
Hab. Sandwich Islands.
Obs. Three examples of this species were found amongst the du-
plicates of the Pease collection.
tL. succinata, Newe. (Achatimella.) Proc. Bost. Soc. 220-1855, Amer. Jour.
Conch. ii, t. 13, f. 7.
Achatinella marginata, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj pl. 6, f. 7.
Labiella suecincta, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 651-1869.
Leptachatina succincta, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 166-1856.
Wahai, Oahu.
L. saxitilus, Gul. (Achatinella,) Ann. Lyc. N. Y. vj. t. 6, f. 15.
Leptachatina saxitilus, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 650-1869.
Oahu.
L. sculpta, Pfr. (Achatina.) Mon. Hel. Viv. iv, 609.
Leptachatina sculpta, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soe. 650-1869.
Oahu.
L. semicostata, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Mon. Hel. Viv. iv, 565.
Achatinella costulata, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj t. 6, f. 5.
Leptachatina semicostata, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 166-1856.
Oahu.
Obs. Dr. Newcomb thinks it questionable if this species is not a
synonym of L. fusca, Newe.
TL. simplex, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Jour. Conch. 1869-70.
: Hawa.
Obs. Examples L. nitida, Newe. (coll. Newe.) and L. simplex,
Pse. (coll. Pse.) are similar.
L. stiria, Gul. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lye. N. Y. yj. t. 6, f. 22-1855.
Leptachatina stiria, Pfr. Nomen. Hel. Viv. 316-1881.
Oahu.
{L. striatula, Gid. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soe. 28, January 15-1845,
Achatinella clara, Pfr. Proc. Zool. Soe. August, 1845.
Leptachatina striatula, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 143-1854, 166-1856.
Kauai.
56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
+L. tenuicostata, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Jour. Conch. 170-1869.
Leptachatina tenuicostata, Pfr. Mail. Blatt. 166-1856.
Hawai.
+L. tenebrosa, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Jour. Conch. t. 3, f. 5-1876.
Kauai.
L. terebralis, Gul. (Achatinella.) Ann. Lyc. N. Y. vj t. 6, f. 21.
Leptachatina terebralis, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869,
Oahu.
L. teres, Pfr. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. 206-1855.
Leptachatina teres, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Sandwich Islands.
+L. turgidula, Pse. (Leptachatina.) Jour. Conch. xviij—87—1870.
Labiella turgidula, Pse. Jour. Conch. xviij-167. _
Leptachatina turgidula, Pse. Jour. Conch. 96-1876.
Kauai.
+L. vitrea, Newe. (Achatinella.) Proc. Zool. Soc. t. 25, f. 24-1853.
Achatinella fumida, Gul. Ann. Lye. N. Y. vj t. 6, f 9-1853.
(Dwarf.)
Leptachatina vitrea, Pfr. Mall. Blatt. 144-1854-166-1856.
Labiella vitrea, Pse. Proc. Zool. Soc. 651-1869.
Manoah, Oahu.
EXPLANATION OF PuateE I.
No. 1 Partulina proxima, Pse. Typical.
2 Partulina proxima, Pse. Variety.
“ 3 Achatinellastrum Nealii, Bald. Nobis.
4 Bulimella rosea, Swains. Variety,
5 Amastra farcimen, Pfr. Typical.
6 Amastra porphyrostoma, Pse. Type.
7 Amastra uniplicata, Nobis. Type.
8 Amastra textilis, Fér. Typical,
9 Amastra Huchinsonii, Pse. . Typical.
10 Amastra micans, Pfr. Typical.
11 Amastra umbilicata, Newe. Typical.
12 Leptachatina Hartmanii, Newe. Type.
13 Leptachatina cerealis, Gould. Type.
14 Leptachatina cingula, Mighls. Typical.
15 Leptachatina saceula, Nobis.
16 Leptachatina coruscans, Nobis.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 57
FEBRUARY 7.
Mr. THoomas MrEnan, Vice-President, in the chair.
Twenty-four persons present.
The death of Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. on the 5th inst. having been
announced the following minute was adopted :—
While this may not be the time to fully set forth the services
which have been rendered to this Academy and to the scientific
world by our departed member Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., yet it is fitting
that the sad announcement of his death should be followed by im-
mediate though brief expression of our sorrow.—Therefore be it
Resolved—That by the death of Mr. Tryon, the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia is bereft of one of its most faithful
and useful workers—one whose devotion to the interests of the in-
stitution has been proven during nearly thirty years in varied and
responsible positions of trust, by repeated and generous gifts, and
above all, by untiring labor for its advancement; and whose earnest-
ness and assiduity in his chosen field of study have been rewarded
with a well-earned celebrity which will forever connect his name
with the history and progress of conchological science.
Resolved—That we are enabled by our own knowledge of his
kindly, helpful and endearing qualities to sympathize heartily with
his family in their irreparable loss.
Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger was appointed to prepare a bio-
graphical notice of Mr. Tryon for publication in the Proceedings.
Frsrury 13.
MEETING OF THE BorANICAL SECTION.
The Director, Dr. W. S. W. RuscuENBERGER, in the chair.
The death of Dr. Asa Gray, on January 30, was announced and
the following minute which had been adopted by the Academy at
the meeting held February 7, was read :—
The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia has learned
with deep sorrow of the death of Professor Asa Gray of Cambridge,
Massachusetts, who was elected a correspondent in 1836. In plac-
ing this record in our Proceedings we are unable to give adequate
expression to our sense of the great loss which we, in common with
58 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
the whole world of science, have sustained. A life extending to nearly
four score years has been wholly devoted to scientific investigation,
mainly in his chosen department of Botany, in which his labors and
philosophic insight have been attended with results that do honor
to him and to his country. In entering upon the study of the flora
of his native land, he early realized the imperfect character of its
existing literature and turned his attention to the examination of
the original tyjfes of various authors as found in the herbaria of
North America and Europe. His ultimate object seems to have
_ been the production of a complete flora of North America, which,
though he lived to see far advanced, he was not permitted to
entirely finish.
In the course of his studies his far reaching mind found deep in-
terest in the difficult questions pertaining to the geographical dis-
tribution of plants, and he was led to the discovery of the remarkable
analogies between the flora of the Eastern United States and that of
Eastern Asia. His reasoning upon this and kindred subjects pre-
pared his mind to give respectful attention to the deductions made
by Darwin, when they were first published, and though never a
blind follower, he was one of the earliest scientists of our land to
uphold the idea of progressive development, always maintaining its
perfect harmony with theistic belief. Thus his labors in the botanical
field have been utilized for the entire scientific world.
His interest in this Academy never abated; our library bears
abundant evidence of his researches; our herbarium has been great-
ly enhanced in value by his studies ofits types, and by his generous
contributions; whilst his kind, genial and attractive presence at
many of our meetings has endeared him to us all.—Therefore be it
Resolved—That this expression of our sorrow be communicated to
his immediate family with the assurance of our deep sympathy with
them in a loss which is so widely felt.
Resolved—Thait this record be entered in full upon our minutes
and published in the Proceedings.
Mr. REDFIELD offered at the meeting of the Section, the following
preamble and resolutions which were unanimously adopted :—
When in due course of nature a man eminent in his calling, con-
spicuous as a large minded citizen and remarkable for his private
virtues is taken from us it is a duty which his colleagues owe, not
only to the memory of the departed, but to themselves that they
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 59
should recognize by public expression the value of so distinguished
a life to the times in which it was cast:—Therefore be it resolved,—
Ist. That in the death of Professor Asa Gray, the Botanical
Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia recogni-
zes the removal of one who stood without a rival in his chosen field.
The magnitude of his work, the industry and ability with which
it was executed, the clearness of insight, the truthfulness and accu-
racy displayed in all that he undertook, have done more to elucidate
the flora of North America, than the labors of any of his predeces-
sors or cotemporaries.
2nd. That we desire here to record the fact, that as he was ever
ready to aid his co-workers however humble, by his extensive know-
ledge, his removal is deplored as a loss to the whole scientific com-
munity.
3rd. That while his great intellectual attainments were combined
with the charms of a pure life, a warm heart and a charitable dis-
position which gave a rare loveliness to his whole character,—there
were also added an inflexible purpose, an unyielding devotion to duty,
and an allegiance to all right principle.
4th. That we will cherish his memory, and endeayor to follow
the spirit and purpose of his life in science, by fostering that frater-
nal feeling which he did so much to create among the botanists of
our country.
5th. That while we trust that his removal hence is but the en-
trance upon a nobler field of action, we desire to offer to Mrs. Gray
and to other relatives our most profound sympathy in their be-
reavement.
6th. That these resolutions be entered in full upon the minutes
of the Section, be printed in the Proceedings of the Academy, and
that a copy of them be transmitted to Mrs. Gray.
Mr. Wx. M. Cansy in seconding the resolutions said :—
One of the most remarkable men of our country and, as a scientist,
the best known and most esteemed abroad of any American of our
day, has passed from among us. The early advantages of AsA
GRAY were not many. He was not a college-bred man in the ordi-
nary acceptation of the term and his rise was due to his own genius
and energy. It falls to me to-night to speak of him as a systematic
botanist. It is difficult for our younger botanists to comprehend the
low state of the science when Dr. Gray first became interested in it.
Nothing of any moment had as yet been done except in systematic
60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
botany. True there had been good workers in this department,
and the labors of Bartram and Marshall, of Walter and Michaux,
of Muhlenberg and Elliott, of Schweinitz, Pursh, Nuttall and others,
have always been highly esteemed. Many foreign botanists, from
the time of Linnzeus onward, had described American species. The
labors of these had laid a foundation for North American botany.
But many of the descriptions were in diverse and scattered publica-
tions and were often incomplete or faulty. Thesynonymy had become
much confused. Vast regions now well known, were then terre
incognite. Even the flora of so near a district as the pine lands
of New Jersey was almost unknown.
Nothing daunted, the young botanist, encouraged by the late Dr.
Beck of Albany and yet more by his life-long friend and associate
Dr. Torrey, gave up the practice of medicine and devoted his whole
time to his tavorite science. So far as I know he was the first
American to fully do this. Almost at once the effect of his carefuk
and excellent labor began to appear and much preliminary work
was soondone. Dr. Torrey had seen the manifest need of a new and
better “Flora of North America.” Here was one who could not
only assist him but take the main burden of the work; and soon the
now classic “Torrey and Gray’s Flora” began to appear. Any one
familiar with this work must have noticed how rapidly the deserip-
tions improved as the work went on, and what a vast amount of new
material the collections of Nuttall, Fremont, James and other explor-
ers of our western Territories brought into it. While the species
were thus well studied and the new ones admirably described, the
fullest and most generous credit was always given to the discoveries.
and labors of others. But collections of the plants of the great
western regions, from public and private sources, began to come, in
most embarrassing richness. It became evident that the further
publishing of the “Flora” must be delayed until the floral wealth of
the great interior could be better known. It was also necessary that
the synonymy of the earlier described species should be settled. So,
for a brief period, Dr. Gray studied these in Enropean herbaria and
gardens. Twice afterward he made similar studies with most im-
portant results. Soon after his return from his first visit abroad,
came the call to Cambridge and his settlement at the Botanic
Garden there. From this time onward he stood in the very front
rank as a botanist. His energy and industry were unceasing, and
his work, by no means confined to systematic botany or to the plants
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 61
of our own country, went forward rapidly and well. Less than a
year ago I was told by the Governor of the Fiji Islands that Dr.
Gray’s work upon the flora of those distant lands was still the foun-
dation of their systematic botany. His researches into the flora of
Japan and China are well known. Soon the “Manual of Botany”
appeared with its excellent arrangement and its clear and accurate
descriptions. Who can measure the influence of that work upon
the botany of our country or the effect it has had to create and
increase an interest in the science. At last, after an amount of
well directed labor and research which could have been applied
by no other man, and after very many “contributions” of new species
and “monographs” of difficult and little known genera had come
from his pen, the time seemed ripe for a real and comparatively
complete “Flora of Notth America” to appear. We all know how
two volumes of this were issued and, in a second edition, extended
and improved; and how fondly we had hoped, knowing how un-
impaired was his mental and physical vigor, that the whole might
have been finished before death claimed him. This was not to be;
but we can never be sufficiently thankful that so much which he
alone could give was made free to all.
What estimate shall we place upon his work in this department
of the science? None but the very highest would be just. To me
it seems as if the systematic botany of our country owes nearly every
thing to Dr. Gray. Much that he did not do personally gvas done
under his eye or by his advice and approbation. He it was who
brought order out of confusion and having made stable and secure
the foundation of this branch of the science, erected thereon a noble
edifice which his tireless energy well nigh completed.
But no man could have done this who was less richly gifted than
Asa Gray, for he had that clear insight and prescience which is
genius rather than talent. In him, with eminent ability to detect
the relations of genera and species, were combined a rare faculty of
conveying his own knowledge to others by felicitous and accurate
description, and the conscientious truthfulness which would allow
no work to be carelessly or incompletely done.
Would that it were my place also to bear testimony to his great-
ness of soul. But this I must leave to others,—only saying, what
all will recognize as true, that in the death of Dr. Gray we have,
in the largest sense, lost the best as well as the greatest of American
botanists.
62 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888-
Prof. J. T. RorHrock then said:—
I desire here to speak of Asa Gray simply as a teacher, and shall
not allude to his rich and rounded career in any other relation,
except so far as may be required to bring out the teacher more fully.
His work as a systematist will receive fuller and better consideration
from others, than I could hope to give it.
Directly or indirectly almost all the botanical teachers and in-
vestigators of this country owed their training, or their inspiration
to Professor Asa Gray. If they had not been directly trained under
his eye, they were at least taught by those who had been, or had
used the text-books prepared by him for the special purpose of
diffusing a popular knowledge of botany. Two of his least preten-
tious books,—‘“How Plants Grow” and “How Plants Behave” are
veritable missionaries which daily impart some worthy lesson to
thousands of children all over the land. We can hardly think of
a time when these books will cease to be read, or to be popular.
In each generation there are a few men to whom “the world owes
its most notable impulses.” One may well say that the life and
labors of Charles Darwin illustrate this statement fully; and with
equal propriety we may claim, that so far as our own country is con-
cerned, the teaching and example of Asa Gray were, no less note-
worthy.
There comes a time in the history of almost every ambitious youth,
bent upon an intellectual life, when he is called upon to decide what
special career he will select. His earliest ambition to become a master
in the whole realm of knowledge is found to be worse than a dream.
His first intention was to have devoted a year to one celebrated in-
structor and another year to a second, and so on, until he should lay
the broad and solid foundation upon which his great learning and
reputation might rest. I have known such ambitious students, and
I have known them to become pupils of Professor Gray, with the
full intention of leaving him at the end of a year or two, to seek
instruction in another department of Science, from another teacher:
but of that number, very few ever completed their proposed course of
study. The charm of Professor Gray’s manner, his kindness of
heart, no less than the constantly widening views which unfolded
under his instruction, wedded them to botany for life. Yet I
never knew him to say, or even intimate, that one should elect his
branch over anothers. There have been students to whom botany -
was far from a favorite branch, but in less than six months, the
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 63
great, warm-hearted teacher had won the pupil to himself and to
botany forever. Had Asa Gray been a man of but medium attain-
ments, his transparent and unselfish goodness would alone have
made him a model teacher, whose example and whose memory a
student must have revered to the end.
Yet of all this personal power which Gray the teacher wielded, not
a trace was due to toleration of half done work. On the contrary
if he had a characteristic which absolutely predominated, it was
thoroughness. Not once in years did I ever know him to rest satis-
fied until he had obtained from a pupil the best results possible
under the circumstances. From the outset he not only encouraged,
but required a student to see, think and conclude for himself: often
without aid from books and always without unnecessary aid from
him. This may appear to many as harsh treatment, but systems of
teaching can only be judged by their result, and in this ight Pro-
fessor Gray’s method stands abundantly vindicated. How wretched
the system of education which “crams” a lad with facts and leaves him
unable to stand alone when beyond the authority of the preceptor.
To the fullest extent Doctor Gray recognized this, and to prevent
such a result insisted on mental discipline which left the student
with a well-grounded confidence in his own powers. But on the
other hand a student never could learn presumptuous trust from a
teacher who had nothing of the kind Dimself. Those who received
from Professor Gray the largest share of judicious “letting alone”
were the ones disposed to hunt an easy solution to their problems.
It was never enough to simply reach a result in work. His common
custom was to question and cross question until there could be no
doubt in the mind of either teacher or taught, that the result was
fairly obtained. Often the conclusion of the student was treated as
a thesis to be sustained.
Dr. Gray not seldom assigned to his advanced students, subjects
for original investigation and of course required a written report,
often for publication. Nothing shows more clearly his conscien-
tiousness as a teacher than his strictness concerning these reports.
It was not sufficient that the conclusions should be correct, but they
must be stated in exactly the right way. An artistic turn of a sen-
tence, making it graceful as well as logical, was in his eyes of the
utmost importance. “There now, that is neatly stated,” is an ex-
pression which yet rings in my ears. It was uttered by Doctor
Gray, when at last I had succeeded in “putting a point” as he thought
64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
it should be. I had written my first scientific paper at least six times,
and each time thought it was as well done as could be; certainly as
well done as I was capable of doing it. But my critic was merciless. —
I mentally resolved each time, that I would not re-write it; but I
did re-write it; and was obliged to continue doing so until he thought
it might be allowed to pass. I can see now the benefit of all that
criticism. It was the most helpful lesson I ever received in the art
of stating things. How much easier it would have been for Professor
Gray to have made a mere perfunctory criticism, and then allowed
the paper to have gone, with the statement,—it will do, but it should
have been better! The fact that he did not do so, however, is just
the point that I desire to bring out in illustration of his conscientious
discharge of duty. I have no doubt he sighed more over having to
take time to re-read it, than I did over having to re-write it. But,
though to him lost time, he was good enough to regard it as a duty, —
and as such he did it. His character as a teacher came out in the
fact that he did not allow it to pass. It was this disregard of his
own time when a duty to a student was apparent, which places him
now so high in the esteem of scores of pupils.
During working hours Professor Gray would allow no talking for
talk-sake, at least but fora moment. He would, however, volunteer a
hint, to place a student on the track in a difficult problem, or if
necessary he would cheerfully give an hour for the same purpose,
though he would not reveal anything which it were better that the
student should discover for himself.
So far as I am aware he never forgot or lost interest in any one
whom he had instructed. This is certainly true of those who had
spent any considerable period with him. ‘Time and time again,
have I known him to be on the watch for a chance to help a student
make an honorable name. Is it strange then that all over the land
there are those who have heart aches when it is remembered we
shall see that loved teacher no more?
When a great, good leader has been taken it hardly alters the
case that he went full of years and honor. We are even then not
ready to spare him. We never would have been ready to spare
Asa Gray.
Each year the aspect of a science changes and some new phase
becomes the popular one: and this for the time being is apt to be re-
garded, as, if not the whole, then at least as the better or the major
part of the science. It is simply the expression of an old human
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 65
weakness, which tries to make a part appear greater than the whole
of a thing. An individual of great force of character, may if he
desires, impress his associates with an idea of the supreme impor-
tance of his particular, partial line of study. But after all we only
discover the solid bulk of anything when it is viewed from all sides.
This is intended to bear especially upon the fact that Professor
Gray’s teaching lay mainly, but by no means exclusively in the line
of systematic botany. Just now there is a decided tendency to give
more attention to morphological and physiological botany than ever
before, which is right; and to discourage systematic botany, which
iswrong. Itis merely atemporary swing of the pendulum. Gravity
will at length place all these lines of botanical thought, as they de-
serve to be, on an even plane. It should, however, be said that those
who disparage the systematic side to which Doctor Gray leaned, and
on which he mainly taught, have as a rule had so little training in
it, that they fail to comprehend its full meaning. Even mere analy-
sis of a plant may, nay must, if properly taught, indicate beside the
name, those broader relationships which express, or suggest the lines
of descent by which the plant hascome down tous. If itis a grand
study, and it surely is, to follow the development of the individual
from the egg or cell to the adult condition, is it not a much grander
and broader problem to follow the evolution of the species or the
genus?
Further, it should be stated that Professor Gray’s work and teach-
ing was directly in the natural sequence of events. Above all, it is
to be remembered that the most timely work is always the most
valuable. The first, most pressing task in the botany of any country
is to correctly name and arrange its plants. This is a pre-requisite
condition upon which the record of all other botanical studies then,
and the diffusion of all knowledge thence, must rest. Jt was to the
completion of this great, this necessary work that Professor Gray
was bending all his strength.
It is well, however, to come to the clear statement, that no one in
America, and but very few in Europe were so fully and practically
acquainted with the latest thought and latest observations in all de-
partments of botany as was the subject of this sketch. He could
discuss just as clearly the functions of chlorophyll, or the dual nature
of lichens, or the relation of a plant to its environment, as he could
the relation of one American species to another, or of an Eastern
United States plant to one from far away Japan. Let it then be
66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1888.
stated, that judged by the broadest standard, as a teacher, Asa Gray
stood perfectly rounded in his knowledge. If any one can doubt
this, let him but read the critical reviews which during the past
twenty years Professor Gray has written for the American Journal
of Science, and be convinced. Indeed the wide range of his exact
knowledge was wonderful. But vast as were his attainments, and
vast as was the sum of all that he has written, his strongest claim to
a perpetual remembrance does not rest there. His was the task of
starting a generation of teachers in the right direction. True, the
times were ripe for the coming of Professor Gray; but how much
more meagre the harvest would have been if he had not come!
Certainly it could not have been what his care and culture have
made it! It is a great thing to write a good book. It is a greater
thing to write a clearer book for a country than had been produced
before. But it was greatest of all, to take the young, ambitious na-
turalists of this growing and educationally immature country and
teach them how to teach others, not only as to facts, but as to
methods. The value of this labor passes comprehension, for its
ultimate effects ever widening, reach far out into the future. Facts
may be lost sight of, theories disproven, hypotheses rejected as insufh-
cient, but men will henceforth never lose a key which unlocks
realms of knowledge. Asa Gray’s whole life as teacher and as inves-
tigator has been the model of a master key. Those who have his
patience, his honesty, his genial faith in his associates will best un-
lock the secrets of our flora so long as any remain unrevealed.
Think of him in what relation we may, he stands out in strong
light for inspection, the picture of a “manly man.’’ Was he with-
out fear? It was because he was without reproach. If to the
last, his cheerfulness and mental buoyancy amazed even those who
knew him best, it was because the elasticity of his love of God and
man enabled him to reach beyond the limits which age usually im-
poses, clear into the sunlight of eternal youth.
Asa Gray has gone to his rest. We mourn his removal from our
midst: but we are thankful for the honor he cast upon this land,
throughout the length and breadth of which his name is revered.
More than this, we his associates and pupils are especially grateful
for the example of kindness and conscientious devotion which he
has left us; as well as for the methods of study which he inculcated
and so well illustrated in his own daily Jife and labor.
1888.] | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67
Prof. W. P. Wrtson said :—
I wish to offer a few words on the relation sustained by Dr. Asa
Gray to the various leading scientific societies and naturalists of the
old world. I do this all the more gladly because like some others
of our true scientific men he was known better abroad than in his
own land. I do not wish to say that Dr. Gray was not well known
at home, for he was. His series of text-books, eight in all, has in-
troduced his name wherever botany is well taught, but had his
celebrity in this country depended on his scientific papers and books
not intended for the general reader, he might have been almost as
unknown to the masses as Jeffries Wyman, who wrote no text-books
but made some very important additions to science and consequently
was much better known in England and on the Continent than here.
In this country, to the great majority of individuals who had seen or
heard of Dr. Gray, his name was inseparably connected with the finest
set of text books ever issued in the English language. Only a few
botanists and friends knew of his incessant labor on original ques-
tions, and that the results of this work were frequently published in
the proceedings of the different societies. It was this latter kind of
work which rapidly gained for him abroad a great recognition.
While Dr. Gray in his early career labored incessantly at his
chosen work, went on numerous collecting tours, prepared important
papers on the Grasses and Sedges, gave lectures on botany in two or
three schools and colleges, published several minor papers in differ-
ent societies and made himself indispensable in the early work of the
Flora of North America which Dr. Torrey had already begun—he
was known only to a very limited circle at home.
This activity, accuracy and ability in botany had already made
him through his collecting and papers quite a reputation abroad and
had as early as 1836 secured for him membership in three foreign
societies: The Royal Academy of Sciences of Stockholm in 1829,
the Imperial Academy Naturze Curiosorum, Warsaw, 1835, and the
Royal Botanical Society of Regensburg (Ratisbon) 1836.
Dr. Gray’s visits ‘to Europe were in all six. He first went for
botanical study in November 1838, returning in the November or
the following year. The progress of the North American Flora re-
quired the study and comparison of the many collections which in
earlier times had been sent over from America to the European
herbaria.
68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF , (1888.
In Glasgow he was the guest of Dr. W. J. Hooker. Among those
whom he met in England at this time were George Bentham, Robt.
Brown, Balfour, Lindley, Boott, Bauer, Lambert, Greville and a
score of others. Upon finishing his work in England he went to
the Continent pushing his undertaking with great vigor. In the
course of his extended tour he visited Paris, Lyons, Vienna, Munich,
Geneva, Halle, Berlin, Hamburg and other cities, and made the ac-
quaintance of such men as Jussieu, Brongniart, Decaisne, Mirbel,
Adrien, Gaudichaud, Gay, Delile, Duval, Endlicher, von Martius,
Zuccarini, the De Candolles, Ehrenberg, Schlechtendal, Klotzsch,
Kunth, Link, Lehmann and many more.
It will be seen that in this, his first visit to Europe, he made the
acquaintance of many botanists already eminent, and others who
like himself were later to become so. This was one of the most im-
portant years in his life. Acquaintances were made which were
life-long ; correspondences were opened and exchanges of plants
and works begun which were alike helpful to all parties. It must
be admitted that in America Dr. Gray had no equal, but in
Europe there were many who were working on kindred problems
and to whom he might turn for scientific companionship. Upon
returning home he prosecuted the work on the “ Flora” with his ae-
customed energy and by the spring of 1841 had issued the first 184
pages of Vol. II.
Passing over ten years of hard work in collecting, writing and
teaching at Cambridge, we find him in June of 1850 in a sailing
vessel for a second time on his way to Europe. His object now was
a study of the plants of the Wilkes Exploring Expedition.
After travelling in Switzerland, working for a time in DeCandolle’s
herbarium at Geneva and visiting von Martius at Munich, he went
with Mrs. Gray to the country place of Mr. George Bentham in
Hertfordshire and spent two months there, going over in company
with Mr. Bentham, the entire collection which had been sent out
from America.
He next went to Sir Wm. Hooker’s house at Kew, London, to
study collections there.
A visit of six weeks to Paris with work in P. Barker Webb’s
herbarium and at the Jardin des Plantes was followed by nearly
four months stay in London with study at the British Museum.
Robert Brown was then living. For him Dr. Gray entertained the
most profound respect, rating him as he ever after did, as one of the
greatest of philosophical botanists.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69
In 1855 he made his third journey, visiting some of his old friends
but remaining from home but six weeks. His fourth trip to England
and the Continent was made in 1868. Between the years 1855, the
date of the last visit, and 1868 much valuable work had been done.
He had issued his “Structural and Morphological Botany” which had
no rival in America, and no superior in Europe. It was a model
of clearness and conciseness in its methods of treating the general
morphology of the plant and especially that of the flower.
The “Manual” had been published and was already recognized as.
worthy a place by the side of Koch’s German Flora. No higher praise
could have been given to it. ‘The two Manuals were regarded as
models of clearness and brevity in description.
The work, also that on the Flora of North America, had been con-
stantly carried on, besides the publication of various papers on botan-
ical subjects, the most important of which was: “ Relation of the
Japanese Flora to that of North America.’ This had been a very
remarkable piece of work, requiring close reasoning and comparison,
all the more remarkable because the geological and palaeontological
work on the fossil flora of the North by Heer had then not been
done. The “Principles of Variation in Species” soon to be made
known by Charles Darwin’s “Origin of Species” was yet unpub-
lished. Both of these works might have given great help toward
the solution of the problem in hand. It is safe to say that this last
work made him known to every active thinker in Europe.
What wonder is it then, that after the very successful issue of his
valuable text-books, after many additions to the North American
Flora and the publication of numerous papers including the last one
mentioned on geographical distribution, this fourth visit abroad in
1868, should have been one continued ovation? Leaving home in
September he spent this and the following autumn at Kew, hard at
work. Inthe interim, visiting Paris, he renewed old acquaintances ;
worked with von Martius in Munich and with DeCandolle in Geneva,
and visited various herbaria all over the Continent before returning
to England.
Something of the high regard in which his scientific labors were
held at this time may be gathered from the fact that when he sailed
for home in 1869 he had been made a member of nearly every Royal
Scientific Society in Europe.
He was in Europe twice after this; first in 1880, remaining about
ayear. He visited Paris, the Herbarium at Madrid, Spain, most of
70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
the Italian herbaria and then settled down at Kew for hard work,
receiving plants for comparison from many of the German and other
continental herbaria. Some time was, however, given to the visiting
of old friends.
The last visit to Europe was made in April, 1887, returning in
October of same year. A little work was done at Kew, and the
Lamarck Herbarium at the Jardin des Plantes was carefully ex-
amined. Otherwise the time was devoted to pleasant travel and old.
friends. Returning in October, he had planned among other work
the writing of his Recollections of European Botanists.
Dr. Gray was known both in England and on the continent not
alone as a botanist, but as one of the ablest exponents of evolution.
In the early times after the publication of the “ Origin of Species”
he was its most out-spoken defender in America. His articles at
this time were often copied by the English journals. He did not
accept the theory in its entirety. Many letters of Darwin’s attest
how fully the latter relied on his judgment and support—Darwin
says in one of his letters to Dr. Gray “ you never touch the subject
) yo J
without making it clearer,” “I look at it as even more extraordinary
that you never say a word or use an epithet which does not fully ex-
press my meaning,” “others who perfectly understand my book, yet
sometimes use expressions to which I demur.” And again in the
same letter he writes “ I hope and almost believe that the time will
come when you will go further, in believing a much larger amount of
modification of species, than you did at first or do now.”
When the history of the development theory is written no small
part will be given to him whom we commemorate.
More than one continental botanist has had reason to venerate
our teacher and leader in botany fully as much as Mr. Darwin.
His criticism-and kindly advice was freely given when asked and
often proved invaluable.
Prof. THomas MrEHAN remarked that he desired to dwell some-
what more fully upon a trait of Dr. Gray’s character which the
previous speakers had touched only incidentally. The whole world of
science owed a debt to Dr. Gray for his botanical labors; but he was
not sure but the greater debt was due to his unpublished work, namely
his kind helpfulness to other workers. Many had been made scientific
students, many had even become eminent in usefulness, solely by
the early encouragement received from Dr. Gray. If he might be-
1888.] ° NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 71
pardoned for referring to his own history, he would say that few
have had better opportunity of knowing Dr. Gray in this respect
than he himself. In 1857, at the instance of a friend he was led to
open a correspondence with Dr. Gray upon the constant differences
between the European and American forms of Spiraea salicifolia.
Nothing could be kinder than the reply which urged him to continue
his observations, saying that former authors had made the American
form a distinct species under the name of S. carpinifolia and that
Dr. Gray might probably adopt this name in the next edition of the
Manual. The subsequent appearance of Darwin’s “Origin of Species”
so changed the hitherto prevailing idea of specific types that it is
no wonder that it did not appear in the next edition under a dis-
tinct name. But the encouragement given to the obscure young
man was not lost. It led to a closer observation of similar phenom-
ena, and the paper on the relative characters of American and Eu-
ropean species, which subsequently received the approval of Darwin,
Mivart and others, was the result of the encouragement given in that
letter. That and many subsequent papers were submitted to Dr.
Gray before publication, and not presented without his approval ;
and it was not till later, after he had caught up with the whole lit-
erature of the subject, that he ventured to stand alone without the
aid of his early friend and monitor.
Prof. Meehan then spoke of his long and frequent correspondence
with Dr. Gray, growing out of his own editorial position. From
month to month Dr. Gray would send his criticisms upon his edito-
rial work. These were occasionally sharp and adverse, but always
judicious, encouraging and kind, and Mr. Meehan cited many in-
stances illustrative of this.
It was characteristic of Dr. Gray to give the same attention to the
poorest and most obscure, as to the most prominent, if only he found
them to be earnest searchers for truth. It had been said that he was
hard to convince, but this was because he himself had taken so much
pains to reach the truth. Nothing but positive evidence would lead
him to set aside a conclusion at which he had arrived; but when
once such evidence was produced, no one accepted it more readily —
or gracefully, and hence he was even more merciless in judging
of his own work, than that of others. Of this readiness to re-
verse his own decisions, and do justice to others, Prof. Meehan gave
many pleasant instances. Few men could have a warmer heart
towards friends than Dr. Gray—but this did not lead him to ig-
72 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
nore their faults, nor prevent him from expressing his views of
them. Tender, loving and considerate as he always was, he
could be caustic and severe when he believed the good of science
demanded it. Once a very zealous collector to whom science was
under many obligations, described and published a large number of
plants, from imperfect material, with undue haste and without com-
petent knowledge. Dr. Gray had to show that really there were
very few new species among them, and in so doing his criticism was
unusually severe. Mr. Meehan in writing to Dr. Gray ventured to
remonstrate with him upon the severity which he hadused. The
reply was, “In my heart, I would have been more tender than you,
but I cannot afford to be. I am, from my position before the world,
a critic, and I cannot shrink from the duty which such a position
imposes upon me. If you were in the position that I am, with a
short life and a long task before you, and just as you thought the
way was clear for progress, some one should dump cart loads of rub-
bish in your path, and you had to take off your coat, roll up your
sleeves and spend weeks in digging that rubbish away before you
could proceed, I should not suppose you would be a model of amia-
bility.”
In giving these recollections Prof. Meehan hoped that he should
be pardoned for so much allusion to his own history, but it was be-
cause that history bore such full and rich testimony to the critical
acumen, the kind judgment, the friendly aid and the warm and loy-
ing heart of the man as well as the scientist, whom we this evening
commemorate.
Mr. Isaac C. MARTINDALE then spoke of Professor Gray’s en-
couragement to young students, and of his willingness always to aid
them in their studies; this he was able to testify from his own exper-
ience, having been again and again assisted while engaged with
perplexing botanical problems: he also spoke of the genial, kind
and social dispusition ever displayed, and which made the name of
Professor Gray a household word in so many homes. He gave an
interesting account of a botanical excursion to the mountains of
North Carolina made in 1884 in company with this greatest of
American botanists, referring to the readiness with which he recalled
the names of all the plants met with during the journey, showing
not only his perfect familiarity with the names of the species but
also his most remarkable memory.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 73
FEBRUARY 14.
The President, Dr. JosepH Lerpy, in the chair.
Twenty-two persons present.
On the resemblance of the primitive foraminifera and of ovarian
Ova.—Prof. Ryprer remarked that upon cutting sections of nearly
mature ovarian ova with their investing membrane, zona radiata, in
place, it was found that, in quite a number of cases, fine protoplas-
mic processes or pseudopods extended from the peripheral layer of
protoplasm of the egg, through iis capsule or zona and joined the
cells of the granulosa or discus proligerus. This arrangement re-
minded one forcibly of the filamentous pseudopods extended from a
Heliozoén or of the slender pseudopods extended through the per-
forations in the walls of the single chambers of Globigerina. This
resemblance was all the more suggestive if one will compare a
section of one of the chambers of a Globigerina made through the
calcareous shell and its contained protoplasm with a similar section
through the ovum of the Gar Pike, where the zona is formed of
pillars of homogenous matter. Such prolongations of pseudopods
through the investing zona radiata in the case of many species of ani-
mal forms, shows fairly well that this must be the principal means
by which new matter is taken up from without and incorporated, as
there is no direct extension of the vascular system into the egg, by
which it can take up nutriment. It is thus seen that the early
stages of the growing ovum, not only resemble some of the lower
forms of Helizoa and Foraminifera as respects the grade of their
morphological differentiation but also as to the mode in which they
exhibit their nutritive or physiological activities. This resemblance
is still further heightened if a form like Orbulina is compared with
certain stages of the development of ova. It is thus seen that, in
many cases, the ovarian germ, at least, passes through a stage which
may be morphologically as well as physiologically compared with
some of the lowest grades of the Protozoa.
Chaetopterus from Florida:—Prof. Letpy directed attention to
specimens which were collected in the trip of Prof. Heilprin and Mr.
Willcox, at the mouth of the Manatee River. The species appears
to be the Chaetopterus pergamentaceus of Cuvier, originally des-
eribed from specimens from the West Indies. It is a remarkable
form. It belongs to the Tubicolae or tube-living worms, but unlike
most of these, is devoid of the numerous cephalic appendages, or
tentacles and gills. The tube is membranous and laminated in
structure and it has the appearance of parchment. The two tubes
collected are 16 inches long by jths of an inch in diameter, and
tapering towards the ends. ‘An incomplete worm, not well preserved
on account of its delicacy, in its present condition i is 9 inches long,
6
74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
and appears very narrow in comparison with the capacity of its tube.
The anterior division of the body, about an inch long, is flattened,
and about half as wide, but narrowing behind, and is composed of
eight podal segments provided with dense bunches of lustrous, golden
setae. The succeeding segment, long and narrow, is provided with a
pair of wing-like appendages an inch long, and each furnished with
two bundles of diverging setae. Then follow five long narrow seg-
ments with large membranous appendages, without setae. The
terminal segments, of which 15 remain in the specimen, are furnish-
ed with pairs of long pointed appendages with bundles of setae.
FEBRUARY 21.
The President, Dr. Lerpy, in the chair.
Twenty-one persons present.
The following papers were presented for publication :—
“Researches upon the general physiology of Nerves and Muscles.”
By Henry C. Chapman M. D. and A. P. Brubacker M. D.
“Notes on an aquatic insect larva with jointed dorsal appendages.”
By Adele M. Fielde.
Necessity for Revising the Nomenclature of American Spiders.—Dr-
McCook remarked that during the summer of 1887, while visiting
the Zoological Library of the British Museum of Natural History,
he gained information which may revolutionize, or at least compel
a radical revision of the nomenclature of American spiders.
His interest in these animals being known by some of the zoolo-
gists in the room, his attention was called to a volume of unpublished
figures of American spiders then in the library. These drawings
were made by Mr. John Abbot, an Englishman settled in Savannah
during the latter part of the eighteenth century. The figures were
made as early as 1792. At least they bear that date. Mr. Abbot
is well known to entomologists by his work upon lepidoptera, pub-
lished in connection with Mr. Smith. This book proved to be the
volumes, long supposed to be lost, of original drawings from which
Baron Walckenaer described the numerous species from Georgia
which are found m his Natural History of Apterous Insects.’
1«The Natural History of the rarer lepidopterous insects of Georgia. Including
their systematic characters, the particulars of their several metamorphoses and the
plants on which they feed. Collected from the observations of Mr. John Abbot,
many years resident in that country, by James Edward Smith M. D. 2 Vol’s, fol.
London, 1797.”
* Histoire Naturelle des Insectes. Aptéres. Vols. I. and II. Suites a Buffon.
1837.
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 75
It was known, of course, from Walckenaer’s introduction to his
descriptions that he had purchased Abbot’s' drawings of over five
hundred species of spiders and other arachnids; that he also had the
manuscript drawings made by Bose of South Carolina spiders. But
Americans seem to have been in ignorance of what had become of
these drawings, and the fact that they were in the Zoological Lib-
rary appears to have escaped the observation of the little circle of
British students of araneads; at least the speaker could recall no
reference made to them in current literature. It was not until the
above incident that an American student was known to have a clew
to the whereabouts of the valuable volume which the British Mus-
eum is so fortunate as to possess.” How the book happened to come
into its present place, or in what manner it was procured from Baron
Walckenaer or his executors, Dr. McCook was not able to say.
On the day when the discovery was made, he had engagements
which prevented him giving more than an hour or two to the study
of the figures, and as he was about to leave London, no further oppor-
tunity presented for making extended notes. However, he was able
at once to recognize a number of species which have long and fa-
miliarly been known under the names published by Hentz. He took
notes of a number of these species, principally among the orbweav-
ers, a group with which he was at present particularly engaged.
He also took the numbers under which the figures are listed by
Abbot. :
After returning to America Dr. McCook went over Walckenaer’s
descriptions, comparing them with his own notes, and found that
there is no doubt at all as to the identity of these drawings with the
original ones from which Walckenaer described his published spe-
cies. The number of Abbot’s figures as they appear in the manu-
scripts correspond with the numbers cited by Walckenaer in his
references to the same. Moreover, Walckenaer’s descriptions, view-
ed in the light of the speaker’s recollection of the drawings, together
with his own notes and identification on the spot, remove all doubt
as to the identity of at least a considerable number of the species.
The importance of this discovery is seen in view of the following
facts: Walckenaer published his descriptions of Georgia species in
1837; Professor Hentz, the father of American Araneology, made:
his publications in the Proceedings and Journal of the Boston So-
ciety of Natural History beginning with the year 1841, and con-
tinued until 1850. The latter have been gathered together and
1 Walckenaer erroneously refers to the author as “Thomas” Abbot; his name is
“John.”
2 The full title of the book is “Drawings of the Insects of Georgia in America
by John Abbot of Savannah. Vol. XIV, 1792.’’ Zoological Library of the
British Museum of Natural History, London.
76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
published in book form under the title of “The Spiders of the United
States,” edited by Edward Burgess and with notes by Mr. Emerton."
Hentz had some previous papers of no very great consequence,
and in 1835 he published a simple list of 125 species arranged under
the genera to which he supposed that they belonged. This was in
the Second Edition of Hitchcock’s Report of the Geology of Massa-
chusetts, (1835.) An examination of this list shows that it includes
a number of the species which Walckenaer described in 1837 from
the drawings of Abbot. So far then as the bare publication of these
names is concerned Hentz has a priority of two years.
The question of priority involved is yet more complicated by the
fact that the second volume of Walckenaer’s work, containing many
of the American species and all the orbweavers, bears a date whose
integrity is seriously questioned. The title page gives “1837” as the
year of publication, the same as that rightly borne by the first vol-
ume; but Dr. T. Thorell, who is one of the highest living authorities
in Araneology, declares that this volume “did not come out till
1841.” This fact, however, does not seriously effect the points in
issue, as only a few species of the Mygalidae were published by
Hentz in 1841;° all the remaining species were published during
and subsequent to 1842.
The attitude of American students of spider fauna toward Walck-
enaer’s descriptions alluded to above has been something after the
fashion of the famous Scotch verdict “not proven.” In other words,
in the absence of any types or specimens anywhere existing to which
his descriptions might be referred; in the absence of the original
drawings from which his descriptions were made, for none (or only
one) of them were made from the specimens themselves; and in the
absence of any knowledge as to whether those drawings anywhere
existed, it was generally conceded, so far as there was any thought
or action on the matter at all, that Walckenaer’s descriptions must
be considered as non-existent. The priority, therefore, of all the
descriptions made by Hentz has been heretofore universally allowed,
even though some of Walckenaer’s descriptions are sufficiently clear
to show without the aid of figures that he had in mind the same
species covered under different names by Hentz. Dr. McCook be-
lieved that on the whole this decision was a righteous one, and that
up to this date no claim could have been established in favor of
Walckenaer’s priority.
However, a question now arises which it is necessary to face and
in some way settle. Does not the discovery of the original drawings
in the Zoological Library of the British Museum put an entirely
1 Boston: Boston Society of Natural History, 1875.
> Thorell: “On European Spiders,” Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sci. Upsaliensis; Ser.
3rd, Vol. VII., p. 15, foot note. The text indicates that he knows “with certainty
that such date was incorrectly given.”
3 Mygale truncata, solstitialis, carolinensis, gracilis and unicolor. See Proc.
Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. I, pp. 41-42. :
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 17
new phase upon the matter? Shall we not be compelled, in view of
the fact that there can now be no doubt of the identity of Walcken-
aer’s species, to give the priority to him?
The very few “American students of our spider fauna have become
so familiar with many of Walckenaer’s species under Hentz’s names,
that it will be difficult to throw those names out of mind. Moreover
they have entered into all our literature up to this date, and there
will be great confusion in making the corrections. Besides, it must
be allowed that Hentz’s names are better chosen then Walckenaer’s.
If Abbot, whose patient, long continued and intelligent labors de-
serve the real honor, could receive the credit of entitulation, one
might, at least on the ground of sentiment, feel more reconciled to
seeing the priority pass from Hentz; especially as Baron Walcken-
aer was often indifferent to the prior rights of fellow naturalists.
But the laws of priority must be considered, and honesty and justice
can give no room for considerations of convenience and sentiment.
Many of Walckenaer’s descriptions may be considered as fairly
good, and indeed they have all along been recognized as clearly
covering some of Hentz’s species. But when those descriptions are
placed alongside of Abbot’s drawings, from which they were made,
all doubt is removed as to the identity. For the most part, Abbot’s
drawings are tolerably accurate, well finished, are colored after
nature, and there was no difficulty at first sight i in identifying a
large number of our well known species, under ‘the names published
by “Professor Hentz. It seems unfortunate that such good work
should have remained so long unnoticed, and that credit for the same
should have been so wholly lost to the author. It is at least some
satisfaction to be able to render such justice and honor as this notice
may bring, to one who barely escaped the distinction of being the
father of American araneology by inability to publish or procure
the publication of his faithful labors.
There are thus raised very delicate points as to the law of priority,
concerning which Dr. McCook desired to obtain the judgment of his
associates : - first, in view of the fact that Walckenaer’s species were
described not from the spiders themselves, but from the drawings of
them made by another hand, can we be permitted to give priority
to Hentz, whose descriptions were made from the animals them-
selves? Second, does the fact that two years previous to Walcken-
aer’s descriptions, Hentz published the names of one hundred and
twenty five species, many of which are identical with those of Abbot’s
drawings and Walckenaer’s Sees entitle the American au-
thor to “priority as to these species? Under ordinary circumstances
it would perhaps be at once admitted that Hentz could have no
claim, but in view of the special circumstances alluded to may there
not be some departure from the strict construction of the /ex priorita-
tis? The inconvenience of overthrowing Hentz’s names would be
a peculiar hardship to American ar aneologists, unless the original
or a fac-simile of Abbot’s Drawings could be obtained and made ac-
cessible on this side of the Atlantic. With the book in the British
78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Museum, there is no final court, before which to test the integrity
of species, available for the bulk of American students. While
Walckenaer’s descriptions are generally intelligible with the draw-
ings in hand, many are obseure without them. This is equally true
of Hentz’s descriptions; but then we have his figures to interpret the
descriptions sufficiently well to enable us to identify the species.*
Dr. McCook presented a list of a few of the best known species,
especially among the orb weavers, of those which were recognized
by him as identical with the corresponding numbers in Abbot's
drawings, and which, if Walckenaer’s claim to priority be conceded,
must hereafter be known under the names assigned by that natural-
ist. A reading of this brief list will give araneologists some idea of
the serious labor that must be wrought by them before fixed and
satisfactory results can be evolved from the confusion into which our
existing nomenclature has been startled by the unexpected reappear-
ance of Abbot’s long lost manuscripts.
These species are here given in the following tabulated form.
‘The first column shows the name given by Hentz. The second shows
Walckenaer’s names. The third column gives the names of the
species as they must hereafter be known if Walckenaer’s names are
to be accepted.
TABLE OF RevisepD NOMENCLATURE OF AMERICAN SPIDERS.
HENTz. W ALCKENAER. REVISED.
Epeira insularis Epeira conspicellata ' Epeira conspicellata.
Epeira trivittata Epeira arabesca * Epeira arabesea.
. Epeira Pegnia * Epeira arabesca.
Epeira domiciliorum Epeira benjamina* Epeira benjamina.
Epeira parvula Epeira eustala ° Epeira eustala.
Epeira thaddeus Epeira cepina ° Epeira thaddeus.
Epeira verucosa Epeira arenata * Verucosa arenata.
*In the discussion which followed the remarks of Dr. McCook the opinion was
expressed by Professors Leidy, Lewis and Dall that the earlier names should in all
cases be adopted, no matter how much inconvenience might be entailed thereby,
af the descriptions were recognizable. Prof. Heilprin held that such cases should
‘be decided so as to cause the least embarrassment to naturalists and therefore the
deast detriment to Science.
1 Walck. Nat. Hist. Apteres. Vol. II, p.58. 2id p. 74. 3id p. 80. 4 id p. 42.
5id p. 37. This species, whose remarkable variations have attracted the atten-
ion of all who know it, is described by Walckenaer under several names, as it was
by Hentz.
§id p. 88. Walckenaer confounds thaddeus with parvula of which he makes
ita variety. Hentz’s name may therefore stand.
Tid p. 133.
1388. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 79
Epeira stellata Plectana stellata ° Plectana stellata.
= Epeira nobilis *
cy Epeira cerasiae *
s Epeira iris *
Epeira riparia Epeira cophinaria™ Argiope cophinaria.
Epeira fasciata Epeira argyraspides ° Argiope argyraspides.
Epeira cancer Plectana ellipsoides * Gasteracantha ellipsot-
des.
Epeira rugosa Plectana gracilis * —_Acrosoma gracilis.
Epeira spinea Plectana sagittata * Acrosoma sagittata.
Epeira mitrata Plectana reduviana *® Acrosoma reduviana.
Epeira caudata Epeira turbinata “ — Cyrtophora turbinata.
ce “cc
Epeira glomosa *
Tetragnatha grallator Tetragnatha fulvua® Tetragnatha fulva.
Phyllyra riparia Uloborus Americanus” Uloborus Americanus
The numbers under which the species described by Walckenaer
and listed in Abbot’s figures are here given for the convenience of
those who wish to refer to the originals. The reference numbers
attached to them correspond with the reference numbers in the
second column of the table and in the foot notes.
Axsgor’s Manuscript Numpers.—l16, 121'; 331, 346°; 375,
Eeoeea > 126% 119% 120 117°; 181, 182; 183"; 1617; 166°;
pea ipl 15a s 1185. 47; 48%: 50%; 49%; 79, 80.25
Heo > 211,; 216,221 %; 44.
8id II, 171. This is probably the figure to which Hz. refers (Sp. U. S. p. 125)
when he cites Bosc as authority for the name. The species which Walck. has
named nobilis, iris and cerasiae all seem to me to be sée//ata, and it is odd that
Walck. should have put them even into a different genus from ste//afa which is
described in his “Tabl. des Araeides”’ p. 65, fig. 54. If this spider is to be placed
in a genus other than Z/ezra, it might retain the now abandoned name of P/ectana,
which is here provisionally revived to receive it. Emerton gives the species to
Hentz. (‘New Eng. Epeiridae,” p. 319).
9id p. 119. 10 id p. 120. 11 id p. 109. 12 id p. 110. 13 id p. 155.
14 id p. 193. 1s id p. 174. 16 id p. 201. 17 id p. 140.
Sid p. 144. This bears some likeness to my species Cyrt. 6zfurca and may
prove to be the same.
19 id p. 212. Abbott figures a number of Tetragnathas including what appears
to be Emerton’s 7. caudata (7. lacerta Wik); but a careful study will be re-
quired to determine which are simply variations. Hentz’s gradlator is probably
‘the one here designated. Walckenaer’s 7etragnatha zorilla (Aptr. II, p. 221 and
Pl. 19, 2 B) which is figured from Abbot’s mss., belongs to his own genus La¢ro-
dectus (Lathrodectus), and is Hentz’s Theridion verecundum and /ineatum. It
is also the Latrodectus formidabilis and L. variolus of Walk. (Apt. Vol. I. p.
647, 648.). The name of this interesting spider will now be Lathrodectus form-
2dabilis WALCK.
20 jal joa EA
80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888
Cirolana feasting on the Edible Crab.—Prof. Lrerpy stated that.
on last Saturday, having occasion to go to Beach Haven, N. J. dur-
ing a leisure half hour stroll along shore, he noticed, here and there
a dead crab, Callinectes hastatus, lying on the sand, near the last
high tide mark. The crabs observed happened to be all females and
they appeared to have died recently as some were quite fresh and
showed no signs of decomposition. Others, broken open by remoy-
ing the carapace, were found to have the body cavity swarming with
a living isopod, the Cirolana concharum, which had preyed upon the
organs and were variously colored by the food with which they were:
gorged. From a single crab there were taken 108 of the Cirolana
ranging from 15 to 22 mm. in length by 5 to 7 mm. in breadth.
The isopod is grayish translucent above and whitish translucent.
beneath, and centrally variously colored, brown, black, red or yellow,
from the food contents. The dorsal plates are minutely dotted, black
or brown, in bands. The eyes are triangular with rounded angles,
and black. The antennae are nearly double the length of the anten-
nules. The mandibles are furnished with a strong, brown, tricuspid
molar. The caudal plate or telson is triangular with a blunt, slightly
emarginate apex and with a pair of spines each side of the latter.
The isopod has been observed by Stimpson at Charleston, S. C. and
by Harger at Vineyard Sound, Mass., but has not previously been
reported from the coast of New Jersey. Three isolated specimens.
of the same were picked up on the shore of Beach Haven, the last
summer.
On Bopyrus palaemoneticola.—Prof. Leidy also presented numer-
ous specimens of the prawn, Palaemonetes vulgaris, infested with the
parasite, Bopyrus palaemoneticola, obtained at Beach Haven, N. J.
From about two quarts of the prawn, caught for fish-bait, upwards
of fifty contained the Bopyrus.
FEBRUARY 28.
The President, Dr. Lretpy, in the chair.
Twenty-five persons present.
The death of James S. Mason, a member, was announced.
Note on Lepas fascicularis—Prof. Lerpy remarked that while
stopping at Beach Haven, N. J., the last summer he had observed
that from time to time the debris thrown on shore would differ accord-
ing to the direction of the wind. On one occasion a strong wind from
the north cast up a considerable quantity of material consisting of frag-
ments of wood, grass, fucus, ete., to most of which was attached a pro-
fusion of goose-barnacles, Lepas fascicularis. Among the materials
observed were apples and cranberries, which also had bundles of
barnacles attached, and as the fruit was not decomposed, it appar-
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 8f
ently indicated a rapid development and growth of the animal.
Portions of apples were exhibited with dense hemispherical groups
of attached barnacles an inch and a half in diameter with the barna-
cles from 2 to 3 lines long, and several cranberries with bunches in
which the barnacles are from 2 to 6 lines long.
Reputed Tape-worm in a Cucumber—Prof. Lerpy stated that
several years ago, his colleague in the University, Prof. Wm. Goodell,
submitted to his examination a tape-worm, which he received from a
correspondent, with the label “From the middle of a cucumber pre-
served in brine. §. E. Robinson, West Union, Iowa, May 29, 1876.”
The specimen appears to be complete and in its present condition,
preserved in alcohol, is about eight inches long. The head is large,
spheroid, provided with four, small, equi- distant hemispherical both-
ria, and surmounted by a prominent crown with a double circle of
strong hooks. The neck is a slight constriction whence the body
rapidly widens and again tapers behind. The anterior segments are
transversely linear with a gradually increasing length and more
acute and prominent lateral ends; the middle segments are about
twice the breadth of the length “and slightly companulate; and
the posterior segments are proportionately longer and narrower. In
the latter, the uterus is distended with eggs only at their anterior
portion.
The hooks are partially lost on one side of the crown; and it is
estimated that there were about 40 or more.
The head is °875 mm. broad; the crown of hooks *625 mm.; the
neek *8 mm.; at the middle of the body six segments together are
1 em. long and 3:5 mm. wide; the terminal segments are : about 4mm.
long and 9-5 mm. wide. The egos measure from -032 to -036 mm.
While it cannot be admitted that the worm belonged to the cucum-
ber, nor is it clear how it reached this position, it is a question as to
the species. It bears a near resemblance to the Taenia crassicollis of
the Cat, but is not more than half the size of this as it ordinarily
occurs.
In comparison with a complete specimen of the latter, six inches
in length in the contracted condition as preserved in alcohol, we find
the following measurements.
T. of the cucumber T. crassicollis.
Breadth of head = = = °875 mm. 1°875 mm.
Breadth of crown of hooks - ‘O205 0. ie aS
Breadth of neck : : = 8 « Opin Me
Breadth of middle segments a a Kg Gatoromes
Length of middle segments SEs) ae i =
Breadth of terminal ‘seements E Pe De a 35 ff
Length of terminal segments - 4 5 a
Diamonds in Meteorites—Professor CARVILL Lewis exhibited a
small fragment of a meteorite which had fallen in the district of
Krasnoslobodsk, Government of Penza, Siberia, on September 4, 1886,
82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF _ [1888.
and which he had obtained through the kindness of Mr. George F.
Kunz. The specimen was of especial interest on account of the re-
port (see Nature. Dec. 1, 1887. xxxvii, p. 110) that Professor Lat-
chinof and Jerofief had detected in the insoluble residue small cor-
puscles having all the characters of diamonds.
The speaker had extracted from the fragment in his possession
two small oval bodies with extremely high index of refraction and
showing only slight traces of polarization, such as is common to
many diamonds. They were colorless and transparent, resembling
certain specimens of Brazilian “bort.” Having been able to dis-
tinctly scratch a polished sapphire with portions of the meteorite, he
was disposed to agree with Professor Latchinoff and Jerofief that
these bodies were true diamonds. The olivine in this meteorite was
also in the form of oval grains and had a deep yellow color and
bright polarization. The rounded form of the olivine and the dia-
monds may have been due to corrosion of the igneous mass. This
rounded form is yery commonly shown by the olivines in basic erup-
tive rocks.
While diamonds have never before been found in meteorites, car-
bon has long been known in them in its graphitic or amorphous form.
Recently Fletcher" has described under the name of Cliftonite a
cubical form of carbon, somewhat harder than ordinary graphite,
which he found in an Australian meteorite.
The important bearing of the present discovery upon the vexed
question of the diamond is evident. The speaker had recently en-
deavored to show that the commonly received notion that itacolumite
was the original matrix of the diamond is a mistake, and that dia-
monds reaily occur in, or in the neighborhood of, basic eruptive
rocks.” The facts regarding the associations of the diamond in
Africa, Borneo, New South Wales, California and elsewhere all
point to peridotites or allied rocks as the matrix of the diamond.
The similarity, both in structure and composition, of the diamond-
bearing Kimberlite of South Africa to meteorites had been pointed
out by: the speaker previously, and he had, in view of this fact, sug-
gested the search for diamonds in meteorites.
Ctenophores in Fresh Water:—Dr. BENJAMIN SHARP reported
that he had observed in a fresh water pond at Sachecha, Nantucket,
a great number of Ctenophores, in apparently good condition. This
pond i is occasionally opened to the sea to allow the escape of the perch
that breed there is great numbers. The Ctenophores without doubt
found their way into the pond at such time. As far as he could de-
termine they were the common Mnemiopsis Leidyi, unchanged by
their strange environment. They not only appeared perfectly healthy
and active but were highly phosphorescent at night. He was not
1 Jour. Mineralog. Soc. vii, p. 121, 1887.
Proc. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Science. Manchester, 1887. (See Geolog. Magazine,
March. 1888.)
1888.] | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83
able to say whether they bred there or not, and until this is proven
it is not possible to say that they have become perfectly adapted to
the new condition of life. Many observers have noticed that Coe-
lenterata move up rivers, but this is an interesting case, as the transi-
ition from the salt to the fresh water must have been very sudden.
At the time of observation Dr. Sharp said that on drinking the
water he could not notice the slightest trace of salt.
Messrs Henry A. Pilsbry and S. G. Morton Montgomery were
elected members.
The following papers were ordered to be printed :—
. tere See et ene ee
84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE COLOR-MARKS OF THE MAMMALIA|!
BY HARRISON ALLEN, M. D.
The variations in the colors of the hair and the skin are of a char-
acter and importance which warrant a systematic study. I have
ventured to formulate my impressions on this subject, and while de-
parting in some degree from the directions of approach which zool-
ogists have developed, I have not I trust, stated the case without
due regard to the views of others on this perplexing phase of obser-
vation.
My main object has been to contemplate color marks as the result
of nutritiye processes controlled by recognized biological forces both
in health and disease. JI will not hesitate to treat of a perverted
growth in the human subject as comparable to a normal growth in
any member of the mammalian series.
Statements will be made respecting the distribution of colors of
hair, (the superficial color, or rather the effect of the main color of
the hair upon the eye being here intended) of the colors of pigment
marks on the skin, of localized hypertrophies and atrophies, of vi-
brissze, of pilose and naked warts, as though they were co-ordinates
of equal value.
I have examined the museums at Philadelphia, New York, New-
Haven and Washington. I have consulted the illustrations of
works on Natural History and have made extended observations on
the domesticated animals especially of dogs, horses, cattle, guinea-
pigs and rabbits.
The conclusions drawn at this time have stood the test of repeated
re-examinations and while they are not all susceptible of being held
as rigid deductions from the premises, they present, I think, a group
of tenets which may prove of interest to working zoologists.
The subject of distribution of the hair in the human subject has
received attention from D. F. Eschricht’ and C. A. Voigt.’
Both writers have taken the new-born child as a standard and
have described the directions of the hair in two ways: first as it is
1 This paper is an elaboration of a portion of an essay which constituted
the presidential address at the annual meeting of the American Society of Natural-
ists, December, 1887.
2 Miiller’s Archiv. 1837, Vol. IV, 37.
3 Denkschr. Wein. Akad. d. Wissenschaft. 1857, Vol. XII, III Abth. p. 1.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85
observed radiating from certain points, and second as it is seen to
converge to certain points.
The following are the main points of radiation. The parietal bone,
ashort distance to the right of the obeleon, and the axilla. The pa-
rietal centres may be symmetrical.
The following are the main points of convergence. The head at
the obeleon and directly above the auricle; the face at the inner end
of the eyebrow, and at the root of the nose; the neck over the cen-
tre of the hyoid bone; the sternum at its upper third; the abdomen
at the summit of the bladder; the under surface of the penis at the
base ; the nape of the neck on each side of the vertebral column ;
the trunk over the lower part of the coccyx ; the side of the trunk ;
the arm at the insertion of the deltoid muscle; the elbow at the ob-
cranon; the wrist at the head of the ulna; the ilium over the ante-
rior superior process; the thigh at the lower end of the femoral artery;
and the ham at the inner border.
It will be found in the course of the ensuing statements that the
points of convergences are often found associated with the regions of
markings which contrast with the ground-color. Thus the obeleon
is the site of brown or black spots in the dog; in the same animal
the tan-colored wart is found in black and tan dogs; the centre of
the hyoid bone is also the centre of the gular white or gorget in many
carnivorous and quadrumanous animals; the sternal point is often
white in the horse and dog; the lower end of the back at the sacrum
and coceyx is black or brown in ordinarily parti-colored dogs; the
insertion of the deltoid is the lower end of the epaulette-region which
is frequently of a contrasted color to that of the rest of the limb; the
spot over the head of the ulna is in the line of the fringe of the fore-
leg in the setter-dog and in some lemurs. The nape of the neck, the
root of the nose, the summit of the bladder, the base of the penis,
the olecranon, the anterior prominence of the ilium, the femoral
point and the inner border of the ham are not found associated with
color-marks. These cannot in turn be entirely separated according
to Eschricht from being in the line of union of parts which unite late
in the development of the foetus. A complicated disposition at the
upper lip is held by the same writer to result from the union of the
right and left halves at the median line. Some points, as for exam-
ple the olecranon and the iliac process, answer to bony surfaces
which are near the skin. The femoral point is also the region at
which the long saphenous nerve pierces the fascia. The point on the
86 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
side of the trunk is associated with the naked trunk surfaces of birds,
and the colored area in Indris brevicaudatus. (See infra.)
In men who are notably hairy (the cases of universal hyper-
trichosis are not here included) the hair is chiefly developed on the
breast and the anterior wall] of the abdomen at its upper part,—on the
region over the trapezius muscle near the scapula—and on the lower
part of the loin and the shoulder. In a number of examinations I
have made of hirsute men, I have never found the teeth defective
unless a disposition to universal hypertrichosis was present. This
disposition is shown (in addition to the dental defect) by great shag-
giness and looseness of contour of the eye-brows. They meet across
the inter-orbital space and straggle off toward the temporal side of
the forehead. The best marked of the naked places of the body in
the hirsute men are the forehead, and the side of the trunk. Eschricht
mentions having found but a single example of the trunk being
naked at the side. His observations appear to have been made in
Copenhagen and may perhaps exhibit a national peculiarity. In
America I am sure such naked places are frequently seen. I can
confirm Eshricht’s statement that hirsute individuals usually have
black hair, are of stalwart build and do not of necessity have strong
beards or more than ordinary growths from the head.
An instructive analogy can be detected to exist between the na-
ked surfaces on the sides of the trunk and the great lateral feather-
less spaces (apterylia) of most birds. Above I have invited atten-
tion to the fact that in Indris brevicaudatus' the side of the trunk
possesses hair of a different color from that covering the ventre or
the dorsum.
The literature of the subject of color-marksis scanty. The papers
here given in abstract are of importance.
Th. Eimer? believes the striped forms of the mammalia antedated
the spotted, and the retention of color obey phylogenetic laws. He
traces the markings of Viverra through the varieties of the genus
Canis. Faint traces of the transverse marks of Hyena can be detec-
ted in the wolf. The black spot at the root of the tail is mentioned
as occurring in all dogs. The presence of a dorsal stripe is mentioned
as being commonly present. In vertebrates generally the posterior
parts of the body is more strongly marked than the anterior. This
is evident in mammals though less marked than in the lower classes.
1 American Museum of Natural History at New York, No. 260.
2 Zool. Anzeiger 1882, V. 685; 1883, 690.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 87
The transverse body stripes are the highest form of development of
a body-mark, and succeeds in phylogeny the series of dotted-marks.
This order is the reverse of that suggested by Darwin. _ A paper by
G. T. Rope’ describes two varieties of coloring in the English form
of the domestic cat viz: transverse stripes or rows of dots on a white
ground and white markings of a more or less longitudinal direction
on a black ground.
The following list includes the arrangement of the subject-matter
of the present essay.
1. The “break” from the prevailing or ground color compared
with the positions at which hair is retained in nearly hairless animals.
2. Brindles.
3. The regions in which color-marks are found regularly disposed.
These are: the dorsal line of the trunk; the back of the neck; the
the dorsi-facial line; the ventre and limbs; the ulnar border of the
foreleg ; the axilla and pudenda; the “collar;” the regions of the spe-
cial senses; the sides of the body; the regions of nerve-endings ;
muscle-regions ; regions which are rich in seba and moisture.
4. The effects of age.
5. Bilaterality.
6. Antero-posterior symmetry.
1. THe “BREAK” FROM THE GROUND COLOR, OR PREVALENT
COLOR, COMPARED WITH THE PosITIONS AT WHICH HAIR IS RE-
TAINED IN NEARLESS HAIRLESS ANIMALS.—When an animal of
a single color changes (even in a slight degree) the uniformity of
the tint, the new color will appear in an order definite enough
for the variety, species, and sometimes for the family to which
the animal belongs. A black, gray or chestnut colored dog when
thus changing almost invariably has a white spot appear at one of
the following localities: The tip of the tail,’ the breast, the dorsal
surfaces of the feet, and the tips of the ears. I have observed these
changes in the New Foundland dog, the greyhound, the Irish setter
and the collie. In the sunbear (Ursus malayanus) the prevailing
black is relieved by a crescentie whitish-yellow spot on the breast.
Sarcophilus when varying from its prevalent color exhibits a spot of
white in the same region. Horses having white feet and a white
1 Zoologist, 1881, 353.
» According to Gervais the first white appears at the tip of the tail. G. T.
Rope (Zoologist, 1881, 353) states that where only a very minute portion of white
occurs, it is most likely to be found on the chest.
88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
star on the breast while the remainder of the bodies are dark are
objects of common observation. It cannot be an accidental cireum-
stance that animals that are nearly hairless retain sparse clumps in
the same localities. | Rhinoceros lasiotis is hairless except at the tip
of the tail, the dorsal surfaces of the feet and the tips of the ears.
Rhinoceros indicus shows the same peculiarities to a less marked
extent. In Elephas the tip of tail is similarly furnished. In the
Mexican variety of the so-called hairless dog the same regions named
in Rhinoceros are alone hairy. In another variety the breast is
furnished with an abundant growth of hair. Men, who are more
than usually hairy, yet who do not belong to the group of universal
hypertrichosis, possess hair on the pectoral region, and are apt to
have a sparse growth of hair at the upper margin of the auricle and
a similar but separate line of hair along the posterior border, as well
as a patch on the loin or near the coccyx in the median line of the
trunk.
It may be said that the regions named tend to behave differently
from the prevailing disposition in hair-nutrition. In breaking from
a uniform color these regions present a contrasted color, and the
same regions tend to retain hair which elsewhere for the most part
is lost. .
But it must be acknowledged that in animals which are for th
most part hairless, clumps are seen which do not belong to the above
category. These are discussed under other heads. See hair at june-
tion of limbs to trunk, (p. 94) hairs on dorsal line (p. 89) hair at nerve
ends. (p. 98)
2. Brrypies.—In some animals the break from the prevalent
color assumes another disposition of a widely spread character. I
allude to the plan by which the entire pelt is covered by alternations
of black with brown or chestnut : these embrace the “brindles.” The
wolf (Canis lupus) is often a brindle. Many varieties of dogs e. g.
some of the mastifis and bull dogs are brindles. It is often seen in
the female of the domestic cat. The prevalent color remaining black
the break is seen in dogs to take place to “tan” and to be localized
to the feet to the supra-orbital hair clumps and to the hairy wart on
the side of the face. The prevalent color being white, black spots
are apt to have “tan” margins as is well seen in the fox terrier.
3. THE REGIONS IN WHICH CoLoR-MARKS ARE FOUND REG—
ULARLY DISPosED.—I will now treat of the manner in which the
color of a hue which is contrasted to the prevalent color is apt to
occur along definite lines or regions of the body.
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 89
The Dorsal line of the Trunk. The line of the dorsal spines of the
vertebral column (including the head as far as the parietal foramina,')
is one of the most instructive of these. The black line in the ass
and the horse has especially received the attention of Darwin.
Prof. Jno. Ryder’ detected a dorsal arrangement of hairs in an
embryo of the domesticated cat. It retains the same color in many
carnivores. In the domestic cat two pairs of black stripes are often
found on either side. In domesticated cattle these are supplanted by
awhite line. In piebald rats the stripe is commonly black.
Lemur collaris,* has a prevalent squirrel gray color, while the head
is black and a black spot is seen at the root of the tail on the dorsal
surface. In Propithecus diadema, a conspicuous dorsal line is con-
tinuous with a black sacral region and tail. In Lemur varius® the
same character of dorsal line is seen as in the foregoing animal but
isnot so marked. In the parti-colored Jndris brevicaudatus' the
region of the back of the sacrum is distinguished from the rest of the
fur by being a uniform dull ochreous hue—a hue unlike that met
with in any other region of the body. In Propithecus verreauxi
coquerelit> the dorsum near the lower part of the thorax is marked
by a dark spot, which is in contrast to the surrounding color. The
‘sacrum and loin are of a dirty gray color. In animals which ex-
hibit spots on the line which are in contrast to the prevalent color
the retained colors may be looked upon as persistencies which for
some reason have resisted the forces which have displaced the line
itself Such a view is in harmony with Darwin’s statement? that
dappled and spotted animals were originally striped. One of the
numerous forms of Lemur varius exhibits a white circle at the base
of the tail the prevalent color being light brown. This does not of
necessity correlate with the dark sacral spot. But distinctive kinds
of marking at the root of the tail in the dog are of the same signifi-
1 These are persistent in the human cranium near the sagittal suture a short
distance in advance of the lamdoidal suture.
2 Animals under Domestication pov.
3 Proc. of Acad. of Nat. Sci. 1887, 56.
* American Museum of Natural History at New York.
5 Ibid. No. 263.
6 Ibid. No. 266.
7 Tbid. No. 260.
8 Ibid. No. 973.
9 Animals under domestication I. p. 65.(Eng. Ed.)
i
90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
cance asthe sacral spot. In Didelphys a dark pigment ring encircles
the base of the tail. In roan horses a white ring is occasionally
found which also encircles the base of the tail.
In Thylacinus, Felis manul,' Hyena striata, Myrmecobius, and in some
of the viverrine genera, the line is interrupted and a number of sad-
dle marks are seen which are best marked posteriorly. In the dog
when the black and tan colors are bred out, as in the English setter,,
the bull terrier and the fox terrier, the dorsal line is retained only at
the sacrum and at the root of the tail. It often forms an irregular
mark which may extend upon the flanks. In the “ Chester reds,”
a variety of hog bred in Eastern Pennsylvania, black is persist-
ently bred out, yet a small black spot is commonly found at the sac-
rum. In Phoca fasciata a broad white band crosses the trunk at the
sacral region.
In Cercopithecus diana, the greater part of the dorsal region and
all the sacral region are of a red color which extends downward upon.
the outer surface of the flank.
This disposition is seen in a number of the quadrumana. It ap-
pears to be repeated in many dogs (as already mentioned) in which
a flank mark is continuous with the sacral spot. The mark may be
homologous with the sacral saddle mark of Thylacinus and Felis tigrise
In a colony of piebald rats observed at the Zoological Garden,
Philadelphia, the sacral region was black while the prevalent hue
was white.
I will now attempt to explain the persistence of color marks at the
region of the sacrum and the root of the tail, though the varieties of
the colors themselves are not at present susceptible of demonstration.
In the range of human observation, L. Tait? records the frequent
possesssion—nearly 45 per cent—of a pit, or “sacral dimple,” over
the sacral region in women.
A. Ecker’ describes the frequent appearance of pits or depressions
in the region of the coccyx, in the foetus and in new-born infants.
The spot is associated with various pilose conditions. Max Bartels*
describes a tail-like formation in man from the lower part of the
same region. Virchow’ finds the pilose spots co-ordinated with
1 A. Milne Edwards, Recherches sur les Mammiferes, Paris, 1868 to 1874.
Jae Bile
2 Nature, 1878 XVIII, 481.
3 Archiv. f. Anthropologie, 1880, XII, 129.
4 Ibid, 188], XIII, 1.
5 Zeitschr f. Ethnologie 1875, VII 280.
Be |
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91
occasional deformity of the sacral spinal processes and he ar-
rives at the conclusion that the sacral pilosity is often connected with
attempts at formation of spina bifida. Both Tait and Ecker con-
nect the presence of the sacral depression with the formation of an
exserted tail. I make the suggestion that the retention of white, black,
tan or lemon colored patches at the sacral and lumbar region is an
evidence in tailed quadrupeds of the great activity of nutritive pro-
cesses between the superficies and deep-seated parts. It is but a
step further, and a legitimate step I think, to connect the sacral pig-
ment patches with the subject of sacral tumors which has been so ably
elucidated by R. Middeldorpf.'| This writer traces the congenital
sacral tumors to retention-cysts of the neuro-enteric canal of the em-
bryo, as defined by Kowalensky. The canal is the same as the post-
anal gut of Balfour. It has been identified in Ascidians, Amphioxus,
and in plagiostome and teleostean fishes. Should the retention of
the pigment patch at the superficies of the region where such pro-
found changes are seen to occur be proved to be associated with
minor degrees of interference at the same region, it follows that in
the individuals thus marked, minor changes in the sacral elements,
and possibly in the condition of the lumbar swelling of the spinal
cord, might be sought for.
The Back of the Neck—The region of the back of the neck inclu-
ding the withers is well known to be often furnished with a mane of
long or short hair. It is of interest to note that in a case of trichosis
circumscripta recorded by Virchow’ a distinct pilose growth lay over
the region of the third and fourth cervical vertebree.
As already remarked p. 88 the breast may be hairy in an animal
which in other respects is nearly naked. It remains to mention the
gnu in which form a pendant growth of hair from the same region
is found associated with an animal having short hair—and a long
tail furnished with a terminal brush.
The dorsi-facial Line—The region of the head as far as that of
the parietal foraminal belongs to the trunk while that in front is
distinctive. A white median stripe is commonly found in the region
last named in parti-colored dogs. In some varieties a spot of the
prevalent color lies directly at the beginning of the trunkal region
near the occiput which interrupts the dorsal white line, in the rare
instances of its backward prolongation or may be enclosed by it.
Mephitis may exhibit a white spot on the dorsum of the face especially
1 Virchow’s Archiv 1885, 101, 37.
2 Zeitsch f. Ethnologie VII, 279.
92 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
in the young. Horses commonly show a white mark, the “star,”
in the middle of the forehead between the eyes. In Cercopithecus a
median white spot is often seen on the dorsum of the nose.
The Ventre and Limbs.—The hair of the under part of the trunk
is in all animals less thick than that of the upper and is apt to be of
a lighter shade of color. The color of the ventre is continuous with
the inner sides of the limbs, and with the throat where it is apt to.
pass in Quadrumana to the crown. The account of the color-marks
of the limbs cannot be disassociated from that of the trunk. Thé
hair of the outer surfaces of the limbs extends to the sides and dor-
sum of the trunk and neck, while the inner surfaces extend to the
yentre. “Stockings,” by which term is meant patches of white color
which pass entirely round the manus or pes above the palm or sole,
are exceptions to the rule.
The feet of an animal are liable to be of the same color and this
color to be black or a break from this color to a contrasted one (see
p- 88). In the horse this is notably the case—a bay horse has
black feet or exhibits a break from the black color to white. Both
fore and hind feet of the Thibetan bear, Ailwropus melanoleucus, are
black, the rest of the animal being white, with faint shades of brown.
The fore foot in mammals is apt to a greater degree than is the case
with the hind foot to retain the same color for the arm and the re-
gion of the scapula. This is remarkably well seen in Ai/uropus, in
which form the entire fore limb including the shoulder is black,
while the hind limb and region of pelvis (excepting the foot) is white.
The region of the scapula in many animals is distinctively patterned
as is seen in the tiger (Felis tigris) and the leopard (Felis pardus).
In the dog the prevalent color of the neck and the trunk is rarely
continuous over the region of the scapula, which is usually of the
contrasted color. The spots on the side of the trunk in white dogs
appear to be arrested by the region of the scapula. A post-scapular
spot of an opposed color is commonly seen in dogs.
P. Michelson’ describes cases of trichosis cireumscripta in which
clumps were found above and below the region of the scapula but
not uponit. I have often found similar clumps in hirsutemen. In
the horse and its allies the stripes when sparsely distributed are con-
fined to the region of the scapula or lie in front of it. The region
of the scapula is apt to be white in Pecora. The region of the
shoulder, 7. e. the region of the humero-scapular joint, is separately
1 Virchow’s Archiv. 1883, Vol. C. 66.
]
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 93
marked in a number of diverse forms. In many bats a tuft of white
color distinguishes this region. In the llama, camel and bison
shagey tufts of hair adorn it. Cynocephalus hamadryas exhibits on
both shoulders conspicuous growths of hair which extend back-
ward. In a specimen of Colubus querza’ the shoulder was found
furnished with an epaulet of long white hair. In other examples of
this species the epaulet extends backwards. . B. Ornstein* describes
an instance of trichosis cireumscripta, in an adult man in which a
clump of hair was found on both shoulders.
In Quadrumana the colors of the limbs are apt to be differently dis-
posed from the arrangement in quadrupeds. In Lemur catta the
colors are much like those in lower animals and in all varieties white
stockings may be seen in the fore arm and leg. The inside of the
limb is apt to be of a lighter color than the outer.
With this qualification I think I may say that the outer surface
and anterior surface of the thigh to a point answering to the prox-
imal third or fourth of the tibia is differently colored in Quadrumana
from the leg and the foot. This is noticeable in Indris brevicauda-
tus’ and Propithecus verreauxi-coquereli.*
The manus is commonly’ black in Quadrumana. In Indris brev-
icaudatus® the outer side of the arm is black, while the entire fore-
arm is white.
In the figures of Audebert® the separate color marks of the limbs
often correspond to the regions of manus, fore-arm, arm, pes, leg
and thigh especially for the outer surfaces. From the well known
artistic abilities of Audebert these figures may be accepted as au-
thoritative.’
The ulnar Border of the Foreleg—The ulnar border of the fore-
leg often displays hypernutritive characters. The disposition is not
confined to the mammalia. In this class the growth is most likely
asurvival of the natatorial form of foot and is at best an adaptative
1 Am. Mus. No. 298.
» Arch. f. Anthropologie 1886, 507.
3 Am. Mu. No. 260.
4 Ibid. No. 9738.
5 Ibid. No 260.
6 L’ Histoire Naturelle des Singes, des Makis, et des Galéopithéques, 1800.
7 C. F. Maynard (Quarterly Journ. Boston Zool. Soc., 1883, II, 18) states that
in the variety of bear ( Urses Americanus) met with in Florida ‘‘brownish lines” are
seen “starting from the point of each shoulder and extending down the legs on the
inside.” This disposition is certainly exceptional.
94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
effort to extend a fold of skin from the sides of the limb. A skin-
fold is demonstratable in Menopoma (where it is supplied by a
branch of a nerve) as well as in Emys and its allies. It is the be-
ginning of the hair-covered membrane in the flying squirrel (Sciur-
opterus) and in Belideus; it is enormously displayed in the bat.
The long fringe on the ulnar border of the fore-arm in the setter
dog may be named as an example of its occurrence in a terrestrial
mammal.
The fold corresponding to it is not so evident in the hind leg—
where it would naturally be sought for on the inner border. The
line of feathers seen in some varieties of the pigeon and of the domes-
tic fowl on the outer border of the leg may be associated with a
similar proclivity to that above named.
In a ease of trichosis cireumscripta recorded by B. Ornstein’ in an
adult male a growth of hairs was found on the ulnar border of the
fore-arm of both sides.
In some species of Quadrumana the hair of the arm and the fore-
arm inclines toward the elbow. Wallace’ and Darwin® describe this
arrangement in connection with the use made of it by the animal in
shedding the water falling upon the flexed limb. That the hair in
Hylobates agilis should be directed toward the wrist is evidently an
aberrant arrangement if we are to follow the distribution of the
lanugo as outlined by Eschricht and Voigt.
A marked instance of growth of the hair from ulnar border of the
fore-arm and the corresponding border of the arm is met with in
Propithecus verreauxti-coquerelii* A long brilliant fringe of orange
and white colors equals in width the arm at its greatest diameter.
The Avilla and Pudenda—The presence of hair in the axilla and
pudenda in man is not without interest in connection with the pilose
regions of the newly born infant. It will be noticed that both Esch-
richt and Voigt separated the pudenda and the entire perineum from
the rest of the body.
In Lemur varius’ the prevalent color being a light brown the per-
ineum is black. The axilla is often of the same color as the inside
of the entire fore-leg in Indris brevicaudatus.
1 Arch. f. Anthropologie, 1866, 507.
On Natural Selection, 344.
3 On Descent of Man. Am. Ed. I. 185.
4 Am. Mus. No. 973.
Ibid. No. 268.
Ibid. No. 260.
i)
Oo
a
a Et
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 95
It would appear that retention of hair at both junction of the fore
and hind leg with the body is in someway connected with se-
cretion and with retention of heat at these localities. (See p. 9+.)
The black stripe which is well defined in many examples of Lemur
varius may extend as far as the patella or a little distal of that bone.
-In the case of the child exhibiting circumscribed trichosis reported
by H. Ranke' a large pilose patch occurred at the front ot the pa-
tella and the upper part of the leg to its distal side. Two small
patches were found in line with the front of the thigh.
The position of the pilose marks above mentioned can be consist-
ently placed in the same category as the thigh marks in the lemurs.
The Collar—The region of the head is distinguished in some of
the more specialized mammals by a transverse band extending from
the vertex down over or near the auricle (commonly in front of this
appendage) and is variously dispersed on the neck. It is an inter-
esting region since it affords some of the most striking superficial
color-marks of the Quadrumana and is the probable precursor of the
hair of the crown of the head and of the beard in man.
In the figures of Eschricht’s and Voigt’s papers on the lanugo al-
ready quoted, the outlines of the region of the color are clearly deter-
mined.
In many species of Quadrumana the region of the vertex of the head
to near the occiput, the auricle, the region below the auricle and the
throat and submaxillary regions are white. This disposition is con-
spicuous in Hylobates lar.2 In Colobus guereza, the prevalent color
being black, a white color is disposed as above and extends down
the neck to the clavicle. In Colobus vellerosus the collar is white
and includes the gular region. In Cercopithecus diana, the white
collar is interrupted by black at the side; the chin is furnished with
a white goatee. The prevalent color is a squirrel gray. In Cebus
hypoleucus the collar is continuous down the neck and is continuous
with the white scapular region and with the outside of the arm to a
little below the elbow. The prevalent color is black.
In Lemur varius’ the ears, retromaxillary region and the neck
uniting the head lines, are white. In Lemur albifrons* a white band
extends from the white crown over the head and thence to the
neck.
1 Archiv. f. Anthropologie, 1883, 339, XIV.
2 American Museum of Natural History, No. 953.
3 Ibid. No. 266
4 Ibid. No. 275.
96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
In Lemur catta’ the prevalent color being squirrel gray, the white
color between the eyes unites with the color round the eyes and
thence passes to the front of the neck. In another individual of the
-same species (No. 268) the crown remains black, while the rest of
the collar is white. In Phoca fasciata a white band encircles the
head and neck at the region of the auricle.
It will be seen from these examples that the color of the vertex
which may be defined as the crown of the head, excepting the mar-
gin near the occiput, is often white; that this color tends to pass:
down over the region of the ear to the neck, where it may unite
with the white of the ventre and embrace more or less of the arm.
With the exception of Phoca fasciata I have not met with this color
mark outside of the Quadrumana. Within the group last named
the band appears to be homologous with the hair of the crown and
the whiskers of the human subject. In the Saki the color is black
in this region and inclines forward to the submandibular growth
or the beard proper.
The abruptness of termination of the white patch on the crown as.
it approaches the occiput, appears to relate to the limitation of
baldness of the human subject, and explains the common retention
of hair at the line of the occiput. The occiput is under the control
of the causes which maintain the body color as distinct from that of
the rest of the head.
The Regions of the Special Senses—In addition to the dorsi-facial
stripe in the carnivores and the “collar,” the mammalian head dis-
plays a very noteworthy feature in the retention of a contrasting
color to the prevalent one of the body, about the nostrils, the eye-
lids and the auricles. Such a style of coloration is typically rep-
resented in Ailuropus melanoleucus, in which form the body color is.
a dull white. According to Darwin’ the Himalayan rabbit at birth is
white, but in the course of a few months it gradually assumes dark
eyes, nose, feet and tail. The cireumpalpebral black is found in many
animals when the ear is imperfectly pigmented, as in Didelphys and
Solenodon. In Nycticebus javanicus the circle is brown. In Nyeti-
pithecus and Loris the two circumpalpebral circles unite in a median
dorsal line. In Nasua the circle is white. In Cercopithecus aethiops,
C. collaris and C. fuliginosus the eye-lids are white. In many dogs.
which are otherwise black or black and tan—a conspicuous black
1 Am. Mus. Nat. Hist. 270.
2 Animals under Domestication I, 109.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 97
patch surrounds one eye and includes one or both ears. Such are fox
terriers, bull terriers and bull dogs. The two patches of cireumpal-
pebral black may interrupt the dorsi-facial white stripe as is seen
occasionally in the beagle.
Both the eyelids and the auricle may be included inthe same patch
of black as is seen in many dogs especially in pointers. The same
is noticed in the Japanese dog. This disposition leads the observer
to note that the same black patch may extend still farther backward
and be found on the sides of the body. A typical example of such
an atrangement is seen in Myrmecophaga jubata. In Myrmecobius
the circle extends backward in a stripe. I have seen asimilar stripe
in the Scotch collie. In Procyon the patch is for the most part in-
fra-orbital and extends backward to include the ear. In one of the
many varieties of Mephitis the ear and auricle are included ina
line of black, while the rest of the head is furnished with white lon-
gitudinal stripes; more commonly, however, the entire head is black
except a jugal stripe which is white and extends down on the sides
of the trunk but inclining toward the dorsum as in Myrmecophaga.
When the auricle is black the tip may be furnished with a pencil of
white hairs which suggest the reversion to the plan of coloration de-
scribed on page 88.
The region of the nostrils or the muzzle is pigmented black in
most mammals an exception being found in the Quadrumana as in
Semnopithecus nasalis.
It is interesting to find that in the bull terrier the black may dis-
appear in whole or in part from the muzzle.
The special organs containing as they do black pigment often ap-
pear to determine retention points of the same color at the periphery.
The breaks in the cireumpalpebral color determine the disappear-
ance of the color from the region in hairless animals excepting the
brow where it is apparently caused by the presence at that point of
the circumorbital wart. The eyebrow in man isin reality a stripe
which tends to pass backward in obedience to the tendency of the
stripe in animals generally.
But the direction taken by the eyebrow is not a guide to all the
transitions in the form of the black about the eyes. 00625 “
22 230 .“ 0.0588 “
23 200 “ 00588 “
24 225...“ 00714 “
25 260. “ 0:0769 *
sears iG see en OU mes y igs) AeA IO 9 cage Dp:
25 25
10Op. cit. Band II, S. 250.
112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Sciatic NERVE.
25 25
|
Observation. Magnetic Deflection. Electro Motive Force. aq
1 25 div. of scale. 0:0277 D. |
2 1548 0:0212 “ .
3 5 00217. .
4 ae ee 002722
5 SO acs 00333. “
6 3) UN 070333. ¢ ;
7 Uf Ge 0:0333 “ . |
8 gg « 00333 « S|
9 A) * 00200 “ 5
10 a 0-0208 “
a has 0°0208 “
i? DG: 3 1:0180 “ t
13 Vie 00181 “ :
14 26 « 0:0256 “ .
15 ee 00250 “
16 18, & 0:°0185 “ i
oar 19,°s 00185 “
18 pA ees 0:0185 “
2 7d ge 0:0294 “
20 Ady * 00181 “ i
| 1855 00200 “ /
22 | aa 00250 “
23 th is 00192)
24 20 « 0-0263 « |
25° eas 00270 “ |
mean 033 __ O14 05948 _ 0-0937 D. .
|
Proc.Acad.Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888. etl
VW right on New Uniones.
:
*
j
|
Proc Acad.Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888.
/T1 éht on New Uniones.
Pe
Wright on New Uniones.
q
> @ a: hieue
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888. eA.
Wright on New Uniones.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES OF UNIONES FROM FLORIDA.
BY BERLIN HART WRIGHT, PENN YAN, N. Y.
Unio Fryanus. Plate I, fig. 1.
Shell elliptical, very smooth, very inequilateral, substance of the
shell thin, inflated in the umbonial region, beaks projecting very
slightly beyond the hinge line, ligament short, thin and light brown.
Epidermis yellowish red and covered with bright green rays which
are so thickly set upon the upper portion of the shell as to give that
part, a bright green color: the young are of a bright shining green
over the entire surface, the green being interrupted by heavy lines
of growth of a light red color. Ligamental margin sub-angular
before and slightly arched, posterior margin disposed to be slightly
bi-angular and quite uniformly rounded above, anterior margin
abruptly rounded; basal margin uniformly rounded; cardinal and
lateral teeth double in the left and single in the right valves, the
cardinal teeth short, oblique stout and crenulate, lateral teeth slightly
and uniformly curved, dorsal cicatrices deep and slightly posterior
to the cavity of the beak, anterior cicatrices slightly impressed and
distinct. Nacre quite uniformly purplish.
Diameter .60. Length 1.00. Breadth, 1.75 inches.
Habitat. Lake Ashby, Volusia County, Florida.
Mus. Acad. Nat. Sciences. Phila. Newcomb Coll., Cornell Univ.
National Museum.
Remarks. This species is highly polished, and the young are
rich in lustrous rays. The strongest affinity is with U. sparus Lea.
It approaches U. fuscatus Lea, but is thicker through the umbonial
elevation, and the umbos are farther forward, and its valves thicker,
heavier, and not so flat. The dorsal view showsit isenlarged anteriorly,
while that of fuscatus is not so. It can not be mistaken for U. per-
lucens or U. micans Lea. Abundant on the muddy bottom of the
outlet of Lake Ashby, Volusia Co. Fla.
Named for Mr. T. Marshall Fry, of Syracuse, N. Y. who is an
enthusiastic collector and student of the Unionide.
Unio Websterii Plate II, fig. 2.
Shell oblong, inequilateral, considerably inflated, rounded at the
sides, surface roughened by numerous obtuse irregular lines of
growth, substance of the shell thin, ligamental margin moderately
arcuate and rather short, posterior margin slightly biangular, liga-
114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
mental area narrow, umbonial slope subangular, anterior margin
projecting and uniformly rounded, basal margin slightly and uni-
formly curved. Epidermis reddish, interrupted by coarse, distant
radiating lines of a blackish color. Greatest length near the
middle of the shell, beaks eroded and ornamented with three to
five radiating elevations. Umbos broad and rounded: nacre delicate
flesh color to pink, usually clear, rarely mottled with waxy spots;
cardinal teeth disposed to be double in both valves, slender, ob-
lique, long and delicately crenulate, lateral teeth long and heavy,
curved; cavity of the beak deep and rounded, cavity of the shell
deep, and occasionally the surface is interrupted with undulating
ridges near the anterior portion of the cavity; dorsal cicatrices
forming a continuous line extending from the base of the posterior
eardinal tooth backward for one half inch and directly under
the edge of the roof to the beak cavity; anterior cicatrices small,
the superior one undermining the anterior portion of the cardinal
tooth, posterior cicatrices confluent.
Diameter 13. Length 2.50. Breadth 44 inches.
Habitat. Lake Woodruff, Volusia Co. Florida.
Mus. Acad. Nat. Sciences. _ Newcomb Coll., Cornell Univ. Na-
tional Museum.
Remarks. This is the largest Unio yet found in Florida waters.
Its place is between U. Savannahensis Lea and U. Mecklenburgensis
Lea. It is more inflated than the former, thinner, has more promi-
nent and narrower beaks, higher and more rounded umbos, deeper
and smaller anterior cicatrices and the teeth are lighter.
We are pleased to name this species after our botanical friend
Mr. Buchard Webster of Lake Helen, Florida, who, with his father,
often made our collecting trips more pleasant.
Unio Waltoni. Plate IT, fig. 3.
Shell compressed on the posterior slope, transversely elongated,
very inequilateral; valves rather thin, beaks not prominent and
eroded; epidermis brownish black, apparently rayless, valves ante-
riorly rounded and oblique upward and sharply angled above, obtusely
rounded behind; cardinal teeth nodulous, small, complex and serra-
ted; lateral teeth lamellar and slightly curved upwards; nacre purple.
Basal margin very much excurvated.
Diameter 1.00. Length 1.50. Breadth 4 inches.
Habitat. Lake Woodruff, Volusia Co., Florida,
Mus. Acad. Nat. Sei. Newcomb Coll. Nat. Mus.
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115
Remarks. This species has the general form of U. Emmonsii Lea,
and is more in affinity with that species, than with U. Shepherdianus
Lea. The former is a much heavier species, and with coarse heavy
teeth. U. Shepherdianus Lea, is deeply emarginate on its basal
margin, and the sides of its valves are very much constricted ob-
liquely from its projecting umbos down, while U. Waltoni, is very con-
vex in its basal margin and its umbos not projecting, and its anterior
end very obliquely rounded, instead of evenly rounded, and a thin
shell. It can not be confounded with U. perlatus, Lea, though the
obliquity of the anterior end is muchalikein both. Itis with much
pleasure that we name this curious species, after Mr. John Walton,
a zealous and working conchologist, and artist of Rochester N. Y.
Unio Dorei. Plate ITI, fig. 1,
Shell ovate, heavy; polished, rayless; epidermis reddish, with
brownish colored elevations or growth-ridges; beaks blunt and mas-
sive, dorsal margin very broad, short and slightly arched; posterior
margin quite straight; Umbonial angle sharp and supplemented by
two parallel elevations which are more or less broken by undulations;
basal margin slightly rounded, anterior margin truncate and angu-
lated above; cardinal teeth with a tendency to being double in both
valves, very massive, smoothish; lateral teeth very long, heavy and
uniformly curved; nacre a rich salmon color; cavity of the beaks
almost wanting: of the shell considerable. Named for Mr. H. E.
Dore, and enthusiastic collector of mollusca of Portland Oregon.
Diameter 1.25. Length 1.6. Breadth 2.60 inches.
Habitat. Wake Monroe, Florida.
Mus. Acad. Sciences ; Coll. B. H. Wright.
Remarks. The affinity of this species is with U. Conasaugaensis
Lea, but the teeth differ, the umbos of the latter are not so broad
and blunt, and are farther from the anterior end, and has a white
nacre. There is much disparity between it and U. Bucklyi Lea.
Unio Averellii. Plate ITI, fig. 3.
Shell obovate, thin, fragile, slightly inflated, inequilateral, smooth,
polished, interrupted by numerous green capillary rays arranged in
fascicles which are narrowest at the anterior end of the shell, and broad-
en gradually until near the umbonial angle where they merge together,
giving the posterior portion of the shell a dark green color; epider-
mis yellowish; beaks flattened, rather blunt, slightly and coarsely
undulated; dorsal margin nearly straight; ligament short, horn
colored, thin; anterior margin short and gracefully rounded; posterior
116 . PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
margin bluntly rounded, basal margin with a tendency to emargina-
tion in old females; quite uniformly curved in males; greatest
diameter near the middle of the ligament, greatest length at posteri-
or end of dorsal line; cardinal teeth double in both valves, compress-
ed, very oblique, crenulate, the anterior tooth in the right valve is
much the smaller, as is the posterior one of the left valve; lateral
teeth single in the right and double in the left valve, curved and
slender; nacre light purple and spoted with a few dark-waxy spots;
dorsal cicatrices two to four and in a diagonal row from the base of
the anterior cardinal tooth across the centre of the cavity of the
beak, anterior cicatrices distinct and well impressed.
Diameter .8. Length 1.2. Breadth 2% inches.
Habitat. Lake Ashby, Volusia County, Florida.
Museum Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Newcomb Coll., Cornell Univ.
Nat. Museum.
Remarks. 'Tnis delicate species, is possibly related to U. papyra-
ceus Gould. But Dr. Gould in his description of that species, says
that “it resembles Anodonta Couperiana Lea, in shape, delicacy and
even color.”
But there is nothing in U. Averellii to remind one of An. Couperi-
ana Lea. It has the outline of U. occultus Lea, but its affinity is
with U. rutilans Lea, but differs in being very thin, almost paper-
like, less blunt at each end, and without a depressed area at the
anterior ligament. Named for Mr. Wm. D. Averell publisher of
the Conchologist’s Exchange, of Philadelphia, Pa.
Unio Nolani. Plate IV, fig. 1.
Shell wide, smooth, rather thick, beautifully polished throughout,
and entirely covered with heavy greenish rays; epidermis yellowish
and often olivaceous; dorsal margin arcuate, anterior margin grace-
fully and perfectly rounded, basal margin subemarginate, posterior
margin uniformly rounded from the end of the ligament to the base
with no tendency to biangulation; umbonial angle flatly rounded;
umbonial slope flattened, depressed in the middle; beaks small,
pointed, undulated, and rather prominent; cavity of the shell small ;
cardinal teeth heavy, erect, grooved, double in the left and single in
the right valve; lateral teeth curved, heavy and much roughened ;
nacre beautiful pink and iridescent.
Diameter .9 Length 1.5. Breadth 3 inches.
Mus. Acad. Nat. Sciences. My own cabinet.
Habitat: A creek flowing into St. John’s River, near Palatka, Fla.
ee .
al
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 117
Remarks. This beautiful shell was found by Mr. J. B. Upson
several years ago. Its affinity is with U. corneus Lea, and with U.
Postellii Lea. From the latter it differsin not having a striated and
sealy epidermis, and in not having thick, but con:pressed cardinal
teeth. The former has much heavier teeth, the groove of the lateral
teeth being shorter and much farther from the cardinal teeth, and
the beaks farther from the anterior end, and the post-ligamental area
much more conspicuous. It can not be taken for U. planilateris
Con. which has a stramineus epidermis.
We name this peculiar species for Dr. Edw. J. Nolan, Librarian
to the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.
Unio Hinkleyi. Plate IV, fig. 2.
Shell oblong, trapezoidal, attenuated and pointed behind, smooth,
slightly inflated, and often flatish; rather thin, polished above.
Epidermis black, thickly covered with brown, indistinct fine rays,
visible with transmitted light. Posterior margin subemarginate,
raised into a compressed wing. Anterior margin rounded and slightly
oblique. Dorsal margin a slightly arched curve. Basal margin
slightly convex. Umbonial slope raised and obtusely rounded.
Cardinal teeth compressed, thin, very oblique and grooved, double
in both valves. Lateral teeth very long, slender and undulating,
nearly straight. Dorsal cicatrices four or more in one or two
rows. Nacre pinkish, and iridescent. Umbonial region broad and
blunt, very slightly projecting, but often deep.
Diameter 1.00. Length 1.50. Breadth 3.00.
Habitat. Wake Monroe, Florida.
Mus. Acad. Nat. Sciences. National Museum.
Remarks. In outline this species is similar to that of U. declivis
Say, but its black epidermis, its pinkish or purplish nacre, readily
distinguishes it from that species.
It is dedicated to Mr. A. A. Hinkley, of Dubois Illinois, an ac-
tive collector of Unionide.
Unio Simpsoni. Plate V, fig. 1.
Shell oblong-ovate, pointed behind, and often very slightly unci-
nate below the point, inequilateral, remarkably smooth and polished.
Valves thin, slightly inflated, and rarely with a few coarse, perpen-
dicular, impressed grooves near the centre. Sometimes the valves
are very flat. Ligamental margin higher behind, and straight
or slightly arched. Posterior slope biangular below, straight or
118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
slightly emarginate, and raised into a distinct and angled carina,
which is thin and compressed. Ligamental area often with several
small plice. The posterior end is generally sharply compressed
above and below, giving it a lance-shaped and ancipital appearance.
Umbonial ridge depressed, narrow, and rounded. Anterior margin
rounded and slightly oblique, basal margin convex. Epidermis
yellowish-brown or olive colored, or even bright green, with slender
green rays in uneven fascicles, or rayless and reddish-brown all over.
Umbos very much flattened, and beaks very small and pointed, hav-
ing a few concentric folds. Cavity of the beaks nearly obsolete.
Dorsal cicatrices small and deep. Cardinal teeth oblique and very
small.. Lateral teeth long, thin, undulated and nearly straight.
Nacre salmon or purple, or both mixed. Shell darker behind and
at the base.
Diameter .75. Length 1.12. Breadth 2.30 inches.
Habitat. Lake Woodruff, Volusia Co., Florida.
Mus. Acad. Nat. Sciences. Cornell University. National Mus.
Remarks. The left beak is often shorter than the other. Its affin-
ity is with U. viridicatus Lea, which has much larger cavities under
the beaks, the lateral teeth coarser and not undulating and the an-
terior end not obliquely rounded, and is not rayed. It cannot be
mistaken for U. Jayanus Lea. We have great pleasure in dedica-
ting this species to Mr. Charles T. Simpson of Ogallala, Nebraska,
who has done very much in studying the mollusea of Florida.
Unio Marshii. Plate V, fig. 2.
Shell somewhat narrow-elliptical, transverse, ventricuse and very
inequilateral, smooth, incremental lines close and slightly raised.
Substance of the shell rather thin, and of very uniform thickness ;
swollen in the umbonial region; umbonial slope rounded ; posterior
slope compressed and rounded; dorsal margin nearly straight; an-
terior margin abruptly rounded ; basal margin much excurvate and
slightly constricted near the posterior extremity; posterior margin
bluntly rounded and emarginate above; turned up, raised into a
very small, depressed, and thin carina. Beaks blunt, broad, with-
out concentric undulations but possessing three or four raised, radiat-
ing lines; epidermis remarkably thin, reddish brown below and green-
ish above, indistinctly and closely rayed over the anterior portion, and
very dark or black on the posterior slope; nacre, a beautiful salmon
varying to purple; cardinal teeth compressed, erect, striate, very
oblique and disposed to be double in both valves; lateral teeth long,
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119
solid and curved; dorsal cicatrices four, well impressed and situated
under the base of the anterior end of the lateral teeth which continue
almost to the cardinal teeth.
Diameter 1.5. Length 2.00. Breadth 3% inches.
Habitat. Lake Woodruff, Volusia Co., Florida.
Mus. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Coll. of Berlin H. Wright and
Mr. W. A. Marsh, Aledo, Ilinois.
Remarks. This species, though belonging to the Buckleyi group,
has specific characters distinguishing it from U. Buckleyi Lea; the
adult is very excurvate on the basal margin, has a very smooth and
polished epidermis, filled with obscure rays, the anterior end being
directed obliquely upwards, characters not pertaining to adult U.
Buckleyi. The symmetry of the dorsal and basal curves is peculiar,
being in this character like the same curves of U. symmetricus Lea.
Its affinity is with U. Buddianus Lea, differing in the teeth and
other characters. Dedicated to Mr. Wm. A. Marsh, of Aledo Illinois,
an amateur of the Unionidae.
Unio Dallii. Plate VI, fig. 1.
Shell ovate, pointed and flattened behind, the point being directed
downward, in an uncinate manner. Polished above, and lustreless
below, valves not thick, thicker before, epidermis black, rayless,
with numerous striz of scaly plicze below the umbonial region. Lig-
amental margin much arched, with an angle at each end. Posterior
margin usually slightly and evenly convex. Basal margin emar-
ginate near the posterior end, anterior margin nearly truncated, or
abruptly rounded. | Umbonial slope very depressed, obtuse and
scarcely carinate, and the sides of the valves are decidedly flattened
just forward of the umbonial slope. Greatest diameter in the mid-
dle of the shell. Umbos broad and flattened, obtuse, projecting,
and very much eroded. Sides with numerous close coarse lines of
growth. Nacre salmon or pink, varying to copper color, iridescent
and usually with wax-colored spots, which often are confluent and
cover the interior. Cavity of the shell, and of the beaks shallow.
Lateral teeth long, heavy and much curved. Cardinal teeth coarse,
deep, divergent. Anterior cicatrices distinct, the larger are deep.
Posterior cicatrices confluent, well impressed. The type specimen
is about two-thirds the full size.
Diameter 1.00. Length 13. Breadth 23 inches.
Habitat. Wake Beresford, Volusia Co., Florida.
Mus. Acad. Nat. Sciences. Newcomb Coll. National Museum.
120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Remarks. There is an affinity of this species with U. venustus
Lea, but is more compressed behind and is larger. It has been
largely distributed as U. Buckleyi, thus causing much confusion as
to what the latter really is. U. Buckleyi Lea, is more pointed be-
hind, not uncinate there nor emarginate on the basal margin. Its
umbos are farther forward and less elevated. Its greatest diameter
as well as greatest length, is just behind the beaks, while in U. Dalle
the greatest leneth is through the summit of the umbos.
It is named for Mr. W. H. Dall of the Smithsonian Institution.
Unio Tryoni. Plate VI, fig. 2. -
Shell wide, narrow-elliptical, compressed posteriorly, thin, polished
above. Umbos slightly elevated, the beaks being close to the ante-
rior end, and in the young undulated ; epidermis brownish or grayish
black, raised into numerous fine scaly strize, roughish, rayless, or with
some capillary obscure rays near the centre of the valves. Dorsal
margin straight, posterior margin bluntly rounded or truncate, and
triangular ; often subemarginate above, basal margin slightly convex,
anterior margin broadly rounded. Cardinal teeth of the left valve
are long, erect and widely separated to receive the single wide tooth
of the right valve. The anterior tooth is shorter and less pointed
than the posterior one, and the latter is curved upward. Lateral
teeth very long, rather slender and nearly straight. Nacre livid or
light salmon colored and often with several dark-brown circular
spots. Cavity of the beaks very shallow.
Diameter 1.25. Length 1.75. Breadth 4 inches.
Habitat. Lake Woodruff, Volusia Co., Florida, near De Leon
Springs.
Mus. Acad. Nat. Sciences. Newcomb Collection. National Mus.
Remarks. This species is much thinner and lighter than U. Oc-
mulgeensis Lea, with which there is the affinity of outline. It is
much narrower than U. Buddianus Lea, and its cardinal teeth are
not oblique as in the latter. It is lighter, more rounded before and
more attenuated behind, and has a much shorter hinge line. Some
forms of it approach U. Jayanus Lea.
It gives us much pleasure to dedicate this species to the late Mr.
George W. Tryon Jr., author of “ Manual of Conchology” and other
conchological works.
‘
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121
Marcu 6,
Mr. Toomas MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair.
Twenty-nine persons present.
Action of Hydrofluoric Acid on a Sphere of Quartz—Dr. Orro
MryYER reported an experiment, which he had undertaken in con-
nection with Mr. Sam’]. L. Penfield. A sphere of quartz was sub-
jected to the action of hydrofluoric acid for more than two months.
The acid dissolved the quartz, principally in the direction of the
main axis and thus flattened the sphere. In the direction of the
lateral axes the etching action proceeded with much less activity and
at three places on the periphery the acid had not eaten away any of
the material, but left the original surface of the sphere intact. These
three places were situated at one end of each of the lateral axes, the
result being a triangular dise. This experiment shows that a mineral
may be soluble in a liquid in certain directions and on certain planes
while at the same time insoluble in other directions and on other
planes. Dr. Meyer exhibited the result, the object resembling a
three cornered Jens.—A more detailed account will be given else-
where.
Remarks on the Phylogeny of the Lamellibranchiata—Dr. BEn-
JAMIN SHARP brought forward some points regarding the classifica-
tion of the Lamellibranchiata, and stated that in considering this
group, a diversity of type was to be found that is equal to, if not
greater than that found in any class of the animal kingdom, with
the possible exception of the Hexipoda.
In examining the different forms, he pointed out two well marked
extremes, Ostrea and Aspergillum. In the former as is well known,
the two large unequal shells entirely cover the body, and they are
closed by one large muscle, the adductor. The large and important
organ, so common in the Lamellibranchiata generally, the foot, is
entirely absent. The mantle edges are separated for nearly their
whole extent, and there is no indication whatever of the mantle
uniting to form a siphon.
In Aspergillum, on the other hand, the two shells are so diminu-
tive, that they only cover an exceedingly small area of the animal’s
body, the siphon is enormously developed, and it is protected by a
secretion of carbonate of lime, in which the shells are immovably
embedded; the mantle is closed throughout its entire length, except
at the anterior end, where there is a minute opening, and at the
mouths of the two siphonal tubes.
His object in making the communication was to prove that these
two very marked and different types of Lamellibranchiata arose
122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888_
from a common or what might be called a central type, and that a
divergence from some cause set in, producing on one side the Ostrea,
and on the other the Aspergil/um.
As regards the whole class, he said there is no doubt, in his mind
at least, that it isa degenerate one. Many anatomical and embryolog-
ical facts, as well as their life habits, point to this, it being an acknow-
ledged fact that fixed or stationary animals are as a rule degenerate.
The loss of the head in all adult forms, the presence of eyes in the
head area of some free swimming embryos, and their later total dis-
appearence, are some facts that point unquestionably to the degenerate:
condition of the whole group.
As to the facts of geology pointing to this conclusion, he quoted
from Prof. Heilprin’s work on the “Distribution of Animals,” p. 265.
“Almost everywhere, the Cephalophora, or head-bearing mollusks,
antedate by one full period the Acephala, or headless forms, which
indisputably represent a lower grade of organism.” By considering
the group as degenerate, the conditions of the case are answered, for
the Lamellibranchiata certainly came off from the Gastropoda, after
the latter had become well established, as the anatomical and embry-
ological facts show, and the geological evidence would seem to
indicate this to be the case.
Assuming then, that the Lamellibranchiata have come off from
the Gastropoda, Dr. Sharp then considered what was the form of the
primitive type. It probably had a more or less developed foot, an
organ that is present in all the Gastropoda, that it possessed gills on
each side of the foot, that the mantle edges were separate and that
two adductors were present of about equal size. This type has sur-
vived to the present day and, according to Lankaster (Art. Mollusca,
Brit. Encl. p. 685), is represented by forms like Nucula and Trigo-
nia. The former belongs to the family Arcidae (Claus) which
is the oldest type that we know of, being found in the Silurian and
Devonian. The shells of this family are equal; the adductor mus-
cles of the same size, the mantle free, not being closed to form
tubes like a siphon, foot well developed. The fulcrum of the shell
is about equi-distant from the adductors. In following one branch
from this toward Ostrea, it is found that one muscle, the anterior,
gradually gets smaller, as is the case in Mytilis, and exceedingly
small in Pinna, until in Ostrea but one muscle is present. From
the fact that in this advance the animal becomes more and more
fixed first by a secretion of the foot, the byssus, then by the shell it-
self, the foot gradually is less and less used as an organ of locomo-
tion, until it entirely disappears in Ostrea. The retractor muscles of
the foot, now practically useless organs, are however, still present.
The loss of one adductor muscle can probably be referred to me-
chanical causes. In studying the change of relation of the fulerum
to the adductors, he found that as the fulcrum moved forward (an-
teriorly ) it increased the distance from the posterior, and lessened the
the distance from the anterior muscle. As this took place, the muscle
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 113
farthest from the fulerum was always the larger, in fact it must of
necessity be so, as more power was needed at this point, while the
near one, from the fact that it does not require much power, dimin-
ishes in size. In Pinna, one muscle is very much, in fact four or
five times, larger than the other; the smaller being close to the apex
of the shell, in other words, close to the fulcrum,
As the fulcrum passes still farther forward, a point is soon reached
when both muscles come in line with the fulcrum, the larger one in
this case takes all the work from the smaller one, which from its now
useless position degenerates to disappearance.
A proceedure from regular to irregular shell is to be seen in the
fresh water forms. Unio, he held, is probably a fresh water Mytilis,
which does not have any byssus present in the adult, but has one in
the embryo. =
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. WF
varied from pale green to dark brown, and were laid in such a way
as to indicate that one straw had been used up before another was
sought for the building. There were a hundred and twenty pieces
in the structure, the lower small end being open as well as the upper.
The house was lined with a brown silk cocoon, upon which the straws
were very tightly and evenly cemented.
Hoping to see the method in which the creature worked, she re-
moved from the upper portion of the truncate inverted cone, half a
whorl of its straws, put the larva back, closed its house, put it under
a wire screen, on a plate of tender rose leaves, and stuck through the
screen several dry, small stalks of grass. The active and shy larva
would never emerge from its domicile when she was looking at it,
but she managed to surprise it at its work so many times as to make
sure of its method. The holes made in the rose leaves indicated that
they furnished food for the worker. The dry straw was drawn into
such a position that its end could be laid upon the house, and
cemented, with silken lining, into its place at the upper, enlarging
end of the spiral layers. When laid and fastened, the lower end
being exactly in line with previously laid stalks, the upper end was
made by biting off the straw in the line of the upper edge of the
structure. Thirteen new straws were thus laid on to replace what
she had violently removed, and, after two weeks of active life under
the wire screen, the larva closed the upper aperture (its front door
and place of egress) by fastening it with a veil of silk, to the top of
the screen, from which it hung suspended. She did not perceive that
it had ever voluntarily departed from its house, though its head and
thorax often projected beyond its front door. By the small lower
aperture refuse was cast out. This specimen died without having
reached its metamorphosis.
JUNE 12.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Fifteen persons present.
JUNE 19.
Mr. CHarues Morris, in the chair.
Thirteen persons present.
The following papers were presented for publication :—
“Observations on the Female Generative Apparatus of Hyxna
erocuta.” By Henry C. Chapman M. D.
“ A new Fossil Spider, Eoatypus Woodwardii.” By Rev. Henry
C. McCook, D. D.
178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
The deaths were announced of S. Fisher Corlies and Rachel L.
Bodley, M. D., members, on the 15th and 15th inst. respectively.
JUNE 26.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Forty persons present.
A paper entitled “Nesting habits of the American Purseweb
Spider.’ By Rey. Henry C. McCook, D. D., was presented for pub-
lication.
The death of Dr. J. L. Ludlow, a member, on the 21st. inst. was
announced.
Mr. Wm. W. Jefferis was elected a member of the Council, to fill
the vacancy caused by the death of Mr. 8. Fisher Corlies.
Mr. Benjamin P. Wilson was elected a member.
Mr. John Donnell Smith of Baltimore was elected a correspondent.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179
DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF ETHEOSTOMA (E. LONGIMANA)
FROM JAMES RIVER, VIRGINIA.
BY DAVID STARR JORDAN.
Subgenus IMOSTOMA, Jordan.
Head 4 in length to base of caudal: depth 5. D. IX or X,—
12 or 13. A. II, 8; scales 6-43-7. Type No. 24619. Mus. Comp.
Zool. ; 8 specimens, the largest 24 inches long.
Body moderately elongate, not much compressed; head rather
long, somewhat blunt anteriorly, convex above the eyes, profile of
the snout steep and nearly straight; premaxillaries protractile;
lower jaw included; maxillaries reaching front of orbit, about as
long as eye which is 4 in head, and about as long as snout; teeth
rather strong; gill membranes very slightly connected ; cheeks nearly
or quite naked; opercles with some scales.
Lateral line complete; scales rather large; nape naked; belly
naked anteriorly, with ordinary scales posteriorly. Pectorals ex-
tremely long, reaching front of anal, about 12 times as long as head;
ventrals long, but not reaching tips of pectorals. Dorsal spines
high, the longest 14 in head; soft dorsal very high, 175 in head; anal
rather large, but smaller than soft dorsal; anal spines small, the
first longest; caudal subtruncate.
Color in spirits, olivaceous; traces of about 5 dark cross-shades
which extend on the dorsal fin; fins nearly plain, the spinous dorsal
somewhat mottled; snout and suborbital with some dusky; a dark
spot at base of caudal.
The types of this interesting species were taken by Professor
Baird, about 1855, in a tributary of the James River, Virginia.
They were found by me in the Museum of Comparative Zoology,
bearing the Mss. name (from Professor Agassiz or Prof. Putnam,)
of Cottogaster longimanus.
180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
ON THE GENERIC NAME OF THE TUNNY.
BY DAVID STARR JORDAN.
In the first edition of the Régne Animal, 1817, pp. 313, 314, the
generic names, Thynnus and Orcynus, were proposed for the Tun-
nies. The former name was given to the short-finned tunnies, type
Scomber thynnus L., and the latter to the species with long, ribbon-
shaped pectorals, type Scomber germo Lac.—Scomber alatunga (al-
alonga) Gmelin.
It has been generally agreed that these two groups are generically
identical. Many European writers have continued to use the name
Thynnus for both, although this name was much earlier preempted,
by Fabricius, for a genus of Insects.
The name Orcynus is however also preoccupied having been pro-
posed by Rafinesque in 1815, in his worthless “Analyse de la Nature,”
as a substitute for Scombroides Lacépéde.
According to current rules of nomenclature, the group of Tunnies
is left without a tenable generic name. I therefore propose the name
Albacora, for the group of which Scomber thynnus is the type, this
species being with others, widely known as Albacore. The subgenus
or genus distinguished by the elongate pectorals may be called Germo,
its types being Sc. alalonga Gmelin.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181
ON THE FORMATION OF ROCK-SALT BEDS AND MOTHER-
LIQUOR SALTS.
BY DR. CARL OCHSENIUS.
As is well known that ocean-water, from which all primitive rock-
salt masses have been formed, contains on the average 33 % fixed 1.
e. saline constituents, of which 2} % is sodium chloride, the remain-
der consisting of magnesium compounds, calcium sulphate, potassium
chloride, sodium bromide and small quantities of boron, iodine and
lithium salis, as well as traces of every other element, of which indeed
there exists one or the other compound, soluble in water and much
more so in salt-water.
The open sea precipitates no salt, but in bays partially cut off
from it, a deposition can take place under certain circumstances, in
such a way that gypsum forms the base, and anhydrite the upper-
most layer of the salt deposit; this is plainly seen in every large
rock-salt bed. In considering the mode of formation of such deposits
we are met on all sides by three questions, which hitherto have re-
mained somewhat inexplicable:—1st the absence of fossils in the
salt, whilst the neighbouring rocks often contain them well preserved
and in abundance, 2nd the small quantities of easily soluble mag-
nesium and potassium salts, though they were contained in the sea-
water, and 35rd the replacement of these latter by one of the most
insoluble constituents, viz. sulphate of lime in the form of a cap of
anhydrite, the so-called Anhydrithut. These facts can, however, be
explained, if we take a hydrographical element, viz. the bar, into
account in the process of formation. When a nearly horizontally
running bar cuts off a bay from the sea, so that only as much sea-
water runs in over it as is compensated by evaporation from the
surface of the lagoon, and the so partially separated portion receives
no large additions of fresh—, 7. e. rain or running water a deposition
of salt takes place in the way to be described.
In such a bay the following phenomena may be observed :—The
sea-water running in evaporates, and by the amount of salt it adds,
the solid constituents of the bay are continually increased. The
upper sheets of water, warmed by the sun, sink as they get specific-
ally heavier from the larger amount of salt, and in the course of time,
a vertical circulation setting in, the whole aqueous contents become
182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
enriched in saline matter and rise in temperature.’ The greater
part of the deliquescent magnesium salts however remains in the
upper layers, while chloride of sodium is found preponderating below.
As the saltness increases, organisms pcssessing free locomotive
power, are compelled to seek a new habitat and make their escape
into the open sea against the currents and waves sweeping over the
bar; those without free movement die off and generally leave only
indistinct remains in the strata, which are next deposited. The
formation of the latter commences with the precipitation of oxide of
iron and carbonate of lime, as soon as the concentration has pro-
ceeded so far as to double the amount of saline matter in the lagoon
and then ceases until the solution contains five times as much salts,
when a second layer of carbonate of lime settles, this being brought
about by a double decomposition between the soda and gypsum held
in solution in producing calcium carbonate and sodium sulphate.
At the same time gypsum begins to deposit and constitutes the basis
proper. As soon as the saline solution has increased its weight of
salts eleven times, its specific gravity reaches 1°22 and the precipita-
tion of chloride of sodium begins in the form of the well know foliated
crystalline masses, accompanied by some calcium sulphate ete., added
from the sea-water running in.
Though generally speaking the sediments follow in reverse order
of their solubilities, as Usiglio * has shown in his exhaustive experi-
ments, it often happens that small quantities of easily soluble salts
are mechanically included in the others; thus magnesium sulphate
is frequently found contaminating rock-salt, and especially there,
where clayey mud washed in, and was deposited at the same time.
Then again some substances, only scantily represented in sea-water,
remain longer in solution than we should be led to expect from labo-
1 By this interchange of heat downwards the constant temperature of 14C°. toa
depth of 4000 meters in the Mediterranean can be accounted for, the high barrier
at the Straits of Gibraltar cutting this sea off from the Atlantic; westwards of the
entrance to the Mediterranean on the other hand, we find extending to the same
depth, an icy temperature of 0° to 40°. Accordingly deep sea currents rich in
chloride of sodium flow from the Mediterranean into the Atlantic as well as the
Black Sea, and are compensated by return surface currents. As a result of this
circulation, the surface water of the Mediterranean is rich in magnesium salts,
whilst the Black Sea, analogous to the Baltic, does not contain ocean-water diluted
with fresh-water as one might at first be led to expect from the great influx of river-
water, but shows a preponderating amount of sodium chloride.
2 Ann, Chim. et Phys. 27, 172.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183
ratory experiments. This is especially the case with borates, magne-
sium borate in particular, as well as with silica and titanic acid. As
the depositing process continues, the greater part of the deliquescent
salts remains dissolved in the upper layers and constitutes the mother-
liquors (Mutterlaugen), which contain, along with sodium chloride,
the potassium and magnesium compounds ete. Wehavethen in the
mother-liquors above the rock-salt, approximately arranged in order
of solubility: sulphate of magnesium, chloride of potassium, chloride
of magnesium, borates, bromides, lithium salts, an iodine compound
probably magnesium iodide, and calcium chloride. In the course
of the continued growth of the rock-salt beds and likewise of the
mother-liquors, the latter attain the level of the bar and commence
flowing out seawards directly over it, as soon as their specific gravity
can overcome the current of the inflowing sea-water. After this
stage is reached, ordinary sea-water can only have access through
the upper portion of the bar-mouth, the lower part being occupied
by the outgoing mother-liquors.
At this point the last stage of the process begins viz., the deposition
of the uppermost bed of sulphate of calcium in the form of the
Anhydrithut. Portions of the concentrated mother-liquors get mixed
with surface-water washed in, and this, from the increased amount
of the hygroscopic chlorides of magnesium and calcium, lessens the
superficial evaporation of the bay, and hence the influx of sea water
diminishes gradually. The sulphate of lime in the sea-water that
has flown in, is now precipitated, the other salts mixing with the
mother-liquors and flowing out with them over the bar. As the
gypsum falls through the concentrated mother-liquors, its water of
combination gets abstracted, and a seam of anhydrite is by degrees
deposited. Sometimes a compound is formed of gypsum with the
sulphates of magnesium and potassium (the latter by double decom-
position of sulphate of magnesium and chloride of potassium) viz.,
polyhalite, a mineral occurring in the upper strata of many salt
deposits. The bay meanwhile assumes the character of a bitter-lake
and influences the surrounding shores, the organisms inhabiting the
littoral waters dying off, and the neighboring rock disintegrating to
dust, which is blown into the lake, forming the material for the
salt-clay ; this offers a good explanation for the increased thickness
of salt-clay seams often observed in the upper layers of salt deposits.
"A regular succession of these briefly described phenomena will
rarely be found in nature. Every alteration in height of the bar,
184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
resulting from storms and other disturbances, naturally affects the .
precipitations about to take place, by accelerating or retarding them,
or even redissolving some of the layers already in situ. In some
eases where the Anhydrithut was never formed, the bar not having
retained its original height long enough, the salt-clay plays the
part of protecting covering ; however, even under these circumstances
the resulting series of deposits are so characterised as to point clearly
to their mode of origin.
Salt beds deposited from aqueous solutions under the above-named
conditions, are found in all geological epochs as far back as the
Archean rocks; this is shown by the super-position of Silurian strata
to the salt in Salt Range in India. The existence of primitive salt
beds points conclusively to the presence of shores, 7. e., terra firma,
at the time of formation. At the present day the first of the above
stated agents is found in operation in several localities on the East
coast of the Caspian, especially in the great bay of Adschi Darja,
whose narrow mouth, Karaboghaz (“black abyss”), is partially cut
off from the Caspian by a bar. The bay is one of the saltiest of this
inland sea, and receives no supplies of water at all from the land,
only its evaporation being balanced by a corresponding influx of
sea-water. Under these circumstances no animal can live in the
Adschi Darja waters, and the bottom is covered with a layer of salt
of unknown thickness ; in a specimen of this deposit dredged up by
Abich, the latter found gypsum intermixed with rock-salt. C.
Schmidt* in 1876, found no trace of potassium in the salt bed of
Karaboghaz. On the other hand the water contained in 100 parts :—
8°33 sodium chloride
1:00 potassium chloride
12°94 magnesium chloride
02 magnesium bromide
619 magnesium sulphate, etc.,
in all 28°50 per cent. of salts; this composition is nearly identical
with that found by Usiglio in mother-liquors, when they give off no
more water at the ordinary temperature. Similar conditions have
been noticed at Tjuk-Karagan, Mertwy-Kultuk and Karassee, Kras-
norvodosk, etc. The Caspian then gives up its chloride of sodium
to the salt-pans on its east coast and in return receives only mother-
liquors, accounting for the character of the water in the principal ba-
sin, which contains less salt than the ocean, but much more mague-
* J. Roth, Chem. Geol. I, 467.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185
slum compounds, and hence causes a degeneration in the marine
fauna and flora on the East coast. The Oxus (Amu Darja), which
two centuries ago poured its waters into Adschi Darja prevented a
deposition of salt there, but since sand-storms have diverted this
stream into the Aral, the change of the Caspian into a bitter-lake
has been accelerated by the formation of sand-bars along the East-
coast bays, which are converted into salt-pans.
The above description of the processes now being carried out on
the East coast of the Caspian will suffice to illustrate the origin of all
rock-salt deposits, from the Silurian down to the present era, and
further, the occurrence in each of gypsum, as basis and the Anhydrite-
cap with salt-clay as cover. Fossils are hardly ever present, and
mother-liquor salts rarely in large amounts.
To go back to the time when the first signs of the anhydrite-cap
make their appearance, we find that an increase in altitude of the
bar, sufficient to cut off the influx of sea-water, causes the mother-
liquors to stagnate and under favorable conditions of temperature to
solidify. Such a process has taken place in the EKgeln-Stassfurt ba-
sin, and in some other localities of the old North-German Permian
salt-sea. The potassium and magnesium salts, together with boron
and bromine compounds, have crystallized out and been exception-
ally well protected against re-solution by a clay seam impermeable
to water. There are to be seen lying on a rock-salt bed many hun-
_ dred yards thick, consecutive zones of carnallite, kieserite and poly-
halite; the latter generally encloses the sulphate of lime, which was
still contained in the waters of the bay at the time of the closing in
by the bar, magnesium sulphate occurs especially in the second, and
in the zone of carnallite are found the chlorides of magnesium and
potassium, borates and magnesium calcium bromide (brom-car-
nallite). Calcium chloride is also met with in certain minerals,
such as tachhydrite ete., and in some cases undergoes in presence of
magnesium sulphate a double decomposition, calcium sulphate and
magnesium chloride being formed.
The total quantity of chloride of magnesium occurring in the
Stassfurt beds does not correspond to the normal amount; portions
of this substance must have made their exit over the bar with the
lithium and iodine salts, or have been absorbed by the upper beds
(N. B. lithium is found in the salt-clays above, but not iodine) or
were carried away in solution later on. Hence the succession of
mother-liquor salts in Stassfurt is not quite complete; on the other
13
186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
hand the saltpetre fields of Tarapacd and Atacama in Chile, now
resting on lower levels to those of the original salt-pans, afford an
example of an entire series of beds. In the recpeuing of the bar in
the Stassfurt basin, the process of salt deposition came again into
operation above the stratum of clay protecting the mother-liquor or
Abraum-salts ; this is proved by the occurrence of an upper salt bed,
with anhydrite-cap ete.
The lowest division of the whole series there, though the name
does not correspond very well, is known as the Anhydritregion, or
zone of anhydrite, on account of thin parallel bands of sulphate of
lime transversing it at regular intervals; they are called annual rings
(Fahresringe), bnt cannot be explained by the direct influence of
the seasons, e. g. in winter, because they are not found in other salt
deposits, which have been formed under similar climatic conditions.
It is more probable that a process, similar to that in the deposition
of the second lot of calcium carbonate of Usiglio, has taken place in
their formation. Some agent or other, related to that, which caused
the conversion of gypsum and soda into carbonate of lime and sul-
phate of soda, must also have been at work here. Most likely the de-
composition took place at first gradually, whereas towards the end
it was rapid, from which can be explained the “ rings” being ramified
below and level above. Local peculiarities may also have been the
cause, for instance, periodic supplies of water coming from the land,
but it was certainly not of a purely climatic nature. This might
be a probable explanation for the exceptional case of Stassfurt de-
posits, where the mother-liquors were dried up above the salt beds
proper and not afterwards removed by external agencies.
As the process of filling up of a salt-pan with gypsum, rock-salt,
anhydrite and salt-clay has proceeded so far that the anhydrite-cap
reaches the height of the bar, the latter deposit naturally retains
cavities and irregularities in its surface, occupied by fiuid residues
of mother-liquors. These residues must often have been pretty consider-
able, and they represent a most important geological agency; for
rock-salt formations can only occur on the sea-coast, and it is here
that volcanic action has its sway, so that we often find the neptunis-
tic and volcanic forces cooperating. Through displacement in the
beds, the residual mother-liquors are set free and flow to lower levels,
where on reaching an impervious stratum they collect and form a
salt-lake; or if brought to the surface again appear as brine and
mineral springs more or less removed from the original source.
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187
During their flow or collection the sulphates often separate from
the chlorides; borates, once precipitated, remain so, and give rise to
suffiont; carbonic acid decomposes saline solutions more or less, but
chloride of sodium is scarcely ever entirely absent, and boron, iodine,
bromine and lithium are represented by traces. On account of this
remarkable action of carbonic acid on mother-liquor salts, the min-
erals accompanying trona thermonatrite etc., must be principally
sodium compounds, (chloride, sulphate, borate, silicate etc.) the car-
bonates of calcium and magnesium being separated out as fairly
insoluble precipitates. The carbonates of the alkalis decompose
silicates of lime in the rocks around forming carbonate of lime and
silicates of sodium and potassium as intermediate products, which
easily undergo decomposition, silica thereby being separated out in
the hydrated state: allowed to remain in contact with animal det-
ritus, saltpetre is produced ; magnesium chloride and sulphate con-
vert limestone into dolomite and certain silicates to serpentine; the
sulphates of magnesium and lime also are often decomposed by cer-
tain organisms, giving rise to sulphuretted-hydrogen and a separation
of sulphur ; lastly magnesium chloride dissolves all metallic com-
pounds, and even gold, hence mother-liquors with or without the
aid of water impregnated with carbonic acid, must have played a
great part in the deposition of most of our ores, by dissolving out the
metals contained in the different rocks around and concentrating
the same in cavities of various kinds.
As the bituminous matter contained in brine-springs doubtless is
a product of decomposition of organic substances met by the mother-
liquors on their way, so the origin of petroleum, which is always
intimately connected with salt districts, can be accounted for by the
sudden destructive action of an overflow of mother-liquors over a
rich marine fauna and flora, the accompanying mud serving to shut
off access of air from the cadaverous remains, and the presence of
some chloride of aluminum enabling the formation of all the repre-
sentatives of the hydrocarbon series from the small particles of
anthracite occurring in lodes, to the masses of volatile hydrocarbons
of the vast oil districts. In short, in most littoral districts of past
and present oceans, from the depths of our mines to the summits of
the mountains, which ocean-water has not reached, but where mother-
liquor residues have been transported, do we find tangible proofs of
the remarkable effects of which mother-liquors have been the primary
cause,
188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF OCINEBRA.
BY JOHN FORD.
Ocinebra Michaeli, Ford.
Shell fusiform, rather slender, turreted, light gray, with a narrow
median brown band; whorls 5, convex, shouldered above, the upper
ones carinate; sculptured with numerous rather coarse revolving
lirations, the interstices with riblets bearing crowded festooned
lamelle of growth, which are also prominent below the sutures ;
longitudinally prominently plicate, with about seven folds to each
whorl; aperture oval, white within, angular above; anterior canal
quite Jong, open, straight; outer lip thickened within, bearing six
small tubercles; columeila nearly straight; with a whitish callus
5
BE
projecting slightly at beginning of canal. Length of shell 16, diam.
8 mill. Length of aperture 9 mill. Hab., Cayucos, San Luis Obispo
Co., California. Differs from O. interfossa Cpr., in having open canal.
O. subangulata Stearns, is somewhat related, but is much longer,
ess angulated, aperture more rounded and without the internal
tubercles shown by O. Michaeli. So far as can be learned, this small,
but distinct species, has been found only by Mr. Geo. W. Michael,
Jr., after whom it is deservedly named ; the gentleman being not only
an efficient collector, but a careful student of science also. About
forty specimens have been secured alive by him at the locality
mentioned, which is the only one known at present.
ay
2 —————EEEEEEEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeeEeEeEeEeEeeEeEeEeEeeEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEeO —_
rc
U.
yaena &
on hy
O
a
a
ee
SiGue
¢
i
Nap
at.
Paalal
rb
Ses
T
\
(
\
N
lees
len@eeeac Nat sei: mila:
Na eremennevinwenrenm
pman on Hyaena Ec.
‘gala
Rom
Va
JL ter)
{
{
\
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189
OBSERVATIONS ON THE FEMALE GENERATIVE APPARATUS OF
HYZNA CROCUTA.
BY HENRY C. CHAPMAN, M. D.
The Hyzena, as well known, was regarded by many of the ancients
as being a hermaphrodite. Thus Aelian’ observes “if you see a
male hyzena one year the next year you will see a female, if now
truly a female, afterwards a male, for it partakes of both sexes,”
while according to Pliny’ “the vulgar believe that the hyzena is of
both natures and are on alternate years male and female, and bring
forth without a male.” The same opinion appears also to prevail
to a considerable extent even at the present day among the natives
and settlers in South Africa. Like many other popular opinions
and superstitions the view of the sexes being united in the same in-
dividual in the hyzena is based to a certain extent upon fact, as in
one species at least, the Hyena crocuta, or spotted hyena, the
male and female individuals resemble each other so closely that
naturalists as well as animal dealers and showmen find it impossible,
without dissection, to distinguish one sex from the other. Such
being the case it might naturally have been supposed that the at-
tention of anatomists would long since have been called to the con-
sideration of the generative apparatus in Hyena crocuta, especially
as in the other two species and Hyena striata, Hyena brunnea,
the disposition of the generative apparatus is normal. It is only,
however, within recent years that it was shown by Prof. Watson
of Manchester, England, that in the female of Hyena crocuta
the uterus passes directly without an intervening vagina into the
urethra to form a uro-genital canal which, perforating the clitoris,
offers a passage-way, not only for the urine but also for the
foetus. Such a disposition would naturally suggest without dissec-
tion the idea of the animal being a hermaphrodite—especially as
not only are the vulva and vagina entirely absent, (Plates IX
and X), but there are present in addition to the large and well de-
veloped clitoris two projections below the anus simulating a condition
1 Hyaenam si videas uno quidem anno marem altero videbis foeminam, si vero
nunc foeminam, postea marem, utruisque enim sexas particeps est. Claudii Aeliani,
De Animalium natura. Ludguni, 1616, Lib. 1, Cap. xxv.
* Hyzenis utraqua esse natura et altenus annis mares alteris foemias fieri,
parere sine mare vulgus credit. C. Plinii Secundi Naturalis Historic. Venetiis
1559, Lib. viii, Cap. xxx.
190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
of the scrotum, obtaining in many of the carnivora. As my dis-
section of the female generative apparatus of Hyawna crocuta that
recently died at the Philadelphia Zoological Garden agrees in
every respect’ with that of Prof. Watson, and as the description of
the parts given by that anatomist is excellent, my dwelling further
upon the same in detail apart from confirmation, would be super-
fluous. I will limit myself therefore, rather to the consideration
of how such an extraordinary disposition of generative appara-
tus might be brought about and to pointing out its significance in
the determination of the homologous parts of the male and female
generative organs of the mammalia generally. It is well known
that at an extremely early period of intra-uterine life, about six
weeks, for example, in the case of the human embryo, (Plate XI,
fig. 2.) the sex is undistinguishable, ovaries or testicles are undevel-
oped, the Mullerian and Wolffian ducts, bladder and rectum ter-
minate in a common receptacle or cloaca, while no external gener-
ative organs are observable. As the development of the mammal
advances, however, the rectum and bladder separate and open by
distinct openings, the anus and urethra, the cloacal condition being
retained through life only in Ornithorynchus and Echidna, the
Wolffian ducts become the vasa deferentia, the Mullerian ducts
atrophying, supposing the individual to become a male or the
Wolffian ducts atrophying and the Mullerian ducts become trans-
formed into Fallopian tubes, uterus and vagina, supposing the indi-
vidual to become a female, the two bodies up to this moment, indif-
ferent functionally, becoming testicles or ovaries respectively—the
testicles usually in time descending into a scrotum, the urethra
passing through the penis. It is well known that in the female
of certain shrews, moles and lemurs and, as recently observed by the
author in the South American hare, Capromys pilorides, (Plate XI,
fig. 1.) the urethra passes through the clitoris as through the penis
in the male of these animals. The fact of the clitoris being traversed
by the urethra in the of female Hyena crocuta is, therefore, not such
an uncommon condition as at first sight it might appear and confirms
the view held by morphologists of the clitoris being the homologue
of the penis. Indeed the clitoris only differs from the penis in being
smaller and in the fact that the labia minora do not unite under-
neath the urethra in the middle line to form what would correspond
1 Tt need hardly be mentioned that the contracted kidney and dilated ureter,
the latter due to impacted calculi, observable in my dissection, are pathological
conditions.
1888. NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA 191
i >]
to the skin on the under surface of the penis. It has already been
mentioned that an early stage in the development of the mammalian
embryo the rectum, bladder, Mullerian ducts (the latter in the female
becoming the vagina and uterus) pass into the cloaca, and that as
development advances the rectum separates from the cloaca, open-
ing by the anus. With a still further advance in development the
uterus separates from the uro-genital canal and opens by a distinct
eanal, the vagina, the bladder opening through the urethra. While
such is the normal order of development of the female generative
apparatus in the mammalia, it may be readily conceived that, should
the development be arrested at the stage in which the uterus and the
bladder still pass together into a uro-genital sinus and should the
latter traverse the clitoris in the same manner as the urethra does in
the case of Capromys ete., a disposition precisely similar to that found
by Prof. Watson and the author, in the female of Hyena crocuta
would result. Ifthe above view be admitted, then the peculiar ar-
rangement of the female generative apparatus in Hyena erocuta
may be regarded as due to an arrest of development. One of the
most remarkable peculiarities of the female generative apparatus of
Hyena crocuta, to which we have hitherto only incidentally alluded,
is the entire absence of a vagina, the uterus passing directly into
the urogenital canal in which respect the animal differs from
all other mammalia, except perhaps the elephant. In the latter an-
imal in both the Indian and African species, as observed by the
author’ a long and capacious urogenital canal leads into the bladder
on the one hand and on the other into a cavity which the author
regarded either as corresponding to a vagina or to the neck of
the uterus, this cavity leading in turn into the body of the uterus.
Should the latter view be accepted, that is if the cavity in question be
regarded morphologically as uterine, then the vagina would be ab-
sent in the elephant, as it is without doubt in the hyzena. In con-
clusion it may be mentioned that the fact of the vagina being undoubt-
edly absent in Hyena crocuta and probably also in the elephant
settles definitely, at least for these animals, the question as to whether
the utriculus or sinus pocularis of the male should be regarded as
the homologue of the uterus or the vagina of the female, since if the
vagina be absent in the female hyzena and elephant the utriculus of
the male of these animals must necessarily be homologous with the
uterus of the female.
1 On the Placenta and female generative apparatus of the Elephant. Journal
of Acad. of Nat. Sci. of Philad., n. s. VIII p. 413.
192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
JULY 3!
Mr. Toomas MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair.
Ten persons present.
Note on Mazapilite, a new species—Prof. Gro. A. KoEntG an-
nounced the occurrence of this mineral at Zacatecas, Mexico, in the
mineral district of Mazapil. The crystals are well developed in
all directions. They are of orthorhombic symmetry exhibiting a
flat prism in combination with a brachy dome anda pyramid. The
color is deep brown red, nearly black, but transparent at the edges.
The hardness is nearly 7, its streak greenish yellow. The specific
gravity 3°567. In closed tube a white crystalline sublimate is pro-
duced (As* O *) and water, while the powder turns dark brown.
B. B. fuses at 3 to a black globule. On charcoal the odor of arsenic
is observed. With borax only iron reaction. Easily soluble in
in warm HCl. A preliminary analysis proves the mineral to be
a calcium ferric arsenite. The structural formula must be made the
subject of a more thorough investigation, which the speaker pro-
poses to carry out in the fall. This mineral is the first representa-
tive of the class of pure arsenites in nature and is therefore of mark-
ed interest. For the material the author is indebted to the indefat-
igable zeal of Dr. F. A. Foote, who is now in Mexico.
The following was ordered to be printed :—
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 193
DESCRIPTIVE NOTES OF NEW AMERICAN SPECIES OF
ORB-WEAVING SPIDERS.
BY HENRY C. MCCOOK, D. D.
Epeira gemma. n. sp.
1. (Fig. 1.) This is one of the largest orbweavers of the Pacific
coast, and is found from San Diego northward as far as Victoria,
British Columbia. The species varies a good deal in size and mark-
ings, but the largest adult female (a gravid specimen) measures
over 20 mm. in length. The abdomen
is 15°5 mm. long; the base of the abdo-
men is crowned with two large conical
processes. The markings upon the abdo-
men are as follows: The forepart which
rises quite abruptly from the cephalotho-
rax is of a blackish brown color, inter-
spersed at irregular periods with yellow
spots. Along the median line extends a
narrow band of yellow, upon which are
placed two angular or lance head mark-
ings, the first of which is placed about
the middle of the basal part, and the sec-
BUGS 1 >
Epeira gemma, female, x 2, Ond near the crest. This band continues
more or less regularly along the dorsum to the apex. About
the middle of the dorsum is a shield-shaped figure with scol-
loped edges, blackish brown in color for the most part, though in-
terrupted by yellow lines of a herring-bone pattern. A narrow
yellow border encompasses the shield. The color of the abdomen is
yellow, and this color extends to the posterior half of the abdom-
inal processes, the anterior half of the same being darkish brown.
Dark brown waving and interrupted lines extend along the sides,
and between these are small round spots, which are distributed
laterally along the sides with more or less regularity. A brownish
band extends along the ventral part of the abdomen from the spin-
nerets to the epigynum, bordered on either side by a yellowish band
and with two short parallel yellowish longitudinal lines drawn equi-
distant between these two.
The epigynum is comparatively small, and between and slightly
bent over the dark lateral lobes is a short flat flap; it is thickened
194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
on the edges and viewed from the front, the tip is somewhat hooded.
2) (See fig. 2.) A broad central patch marks
the sternum, and the tongue and mandibles are
tipped with yellow.
The cephalothorax is about 5 mm. long; is
rather small as compared with the immense ab-
domen, and is marked with two broad yellowish
< bands extending along the sides and broadening
~ over the dorsum. The head is a brownish color.
The legs are marked strongly with annuli.
Be seaiee Epigynum ‘Their respective lengths are as follows: 1st
ay ae ON ele a pair, 23 mm.; 2d pair, 21:25 mm.; 3d pair,
14:75 mm.; 4th pair, 21°25 mm. The spider makes a large circular
web of the usual character of the group of Angulata, to which it
belongs, and rests in a nest of rolled leaves or dome shaped rubbish
placed on the upper side of its snare. The cocoon is a round flossy
ball of a darkish yellow color, about three-fourths of an inch in di-
ameter. A number of cocoons sent tome by Mrs. C. K. Smith from
San Diego, California, were found during the month of April to con-
tain well developed young spiders. These spiders are of a quite
uniform light yellow color, with a brown, well marked shield-shaped
figure upon the dorsum of the abdomen, which is without the conical
prominences that characterize the adult. Several of these cocoons
were hung in an arbor upon the Ist of May, and the spiderlings im-
mediately issued therefrom in great numbers, following the usual
habit of their kind to ascend for a considerable distance, and then
gather in small clumps or balls closely packed together. It is no-
ticable that the spiders from the various cocoons mingled together
without any hostility, climbed together the various bridge lines
which immediately issued from the spinnerets, and snugged together
in balled groups under the leaves, as though they all belonged to one
brood. The month being cold and very rainy, they remained thus
clustered throughout the entire month, and were not fully dispersed
until the first week in June.
Specimens received from Mrs. Rosa Smith Eigenmann, and Mr.
Charles R. Orcutt.
Epeira bicentennaria, n. sp.
2. (Fig. 3.) In the summer of 1882 I found in north-western
Ohio and in the Alleghany mountains of Pennsylvania, specimens
of a species apparently new, which I named Epeira bicentennaria.
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195
This spider I Sevan in a verbal communication to the Academy of
Fic. 3
ypeira bicemtennaria, female, species in the Adirondack mountains of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. The speci-
mens were found in nests of rolled leaves,
after the manner of Epeira insularis and
kindred spiders, and were attached by a taut
trapline to the centre of its adjoining snare.
Thespecimens then obtained were not mature
and on the appearance of Mr. Emerton’s de-
scriptions of New England Epeiroids I con-
cluded that my species was identical with his
Epeira silvatica, which it greatly resembles in
external form. © Subsequently, I received a
number of adult specimens from Professor
Peckham of Milwaukee, Wisconsin, collected
by him in that state, and thereafter, (1886)
I myself collected a number of the same
New York, in the neighborhood of the Saranac lakes and elsewhere.
Fic. 4. Epigynum
A study of these led me to conclude that these .ex-
amples differ from E. silvatica. 'The species is 15 mm.
in length; is distinguished by two processes on either
side of the dorsum of the abdomen at the base. The
markings are not unlike those of Epeira silvatica,
but the epigynum of the female, differs from that
of Epeira silvatica. organ as represented by Emerton.* This is shown
Fic. 5. Epigynum of
E. bicentennaria, lower
figure side view; upper,
view from the front
above.
by a comparison of Fig. 4, with Fig. 5. This
appears to indicate a specific, or at least, a varietal
difference between .the two animals. According
to Emerton in adult females of si/vatica “the under
side of the abdomen is dark brown without mark-
ings;” but the adults of bicentennaria have a
yellow lunette on each side of the venter below
the gills, and a yellow circular patch on each side
of the median line, both at the middle and at the
spinnerets. The abdomen is somewhat triangular
in shape. The breadth at the base is a little less than the length ;
the color is a yellowish gray with brownish markings. On the
basal part is a yellow mark, often assuming the shape of a lyre
* See Emerton, “‘ New England Spiders of the Family Epeiridae.” Trans,
Conn. Acad. Vol. vi 1884, Pl. xxxv, fig. 6.
196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 1888.
or the letter “U.” A shield-shaped figure with scolloped edges occu-
pies the middle of the dorsum. On each side is a broad, light un-
dulating band, with five or six foliz of unequal length. See fig. 3.
The cephalothorax is 5mm. long; is smooth and marked by brown-
ish bands along the sides and middle. The legs are strongly annu-
lated with brown rings about the joints and also in the middle of
the thigh, tibia and metatarsus. Length: Ist pair, 22°5 mm.; 2nd
pair, 21:75 mm.; 3rd pair, 16 mm.; 4th pair, 20°5 mm.
Epeira vertebrata, n. sp.
3. A number of specimens of both sexes and various ages of this
spider have been received from Mrs. Rosa Smith Eigenmann, San
Diego, California, at which point the species seems to be abundant,
and indeed is distributed to some extent northward along the Pacifie
coast. The specimens include two forms, which are very distinct
in their shades and coloring, one form being darker than the other,
so dark indeed, that some examples seem quite black.
Female. (Fig. 6.) Length of body, ab-
domen, 11 mm.; cephalothorax 45 mm.
The abdomen is of a yellowish brown col-
or; a V-shaped whitish figure opening pos-
teriorly, extends from the cephalothorax to
the crest of the abdomen. The margins of
this figure are broad and irregular. A series
of irregular white spots extends across the
base and around the sides which are marked
by three rather regular rows of black spots.
The V-shaped figure is followed by a shorter
similar figure, and this again by three circu-
lar patches of diminishing size, the whole
series terminating near the apex with a tri-
angular patch. The whole median line of
Fic. 6. Epeira vertebrata
Rennie ener ieee oe the abdomen from cephalothorax to abdo-
men is thus marked by this series of distinct figures which are
broken through the centre and along the line by a scolloped band
of yellowish brown color. At regular intervals on each side of
these vertebre-like median markings, are circular and triangular
patches of a whitish yellow color. The outlines of the whitish
patches are marked by strong lines of rosy brown hue. The
abdomen is strongly reticulated and the whole appearance is
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 197
very beautiful. Underneath the abdomen, between the spinnerets
and the epigynum are three broken patches of whitish yellow color,
enclosing a dark brown band.
The epigynum is marked by a hooked process or finger, hollowed
like a spoon at the tip. On the anterior side, the stem or base of the
finger rises from a white circular cushion that extends beyond the
body. The end of the process is black, slightly
tipped with yellow, and the base is yellowish
brown in color. (See Fig.7.) The sternum is
shield-shaped, of a blackish brown color, with
a broad yellow lance-head figure in the middle.
Slight processes on either side of this band
mark the points at which the legs are inserted.
The cephalothorax is a yellowish brown color,
marked by bands of brown on either side, and
Fic. 7 Epigynum of . ‘
Bis, vertebrata: a narrow band along the median line to the
summit of the caput. The head is a very little depressed and nar-
rows towards the face. The palps and legs are of the same color as
the cephalothorax ; the legs somewhat darker, and with dark brown
rings at the ends of the joints. Length, 1st pair, 23°5 mm.; 2nd
pair, 21°25 mm.; 3rd pair, 1455 mm.; 4th pair, 23.5 mm.
Male: length of abdomen 7 mm.; cephalothorax, 4°75 mm.
The male differs very little in length, and in
the general character of the markings from the
female. The herring-bone or vertebrate figures
along the median line of the abdomen are com-
monly more closely united than in the female.
The waving marks along the side are less bro-
ken and of a duller color. The general color
of the abdomen is gray, with the central mark-
ings of a whitish yellow. The abdomen and
legs are a yellowish brown color. The cephalo-
Fic. 9. Epeira vertebrata, : x
male. 3. thorax is broad, the caput narrowing towards
the face: the central band of lighter color quite
broad. Length of legs, Ist pair 24.5 mm.; 2nd
) pair, 21:75 mm.; 3rd pair, 15°5 mm.; 4th pair,
{® 205mm. The tibia of the second pair of legs
Bic. 19. Male palpsof ig slightly curved, and is armed on the lower
and inside part with strong rows of thick black spines.
198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
The dark variety of this species resembles in
the markings of the abdomen the lighter variety.
the abdomen, however, in the specimens pos-
sessed by me, appears to be of a more uniform
oval shape throughout. The colors of the ab-
domen are black, with yellow markings. On
either side are two broad broken bands of cir-
cular and irregular waving figures, which meet
in front and at the apex. The cephalothorax
and the legs are of a dark reddish brown or even
blackish. The bands on the cephalothorax are
also quite black, as are the tips of the palps.
This may be the normal color of the female
Fic.8. Epvertebrata, after depositing the cocoon, but I have so many
Female, dark variety. X 3. specimens that are marked in this way, that
it seems well to note the difference. (See Fig. 8.) (Ep. vertebrata,
var. pullus.)
Epeira balaustina, n. sp.
4. I have three female specimens of this beautiful spider, one of
which I collectedin Florida; another was sent by Mr.C. A. Townsend,
from Swan Island, Caribbean Sea, and a third was sent to me by the
late Mr. William M. Gabb, from Santo Domingo.
The spiders differ little in size, and measure in length 15 mm.
The abdomen is of a slightly triangular shape, in this respect approx-
imating Epeira domiciliorum. The abdomen is a bright yellow color,
somewhat mottled upon the sides and around the ventre with a
darker shade of yellow or yellowish brown. The markings are a
quadruple series of lines drawn from the pits that indicate the mus-
cular attachments, longitudinally, to the apex. The spinnerets, legs,
sternum and cephalothorax are of a bright orange, except where the
abdomen overhangs the latter, which is yellow.
The palps are a lighter shade inclined to yellow. The legs are
without distinct annuli, except the Florida specimen, which has a
broad black ring around the upper part of the thighs of the first,
second and fourth pairs of legs. The cephalothorax and abdomen
are covered with white hairs, and the leg armature is of the same
color, and rather weak and sparse.
The epigynum consists of a short flap, tri-lobed at the tip, which
is slightly separated from a thicker flap of similar shape, but which
consists apparently of three folds. Viewed from the side the epigy-
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 199
num presents somewhat the appearance of the thumb of a human
hand clasped over the closed fingers; the thumb representing the
posterior flap and the knuckles the folds and rugosities of the thick
anterior one.
Epeira parvula. Var. conchlea.
5. There are few spiders that present such striking variation in
markings upon the dorsum of the abdomen as Epeira parvula. It
is a curious problem, which remains yet to be solved, what causes
this variety. It is probably due in some degree to those changes
which in certain species are evidently effected by the various moult-
ings which spiders undergo. But that this cannot be the sole cause
is shown by the fact that the varied markings appear even among
mature specimens, particularly of the females. In a quite large
collection received from Wisconsin, through Prof. Peckham, and
from California through Mrs. Rosa Smith Eigenmann, I observed a
number of individuals upon whom a further and even more striking
change was manifest.
The abdomen of Epeira parvula is triangular shaped upon the
dorsum, and the apical part, instead of rounding into an oval, ends
perpendicularly ; that is to say, is a straight wall from the spinnerets
to the top. In the variety alluded to, which I have named Epeira
conchlea, the terminal part of the dorsum of the abdomen assumes
the shape of a caudal process, resembling that which is characteristic
of the tailed spider, Cyclosa caudata. (See Fig. 6, a.)
This peculiarity I have traced in about a dozen spe-
cies, and in some much more decidedly than in others.
In other respects the specimens appear to be nearly
identical with Epeira parvula. The epigynum is in
form the same, although larger, the finger being very broad at the
base, and rapidly terminating in a point that is slightly curled. In
front of the base is a tri-lobed black corneous flap. (Fig.
e- 6, e.)
The body length is about 7 mm. The maxillae are
Fic. 6,e. broader or as broad as long and subtriangular at the tip.
Habitat, Wisconsin, California.
Fic. 6, a.
200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
A NEW FOSSIL SPIDER, EOATYPUS WOODWARDII.
BY HENRY C. MCCOOK, D. D.
While visiting the British Museum of Natural History at South
Kensington, London, in the summer of 1887, I was permitted to ex-
amine some fossil insects and fossil spiders therein contained, under
the kind direction of Dr. Henry Woodward, the Keeper of the
Geological Department. Among the aranead fossils I observed one
which appeared to me to be new to science, and closely related to
the genus Atypus. The fossil is a tolerably well preserved impres-
sion, taken from the Eocene Tertiary at Garnet Bay, Isle of Wight.
After my return to America, Dr. Woodward sent me casts both
in wax and plaster, from which the appended description has been
made. These impressions somewhat shook the view which I was at
first inclined to take as to the systematic place of the specimen.
But on the whole, I am inclined to adhere, though with some qual-
ification, to my original judgment.
The only hesitation that an araneologist would feel in placing the
species would be as to whether it belongs with the Saltigrades or
jumping spiders, among the Attidze perhaps, or with the Territelariz
among the Atypinse. Those who have examined fossils of insects and
other small arthropods, especially of the order Araneze, will under-
stand the difficulty in determining with absolute accuracy their gen-
eric and specific rank, and will, therefore, not be surprised at this
hesitation concerning the above named specimen.
The shape of the cephalothorax to some extent, especially as viewed
from the original fossil in the British Museum, and more particularly
the character of the falces as noted in a side view of the specimen
shown at Fig. 1, indicate that the fossil may belong to the family
Atypinae and be closely related to Atypus. The name Koatypus
Woodwardii is therefore suggested for the species. If this inference
is correct, we may possibly have in this new fossil the distant pro-
genitor of the present British species of Atypus, Atypus piceus.
OrpeR ARANEAE.
Famity ATYPINAE.
EOATYPUS, Nov. Gen.
Eoatypus Woodwardii.
The total length of body, including mandibles is, 8 mm.; length
of abdomen 4 mm; length of cephalothorax 3 mm.; of mandibles
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 201
1 m.; width of abdomen at the base 3°55 mm.; width of abdomen at
the apex 1:75; width of the cephalothorax at the caput 2°25; width
of cephalothorax from margin to margin across the middle 3°5 mm. ;
length of palps2 mm. Both palps are represented by rather thin
lines, showing slight marks of joints, and on one palp is a suggestion
of a terminal bulb which might indicate it to be a young male.
The caput and median part of the cephalothorax as viewed from
the cast, are well elevated and defined; the cephalothorax narrows
towards the abdomen. But in the original impression in the rock
Fic. 2. Eoatypus Wood-
wardii x 4 Outline side view
of body.
Fic. L oatypus Weelarai: x4,
and less distinctly on the casts, there appear outlines on either side
of the margin of the cephalothorax, as though by pressure those
parts had been flattened, and only the caput and a part of the dor-
sum of the cephalothorax along the median line had withstood the
pressure and had been pushed upward into the matrix by the same.
These outlines are visible, but not as distinct in the plaster cast.
Tt is at this point that one experiences difficulty in determining
whether the specimen is related to Attus or Atypus. If the broader
marginal markings are impressions of the original cephalothorax,
the inference would be that the spider represented by this fossil be-
longed to the Atypinae. That such is the case, I am strongly in-
clined to believe, both on the ground just named, and the charac-
teristics of the mandibles, as well as the general facies of the impres-
sion and east. (See Fig. 1.*) In the absence of the characteristic
eyes and long, jointed superior spinners it would be impossible to
relegate the specimen to the genus Atypus with absolute authority.
* This figure has been drawn from the cast and compared carefully with one
kindly made for me in the Geological Department of the British Museum, and fur-
nished by the Keeper, Dr. Woodward,
14
202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Neither would one be warranted to characterize a new genus by the
absence of eyes and spinners, since these organs were doubtless.
present but have simply failed to impress themselves upon the:
matrix. I have, therefore, felt compelled, on the one hand to pro-
pose a new generic place for this fossil, and on the other, to present
no sharply defined generic characteristics. Indeed, it must be
admitted that besides expressing the general facies of the fossil, as-
above described, the generic value of the name Koatypus consists
largely in assigning the specimen rank as a fossil spider.
On one side, portions of all the four legs are preserved, the first
three showing the articulations at the trochanter, femur and patella.
The second leg shows also the patella entire, indicating the articula-
tion with the metatarsus. On the other side a portion of the femur
of the first leg is shown with the patella and its articulations. Both
hind legs are represented by the apical parts of the femora.
The horizon from which this new fossil was obtained is that from
which most European fossil spiders have been taken, viz., the Eocene
Tertiary. It is also that from which have come our American ara-
nead fossils as recently studied by Mr. S. H. Seudder from specimens
collected at Florissant, Colorado.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 2038
NESTING HABITS OF THE AMERICAN PURSEWEB SPIDER.!
BY REV. HENRY C. MCCOOK D. D.
Genus ATYPUS.
Atypus Abbotii (Walck).
1792. Purse Web Spider Abbot. Mss. drawings of Georgia In-
sects, Vol. xiv, Pl. 8, No. 36,
Zool. Lib. Brit. Mus. Nat.
Hist.
1837. Sphodros Abbotii Walk. His. Nat. des Ins. Apt. Vol. i,
p. 247.
1842. Atypus niger Hentz. Jour. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. Vol. iv,
p. 224, p. 2, viii.
1875. Atypus niger Hentz. Spid. of the U.S. p. 19, Pl. ii, fig. 1.
During a visit to Florida in April 1886, I had the pleasure of
observing in natural site for the first time the nests of Abbot’s
Atypus, an aranead heretofore known as the black Atypus, or Atypus
niger of Hentz. I had possessed for a number of years specimens
of the long tubes in which this creature dwells * concerning which I
only knew that they were reported as being spun along the outside
of the trunks of trees.
I. GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION.
The field of observation was on the plantation of Dr. William
Wittfeld,* at the lower part of Merrit’s Island, which is situated be-
tween the Indian and Banana Rivers, a few miles south of Cape
Canaveral. ’
present; moderate lateral concresence is seen on the left side.
When the two parts, (the median and the lateral) are contiguous
the rugze may be said to be entire. But when they are separated
by intervals more or less appreciable they may be said to be broken.
In palates of a moderate curvature 7. e. midway between the flat and
the high vaults, the folds may be evenly disposed and be without break
on one side while they are irregular and broken on the other. The
left side is commonly the most developed, a feature which the rugs
exhibit in common with the mandible, the left ramus of which is
commonly the larger.
An elliptical exostosis which is often met with on the roof of the
mouth is almost always larger on the left side. The left sutural
ruga (see fig. 53) is generally prolonged back farther than is the
right. A similar disposition is seen in the first post-sutural ruga
but to a less degree. The post-sutural rugze especially on the right
side (see fig. 9) may extend obliquely forward. The third is com-
monly so placed, but the fourth, fifth and even the second may il-
lustrate this disposition (see fig. 8). As opposed to exostosis the
term hyperostosis will be employed to denote the general excess of
bone deposition along the line of the intermaxillary suture. It is a
258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
common form of hypertrophy in the Anglo-American and one which
has a distinct clinical significance (see fig. 5).
i i In “ \ .
—
_
MN 1 i
FIGURE 3.
The palate is moderately high arched. ‘The lateral elements are
elongated. The median elements are either two faint to be apparent
or are absent.
The right lateral incisor is absent and the incisive pad shows an
inclination to the side of defect. The left sutural fold is directed
backward at the raphe.
The union of the right sutural and post-sutural rugze so as to
present a fork-like figure, the arms of the fork projecting outwards,
is frequently seen.
The incisive pad, the raphé and the two sutural rugee in rare
instances may coalesce and give rise to a conspicuous cruciform
figure.
The vertically placed lateral ends of the rugz are by far the
most constant of any parts of the series. They are especially well
developed in high narrow vaults.’
The course of the posterior palatine vessels and nerves serve as a
guide to interesting conditions of the hard palate.
The mucous membrane is pale where it overlies tissues which are
not in contact with the bone. The interval between the raphé and
1 In the horse the roof of the mouth is very vascular. In Mephztis the pre-
sutural portion appears to be in a similar condition. The exact limitation of this
part of the roof is of interest and, so far as it goes, supports the position taken that
the rugee are naturally divided into a pre-sutural and a post sutural set.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 259
the sides of the vault is marked by a whitish surface which yields
to pressure. In some individuals this motion can be traced as far
forward as the first post-sutural fold. The tract is best developed
when the roof is normally formed. With a flat arch and a median
exostosis present, the track is small. With rugz well shown, but
broken, the place of the interruption occurs across the track. The
pale tracks appear to be entirely absent in high, acute arches. An
association of the track and the color marking of the hard palate
can also be detected, The high-arched palates are uniformly of a
red color, while the flat arches are red only along the median line
and at the region of the gum. A test exists here for the rate of
blood vessel activity of the palatine structures and, by inference, of
the rates of development of the maxilla.
=
SSS
=
a AC |
Sco
The palate is normal in curvature. The incisive pad and raphé are
continuous. The sutural folds are entire, the left fold extending
farther up along the raphé than does the right. Median concresence
=A
SS
fh
==
is seen on the left side.
VARIATIONS OF THE RuG&.
At the risk of repeating some of the facts of the preceding
description it is proposed to discuss under this head the principal
variations of the rug. They will be included under the following
propositions :
I. The ruge of the left side tend to be the better developed (see
Be 3. AO, 6,°1;.8,):
260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
II. The rugz of high laterally compressed as well as the wide,
flat vaults are apt to be entire. (See fig. 8.)
III. The ruge of vaults whose median suture has become the
seat of general hyperostosis are always broken. (See. fig. 5.)
I. Not only is the group of rugze on the left side more prominent
than on the right, but the distance from the median line to the
canine tooth is greater on the left than on the right side. The
pre-sutural space is slightly the more prominent on the left. The
left sutural rugee is apt to be inclined backward as it approaches
the median line to a point beyond that reached by the right. The
right side exhibits a forked sutural ruga, and a larger first post-
sutural fold than is seen on the left (see p. 261). The obliquely
placed last post-sutural fold is as peculiar to the right side as the de-
flected sutural is to the left.
II. The rugz of the high compressed vaults not only tend to
remain unbroken but are well developed. The membranes are
thick, cushiony and vascular. The incisors are thrown forward,
since they cannot be accommodated in the narrow space between
the canines, or the teeth last named remain out of the arch.
The skeleton is slight and the tonsils large if not hypertrophied.
The hard palate with a wide, flat arch is associated with thin
rugee whose intervals are wide (see figs. 2 and 9). The sutural
rugee tend to be deflected less than in the other types. A hyperosto-
sis 1s common.
III. The form of the wide arch which is modified by the hyper-
ostosis of the median structures of the palate is an illustration of
the disposition of the bones where they unite one to another by
suture to exhibit excess of nutrition.’
The raphé is exaggerated, a median bony ridge extends along its
line, the pre-sutural region is occupied by thick membranes and
prominent neck-folds. The left sutural ruga is apt to incline back-
ward at the median line. The right sutural fold is united with the
third near the raphé. This group is frequently met with in subjects
of nasal catarrh.
THE RUG OF MAN AS COMPARED WITH THOSE OF THE
LOWER ANIMALS.
A generally accepted method of study embraces the variations of
human structures and those of the lower animals in which these
“‘ variations ” are constant.
1 See a paper by the writer, Am. Journ. of the American Sciences, 1870, 405.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261
Most variations in human anatomy are said to be reversions.
While this method is a most valuable one it has a limited use when
applied to the study of the ruge, excepting in the instance of the
broken rugze, and even here the comparison is not exact.
The human ruge derive their peculiarity from two causes:
First, the divergence from the median line of the dental arches as
they are traced from before backward: this is much greater in man
than it is in the lower animals. Out of 96 examples of dental
arches examined by me 58 were found to be deflected more on the
left than on the right (see figs. 8, 4, 5, 6, 9,), 21 deflected more on
the right than the left, (see figs. 1, 2) while 17 only were symmetrical.
If, as I have assumed, the folds in part at least are the result of compres-
sion it follows that abrupt and varying deviations of the boundaries
of the palate must greatly disturb the harmonious development of
its ruge.
The deviations of the curves of the vault especially when inter-
rupted by a disposition to hyperostosis must also be a disturbing
influence. In 90 examples of palates the hyperostosis itself was
found in 51. This is certainly a remarkably high proportion and
when it is remembered that the specimens were from the mouths of
patients who were suffering from chronic nasal catarrh, the associa-
tion is suggestive of a relation between coincident causes.
mA
AN
a SG
i NHN RATT Vian SSS
TT a i
Ficure 5.
The arch is wide. The raphé lies on a conspicuous ridge which
forms a hyperostosis. The rugz are irregular, while some in advance
are long and entire, others are converted into clu-ters of coarse
papillze.
Again, in 90 examinations the sides of the vaults along the range
of the bicuspids and molars was in 27 instances, both right and left,
262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
nearly vertical, in 47 both sides inclined moderately outward, 3 had
right side vertical and left inclined, 4 had the left side vertical and
right inclined, and in 9 the inclination was undetermined.
Second, the extraordinary modifications in the proportions of the
face. The face stunted as it is in its anteroposterior dimensions
compensates for this defect in a great tendency to downward growth.
The premaxilla is enormously thickened as it enters into the com-
position of the mouth; the sides of the vault including the alveolar
processes are greatly elongated ; and the sutural line of the maxillez
tends to become hyperostosed in the region of the rugze or a separate
exostosis forms back of it on the free surface of the palate. It has
been seen how the presence of the hyperostosis modifies the shapes
of the ruge. The firm suture between the premaxilla and the
maxilla determines the greater size of the ruga which answers to it.
The sides of the vault drag the lateral part of the ruge of the post-
sutural set from a horizontal to a vertical and forward position.
The median hyperostosis breaks the rugze into parts,—a condition
never seen so far as I knowin any quadruped. The changes are in
illustration of the well known law that peripheral structures are
conformable to the deeper lying tissues with which they are in
correlation.
One of the most conspicuous appearances in the human ruge is
the approach of two or three folds towards one another either at the
median or lateral ends. It is most marked in children in the lat-
eral ends (where they are clustered toward the deciduous canines
and molars) and in the adults at the median ends anteriorly.
The third and fourth rug of the right side have marked special
dispositions to incline forward and inward, often cutting off the first
and second folds or causing them to disappear. The convergence may
go so far as to effect union between the different folds. | Especially
is this the case between the sutural fold and the third on the right
side, by means of which the forked appearance is seen (see fig. 8).
In some examples the sutural fold is united with the third be-
hind, and with the pre-sutura! in front.
In 90 specimens examined I found the lateral ends of the left rugs
convergent in 19; the lateral ends of those of the right side in 10;
and on both sides in 11.
In the same number of specimens I found the median ends con-
vergent in the left side in 6, on the right side in 4, and on both
sides in 5.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 263
The rug may be convergent on one side and transverse on the
other. It is thus seen that the disposition of the rugze to form little
clusters is noticeable.
=
5)
7 aa ane
Ficure 6.
The palate is wide but with deep recesses from a moderately high
arch back of the sutural rugee. The lateral elements on the left are
regular and elongated; those on the right are unusually irregular,
and first and second post-suturals very oblique. The median ele-
ments on both sides are strangely disturbed. | Median concresence
exists on both sides.
The inclination for the third, fourth and fifth rugge on the right
side to incline forward is especially marked.
In 90 specimens I found the right rugze thus inclined in 33, the
left only in 2 while in both right and left, 16. In the whole number
the inclination of the third rugae is the rule. The disposition is
marked in palates with hyperostosis.
The median half of each ruga may incline independently of the
lateral, but the inclined fold is, as arule, entire. The degree of incli-
nation is variable but it may be expected to be so great that the
sutural and post-sutural folds may unite.
The approach of the rugs one to another their entire length is
much less frequently seen than the foregoing. The sutural, the
third and the fourth post-suturals may be coalescent. In 90 ex-
amples this was noted on the right side 9 times, on the left 6 and
on both 2.
The union of the sutural and pre-sutural I have seen but once.
It was symmetrical.
264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
The folds may be contiguous only. In 90 examples I found the
arrangement on the right side 3 times, on the left 1, and for both 5.
It is probable that some forces create the variations above noted,
which are distinct from those already named. They are evidently
often out of harmony with one another,—the right side exhibiting
their effects oftener than the left. Sometimes they are operating
on the ends of the folds, sometimes in their entire length of the median
halves. That they are correlative with morbid phenomena is un-
doubted (see p. 269). For the clumping of the ruge their entire
length is often found in atrophic foetid catarrh, and in the senile
state. Butit may beso by coincidence. No data exists which covers
the entire range of appearances. Certainly nothing comparable to
such dispositions are seen in the lower animals.
The term concresence is an exact and convenient term to use in
describing this class of modification of the ruge.
The common abortion of the first and second post-sutural rugae
is not the least instructive of the changes affected by concresence.
Ficure Te
The incisorial pad is divided by a transverse groove. The raphé
shows a tendency to right and left subdivision. The left sutural ruga
is deflected backward along the raphé. The post-sutural rugae are
irregular. A small pre-sutural ruga is evident. The right post-
sutural rugae tend to be oblique, especially in their displaced median
elements. Median and lateral concresence is shown on the right side.
The deflection of the left sutural fold backward along the raphé
is probably also an example of concresence. But for some reason
it does not tend to unite with the post-sutural.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265
Of 90 examples I found the left sutural ruga thus deflected in 49
instances, the right, in 3 instances only, and on both right and left,
5 instances. In all the other examples the fold was transverse. In
deflection it must be noted that the ruga after reaching the raphé
is thence abruptly turned so as to be parallel with that structure.
Both the right and the left fold may be inclined back before ap-
proaching the raphé or may not reach it at all.
The forms of the rugs are never pathological as I venture to
define that term. The question to what extent variations of struct-
ure may be said to be pathological is no longer a novel one. The
fact that the forces operating in the economy often antagonize is
generally accepted. Upon this antagonism the approach to sym-
metry as seen in the paired structures alone depends. In the
plastron of a turtle (Chrysemys picta) in my possession, the plates
exhibit a constant disposition for those of the right side to crowd
and minimize those of the left. The same disposition for one side to
gain ascendency is seen in all paired structures which form by their
growth inward a median suture or raphé. If such minor variations
were to be called pathological every living creature would be an
epitome of morbid anatomy. Anatomical variation I assume to be
a better term for such deviations unless the structures are hurtful to
the individual or at least tend to be so. A pathological condition
is one in which the final effect is to create distress*or to excite
lesion. Prof. Alpheus Hyatt has described certain distorted shells
found by him as constituting pathological species. Are not such
species degraded, or reverted rather than pathological forms? The
comparison sometimes made between the horn of the rhinoceros
and the epidermic hypertrophies which appear upon the surface of
man and some of the lower animals, is based upon the conception
that the outgrowths are in both instances of the same nature,—that
they are both pathological and differ only in the single feature that
the rhinoceros by the law of selection has utilized a horn which
happened to appear at a convenient locality. To my mind the
structure is not pathological unless it expresses perverted function
or interferes with a function; not only this but that it interferes in
an abrupt, obstructive manner. If it does not so appear but in
such guise as to encourage the animal to use it; the organ should
be named an anatomical variation.
The word pathology is an anachronism in a system of biology.
It originated at the hands of observers who had imperfect concep-
18
266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1888.
tions (if indeed they may be said to have any at all) on the general
physiological laws operating in all the tissue changes of the body.
What was once “morbid” is now natural. If the word is to be
retained by naturalists, it should have a strictly medical application
—the one originally designed for it by practical men.
THE CORRELATION BETWEEN THE RUG AND THE INTERIOR
OF THE NOSE.
I have met with ten examples in which the left side of the nose
was smaller than the right and in which the same side of the hard
palate was also the smaller. Care must be taken to distinguish the
common variety of narrowing of the nose by a deflection of the
septum from the much rarer form or reduction of the chambers in
all directions.
In six cases the right side of the nasal chamber was the larger
and a corresponding increase in size of the right half of the palate
was detected.
But the association between palatal and nasal conditions is by no
means uniform and at the same time I cannot conclude that the
cases brought forward in evidence were coincidences. I have stud-
ies of individual cases in which not only was harmony present
between the proportions of the nose and the hard palate but between
these structures and the cranium as well.
It may be said that, in a manner, the law of symmetry is not with-
out exemplifications in the harmonies of the arrangement of the
sides of the hard palate, with the nasal chambers and with the cor-
responding side of the head but that this exemplification is subject
to so many exceptions by the operation of minor disturbing factors
as to be rarely present.
In examples of hyperostosis of the inter-maxillery suture the in-
ferior turbinated bones are high and apparently compressed. This
condition is often associated with imperfect development of the vomer
at the choana. The same peculiarity is found in high V-shaped
vaults.
A well defined group of subjects exhibit intumescent states of the
membranes of the premaxillary portion of the nasal chamber, a
rounded nodule projecting from the floor of the vestibule, a prom-
inent anterior end of the inferior turbinated bone, and a tumid state
of the membrane covering the septum. While such pronounced
morbid appearances are seen in the front of the chamber the remain-
der of the nasal surface is perfectly healthy. Coincident with these
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 267
peculiarities of the nose the roof of the mouth is distinguished by a
small incisive pad and coalescence of the sutural and the third post-
sutural folds. The tonsils are moderately enlarged.
A
Wc
FicureE 8.
The arch is narrow and high, the pre maxillary portions being
thrown forward. Hence the space between the sutural rugze and the
incisorial pad and all the parts in advance of the sutural rugee are
exceptionally open. ‘The third post rugee is confluent with the sutural
on both sides. The pre sutural rugze are absent.
THe RELATION BETWEEN THE RUG AND THE TEETH.
The relation existing between the rugze and the teeth is not as
important as would at first sight appear. For the pre-maxilla it
may be said that no influence is exerted by the incisor teeth over
the pre-sutural rugee. The sutural ruga is directly opposite the
canine teeth, the first post-sutural, directly between the canine and
the first bicuspid, the second ruga opposite the bicuspid, ete. In
the Proceedings of the Acad. of Nat. Sci. of Phila. p. 810, 1882, I
proposed a system of naming of the parts in accordance with these
facts. But it is less satisfactory than the one used in this paper.
Nevertheless the following statements would confirm the position
assumed that some connection between the rugze and the teeth must
be accepted to exist.
268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
The axis of the incisive pad when deflected from that of the
median line is inclined toward the side which is minimized by the
non-appearance or extraction of one of the incisor teeth of the per-
manent set, by the eruption of a tooth on the buccal or labial side
of its arch, or by some third related cause (see fig. 3).
In one adult subject whose palatal vault exhibited straight, reg-
ular, unbroken ruge on the right side retained on the left all the
rugze broken and parts of two entering into the composition of the
pre-sutural and the sutural. The left side was narrower than the
right. It is not likely that the irregularity of the rugz on the left
side was independent of the fact that the lateral incisor and the
second bicuspid were absent from the upper jaw, and that the sec-
ond bicuspid on the same side of the lower jaw was also absent, its
place being taken by the second milk molar which had never been
changed from the time of its eruption and was in all respects a
normal, healthy tooth. The left side of the face was slightly small-
er than the right.
In a girl of twelve years the rugze were normal on the left but on
the right the sutural fold was forked and the remaining folds broken.
On the left side the left second bicuspid tooth was absent, while
on the right both teeth were in position.
It is always of importance to remember that the mouths of chil-
dren in whom the deciduous canines and molars are yet in position
at a time when the permanent incisors and the first permanent
molar have been erupted, that the rugze exhibit a disposition to
approach one another toward these teeth. Is it possible that the
change from the infantile arrangement where the folds are entire,
regular and symmetrical to that of the older child, where the ac-
quired variations take place, is due either to the retention of the
deciduous canines and molars, or to the retardation in development.
of the permanent bicuspid teeth?
The region of these teeth is an exceedingly active one within the
maxilla since the germs of the permanent canine and of the bicus-
pids are well advanced to completion. At the same time the pe-
ripheral structures are not changing in correspondence. Hence an
element of disturbance is created.
CLINICAL APPLICATIONS.
It is evident that if, as has been claimed, the ruge are modified by
nutritive and developmental processes they will have clinical signif
icance also. The application will be especially evident in the
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 269
manner in which the ruge are aborted by protusion of the premax-
illary elements, and of the hyperostosis of the structures at the
raphé. When the vault is flat—the rugs tending to be symmeirical
though feebly developed,—a condition is present which is often
found associated with chronic nasal catarrh of the atrophic type.
If the arch is wide the sides of the palate and the alveolar processes
FIGURE 9.
The hard palate is without neck-folds, is of low arch and is wide.
The raphé is nearly obliterated, The rugz are broken. The lat-
eral half of the third post-sutural fold extends obliquely forward and
is in line with one of the median elements (probably of the second).
No similar disposition is seen on the left. Lateral concresence is
seen on the left side.
are not well developed, the rugze are gathered in a clump upon an
anterior declivity of low inclination, the turbinal scrolls are small,
and the membranes nonerectile. The teeth in such individuals are
large especially the incisors, the patient is predisposed to premature
recession of the gums from about the necks of the teeth and to
suppurative affections of their roots."
The Incisive Pad. The pad is often of a bluish red color when
the palate elsewhere is of a pale hue. At other times the pad is of
pink color and the base surrounded by a deep blue line. Thus the
pad may be congested either in whole or in part while the rest of
1 For the connection between atrophic catarrh and premature recession of the
gum see a paper by the author in Dental Cosmos, 1885, xxvii, 329.
270 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
the hard palate be entirely free. In a man fifty six years of age
from whom I had removed a number of polypi the pad was the
seat of soreness and pain for a week after the operation. It consti-
tuted the only annoyance which followed upon an operation of
exceptional extent. In children who have been operated upon for
deflected septum the necks of the teeth are surrounded by a pur-
plish red line as long as the plug is worn in the nose.
Absence of Ruge. The ruge may disappear by pressure from
within, as from a nevus or a fibrous tumor, and from without, as
from the pressure from a plate for artificial teeth. The absorption
of the alveolar process after the extraction of teeth, as a rule, induce
the absorption of the rugze, but occasionally the rugze persist and
are found lying directly across the position of the former dental
arch.
Medico-Legal Value of the Rugew. ‘The persistence of the ruge
after death leads to the conclusion that they may afford valuable
signs by which the body can be identified, for during the processes
of decomposition the mucous membrane of the hard palate is
among the last to be lost. When the positions of the ruge are re-
corded (as in the event of a patient having been recently under the
care of a dentist and the impression of the rugze having been taken
in plaster,) it is certainly true that the folds could be used in connec-
tion with the teeth, or even in the absence of these organs, in
identifying the subject.
Congenital Syphilis. In congenital syphilis I have often observed
that while the roof of the mouth especially at the anterior part was
of a deep red color from inflammation that the rugee were milk white.
The folds become swollen and painful in acute inflammation of the
roof of the mouth and infiltrated in cases of prolonged suppuration
from the alveolar processes.
In the diagnosis of syphilis this appearance is of importance.
While the characters of the teeth as caused by scarlet fever may be
much the same as those produced lfy syphilis yet in the sequelz of
the disease first named the hard palate yields no characters. In
syphilis more or less congestion if not inflammation appears to be
constantly present.
The study presented in the foregoing pages is based entirely upon
examinations made upon living subjects. | Forms of mouths which
occurred to me as interesting were selected and casts of the rugze
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 271
and teeth taken in plaster with great care.' The material therefore
is not of the average. It is based upon the hard palate of individ-
uals known to have some disease associated with disturbed states of
secretion of the nasal chambers.
In order that the study should have a more extended application
it was thought to be desirable before any exact clinical conclusion
could be drawn that a study of similar extent be based on material
known to be derived from entirely healthy individuals.
To make such examinations I visited the State Eastern Peniten-
tiary in this city and by the courtesy of Dr. W. D. Robinson, the
physician of the Institution, was enabled to stuby the mouths and
nasal chambers of the inmates. In this way ninety examinations
were recorded.
In no instance was hyperostosis present in the form spoken of in
the foregoing pages. Nor was asingle case of hyperostosis of the roof
of the mouth back of the region of the rugeeseen. Ina word no form
of rugze was detected which was broken by the descent of the median
structures.
In twenty-two examples the raphé was sufficiently prominent to
form a slight fullness which could be felt by the finger. The re-
maining fifty-eight examples were perfectly smooth.
The rugee were very commonly of the form exhibited in Figs. 1
or 2 with a disposition for the folds to be concrescent at their outer
ends. The examples of the left sutural rugee deflected along the
line of the raphé were but six in number; moderate degree of
asymmetry of the sides of the roof in seven; concresence of the
right sutural and post-sutural as to form a fork-like figure in but
three.
It is evident that the variations of the arrangement of the ruge
were within a much narrower range than in the ninety cases from
subjects from other sources.
The roof of the mouth presented no narrowing of the vault with
compression as seen in Fig. 8, and no flat wide palate as seen in
Fig. 9. Thus the extremes of variation—viz., of the high narrrow
vault and the low, wide vault were absent. But one instance of a
moderately compressed vault was seen and in this example the
pre-maxillz were not thrown forward.
1 T desire in this connection to acknowledge my indebtedness to many of my
friends especially to Dr. L. Ashley Faught, Dr. E. C. Kirk and Dr. J. M. McGrath.
Dr. J. W. White and Dr. W. Storer How of the S.S. White Dental Mfg. Co,, also
greatly aided me in the investigation.
272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Respecting the presence of catarrhal affections in the cases it is
necessary to say that not a single man among the entire number ex-
amined had complained to Dr. Robinson of any of the symptoms of
these diseases. I detected small quantities of secretion in the nasal
pharynx in rifteen instances. I cannot admit that this circumstance
had any significance in the absence of any of the usual appearances
of the membranes.
The teeth and nasal chambers were also examined but nothing
found which is of special mention.
Conclusions. The following conclusions may be drawn from the
statements made in the paper.
(1) That the range of variation in the roof of the mouth and its
folds is greater in subjects of nasal catarrh than in those who are
free from this disease.
(2) That the variations of the rugz are different on the two
sides of the roof.
(3) That excess of development of the pre-maxilla and the hori-
zontal plate of the maxilla, especially at the anterior portion, con-
stitutes a condition which is found in about fifty per cent. of cases of
chronic nasal catarrh.
(4) That chronic nasal catarrh is found associated with so many
phases of asymmetry of the rugze of the hard palate and the dental
arches that the disease should be studied as a morbid action which
is based upon morphological elements and not alone upon climatic
conditions.
bo
~I
Yo
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
OcTOBER 2.
The President, Dr. JosepH Lerpy, in the chair.
Fifteen persons present.
Megalonyx Jeffersonii.-—Prof. Letpy exhibited an ungual phalanx
of Megalonyx Jeffersonvi, submitted to his examination by Prof, J.
FE. Todd, of Tabor, Indiana, who informed him that it was found in
a sand bed, below the drift, in Mills Co., Iowa.
Anomalies of the human skull—Prof. Lurpy exhibited the right
half of a skull, from France, in the maxilla of which, besides the
usual number of incisors, the canine and premolars, there is a series
of four molars, of which the last one is about half the size of the
others. In the same skull the fore part of the middle turbinal is in-
| flated and forms a large sinus forming part with the anterior eth-
moidal sinuses.
Further, in the same specimen the venous portion of the jugular
foramen is nearly obsolete, and its inner portion forms a distinct
foramen for the inferior petrosal sinus. The descending portion of
the groove for the lateral sinus, about the eighth of an inch wide,
ends in a large mastoid foramen.
|
OcToBER 9.
Mr. Jonn H. Reprievp in the ehair.
Eighteen persons present.
A paper entitled “Contributions to the Natural History of the
Bermuda Islands,” by Angelo Heilprin, was presented for publica-
tion.
The following, received through the Botanical Section, was order-
ed to be printed :—
19
274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE LIFE HISTORIES OF PLANTS, NO. II.
BY THOMAS MEEHAN.
The leading facts, given in these papers, have been communicated
verbally during the year 1888 to the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia or its Botanical Section. In preparing them for
publication, it was believed they might add to the interest of the meet-
ing of the American Association for the Advancement of Science at
Cleveland, if read there prior to a full publication here. This state-
ment is necessary to explain the somewhat controversial manner,
intended to excite debate, in which the facts are presented. The
remarks of those who discussed the papers, are briefly given in the
Botanical Gazette, for September 1888.
Some new facts in the life History of Yuceca.—In the extremely
fascinating subject of the relation of insects to flowers no plant
possesses a greater interest than the Yucca. It is assumed that in-
sects’ visits are arranged for cross-fertilization, and this again on the
assumption that cross-fertilization must in some way, be a great
benefit to the species or to the race. This conclusion is a fair one.
Some good has been found from cross-fertilization, and some flowers
seem only to produce seed when cross—fertilized—but in Yueca we
have the anomaly of a floral structure so arranged that it can scarcely
pollinate itself or in any way receive pollen except by artificial aid
and yet that arrangement results, in so far as we can see, simply from
the use of its own pollen. There is in Yucca a more wonderful rela-
tion between the insect and the flower fertilized than possibly in any
other case. Professor Riley, to whom the great credit of this
wonderful discovery is mainly if not wholly due, has well expressed
this intimate relation in the insects name Pronuba yuccasella, and
yet it is evident to those who observe closely the working of this
wonderful arrangement, that it has no relation to cross-fertilization,
but results in self-fertilization. In most cases, as clearly shown by
the observations of Prof. Riley, the pistil receives through the medium
of the insect the pollen from its own flower, or at best the pollen
from the flowers on the same or adjacent plants; which is equally
self-fertilization. Just why this plant should be put to all this
trouble to get results through an agent, with no other result than it
would obtain if it did the work itself, is surely a problem worthy of
any endeavor to solve. Mankind has servants and slaves, and even
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 275
small insects, drone bees, and other creatures live in indolence by
the sweat of other brows. There are many parallels between plants
and animals. Is Yucca to be a case of absolute servitude on the
part of the insect, from sheer indolence on the part of the Yucca to
do its own work? It seems to me we shall not be able to draw the
veil from this great mystery till we make continuous and careful
observations of all the facts in its history, and place them on record
for comparison with those which others may make.
Prof. Riley once made the remarkable statement that he had seen
the Yucca Moth collect pollen, and thrust it down the tube of the
stigma, as if it knew that some such process was necessary to insure
fertilization. Dr. Engelmann had found in the Yuccas he examined,
that the apex of the pistil was not stigmatic,—the receptive portion
was low down in the tube. The two observations, taken together,
gave color to the supposed object of the insect. I have shown, (see
Proceedings of the Meetings at Cincinnatti, Saratoga and Buffalo, )
that pollen applied to the apex in Y. angustifolia, and protected by
gauze from the insect, resulted in seed just as well as when the work
was done by an insect. The tubular character noted by Dr. Engel-
mann cannot therefore be a constant one; and we shall have to
admit that the reasoning of the insect which led it to thrust the
pollen down the tube in the other species, leads it to perceive there
is no tube in Y. angustifolia, and that the application of pollen to
the bare apex is sufficient in this species.
Up to this season I had never been able to detect the insect be-
have in the plants around my house, as Professor Riley saw them
behave; but I have always conceded that he is too careful and too
close an observer to have been mistaken in such an observation.
The record of the act of the insect thrusting its tongue down the
stigmatic tube, from so accurate a naturalist, needs no confirma-
tion from any one, however one may be allowed to hold his judgment
in suspense as to the object of the insect in such behavior; not then
as confirming Prof. Riley, but as part of my observations of this year, I
desire to say that I have recently seen an insect at the same task. It
worked its proboscis up and down the tube of the pistil, much as a
sportsman would load his gun.
I find, in this region Yucca filamentosa commenced to bloom this
year about the end of June. Some plants will bloom a full week, or
occasionally ten days before others, though years ago, all the plants
under my notice came from root cuttings of one stock and not from
276 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
seed. The flowers begin to expand an hour before sun-down, assum-
ing a #ampanulate form by dark. By sunrise the next morning
they are closed, and they remain closed till an hour before sun-set
when they again expand, and go through another day as
before. But at the third evening’s expansion they become almost
rotate, closing again the next morning but only to wither and fall
away. The flower opens and fades within three days.
During the first week or ten days of the flowering period, an
enormous amount of moisture exudes from every part of the flower.
It trickles down the outer surface of the perianths, collecting in
drops at the apices of the lobes, sometimes almost covering the leaves
with spots where the drops have fallen and indicating a somewhat
gummy character. The pistil is completely covered with minute
bull, from which the same kind of liquid exudes. _ It is not a sweet
liquid, indeed differs from pure water only in having a very slight
trace of bitterness. The moths become very active just after sun-
set, traveling up and down rapidly over the moistened stigma,
my idea being that they were feeding on the moisture, and that this
probability also included the case of the one noted above as thrust-
ing its proboscis down the tube of the stigma. But the insect’s
motions are so rapid that in the twilight I could not feel absolutely
sure of the objects for which they were laboring so hard.
The most interesting part of my observations comesin here. When
about half the blossoms on the huge panicle had matured, the pro-
duction of moisture ceased. On the evening of the eighth of July I
could find no trace of an exudation of moisture, nor was there during
the whole remainder of the flowering period. Strange to say my
friends whose attention was called to this sudden cessation of a
watery overflow all suggested, “did you note any peculiar condition
of the atmosphere ?” I call attention to this here because it is so
common in reasoning on similar phenomena to say the atmosphere
was so-and-so therefore this or that resulted. It is the bane of
exact philosophical deductions that such hasty assumptions are com-
mon. We may with more propriety remember that in trees and
plants generally a large amount of moisture is stored in the tissue
1 This paper was read at the Cleveland meeting of the American Association
for the Advancement of Science, where Prof. Riley was present and it is due to
this eminent naturalist to say that he insisted on his former view that the sole ob-
ject of the insect in working down the pistil, was to ensure the fertilization of the
flower.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 277
during winter, apparantly ready for the enormous draft on the stor-
age basins which the sudden burst of masses of young foliage must
entail in spring. All know how maples and other trees bleed on the
slightest wound before the bursting of the leaf,—and how completely
destitute of moisture the tissue seems a short time afterwards. All
bleeding ceases as the young leaf has fully expanded. Will not the
same necessity exist for a provision of moisture for the enormous
number of juicy succulent flowers the Yucca has suddenly to pro-
duce? *May there not be enough and to spare in the earlier period,
with none to waste towards the last? These suggestions are all useful
as clews to further discoveries. The danger in science is that we
rest satisfied with plausibilities, and mistake them for facts.
My object is to show that the much discussed Yucea is yet
a comparatively unexplored field; and that its unknown life-
history yet promises to be one of the most interesting subjects the
teleologist can possibly give his attention to.
A study of the Hydrangea in relation to cross-fertilization.—That
many flowers are drranged for cross-fertilization needs no argu-
ment to sustain it, nor is it less certain that some flowers can only
be fertilized through the aid of wind or insects. Sprengel, it is well
known in the early part of the present century, placed this beyond
doubt. The great question is not, do plants generally cross-fertilize,
but why do they do it? Mr. Darwin’s great work in this connection
has been to prove that plants abhor in and in breeding, that the
strugele for life is necessarily the chief object of existence, and that
cross-fertilization tends to make the race stronger and better fitted
to engage in this struggle than close breeding would do. The results
of many of Mr. Darwin’s experiments sustain his views, as do those
of many others; but fo my mind just as large a number do not
sustain them. Mr. Darwin himself has candidly stated that con-
tinuous self-fertilization does not in the least impair the fertility of
the race. Mere negative vigor is the leading advantage he finds
in crossed plants. (Cross and Self-fertilization, Chap. IX, p. 527.)
It is not my object now to controvert the views of Mr. Darwin, or
or of his numerous foliowers. My view of one object of nature in
cross fertilization is to aid in production of variety. . I have shown
ever since discussion grew warm on these subjects, that variation is
essential to the present order of things,—that nature, to be consistent
with herself, must provide for variations if for no other purpose than
to make variety. I now propose to show hy some studies in
278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Hydrangea, that the variations in the species are of the most con-
tradictory character taken from the stand-point of benefits in the
struggle for life; while they are entirely consistent with my view of
variation for variety’s sake. Our garden Hydrangea from Japan,
Hydrangea hortensis' has the ray florets sterile, or rather it is the
lateral florets of the compound cyme, that give the enlarged sepals,
and fail to perfect the gyneecium. The terminal florets are fertile.
In H. quercijolia, all the lateral florets are fertile, and it is only the
terminal one that has petaloid sepals and is barren. Will any one
assert that these exactly opposite conditions can have any bear-
ing whatever as aids in a struggle for life? Suppose we say that the
attractive sepals are given to these species for the purpose of attract-
ing insects, and thus aiding cross-fertilization. With this view we
examine the American species H. arborescens, and we find barely
an attempt to make these enlarged petaloid sepals. There are
small ones on a few terminals and this is all. It has made out.
certainly as well in the great struggle as either of its two brethren.-
But is it a fact that the showy sepals are given to the plant to attract
insects? There is neither pollen nor nectar in the male flowers of
H. hortensis. They conceal the terminal hermaphrodites, and it is
searcely probable many insects, if any, visit the flowers. In the
other two, many insects visit the flowers—so far as my observations
go, as many visit the H. arborescens without the attractive sepals, as
the H. quercifolia that makes such a show of them.
Turning to the minute fertile flowers on these two species, we are
struck by the immense number of stamens and the enormous num-
ber of pollen grains one of these racemose cymes gives us. I estimat-
ed the number of stamens on one of H. quercifolia at 15,000; shaken
over a sheet of dark paper it completely whitensit. It can be carried
by the wind everywhere, why should it develop pelatoid sepals to at-
tract insects? Both species have the odor of Hawthorn, but in addi-
tion H. quercifolia has an enormous yield of nectar, which is apparent-
ly not abundant in H. arborescens. In spite of all the attractions, the
petaloid sepals, the abundance of pollen, the delightful fragrance,
the super—abundance of nectar, and the actual visits of numerous
insects, the flowers are self-fertilizing. The outer row of five stamens
mature pollen simultaneously with the expansion of the petals, which
falls at once on the receptive stigmas, some hours after the inner
1 Franchet and Savatier, insist that Smith’s name of “7. Aortemsts, has priority
over H. Hortensia.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 279
series mature, and ensures that self-fertilization which the pollen
from the first series may possibly have missed. The only possible
aid insects can give is in self-fertilization.
It is broadly asserted that we owe to the existence of insects the
various forms and colors of flowers with their grateful odors and
sweet secretions. Here we have illustrations of the most dissimilar
and contradictory variations in a single genus, variations which
cover all the leading points called for by the insect—adaptationists,
and so far as any argument in common use goes, could have occurred
with as much reason if not a single insect ever existed. The facts
are absolutely inexplicable on any theory of the survival of the
fittest in the struggle for life—but on my view of the absolute
necessity of variation for its own sake, the explanation seems simple
enough.
Variation is inseparable from even. the closest in—and—in
breeding. We are as fully justified in saying that nature abhors a
perpetuity of form as that she abhors in-and-in breeding, and we
ean just as earnestly claim cross-fertilization as an agent in bringing
about variation for the sake of variety, as for the reasons usually
given, and which we find we cannot apply with consistency in so
many cases. ;
That cross-fertilization aids variation, we may well believe is a
without assuming that it has
sufficient reason for its existence,
no other office to perform.
On the forms of Lonicera Japonica; with notes on the origin of the
forms.—The well-known honeysuckle of our gardens, Lonicera Ja-
ponica Thunberg, gives three forms of this in general cultivation,
supposed to be distinct species. One, known as L. Halleana, intro-
duced into America about a quarter of a century ago, I take to be
the plant so intended by the author of the original name. It is the
plant figured in Botanical Register, plate 7). Another is L. brachy-
botrya Asa Gray, a well-known form, preferring to creep and root
in the ground, to climbing. The third has been long in cultivation
as “Chinese woodbine,” a favorite for its rosy, sweet flowers, and is
the L. flexuosa of Loddiges. All the characters given by the authors
of the several names, can be found in different stages and conditions
of the same plant. The segments of the corolla in L. flexuosa are
somewhat narrower than in the other two; and it has a rosy pur-
ple tint in the stems, leaves and flowers. |The leaves in L. brachy_
botrya ave shining, and the hair, being a little shorter, makes the
280 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
plant seem different. The flowers in all three turn yellow soon after
they open.
On account of this change, the plant is known as “Silver ang
Gold” in Japan.
The flowers open towards evening. At the expansion of the co-
rolla, the stamens and pistil are of equal length. The flower is pro-
terogynous. In the morning the stigmas will adhere, if brought
together by their viscid secretions; but the anthers do not disperse:
pollen till later. The expanded flower remains white or rosy-tinted
all the day after opening, and turns yellow the second day, fading
the third. The tube of the corolla is about an inch long. On the ~
evening of expansion it contains no honeyed secretion. In the
morning the production of nectar is coeval with the bursting of the
anther cells, by noon the sweet liquid has risen up the tube for about
one-third its length. It continues to flow after the change to yellow;
and by evening, the tube is full for half its length, or half an inch.
When the flower wholly fades, the sweet secretion, which gives the
name of honeysuckle to the family is still there. Amid all these points
of uniformity, there are differences in productiveness. The form
known as. Ll. brachybotrya is abundantly fertile; in occasional in-
stances only do the others bear fruit. This is worth noting. Plants.
twining on trellises, under exactly the same conditions, vary re-
markably in their reproductive powers. Such observations have:
been made before on other plants, and are the facts regarded as puz-
zling. Mr. Darwin says :—‘‘ They make me believe that some indi-
viduals of a species differ from others in their sexual affinities (to
use the term employed by Gaertner) like closely allied species of"
the same genus.” (Cross and Self-fertilization, Chap. vi, p. 209.)
As the expression “sexual affinity” does not explain anything,
and as these three honeysuckles are such very distinct individuals
as to have been regarded as distinct species of the same genus, they
suggested themselves as offering excellent opportunities for observa-
tion as to the influence of anything that could be understood as being
in the nature of environment that might account for the origin of their
several forms; and especially what part the visiis of insects might have
had in developing the general form of the whole flower. In the hon-
eysuckle, the tube of the flower attracts prominent attention. The
large amount of nectar it contains, gives the name of honeysuckle to
the family as already noted, and one cannot help referring to the ac-
cepted explanation of the origin of tubular forms. “It may be:
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 281
admitted as almost certain that some structures, such as... .a long
tubular corolla have been developed in order that certain kinds of
insects alone should obtain the nectar.” ( Cross-and Self-fertiliza-
tion, Chap. x, p. 382.) The honey-bee visits all these forms freely.
The honey nearly fills the tube, and bees have no difficulty in col-
lecting freely. It can scarcely be believed that the plant made an
effort to exclude short tongued visitors, and that the long tube was
the result of that effort, and then secreted so much nectar as to
nearly fill the tube by which the short tongued insects could get as
much as before the effort was made.
Nor must we lose sight of the supposed objects for which insect
visitors are to be encouraged, namely, cross-fertilization.
In order to make no mistake in our conclusions, it is proper to
note here, that modern literature has misconceived the whole idea of
ceross-fertilization. There cannot possibly be any physiological bene-
fit from one flower crossing another on the same plant; but this is
about all that is involved in much that is written in connection
with the visits of insects. Yet Darwin takes especial pains to ex-
plain that this is not cross-fertilization. He says: “cross fertiliza-
tion always means a cross between distinct plants raised from seeds”
(p. 10). Even distinct plants, unless under distinct conditions
searcely constitute crossings in his mind. “The mere act of crossing
two distinct plants, which are in some degree inter-related, and
which have long been subject to the same conditions does little good”
(p. 61). Referring to Composite (p. 173) he notes that the florets
were ‘“‘self-fertilized”’ though with different florets from the same
head. On p. 345 he declares “ pollen from the same plant is equally
injurious or nearly so, as from the same flowers.” And, after all, it is
difficult to tell what Mr. Darwin really means by “injurious,” for
the most of his experiments, when in his mind resulting beneficially,
referred to vegetative luxuriance, in many little related to those
greater vital questions on which the good of the race depends. He
distinetly states (p. 327) “there is therefore, no evidence at present,
that the fertility of plants goes on diminishing in successive self-
fertilized generations, although, there is some rather weak evidence
that this does occur with respect to height and growth.” Still
it is clearly his idea, and evidently the proper one, that the cross-
fertilization can only be fairly entertained when the physi-
ological conditions vary in the individuals crossed. Though the
honeysuckles referred to are all from cuttings from the one in-
\
282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
dividual in each case introduced, yet being three distinct ones from
seed originally, there might be a chance for cross-fertilization when
three kinds grew altogether, as in those under my observation.
But I found that the bees, and other short-tongued visiting in-
sects, could not, in any way, aid in fertilizing the flower, when gath-
ering nectar. In these forms, the stamens and pistil are curved
upward, so that anthers and stigma are far above the lower lip, on
which the insect alights. If any insects aid in cross-fertilization, it
must be the pollen-gathering bees, and others ; but this will render
the speculation in connection with the development of nectar, and
the prolongation of the tube in favor of certain classes, of no value,
especially in connection with the fact noted, that the short-tongued
insects can get the liquid in spite of the prolonged tube.
It is usual, when similar instances in ofher plants have been noted,
to weaken the force of the lessons they teach, by objecting, that
many things “may have happened.” In this case, it would be
urged, that there might be some insects in the native country of
these honeysuckles, that we have not here where the plant is intro-
duced; but this would not change the fact, that whatever they may
be, they would still be divided into long-tongued and short-tongued
classes ; and that some bees gather honey only, while others are de-
voted to collecting pollen; nor would it ignore the fact that the sta-
mens and style are out of the reach of the short-tongued class. It
“may be” also urged that after the tube had been lengthened to ex-
clude the shori-tongued insect, the plant had subsequently, under
excessive excitation from the long-tongued visitors, overdone its
work, and supplied more nectar than it had originally given; and
then, among the “ may be’s”’ often indulged in, is that of a “ con-
tinuation of effort after the reasons therefor have ceased to exist,”
and the “ progress of development towards a new stage of self-inter-
est.”
No one could rationally deny that in the functions of plants,
self-interest largely enters. Nor can it be successfully controverted
that flower are often wholly dependent on insects for their fertiliza-_
tion. The point I have for some years contended for is, that we
need not necessarily be forced to assume that every variation in a
plant, or every function in its life-work, is for its special interest.
It seems to me absolutely essential to the present order of things,
that variety, for mere varieties’ sake, should exist quite independently
of any other consideration. This may involve the necessity of chang-
a x
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
ing the term “adaptation” to “design” in many cases. At any rate,
I am unable to see a reason for the special form and arrangement
of parts in the honeysuckle flower, that will accord with prevalent
j speculations, and am constrained to to believe the plant has been
forced to assume them for variety’s sake.
pe
284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
OcToBER 16.
Rev. H. C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Twenty-two persons present.
The following papers were presented for publication :—
“Additional Notes on the Structure and Classification of the
Mesozoic Mammalia.” By Henry Fairchild Osborn.
“On the Helicoid Land Mollusks of Bermuda.” By H. A.
Pilsbry.
OcTOoBER 25.
Mr. CoAries Morris in the chair.
Twenty-nine persons present.
The following papers were presented for publication :—
“Crotalocrinus. Its Structure and Zoological Position.” By
Charles Wachsmuth and Frank Springer.
“On a New Species of Starfish of the genus Pteraster.” By J. E-
Ives.
OcTOBER 30.
The President, Dr. JosepH Lerpy, in the chair.
Fifty persons present.
The following papers were presented for publications :—
“Discovery of the Ventral Structure of Taxocrinus and Haplo-
erinus and consequent modifications in the Classification of the
Crinoidea.” By Charles Wachsmuth and Frank Springer.
“Observations on the Development of the Skull in Neotoma
fuscipes, a contribution to the Morphology of the Rodentia.” By
R. W. Sbufeldt.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
Bsc Acad Nat Ser mila see “PL XViEw
i \
Pisbry,Helicoid L andMolusks of Bermuda.
.-
»
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285
ON THE HELICOID LAND MOLLUSCS OF BERMUDA.
BY H. A. PILSBRY.
Through the courtesy of Professor Angelo Heilprin I have been
enabled to study the Bermudan land shells, collected by the party
conducted by him during the past summer. Among them were ex-
amples of all the Helicoid species which have been reported by pre-
vious observers from the island, some containing the living animal.
‘The species, with the exception of a number of artificially intro-
duced European shells, are mostly forms well-known from various
West Indian localities; such as Helix cereolus var. microdonta Desh.,
H. vortex Pfr. and others; but besides these, there are a number of
shells peculiar to Bermuda; and these last have furnished material
for the following notes.
The helicoid species confined to Bermuda are as follows: .H. ber-
mudensis Pfr., H. nelsont Bld., H. reiniana Pfr., H. cireumfirmata
Redf., H. diserepans Pfr. As to the systematic position of these
forms there has been considerable difference of opinion among au-
thors; the first, Hl. bermudensis, has been placed in Caracolus by
Von Martens, in Hyalina by Clessin, in Zonites by Bland ; H. rein-
iana has been considered a Patu/a by Pfeiffer, Clessin, Tryon and
Fischer; and H. cirewnfirmatu and discrepans have been placed in
Microphysa by Von Martens and Binney, in Hyalosagda by Cles-
sin, Tryon and others.
Thus it will be seen that these species have been distributed into
several genera in two distinct families. Upon examining the soft
parts, however, I find that all have essentially the same organization
and without doubt belong to the same genus.
Dr. O. Boettger proposed in 1884, for the Lower Miocene fossil
Helix imbricata Braun, and the H. bermudensis Pfr. the name of
Pwcilozonites. He gave uo diagnosis of the new group, but assigned
it a position between the typical palearctic Zonites and the American
groups Zonyalina and Moreletia, a position which the anatomical
characters prove to be erronecus.'
Teo «x * * Endlich sei noch einer nahen Verwandten der Hocheim-
er untermiociner Ae/ix tmbricata Al. Braun gedacht, die Sandberger bekanntlich
zu Trochomorpha (Discus) gestellt hat. Ich gebe die Aehnlichkeit zu; aber zur
Section Videna H. u A. Adams, Discus Alb., méchte ich die betreffende fossile Art
nur ungern stellen, da alle mir bekannten lebenden Arten dieser Gruppe zum min-
-dester einer verdichter basalrand, der oft recht erheblich Helix-artig umgeschlagen
286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
By error, the genus was quoted “ Poecilozonites Sandberger,” in
the Zodlogical Record for 1884, and this error was repeated by
Tryon’ who gives the first diagnosis of the group published, giving
H. bermudensis as the type and only species. We may, then, con-
sider the H. bermudensis Pfr., the type species of the genus. Wheth-
er the H. imbricata Braun be associated with the Bermudan shells
or not is a point still to be settled. The superficial resemblance is
marked; but as the history of the species of Pecilozonites teaches us,
“systematizing ” helicoid land mollusks by the shells alone is the
merest guess-work. .
The fact that the fossil species which Dr. Boettger proposes to
unite with the Bermudan form is from the Lower Miocene forma-
tion of Germany, is in itself no great objection to the view that they
are congeneric; for no fact is better established in malaco-geogra-
phy than the close affinity existing between the European Tertiary
land mollusca and those now inhabiting the West Indies. To ex-
plain this relationship existing between two regions separated by the
whole expanse of the Atlantic, various theories have been offered.
One of the most plausible is that which bridges the Atlantic by an
ancient Cee ae a Middle ee) continent—an Atlantis.
ist ae Z. B bei Tr, merziana Pfr, ) peste: Viel naher liegt daher wohl der
vergleich der Helix imbricata mit der etwas kleineren, mit zwei braunen bandern
gezierten Hyalinia bermudensis Pfr. von den Bermudas, deren Uebereinstimmung
in allen wesentlichen charackteren bei directem Vergleich sofort in die Angen
springen diirfte. Freilich kommen wir hier fast von dem Regen in die Traufe, da
die systematische stellung dieser lebenden Art selbst noch in hohen Grad unsicher
ist, was ihr Autor durch ein vorgesetzes ‘?’ sehr richtig selbst schon angedeutet
hat. Bei Hya/inia kann sie unméglich bleiben. Da sie meiner Ansicht nach
auch nicht in die indische, indo malayische und polynesische gattung Zrocho-
morpha passt, so diirfte eine eigene Gruppe fiir Hyal. Bermudensis und Helix
imbricata 2 errichten sein, fiir welche ich den Namen Pveci/ozonites vorschlage,
und die ich am liebsten zwischen die Achten palaarktischen Zomzfes und die trop-
isch-amerikanischen Gruppen Moreletia und Zonyalina vorlaufig als section in der
Gattung Zonites Montf. einreihen méchte, bis die Anatomie der lebenden Art eine
mehr gesicherte Stellung im System an die Hand geben wird.” O. Boettger in
Neues Yahrbuch fur Mineralogie, Geologie u. Palaeontologie, 1884, 1 Bd., s
139.
1 Manual of Conchology, 24, series, iii, p. 19, 95.
2 This affinity although doubtless very great, has been considerably exaggerat-
ed. There is, for instance, no warrant for referring European tertiary species to the
exclusively New World genera Pleurocera, Anculosa, Tulotoma, Mesodon, Carini-~
ex, Melantho, and others. There seems to have been no infusion of European,
Tertiary. types into the North American snail fauna east of the Californian region-
This fauna is truly autochthonous.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 287
This view has been advocated by the well-known conchologist Dr.
W. Kobelt! and by others.
But although this theory explains many anomalies in the distribu-
tion of molluscs, I must freely confess that the objections to 1t seem
to me almost insurmountable. The recent work of the Challenger,
Blake, and other deep-sea explorations, all tend to confirm the view
held by Guyot, Dana, Agassiz and others, that the great oceanic
basins, practically as they exist to-day, are of great antiquity; and
render the existence of a former Atlantic continent with any con-
siderable Western extension, highly improbable.
A view more in accordance with the facts with which we are at
present acquainted, seems to me to be the following: It is a well
ascertained truth that until toward the close of the Miocene, large
portions of Nothern Africa as well as Europe were submerged; and
it appears probable that the westward flowing Equatorial current of
the Indian Ocean extended across northern Africa, and united with
the Atlantic northern equatorial current, which now flows westward
from northern Africa, through the Antilles into the Gulf of Mexico.
This current would afford a means of transport not only for the free
swimming embryos of marine molluscs, (and there are not a few
forms both of gasteropods and pelecypods, common to the Mediter-
ranean and Gulf Provinces,) but also, through the agency of floating
materials, trees, etc., swept from rivers, land mollusks may have
been transported across the Atlantic, just as they have been carried
by the Gulf Stream from the West Indies to the outlying island of
Bermuda,’ a distance of over 700 miles.
A further development of the same idea explains certain peculiari-
ties in the distribution of species common to the Pacific and the
Gulf of Mexico. The presence of Miocene and Pliocene deposits
render it certain that there was communication between the Gulf
and the Pacific across the isthmus of Panama as late as the Pliocene.
And a portion of the equatorial current probably swept directly
through to the Pacific. Thus it is likely that those forms common
to both sides ofthe isthmus, will prove to be of Atlantic origin, and
to have been distributed westward.
The indigenous Bermudan molluse-fauna, marine as well as terres-
trial, has undoubtedly been derived wholly from the West Indies.
? Nachrichtsblatt d. deutschen Malak. Gesell., 1887, p. 147.
2 See Darwin, Origin of Species, 6th ed., p. 353. Also a paper by Mr.C. T.
Simpson, On the Distribution of Land and Fresh-water Shells in the Tropics,
Couch: Ex: i, p.. 37,00.
‘288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
And since the island is typically oceanic, “a solitary peak rising
abruptly from a base only 120 miles in diameter” surrounded on all
sides by between 2500 and 5000 fathoms depth, we have an indica-
tion here that land mollusks of many families, Helicide, Zonitide,
Succinide, Pupide, Helicinide, even Vaginulide, (for a large undes-
eribed species of Vaginulus exists upon the island) may be trans-
ported very great distances by sea, by, in all probability, the agencies
mentioned above.
The considerable divergence existing between the various species
of the Zonitoid genus peculiar to Bermuda, Poeci/ozonites, indicates
that the island is of considerable antiquity.
We may define the genus as follows:
POECILOZONITES.
Generic characters: Shell helicoid, subtrochitorm, depressed conie,
or subdiscoidal, perforate or umbilicate, obliquely striate, ornament-
ed with radiating zigzag flammules or spiral bands of chestnut color
on a lighter ground; whorls numerous (7-10) very slowly widening ;
body whorl more or less flattened or compressed below the usually
earinate periphery, not descending anteriorly; aperture more or
less irregularly lunate; peristome simple, the columellar margin
slightly expanded and thickened with a white callus which encircles
the pillar within. Animal similar in form to Helix; foot narrow,
short posteriorly, scarcely reaching behind the shell, without longi-
tudinal furrows above its margin or caudal mucous pore; orifice of
genitalia on the right side of neck, near, but not under the mantle;
mantle margin simple ; jaw like that of Limar, very thin, arcuate,
with a broad blunt median projection anteriorly ; radula with
tricuspid central teeth having quadrate basal plates, the central
cusps projecting beyond the anterior margins of the basal plates, the
side cusps rather short, with well reflexed cutting points; lateral
teeth similar but asymmetrical, lacking the inner cusps ; marginal
teeth aculeate, with simpie thorn-shaped cusps and oval basal plates.
It will be seen by the above definition that the genus cannot be
included in any of the groups with which its species have been
associated by authors; the Zonitoid dentition at once removing it
from the Helicide, and the absence of a caudal mucous pore, the
more anterior position of the orifice of the genitalia and the coloration
of the shell, separating it from Zonites and its subgenera.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 289
The relationship of the species of Poecilozonites to one another is
shown by the similarity of the radulz and jaws, and of the external
characters of the animal; and in the shells, which at first glance
seem to be a heterogeneous assemblage, by the callus which coats
the columella, the compression of the whorl below the periphery, and
especially by the color-pattern, which is the same in all the species,
consisting of zigzag flammules radiating from the sutures. In P.
bermudensis the flammules coalesce into continuous bands above and
below the periphery in the adult; but an examination of young
specimens reveals the same pattern that is found in P. cirewmfirmata,
P. reiniana, etc. The internal spiral lamella of P. cireuwmfirmata
would incline one at first to separate it from the other species ; but it
is scarcely of generic importance, in view of the fact that in all other
characters the species is very similar to P. bermudensis, ete.
The following analysis shows the inter-relations of the various
species:
A. Base of shell with a revolving lamina within
circumprmatus, discrepans.
B. Base of shell without lamina.
a. Aperture rounded below; umbilicus wide reumianus.
b. Aperture angulate below; umbilicus narrow
bermudensis, nelsoni.
Poecilozonites bermudensis Pfr. (pl. xvii, figs. B. c.)
The typical species is a form of about twenty-five mill. diameter,
solid, coarsely irregularly striate and acutely carinate at the per-
iphery; a broad chestnut band usually encircles the shell above
the periphery, and another below it; but these are sometimes
absent; the inner whorls of the spire usually retain traces of the
original color-pattern of radiating flames, and the base in young
examples, is radiately streaked (pl. xvi, fig. E). The base is con-
vex, and not indented around the narrow and deep umbilicus, but
is angulated at its margin; the parietal wall is generally covered
by a shining white layer with which the interior of the shell is lined.
- Reeve, Tryon and other authors have figured the shell of this
species.
The jaw is like that of P. cireumfirmata.
The radula (pl. xvii, fig. c) is rather long. The central teeth have
basal plates almost as broad as long, the median cusps projecting
below their lower margins, with well-developed cutting points, the
side cusps short, attaining about the middle of the basal plate, and
20
290 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
directed outward ; the lateral teeth are similar, but lack inner cusps;
they are about eight in number, and are followed by about four
transition teeth ; the marginals number about fifty on either side, and
their cusps become more slender toward the outer edge, and the basal
plates shorter. A central with five adjacent lateral teeth, and a
group of transition teeth with a true marginal tooth are shown in the
figure.
Helix albella of Chemnitz, (not of Linnzeus), and H. ochroleuca of
Pfeiffer, (not Ferussac) are, I believe, synonymous with this species.
The former is placed in Eurycratera in Pfeiffer’s Nomenclator, and
the latter has been compared to Pachystyla rufozonata, a form some-
what similar in characters of the shell, but belonging, of course, toa
distinct group. ;
Poecilozonites nelsoni Bland. (pl. xvii, figs. 3, K, L).
A fossil form, differing from bermudensis in the much greater size,
greater number of whorls, more convex base, coarser striation, im-
pressed sutures, and especially in the peculiarly prominent dome-
shaped upper whorls. These are, indeed, so closely coiled as to
resemble a specimen of P. cireumfirmata. The coloration, imperfect-
ly shown in several specimens before me, is that. of bermudensis ;
and whilst its affinities are with the latter species, I regard it as a
divergent branch, rather than as an ancestor of that form.
As has been observed in other cases of species approaching extine-
tion, and probably subject to some decided and unfavorable change
in environment, (in this case, perhaps, due to the comparatively
recent subsidence and partial submergence of the island') the shell
exhibits great mutations and distortions of form ; sometimes the spire
is elevated conical, sometimes much depressed ; frequently the planes
of the upper and lower volutions are not parallel, and the spire con-
sequently is canted to one side. The species is remarkably large,
solid and roughly sculptured for a Zonitoid.
Poecilozonites reinianus Pfr. (pl. xvii, figs. 1).
This heretofore unfigured species is discoidal in form, widely
umbilicate, the umbilicus about one-third the diameter of the base,
exhibiting all the whorls; the apical whorl is smooth and whitish ;
the following whorls are quite convex, with deep sutures, brownish,
very prettily zigzagly flammulate with chestnut color, like many of
the species of Patula. The body-whorl in adult examples is round-
1 See Challenger Report, Narrative, vol. i, p. 138.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 291
ed; the base concave around the umbilicus, and the general aspect
that of Patula.
The jaw is like that of eircumfirmata.
The radula (pl. xvii, fig. D) is similar to that of bermudensis except
in the following points: the cusps are larger, with much more widely
reflexed cutting points; the perfect lateral teeth are seven on either
side; the change to marginals is quite abrupt, as there are but two
real transition teeth; the marginals number about sixteen on each
side, the inner six or seven of about equal size, the outer ones rapidly
decreasing. toward the edge. The basal plates are longer than in the
other species. A central tooth with two adjacent laterals and one
marginal are shown in the figure.
Poecilozonites circumfirmatus Redfield. (pl. xvii, figs. F).
A form with much the appearance of Hyalosagda, a group with
which it has been classed by some authors. It isa delicate subtranslu-
cent yellowish brown shell, marked with brown streaks, spots and
flammules ; the whorls are separated by moderately impressed sut-
ures; the apex is like that of reiniana; the last whorl! is more or less
angulate around the periphery, rather flattened below the angle, then
convex, indented around the narrow deeply perforating umbilicus ;
there is a white calcareous deposit around the columella, inside, as
in the other species, and an acute white lamella which revolves
within the base near to the periphery, a character which none of the
preceding species possess. The variation in form is very great—spec-
imens more elevated than my figure F being not infrequent, and
these are connected by examples more and more depressed (fig. G)
with the flattened lenticular form called by Pfeiffer H. discrepans:
This extremely depressed variety, now figured for the first time, (PI.
xvii, fig. H.) cannot be considered’ specifically distinct from the P.
circumpirmata.
Jaw (pl xvii, fig. B) transparent, very thin, arcuate, with blunt
extremities and a wide obtuse median projection below.
Radula (pl. xvii, fig. A) as described for P. bermudensis, but with
only seven laterals, two or:three transition teeth, and about twenty-
eight marginals. The marginals have longer basal plates than in P.
bermudensis.
292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS UPON THE STRUCTURE AND CLASSI-
FICATION OF THE MESOZOIC MAMMALIA.
BY HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN.
In connection with a visit to the recent Geological Congress in
London the writer reviewed the British Museum collection of Meso-
zoic Mammals which formed the principal basis of a recently pub-
lished Memoir’ and examined also the valuable specimens at Oxford,
Bath and York which had previously been studied merely from
the descriptions and figures of Professor Owen and others. Also
the Neoplagiaulax specimens in the collection of Dr. Lemoine at
Rheims. There are two undescribed specimens in the Oxford Museum
and since the writer worked upon the collection in the British
Museum, (in 1886), many of the Purbeck fossils have been much
mure fully exposed by the further removal of the matrix. Impor-
tant features have been brought to light, not visible previously,
which lead to a revision of some of the conclusions which were
reached upon the evidence then at hand. Greater familiarity with
the minute Mesozoic types of molars sharpens the powers of obser-
vation and one is more apt to discover new points when on the
lookout for them. Thus many inconspicuous but important features
were noticed which formerly escaped attention. Some of these, such
for example as the identity of Amblotherium and Stylodon, had been
already. anticipated, but others, such as the tritubercular molars
of Amphitherium were entirely unexpected.
The following notes are in abstract from a Postscript to the Memoir,
which is in preparation, and are not to be considered as final.
AMPHILESTES.
Besides Professor Owen’s type, which is preserved in the York
Museum,’ there are two specimens belonging to this genus at Oxford.
In the type, it is somewhat difficult to determine the number of the
teeth, as described by Owen, since the incisor and canine alveoli are
indistinct, but the Oxford specimens show that there were but six
molars instead of seven as conjectured in Lydekker’s Catalogue,
Part V, p. 271, and adopted by myself, (op. cit., p. 195). In fact,
one well preserved specimen, a right ramus seen upon the outer
surface, shows but five molars. If this specimen be adult, as seems
improbable, it may represent a new genus transitional between
_ 1 “The Structure and Classification of the Mesozoic Mammalia.” Journ. of
the Acad. of Nat. Sciences of Philadelphia. vol. ix, no. 2, July 1888.
2 I am indebted to Mr. Plattnauer, the Curator of this Museum, for the oppor-
tunity of freely examining this specimen. :
¢
ay
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 293
Amphilestes with six molars and Triconodon with four. The second
specimen, a left ramus also seen upon the outer surface, has three
premolars in sitw and the space for a fourth, ( pm, ); in front of
this is a deeper alveolus, probably for the canine, preceded by the
alveoli of at least three incisors, so that the lower dental formula
may now be given with considerable certainty as follows:
1. 23, Cr, Day Me.
The canine is not preserved. The premolars as viewed upon the
outer surface have prominent cingules but not the true basal cusps
seen in Triconodon. The outer face of the molars is entirely devoid
of a cingulum. None of the specimens give any evidence that the
angle is distinct, but indicate that the lower border rises to the level
of the condyle precisely as in Phascolotherium, Spalacotherium and
Triconodon. This strengthens the writer’s reference of these genera
to one family as opposed to the views of Marsh and Lydekker; never-
theless, as shown below, Spalacotherium is a more specialized type
than the others.
PHASCOLOTHERIUM.
Besides the type in the British Museum there is a beautifully
preserved specimen belonging to this genus in the Oxford Museum
and through the kindness of Mr. James Parker of Oxford the writer
had an opportunity of examining a third specimen in his private
collection. The latter, which has been figured in Phillips’ “Geology
of Oxford,” is remarkable for the extension of the coronoid beyond
the vertical line of the condyle. The Oxford Museum specimen’
contains only the four posterior molars, probably m,—m, with the
fangs of m, and m;. It may however be readily distinguished from
the Amphilestes specimens by the stout cones and by the fact that
the internal cingulum rises in two points upon the inner faces of
the molars instead of in a single point beneath the protocone; also
by the stout character of the jaw.
A renewed study of the molar teeth in the type specimen shows
that all the post-canine teeth present the characters of molars in
some respects. The first tooth behind the canine has a main cusp
like that of the posterior molars and an internal cingulum horizontal
and rising in two points instead of showing the sweep downwards and
backwards which is so characteristic of premolar cingula. The
accessory cusps are either covered with matrix or broken off. The
second tooth has a fractured cingulum so that one cannot determine
1 The cast of this specimen in the Natural History Museum (mM. 2300) has been
mistakenly referred to Amphilestes by Lydekker, op. cit., p. 272, on the ground of
“the small development of the accessory fore-and-aft cusps.”
the molars are quite as prominent as in the type.
The basal cusps of
294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888..
whether the anterior cusp is a cingule or a true paracone. The
posterior cusp or metacone is prominent and distinct as in the pre-
molars of Triconodon. The chief interest lies in the main cusp which
is loftier and more pointed than the protocone of the third tooth
which in turn has all the characteristics of a molar. This is an
important point which has been overlooked previously, since it ap-
pears to indicate an available line of division in the functional
adaptation of the series, 7. e. a line between premolar and molariform
teeth. If such a division be confirmed by further examination of the
first and second teeth, it will lessen the gap between Amphilestes and
this genus and remove what has been considered an entirely excep-
tional feature, viz. a type with no premolariform teeth. The mandib-
ular formula may then be provisionally written thus: 4, G, ps,
Ms.
The crowns of this front pair of teeth have never been correctly
represented. The writer’s figure (op. cit., Pl. 8, fig. 3) is incorrect
in restoring the cingulum of the second tooth and the basal cusps
of the first tooth. In this Buckland’s figure was followed, believing
it probable that the jaw was in better condition when he figured it
than now, for the last molar was then present. Another error in
the drawing is the high position of the dental foramen, to which
Professor Marsh kindly directed attention.
AMPHITYLUS:!
In the type of this genus at Oxford the teeth are so fractured that
it is impossible to form any idea of their full structure. There is
some doubt whether the dental formula, 7, ©, p,, m;, as gener-
ally given, is correct; one cannot be positive, for the 4th and 5th post-
canine teeth are much mutilated; the characters of the condyle and
angle, however, separate this specimen clearly from
41
Real
, Proc.Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.1888.
ew”
ea,
acs
: Nn *V
- seen Nesiheeh ale
pany
yi
Tap me
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 303
examination of this locality, which is made comfortable for collecting
and wading during a partial exposure above water of some three
hours. All the dredgings were confined to depths within 16 fathoms,
which also represents the greatest sounding made by us in the la-
goons.
ACTINOZOA.
The true stone corals of the Bermudas are comprised, as far as we
now know, insome twenty-five species, the greater number of which are
represented by identical forms in the Bahaman or West Indian seas,
The genera thus far indicated are Oculina, Mycedium, Astrea,
Siderastrea, Porites, Isophyllia, Mwandrina, and Diploria. The
genus Madrepora, one of the commonest of the Bahaman and Flor-
idian corals, appears to be absent. On the south and east side of the
island group the outer margin of the growing reef, largely covered
bya serpuline and vermetus growth, approaches to within a few
hundred feet of the shore, where it breaks the inflowing surf into a
white crest. Within the line of these breakers the depth of water is
in places as much as ten or twelve fathoms. The brain coral (Diplo-
ria) and various gorgonians develop here in great profusion, the huge
yellow masses of the former appearing almost everywhere at depths
of from ten to twenty feet. Vast growths of millepore also cover the
shallower bottoms, presenting in the ensemble a wonderful garden of
animal development. This profusion of coral growth is, however,
surpassed on the north side, where the reef recedes to a distance of
some eight or nine miles from the island- shores, enclosing an exten-
sive body of water whose depth is in general about eight or ten fath-
oms, and more rarely twelve fathoms. Much the same coral growth
is indicated here as on the south side, the large brain corals pre-
ponderating by their masses. While, probably, the greatest profusion
of animal life is really met with on the actual edge of the growing
reef, this does not appear to be the case with the corals themselves.
At any rate, I was unable to satisfy myself that there was any marked
difference to be observed between the marginal growth and that which
extends gradually backward from the margin into deep water.
Indeed, as far as the brain-corals themselves are concerned, it ap-
peared to me that their largest masses were to be found some distance
within the bounding reef, and consquently beyond the breaking
action of the surf. This condition is again shown in the compar-
atively quiet and sheltered waters of Castle Harbor, where portions
of the platform-bottom may be said to constitute one almost conneet-
304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
ed mosaic of huge Diplorias. In so far, therefore, the Bermudas
differ from the greater number of coral islands, in which, as is com
monly stated, there is a marked deficiency in the coral growth
within the bounding area, and an equally marked luxuriance on the
crest and outer slope of the reef.
In most places the largest corals do not come nearer than a foot or
two feet of the surface of the water, the massive brain-corals rarely
appearing in water of less depth than five or six feet. But in the
shallows off the North Rock we found Porites astrwoides almost
at the surface in low water, and just off the entrance to Harrington
Sound, on the north shore, Siderastrwa galaxea was covered by only
about two inches of water. The borders of Harrington Sound are
largely overgrown with species of Isophyllia, which likewise approach
to within a short distance of the surface. In the greater depths of the
Sound we found only Oculina, down to ten fathoms, the dredge-net
being frequently caught and reversed by their ramose stems ; beyond
ten fathoms the dredge usually came up empty.
The following species were obtained by us:
Mycedium fragile, Dana.
Two specimens. North Rock?
Oculina diffusa, Lamk.
Harrington Sound.
Oculina varicosa, Lesueur.
Harrington Sound.
Oculina pallens, Ehrenberg.
Harrington Sound.
I feel satisfied that this species is identical with the preceding, the
same stock bearing what might be considered to be typical repre-
sentatives of both forms.
The amount of variation in the disposition of the calyces, as well
as in their individual shape, is very great in this genus, and I am
by no means sure that two or three of the other fotms of Oculina
here enumerated represent anything more than varietal modifi-
cations. Pourtalés, in his illustrations of the corals of the Florida
reefs (Mem. Mus. Comp. Zoology, VII, plates I and IJ) correctly
refers, it seems to me, both types to a single species (A. varicosa.)
Oculina speciosa. Edwards and Haime.
Harrington Sound.
Oculina recta, Quelch.
One specimen, from Harrington Sound, which agrees i the. special
characters of the species from St. Thamas (Quelch, Challenger
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 305
Reports, Zoology, XVI, p.51.) The species does not appear to have
been hitherto observed in the Bermudian waters.
Oculina coronalis, Quelch.
Harrington Sound. First described from the Bermudas (Challen-
ger Reports, Zoology, XVI, p. 49.)
Quelch, in his report on the reef-building corals of the Challenger
(op. cit., pp. 9 and 49), enumerates as an additional member of the
Bermudian fauna the Oculina Bermudiana of Duchassaing and
Michelotti. I have been unable to find anything in the description
or figures furnished by these authors (Supplément au Mémoire sur
les Coralliaires des Antilles, p. 162, pl. TX, figs. 1, 2—Memorie
della Reale Accad. Seienze di Torino, Ser. Sec., X XIII, 1866). to
distinguish their species from Oculina speciosa, nor does it appear
to me to be distinct. The characters upon which the form is sep-
arated are exceedingly trivial, and well within the amount of
variability which is presented by individual specimens of nearly all
the species of Oculina. I further believe that O. coronalis, and
possibly also O. recta, will have to be united with O. speciosa.
Isophyllia australis? Edwards and Haime.
Three specimens from the North Rock, doubtfully identified with
this species.
Isophyllia fragilis? Dana.
I am unable to satisfy myself as to the positive existence of this
species in Bermuda, although Quelch refers to a single specimen
having been obtained there by the Challenger party. This author-
ity doubtfully refers one of the forms figured by Pourtales (op. cit.,
pl. VII, fig. 3) as J. dipsacea to Dana’s species, but from an
examination of a number of Bermudian specimens which agree
absolutely with Pourtalés’s figure I am fairly convinced that this
identification is incorrect. The specimens do certainly not agree
sufficiently with Dana’s description, and if they are not the types of
a distinct species, then they represent probably only a certain phase
of development of I. dipsacea, as in indicated by Pourtalés.
Isophyllia dipsacea, Dana.
Three specimens, from Castle Harbor.
Isophyllia strigosa, Duchassaing and Michelotti.
A number of specimens, from Harrington Sound, which agree
with the description of this species. Iam doubtful as to the species
being distinct from Jsophyllia dipsacea ; possibly, however, some of
21
306 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
the varieties (so-called) of the latter species figured by Pourtalés are
really members of this species. Its principal distinguishing char-
acters appear to be the thinner and more irregular septa, and the
terminal cleft that indents or separates the septa of opposing calyces
where they cross the common wall. It also presents a more bristling
appearance than J. dipsacea.
Isophyllia Guadeloupensis, Pourtalés.
One specimen. This appears to be a good species, although by
Quelch it is referred to Isophyllia strigosa.
In addition to these forms Quelch enumerates Isophyllia (Sym-
phyllia) marginata, I. cylindrica, and I. Knozi, all of Duchassaing
and Michelotti, as having been obtained at the Bermudas, but I
have failed to detect any specimens among our collections which can
be confidently referred to these species. On the other hand, I find
one or two forms which I have not yet been able to identify with
any described forms.
Siderastrza galaxea, Ellis and Solander.
Abundant on the shoals of Gallows Island, near the mouth of
Flatts Inlet, where the colonies come to within about two inches of
the surface; also on the borders of Harrington Sound.
Porites clavaria, Lamk.
Two specimens, dredged in Harrington Sound.
Porites astreoides, Lamk.
We found this species very abundantly along the outer reef,
especially on the flats of the North Rock, where it is the dominant
form of coral. The species appears to have been overlooked by the
Challenger party, and indeed, the only reference that I have been
able to find indicating the occurrence of this common West Indian
form among the Bermudas is contained in Mr. Rathbun’s list of
the species of Porites in the United States National Museum (Proc.
U.S. National Museum, 1887, p. 354).
Meandrina labyrinthica, Ellis and Solander.
Three specimens, from the North Rock.
Meandrina strigosa, Dana.
This form is represented by large, sub-globose specimens, one of
which, obtained through purchase, and probably from Castle
Harbor, has an exceedingly attenuated base of attachment. The
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307
corallum is thus openly turbinate, or even pediculate, and exhibits
in regularly scalariform outline the successive stages of outward
development.
Diploria cerebriformis, Lamk.
This species is exceedingly abundant in the shoals lying to the
leeward of the marginal reef, where its huge hemispherical or reni-
form masses of bright orange, measuring as much as four or five
feet in diameter, can be distinctly seen through the transparent
waters at depths of from six to fifteen or twenty feet. I cannot say
how much further down the species extends. It is equally abundant
in Castle Harbor, where it is largely instrumental in building out
the shore-platform which, at a moderate distance from the shore,
descends vertically into deeper water. When attached by a con-
tracted base, the brain-coral may be readily removed from its moor-
ings; but where the base is largely co-extensive with the under-surface
of the corallum the difficulties of removal are very great, neces-
sitating much undercutting with a chisel. The largest specimen
obtained by us measured about 28 inches acrcess; our efforts to
dislodge a‘specimen about four feet in diameter proved unsuccessful.
Diploria Stokesi, Edwards and Haime.
We obtained a number of specimens of this species in Castle
Harbor and through presentation; for the latter my thanks are due
to Miss A. Peniston, of Penistons. The habitat of the species, as
far as I am aware, had not hitherto been noted. Edwards and
Haime in their description of the species (Hist. Nat. des Coralliaires,
II, p. 403, pl. D, fig. 3) state “ Patrie inconnue.” I believe it may
be assumed that this species is the form described and figured by
Knorr as Madrepora labyrinthiformis (Delicie Nature Selecta, I, p.
18, Pl. A 4, fig. 1). In our collections we have a closely related,
and possibly identical species, which assumes a ring form, and in
which the peculiar ecalycular hollows of D. Stokesi run out into
parallel transverse grooves on the inner side of the ring.
ALCYONARIA.
The gorgonians are abundant in the waters inside of the bounding
reef, whence nearly all our specimens were obtained. A few were
nipped up on the south side of Castle Harbor, and at the passage way
conducting from the north into that body of water.
308 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Rhipidogorgia flabellum, Valenciennes.
The purple variety of this species is abundant more particularly
in the northern waters, both near the outer reef and on the shallows
known as Devonshire Flats. We failed to obtain any of the yellow
forms, and I am not positive that this variety has ever been found
at the Bermudas. ;
Gorgonia (Plexaura) purpurea Pallas.
Gorgonia (Plexaura) flexuosa, Lamouroux.
This species, of which we obtained several specimens, is, I believe,
without doubt the Gorgonia anguiculus of Dana (U. 8. Exploring
Expedition, Zoophytes, p. 668). It is referred to under Lamouroux’s
name as a member of the Bermudian fauna in Dana’s “Corals and
Coral Islands,” p. 114, 1872.
Gorgonia (Plexaura) homomalla, Esper.
Gorgonia (Plexaura) multicauda, Lam.
( Gorgonia crassa, Ellis and Solander.)
(G. vermiculata, Edwards and Haime.)
The exact limitations and synonymy of this species are difficult to
make out, but as far as my studies have permitted me to analyze
the forms above indicated from the rather insufficient or deficient
descriptions that have been furnished by their authors, they appear
to represent an identical form. As such+as I have accordingly
referred them in this list.
Gorgonia (Plexaura) dichotoma, Esper.
A single specimen, measuring about a foot and three-quarters in
height, with the main stems somewhat over a half-inch in diameter.
Gorgonia (Eunicea) pseudo-antipathes, Lam.
One much branched specimen, and another, slightly differing,
which appears to belong to the same species.
Pterogorgia acerosa, (7) Pallas.
A single specimen of a large Pterogorgia, entirely stripped of
ecenenchyma, and measuring about two and a-half feet in height,
was obtained through purchase at the Crawl. The axial skeleton is
yellowish, or of the color of earth. The terete branches are much
more broadly spreading than in P. setosa, and unite into a common
basal stalk which is upwards of two inches in thickness. The pion-
ules are very numerous, exceedingly slender, and pendulous, giving
to the whole organism the decided appearance of a weeping-willow.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309
I have not been able to satisfy myself as to the exact affinities of
this species. It appears to differ broadly from the common purple
sea-feather of the West Indies, and does not have the depressed
branches which are assumed for Esper’s Pterogorgia acerosa. It is,
however, with little doubt one of the forms that are included by
Pallas in his Gorgonia acerosa (Quercus marina Theophrasti), and
may be the one that is referred to by Milne-Edwards as Pterogorgia
Sloane.
Of the species of gorgonians above enumerated Dana indicates
Rhipidogorgia flabellum, Gorgonia flecuosa, G. homomalla, and G.
crassa as coming from the Bermudas (“Corals and Coral Islands,”
p. 114). I find no mention in any more recent work of the occurence
there of either Gorgonia pseudo—antipathes or G. dichotoma. On the
other hand, we failed to obtain the Pterogorgia Americana mention-
ed by Dana.
ZOANTHIDA.
Of the zoanthoid forms of actinians we collected three species,
Palythoa (Corticifera) glareola, Lesueur, P. ocellata, Ellis and
Solander, and a species of Zoantha, closely related to Z. sociata, but
possibly new. The first of these species was found in large encrusting
masses at the North Rock, partially exposed at low water. The
glary white or yellowish crusts were nearly half an inch in thickness.
Palythoa ocellata also occurs, but more sparingly, at the same local-
ity; on the western exposure of Gallows Island, at the entrance to
Flatts Inlet, it was much more abundant, forming large patches in
association with Siderastrea galaxea. The species of Zoantha was
sparingly developed off Gallows Island, but in one or more rock-
hollows in Tucker’s Town Bay, Castle Harbor, the bright green
colonies of this beautiful polyp were plentiful.
ECHINODERMATA.
HOLOTHURIA.
The animals of this order are in places excessively abundant ; in-
deed, excepting the corals, they may be said to constitute the most
distinctive feature of the fauna of the sand bottoms. Where other
forms are apparently entirely absent, the black masses of the great
Stichopus stand out in prominent relief over the white bottom.
Motionless, seemingly, during the greater part of their existence,
these singular creatures present the appearance of big black blotch-
es on the’sand, of which they consume, whether for nourishment or
310 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
otherwise, vast quantities. All the individuals that were opened
had their intestinal canal, or more properly, their entire digestive
tracts, completely choked with calcareous particles.
The following are the species of holothurians observed by us,
only one of which, I believe, had hitherto been noted from the
Bermudas :
Holothuria Floridana, Pourtalés. (Holothuria atra, Jiger.) Pl. 14, figs. 6, 6a,
i, (a.
I identify with this species five small individuals of an olive-green
color which were obtained in Castle Harbor, and which in a general
way agree with the description of the species given by Pourtalés
(Proc. American Assoc., 1851, p. 12). Unfortunately, no figure
accompanies the description, and that part which pertains to the
calcareous bodies embodied in the skin is too vague to permit of spe-
cific determination. Selenka (Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zool-
ogie, Xvil, p. 324, 1867) has supplemented the original description
with further details of structure and with illustrations of the spicules,
which practically leave no doubt in my mind that the Bermudian
forms, even though differing somewhat from the type described by
Pourtalés, are really that species. I have examined the spicular
bodies of all the individuals, and find that they exhibit considerable
variation (Pl. 14, figs. 6, 6a,7, 7a). This is especially noticeable in
the form of the stools. I really doubt if very much dependence can
be placed upon these bodies as furnishing characters for specifle
distinction. I also find a certain amount of variation in the num-
ber of tentacles. Thus, while four of the individuals have the
normal number of tentacles, 20, one has only 10, although in all
other essentials of structure it agrees with the remaining four. The
dorsal surface is distinctly papillate. The elongated yellowish pedi-
cels of the ventral surface are irregularly distributed, as stated by
Selenka, and I could not determine ‘any strictly linear disposition
such as in indicated by Pourtaleés.
The largest specimen measures about two and.a half inches.
Semper, Ludwig, and Lampert (Die Seewalzen, Semper’s Reisen
im Archipel der Philippinen, 1885, p. 86) identify this species with
the Holothuria atra of Jager (1833), whose range is made to be
practically cosmopolitan—extending from the Radack Archipelago
and the Sandwich Islands to Adelaide, Zanzibar, the Red Sea, and the
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. dll
West Indies—but on this point I can offer no satisfactory evidence,
never having had an opportunity to examine authentic specimens of
Jager’s species.
Holothuria captiva, Ludwig. (PI. 14, figs. 4, 4a)
Two individuals, agreeing with the species described by Ludwig
from the Barbados.
Holothuria abbreviata, n. sp. (PI. 14, figs. 5, 8, 8a.)
Among the smaller forms of holothurians is one which in many
of its characters agrees most closely with Ludwig’s H. captiva, but
yet differs to such an extent as to compel me to recognize it as a
distinct species. Indeed, by many systematists it would probably be
made the type of a distinct sub-genus or genus. The distinguishing
peculiarity is the abrupt truncation of the body, which carries the
vent on the dorsal surface, immediately about the extremital border.
In the single specimen before me I could determine only 17 tentacles,
with as many tentacular vesicles, and but a single Polian body. A
large Cuvierian bundle is present. The pedicels are arranged ven-
trally in three more or less distinct rows. Color olive green.
Length about two inches.
The stools, buttons, and fenestrated plates of the pedicels are
figured on plate 14. It will be seen that in general they bear a close
resemblance to those of Holothuria captiva, but the rounded sum-
mits of the stools serve readily to distinguish them from the some-
what similar, but more strictly castellated, bodies of the other spe-
cles.
SEMPERIA,
Semperia Bermudensis, n.sp. (PI. 14, figs. 2, 2a, 3.)
Body cylindrical, spindle-shaped, tapering almost equally to both
extremities. Tentacles 10, of which 4 are shorter than the remain-
ing 6; pedicels crowded, arranged in five broad rows, and scattered
over the interambulacral areas; two genital bundles, with very
numerous non-divided, and greatly elongated filaments; two Polian
vesicles; two long respiratory trees. Color greyish white, minutely
speckled with brown; five narrow longitudinal brown bands sepa-
rating the ambulacral areas. Length about 33 inches.
Calcareous bodies consisting of baskets, knotted and smooth but-
tons, and perforated more or less circular disks; pedicels with fen-
estrated plates. Calcareous ring with long back processes for the
attachment of the powerful retracted muscles.
312 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF * (1888.
One specimen, from the north shore-about a half-mile west of
Flatts Village.
I first mistook this species for the Semperia (Colochirus) gemmata
of Pourtalés (Proc. Amer. Assoc., 1851, p. 11), described from Sul-
livan’s Island, coast of South Carolina, but the more exact descrip-
tions and figures of that species given by Selenka and Lampert
convince me that it is quite distinct. Both species are of a greyish-
white color, but no mention is made by either of the authors above
quoted of the existence in the Carolinian form of the five longitudi-
nal brown bands which extend over the entire length of the Bermu-
dian species. Apart from this, Semperia Bermudensis differs in the
disposition of the tentacles, the greater number of Polian vesicles,
and the character of the spicular buttons, which are in the greater
number of instances strongly knotted. The posterior processes of
the calcareous ring appear also to be much more elongated.
From Semperia (Cucumaria) punctata, described by. Ludwig from
the Barbados (Arbeiten aus dem zoolog. zootom. Instituts in Witre-
burg, ii, 1875, p. 82) the species differs, apart from the general
scheme of coloring—tentacles as well as body—in the different dis-’
position of the tentacles (9 equal in S. punctata. according to Lud-
wig), the smaller number of Polian vesicles (5 in S. punctata), and
in the much greater number of filaments composing the genital bun-
‘ dles. The vent does not appear to have been rayed.
Ludwig states that there are in his species no calcareous eeth
abou the anal aperture, whereas Lampert just as positively asserts
that they are present (Semper, Philippinen, 1885, p. 152). None
such were detected in the Bermudian form.
STICHOPUS.
Stichopus diaboli, n. sp. (PI. 15, Figs. 1, la. 1b, 2.)
Body stout, more or less quadrangular, flattened ventrally, and
bearing two rows of prominent marginal, wart-like, tubercles ;
sometimes two additional rows of minor tubercles are noticeable on
the lateral margins of the dorsum. Tentacles 20, unequal. Dorsal
papille scattered, not prominent, leaving the surface nearly smooth.
Pedicels and papille on ventral surface arranged in three broad
bands, which are more or less distinct for the entire length of the
body, but most distinct near the extremities; numerous in each
transverse row.
The body-cavity is largely occupied by the greatly developed, and
finely dissected, respiratory apparatus, and by the loops of the
_——
ll
a.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 315
variously branched genital organs, which are disposed in two
great bundles. Tentacular vesicles present. Two Polian vesicles.
Calcareous ring with long back processes.
Calcareous bodies in the form of stools very numerous (PI. 15,
fig. 16.) | C-shaped bodies very scanty, and possibly in some cases
entirely wanting.
Color black, somewhat more intensely so on the dorsal surface,
becoming Vandyke brown or chocolate in alcohol.
Length, about one foot; width of corresponding animal about
three inches.
Abundant over the sandy floor of the entrance to Harrington
Sound, opposite Flatts Village, in Harrington Sound, and in Castle
Harbor, whence it was obtained in several of our dredgings.
I have little doubt that this species is the dark-brown form
which is referred to by Théel as having been obtained by the
officers of the Challenger at the Bermudas, and which is doubt-
fully referred by that authority to Semper’s Stichopus Haytiensis
(Report on the Holothuroidea, Challenger Reports, Zoology, XIV,
p- 162.) But a single specimen appears to have been obtained,
which when examined was too deformed to permit of positive spe-
cifie determination. I cannot agree with Théel’s determination.
Apart from the differences which Théel himself points out, is the
great difference in coloring. Semper (Reisen, Philippinen, Holo-
thurien, 1868, p. 75) states that his species is dark chocolate-brown,
blotched with yellow spots, which form five longitudinal bands,
corresponding to the interradii. No such coloration is visible in our
species, although probably we observed as many as a hundred indi-
viduals, all of which were uniformly black. Semper’s description of
the coloring of Stichopus Haytiensis is restated by Lampert.
Stichopus xanthomela, n.sp. (PI. 14, fig. 1; Pl. 15, fig. 3.)
Body stout, flattened ventrally, and bearing on the basal margin
two rows (one row on each side, as in the preceding species) of prom-
inent wart-like processes. Tentacles 18, unequal, whitish or gray,
edged with brown. Dorsal papille fairly prominent, scattered.
Pedicels on ventral surface crowded, arranged in three longitudinal
series, five to eight, or more, in each transverse row.
Body-cavity, as in the preceding, largely occupied by the respira-
atory tree and the double genital bundle, the filamental processes of
the latter much finer than in S. diaboli. Tentacular vesicles present.
One (?) Polian vesicle.
314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF ~ [1888.
Caleareous bodies, in the form of stools (Pl. 15, fig. 3), very
numerous. C-shaped bodies scarce, in the form of broadly-opened
calipers. Ground-color reddish-yellow, irregularly blotched with
black or very dark brown. The spots on the ventral surface more
or less coalescent in the median line, forming there a broad longitud-
inal band, or entirely united to form a uniformly dark-colored
base; on the back, united into two irregularly ramifying or wander-
ing bands.
Length of longest specimen about ten inches; width about two
and a-half or three inches.
The same habitat as that of the preceding species, although appa-
rently much less abundant.
I strongly suspect that this is the form which Théel, in his report
on the Challenger holothurians (loc. cit., p. 159), identifies with
Stichopus Mébii (Semper), one specimen of which, “ rather deformed
and compressed” when examined by Théel, was obtained at the
Bermudas. I assume the identity in this case, as well as in that of
the preceding species, on the ground that the two species here de-
scribed are the characteristic forms of the archipelago, and it is
barely possible that they could have escaped the attention of the
Challenger people. But the identification with Semper’s species
appears to me to be erroneous. The resemblance to Stichopus Mobi
appears to rest almost wholly upon the form of the spicules, which
are largely similar in many very distinct forms of Stichopus, and in
a general scheme of coloring. But Semper distinctly states (Holo-
thurien, loc. cit., p. 246) that the characteristic spots are almost wholly
wanting on the ventral surface, and no mention is made of their
occurrence there by Lampert, in his revision of the species of the
genus (op. cit., p. 108.) Moreover, Semper affirms that the body is
devoid of wart-like tubercles, whereas such are quite prominent in the
Bermudian form, although not as prominent as in Stichopus diaboh.
Théel, however, makes no mention of the occurrence of tubercles in
his single specimen, but probably through contraction in alcohol
their existence had been effaced. The number of pedicels in each
transverse row seems also to be much more numerous in the Ber-
mudian species than in Stichopus Mobii.
Another apparently related form is Stichopus errans of Ludwig
(Arbeiten zoolog. zootom. Inst., Witrzburg, 1875, p. 97), described
from aspecimen in the Hamburg Museum, reputed to have come from
the Barbados. But in this species there appear likewise to be no
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 315
lateral tubercles, nor is the coloring like that of our species, although
in this regard there may be considerable variation. The number
of tentacles is stated by Ludwig to be 19, and their color yellow.
The form from the Barbados which is somewhat doubtfully referred
by Théel (oe. cit., p. 191) to Ludwig’s S. errans would seem to be
more nearly related to the Bermudian species.
ASTEROIDEA.
We obtained but a single species of star-fish on the Bermudian
coast. This is the Asterias Atlantica of Verrill, a form which had
already been previously noted from the Bermudas (Trans. Conn.
Acad. Sciences, i, p. 368), and whose range extends to the Abrolhos
Reef, Brazil. With very few exceptions the rays were either six or
eight in number, and of the total number of individuals examined I
believe that not over two had fivearms. The species exhibits a marked
want of constancy in ornamentation and coloring, the dorsal spines
being in some cases acute, while in others they are terminated by a
minute bead ; again, while the maculation is brown in some individ-
uals, in others it is blue, or of both colors combined.
Asterias Atlantica, Verrill.
Common in the entrance to Harrington Sound, opposite Flatts
Village—under stones ; dredged in Harrington Sound.
Ophidiaster Guildingii, Gray.
This species, which was first described from St. Thomas, is appar-
ently a member of the Bermudian fauna. A single specimen, marked
as having heen collected by Mr. Janney in the Bermudas, is in the
possession of the Academy of Natural Sciences.
OPHIUROIDEA.
Six species of ophiwrians were obtained in our dredgings and
under rock shelters, the greater number of which, as far as I am
aware, had not hitherto been reported from the Bermudas. For a
critical examination and review of the species I am indebted mainly
to my assistant, Mr. J. E. Ives, who has made a careful study of all
the species in the collections of the Academy of Natural Sciences.
From an examination of many of these forms I feel satisfied that
tov much dependence should not be placed upon the constancy in
minute details of either the form or relative size of the arm plates
and their appendages, nor upon an exact scheme of coloration.
These characters, and others that may be added, which have been
316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
drawn in very close limits by Mr. Lyman in his several memoirs,
vary materially within the limits of the same individual, and render
the discrimination of species which have been most “elaborately ”
defined as to exact lengths and breadths of the arm-shields and oval
plates, the precise form and number of the arm spines, etc., a mat-
ter of almost hopeless possibility.
Ophiocoma crassispina, Say.
One specimen, taken at low water from the North Rock, which
agrees perfectly with the species described by Say from the coast of
Florida (Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila. v, p. 147). This species is
generally considered to be identical with the Ophiocoma ( Ophiura)
echinata of Lamarck, but I am disposed to consider this identification
erroneous, unless, indeed, several distinct forms, as has been averred
by Miller and Troschel (System der Asteriden, 1842, p. 98), were
included by Lamarck in his species. Two distinct forms, closely re-
lated to each other, certainly do occur in the West Indies, one of
which, with more blunt arm spines, is clearly Say’s species, while the
other, with more elongated arm spines, and much less stoutly
developed uppermost spine, more nearly corresponds to the general
type of Lamarck’s species.
Ophiocoma pumila, Liitken.
A fragmentary specimen; exact locality unknown. This species
had been recorded by the Challenger from Bermuda.
Ophiostigma isacantha, Say.
Two very young specimens, dredged in Harrington Sound.
Ophiactis Krebsii, Liitken.
O. Mitlleri, Liitken ?
Two very young specimens, dredged on the north shore between
Bailey’s Bay and Shelly Bay, which manifestbhy belong to one or the
other of the above species, although partaking of the characters of
both. They agree with O. Avebsii in having a lobe to the outer edge
of some of the upper arm plates, and in the banded character of the
arms, while they differ from that species in having but four arm
spines. In this respect they agree with O. Milleri. Possibly the
two species are only varieties of the same form.
Ophionereis reticulata, Liitken.
Very abundant at low tide in the rock shelters of Shelly Bay ;
also under stones at the entrance to Harrington Sound.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 317
Ophiomyxa flaccida, Liitken.
One specimen, dredged in Bailey’s Bay.
. ECHINOIDEA.
The number of species of echinoids observed by us is six, of which
five had already previously been ascribed to the archipelago ; Cidaris
tribuloides, as far as I am aware, had not hitherto been collected—
at any rate I have been unable to find any mention of its occurrence
there. One species, Mellita sexforis, we did not ourselves collect, the
specimens in our possession having been kindly donated to us by
local collectors.
Cidaris tribuloides, Bl.
Fairly abundant among the coral shelters of the North Rock.
Diadema setosa, Gray.
This species, one of the gems among sea-urchins, is exceedingly
abundant in the flats about the North Rock, where, in magnificent
contrast to the wealth of color by which it is surrounded, its ebony-
black masses stand out in prominent relief from the coral shelters
which it inhabits. All the individuals occupied recesses in the coral
growth, which they had by some means probably managed to keep
open. It seems hardly likely that they should have crept into these
shelters after they had been already formed, and that the association
is one of mere selection. It isa noteworthy fact that while most of
the animal forms inhabiting this portion of the growing reef were
brilliantly colored, harmonizing with, and shielding, one another by
their party tints of red, yellow, purple, and green, these urchins were
alone conspicuous by the absence of any such protective cloak ; but
just in their case no protective guise in the form of coloring would
be needed, inasmuch as these animals are abundantly able to shield
themselves by means of their extremely attenuated spines.
This species is also abundant in the moderately deep water that
lies within the reef border.
Hipponoé esculenta, Leske.
North Rock, and the deeper water within the growing reef.
Echinometra subangularis, Leske.
Several specimens from the flats about the North Rock. There
is a certain amount of variation in the coloration of the spines,
which ranges from olive or sea-green to purple.
318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Toxopneustes variegatus, Lamk.
We found this species very abundantly in Harrington Sound,
where it rarely escaped being hauled up in our dredge. It seems to
frequent the calcareous bottom to a depth of 10-12 fathoms, or even
more. Probably the species is equally abundant elsewhere.
Mellita sexforis, Agassiz.
As before remarked, we did not ourselves obtain any specimens of
this species. It is said to be abundant along the calcareous bottoms
of some of the inlets, as, for example, opposite Flatts Village.
CRUSTACEA.
For the following notes on the Crustacea I am principally indebt-
ed to Mr. Witmer Stone, one of my assistants on the trip, who has
made a careful study of all our specimens, as well as of the allied
and identical species contained in the collections of the Academy of
Natural Sciences. In the case of in any way doubtful forms I have
personally satisfied myself as to the determinations, and particularly
in cases where the geographical range appeared to indicate possible
or probable error. The occurrence in the Bermudas of a number of
what had hitherto been considered to be distinctively Pacific or Old
World types, as for example, Palemonella tenuipes (Sooloo Sea), Pale-
mon affinis (Pacific), Peneus velutinus (Pacific)—may be considered
positive, even though it be opposed to the common facts of zoogeogra-
phy. But this anomaly in distribution is again repeated among the
mollusea, as will be seen in the enumeration of species in a future
paper.
The total number of species here enumerated is not very large,
but yet it is considerably in excess of the number published in any
previous paper, probably one-half of the species being now for the
first time credited to the Bermudas. The species of some of the re-
maining groups—the Isopoda, Amphipoda—still await analysis and
determination.
BRACHYURA.
Microphrys bicornutus, Latr.
Three females and one male, collected on the beach at the entrance
to Harrington Sound.
Mithraculus hirsutipes, Kingsley.
Two males and one small female, which agree in every way with
the description of the species given by Kingsley (Proc. Bost. Soe.
Nat. Hist., 20, p. 147), except in the number of teeth on the fingers,
ee eee” as
— sr
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 319
a character which appears to be very variable. The three individ-
uals differ in this respect among themselves.
Actza setigera, Milne-Edwards.
One male dredged off Shelly Bay. The individual differs from
the description given by Milne-Edwards (Now. Arch. du Mus.
@ Hist. Nat., i, p. 271, pl. xviii, fig. 2) in having the color of the out-
side ot the hands red, instead of black. It however agrees precisely
with specimens attributed to Milne-Edwards’ species in the collec-
tions of the Academy, and labeled as coming from the Florida reefs.
The species has also been recorded from Cuba.
Panopeus Herbstii, var. serrata, De Saussen.
Numerous small specimens, both male and female, from under
stones on the beach of St. George’s Causeway, and at the mouth of
Harrington Sound. The specimens vary greatly in color, some be-
ing very light, others dark brown, while a few are reddish; other-
wise they are identical in structure.
The species, described in the Hist. Nat. du Mexique et des Antil-
les (Crustac., p. 16, pl. 1, fig. 7), had previously been recorded from
the Bermudas.
Lobopilumnis Agassizii, Stimpson.
One small male, agreeing well with Stimpson’s description (Bull.
Mus. Comp. Zool., ii, p. 142) except in that it lacks the subhepatic
spine. Recorded from Bermuda and Florida.
Neptunus hastatus, L.
CN. dicanthus.)
Two small males.
Geocarcinus lateralis, Frem.
Numerous large specimens, from the banks and fields near the
southshore. We found them specially abundant near the locality
known as Spanish Mark or the Chequer Board, and again not far
from Peniston Pond. The burrows in places extend diagonally three
or four feet, or even more, beneath the surface, and the animals,
rapidly retreating into these, are frequently difficult of capture.
This is, doubtless, the species that is referred to by Willemoés
Suhm in the Challenger narrative as Gecarcinus lateralis, and is
apparently the G. lagostoma (?) described by Miers in the systematic
portion of the Challenger Reports (Zoology, X VII, p. 218), in so far
as this description applies to the single Bermuda specimen.
320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Nautilograpsus minutus, L.
One small specimen dredged off Shelly Bay.
Grapsus maculatus, Cateshy.
One large female, and numerous empty shells from Harris’s Bay,
south shore.
Pachygrapsus transversus, Gibbes.
Numerous specimens, including ovigerous females; very abundant
on the rocks about the mouth of Harrington Sound, and also on the
Pigeon Rocks, Bailey’s Bay.
Recorded from Florida, West Indies, Australia.
Cyclograpsus integer, Milne-Edwards.
One small female. Species recorded from Brazil and Florida.
Goniopsis cruentatus, Latr.
One female, from the mangrove swamp of Hungary Bay, south
shore. Although the species was very abundant at this locality we
only sueceeded in catching a single individual. The mangrove crab,
or “ mangrove climber” as the animal is sometimes called, burrows
among the thickets of mangrove stems and rovts, up which it not
infrequently climbs to a height of several feet. The great similarity
existing between its coloring aud that of the bright and partially
withered leaves of the mangrove, especially in the shades of yellow
and red, renders the animal difficult of detection, and often at a
distance of only a few feet, buried among the fallen leaves, these
agile creatures escaped observation, even when attentively sought
after. We have here one of the most remarkable instances of
protective coloring, or semi-mimicry, with which I am acquainted.
Sesarme cinerea, Bose.
Numerous specimens, from the beach of Flatts Village. The
species was seen almost everywhere scampering over the rocks.
Calappa fiammea, Herbst.
A single male individual obtained through purchase. Species pre-
viously recorded from the Bermudas.
ANOMURA.
Petrolisthes armata, Gibbes.
Five specimens, obtained on the beach of Flatts Village, appear to
be identical with the form described under this name from Florida,
(Proc. Amer. Assoc., 1850, p. 190.)
” otis sh
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. BH |
Cenobita Diogenes, Latr.
A number of living specimens obtained at Wistowe, opposite
Flatts Village, and kindly presented to us by Miss Edith Allen,
daughter of the American Consul. Most of the animals are still liv-
ing (October), and apparently flourishing, three months after their
capture. The shells occupied by the largest individuals are those of
Natica catenoides. ‘
Calcinus obscurus, Stimpson.
Several specimens obtained on the beach of Flatts Village.
Clibenarius (Pagurus) tricolor, Gibbes.
Numerous on the beach of Flatts Village and at the St. George’s
Causeway ; under stones, etc.
MACRURA.
Palinurus Americanus, Lamk.
We observed a number of specimens of the large Bermuda cray-
fish, but unfortunately obtained none. I am unable, therefore, to
state positively if the species is correctly referred, but in all prob-
ability it is the same as the common West Indian form.
Scyllarus sculptus, Milne-Edwards.
One specimen, purchased at the Crawl, which agrees with Milne-
Edwards’ description (Hist. Nat. des Crust., ii, p. 283) and Lamarck’s
illustration in the Encyclopédie, pl. 320. The locality of the origin-
al specimen appears to have been unknown, nor have I been able
to obtain data regarding this species from any of the later writers,
by many of whom it is entirely ignored.
Alpheus avarus, Fabr.
(A. Edwardsii, Audouin.)
(A. Bermudensis, Spence Bate.)
A series of some twenty specimens collected at the same locality
shows considerable variety of form. The smaller specimens are
evidently the A. Bermudensis of the Challenger Reports, while the
larger ones, agreeing with these in the ‘structure of the head, ete.,
more nearly approximate in the configuration of the hand A. avarus
and A. Edwardsii, the former a common Old World species, and
the latter, a species described from the Cape Verde Islands. Our
series contains what might be considered undoubted representatives
of all three (so-called) species, showing all the gradations that unite
or separate the forms from one another. Hence, I am constrained
22
322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
to look upon them as mere varietal forms of a single species, the A/-
pheus avarus of Fabricius. The older the specimens, the more
deeply grooved is in most cases the hand.
Alpheus minus, Say.
A number of species taken from sponges and tunicates collected
in Harrington Sound. All the individuals were of small size, meas-
uring rather less than an inch in length, although the females were
abundantly provided with eggs.
Alpheus formosus, Gibbes.
One specimen (dredged) which agrees well with Gibbes’ descrip-
tion (Proc. Amer. Assoc., 1850, p. 196), and seems to indicate that
the species is distinct from A/pheus minus, with which it is united
by Kingsley. The specimen is larger than any of the individuals of
A, minus, and is also differently colored, although appearing identi-
eal in alcohol.
Palemonella tenuipes, Dana.
Several specimens dredged off Shelly Bay, which agree perfectly
with the species described by Dana from the Sooloo Sea (U. 8. Ex-
ploring Expedition, Crustacea, p. 582). The remarkable distribu-
tion here indicated induced me to make a very careful examination
of the Bermudian species, which has left no doubt in my mind as to
the identity of the forms from the antipodal region of the earth’s
surface. The only other known species of Palzemonella, P. orientalis
(Dana), is likewise an inhabitant of the Sooloo Sea (Dana, op. cit. ;
Spence Bate, Challenger Reports, Zoology, X XIV, p. 786).
Palemon affinis, Milne-Edwards.
Numerous specimens from shallow water, Castle Harbor. All are
exactly like one another, except in the number of teeth on the beak,
which may be 8 above and 4 below, or in the relations of 8-3, 7-3,
9-3, and 9-4. This character is manifestly a very variable one, and,
therefore, of little or no value from a classificatory point of view.
The specimens agree well with the descriptions and figures of A.
affinis, although that species has hitherto been recorded, as far as I
am aware, only from the Pacific (obtained by Dana off New Zealand)
The species is near to the Eurafrican P. squilla, but yet sufficiently
distinct to permit of ready recognition as only an allied form.
It is remarkable, in view of the distribution and the number of
specimens that we obtained of this species, and the position of the
island group, that we should have failed to obtain any individuals
ces
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 525
of the common form of the eastern United States, Palemon vulgaris.
Whether the species is entirely absent or not I cannot of conrse say,
but it is surprising that it should not have been observed by us.
Penzus velutinus, Dana.
One specimen, which agrees with the figure and description of the
species obtained by Dana off the Sandwich Islands (U.S. Exploring
Expedition, Crustacea, p. 604), and which was subsequently collect-
ed by the Challenger party at various points in the Pacific, and be-
tween Australia and New Guinea (Challenger Reports, Zoology,
XXIV, p. 253). This species, as well as all the immediately related
forms, has, as far as I know, been found thus far only in the Pacific.
The case is, therefore, another example of remarkable geographical
distribution.
STOMATOPODA.
Gonodactylus chiragra, Latr.
One specimen from the beach of Flatts Village.
MOLLUSCA.
The enumeration of species of molluscous animals is left for a
future paper, as our collections, large as they are, are doubtless in
great part deficient. Through the kind energies of local collectors
I hope to supplement at an early day the material obtained by us,
and to present, as nearly as is possible, a full list of the species
inhabiting the Bermudian waters. We ourselves collected some 110
or 120 marine species, which is largely in excess of the number
that has thus far been chronicled in any list of Bermudian species,
but the examination of private collections in the islands satisfies me
that there must be an additional 30 or 40 species, or more, that are
common to the island group.
It is a well-known fact that the Bermudian molluscan fauna
is distinctly, and it might be said, overwhelmingly Antillean in
character, by far the greater number of species being found in
the Bahaman and West Indian Seas, or along some part of the coast
of Florida. The practically total absence of species of the Eastern
United States which are not found in the Floridian waters is aston-
ishing, and shows how insuperable is the barrier which the waters of
the Atlantic, and of the Gulf Stream particularly, offer to a free
migration or dispersion of the species. This, again, appears the more
remarkable in the light of certain anomalies of distribution which a
critical examination of the species reveals, and which had already
324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
in many cases been noted as a characteristic of the ‘West Indian
fauna. Thus, of the various species of Triton, Triton chlorostoma and
T. tuberosus are members of the Mauritian fauna, and Triton eyno-
cephalus and T. pileare of the fauna of the Philippines; Ranella
cruentata crops up in the variety R. rhodostoma, from Mauritius.
Again, Epidromus concinnus, from the Philippines, is represented in
our collections by a number of individuals which are absolutely
undistinguishable, both in shell ornamentation and color-markings,
from the Pacific specimens, although they differ somewhat from the
closely related EZ. Swijti, from Antigua. A number of other forms, com-
mon to the west coast of Africa and to the southern waters of Europe,
also occur. Among a number of American west coast species which,
I believe, have not hitherto been recorded from the Atlantic may be
mentioned Chama exogyra and Tellina Gouldii, both from the
Californian coast. In the case of both of these forms I have very
carefully satisfied myself as to absolute identity. Arca solida from
the west coast does not appear to differ measurably from A. Adamsii,
a West Indian form which has its representative in the Bermudian
fauna.
The following notes on new species are given in advance of the
publication of the full list.
CEPHALOPODA.
Cuttle-fishes are said to be abundant in the Bermudian waters, but
we were not very successful in our search after these animals. Two
moderately large octopods, which we could only see, but not obtain,
may possibly be the common’ West Indian Octopus vulgaris, or one
of the forms that have been separated off from it as a distinct species.
We made considerable efforts to capture one of these, but all
our attempts to dislodge the creature from its hold upon the interior
of a rock crevice were unavailing.’ The following species was ob-
tained beneath a stone on the beach of Flatts Village.
Octopus chromatus, n.sp. (PI. 16, fig. 1.)
Body spheroidal, somewhat acuminate behind, and impressed, but
not furrowed, ventrally; mantle opening extending about one-half
around the circumference of the body, and terminating some distance
below and back of the eyes. The head not much narrower than the
body ; eyes not conspicuous, with a wart above each; funnel largely
free, reaching about half way to the base of the web, which is about
as long as the body and head combined.
25
ee)
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
Arms longest as 1. 3. 2. 4, although possibly the second pair
outmeasured the third pair previous to contraction ; slender, very
tapering, and exceedingly attenuated toward the apex ; suckers fairly
large, closely placed, and in regular zigzag alternation from the base,
contracting with a quadrangular outline.
Body granulated posteriorly, and to a less extent in the region of
the neck. Color milky, closely blotched or speckled with ochre,
giving a yellowish appearance, and sprinkled with brown.
Length of specimen about nine or ten inches.
The only form with which I can closely compare this species is the
Octopus Bermudensis of Hoyle (Challenger Reports, Zoology, XVI,
p- 94, PI. II, fig. 5), which is described from a single young specimen,
measuring, including the arms, not more than two and a-half or three
inches. It differs from this form in the extremely tapering and
attenuated arms, their relative lengths (1. 3. 2. 4 instead 1. 2. 3. 4),
and in the disposition of the acetabula, which are in zigzag alterna-
tion from first almost to last; the body is also in part granulated,
and the siphon, instead of being attached for nearly its full length,
is largely free.
I should have hesitated perhaps in describing this as a new species,
distinct from O. Bermudensis, and preferred supposing that the
characters indicated by Hoyle were not very clearly marked, or that
they possibly represented only the immature form, but Hoyle dis-
tinctly states that while his specimen is probably immature, the
characters are so well marked as to safely permit of their recognition
as typical of a new species (op. cit., p. 95).
GASTEROPODA.
Aplysia equorea, n. sp. (Pl. 16, figs, 2, 2a, 2b).
Body broadly oval, with a moderately elongated neck ; tentacles
cylindrical, slit at the extremity; buccal lobes broad, infolded ;
mouth between fairly developed lips; aperture to opercular cavity on
a slightly raised papilla.
Color drab or greenish; exterior surface with thin black annula-
tions and irregular markings. which are few and scattered ; the inside
of the mantle-lobes, as well as the cover to the opercular cavity, al-
most free of blotches.
Shell narrowly-elongate, somewhat oblique, and calcareously lined ;
longitudinally radiated, and transversely finely striated.
Length of animal about four and a-half inches.
A single specimen, found in shallow water on the south side of
Castle Harbor, opposite Tucker’s Town.
326 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
The nearest ally of this species is probably the Aplysia ocellata of
D’Orbigny, from the Canary Islands, or the common A. dactylomela,
from the eastern Atlantic, of which the former is by some authors
considered to be only a local variety (Rochebrune, Nouvelles Archives
du Muséum, 1881, p. 264). From both of these forms, apart from
other characters, it differs in the absence of the heavy ocellation, and
from A. dactylomela in lacking the purple lining on the mantle
margins. From A. ocellata, again, it is clearly marked off by the
non-maculated surface of the interior of the mantle lobes and of the
opercular covering. The shell in the Bermudian form is compar-
atively narrower than in any other large species of Aplysia with
which I am acquainted, and wholly different in outline from that of
either of the two species above referred to. I have fully satisfied my-
self on this point through an examination not only of the figures
furnished by Rang and D’Orbigny, but of actual specimens.
Dobson, in a communication made before the Linnzean Society of
London (Journ. Linn. Soc., Zoology, xv, p. 159, et seq., 1881), iden-
tifies a specimen of Aplysia from the Bermudas with the A. dacty-
lomela, and describes the color as being “a rich drab, marked all
over with circles and streaks of velvet black, the latter most abund-
ant on the mantle covering the shell and on the lateral swimming
lobes. The shell agrees in all respects with that of A. dactylomela as
figured by Rang, and the only difference observable is that the mar-
gins of the swimming lobes are not tinged with violet. This might
be accounted for by supposing that such a fugitive color had disap-
peared in the alcohol, but the captor does not remember to have
seen it in the living animal.” This may be the true A. dactylomela
or A. ocellata, but it is, doubtless, distinct from the species above de
scribed. Tam confirmed in this supposition by the examination of a
specimen recently collected by Prof. Dolley inthe Bahamas, and which
has been placed in my hands through the kindness of Prof. Leidy. This
Bahaman form has the massive ocellation and blotching distinctive
of A. ocellata or A. dactylomela, and further agrees with these two
species (or varieties) in the form of the shell. The stellate opening
to the opercular cavity appears to be destitute of a papilla. This is
the form, probably, that Mr. Dobson received through Surgeon R.
Vacy Ash.
Deshayes described some years ago an Aplysia, ocellated and of a
yellowish color, from Guadeloupe (Journal de Conchyliologie, 2d. ser.,
ii, p. 140) under the name of Aplysia Schrammii, but the species is
ad
et
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 327
so imperfectly characterized that it is almost impossible to determine
its exact relationships.
Chromodoris zebra, n. sp. (PI. 16, figs. 3, 3a.)
Animal of the form typical of the genus; head portion consider-
ably extended and expanded in motion ; caudal portion moderately
elongated ; base flattened; mantle beaded immediately over the tail.
Color bright blue above, variously lined and streaked with light
yellow; on the dorsal surface the yellow markings are disposed in
longitudinal wavy or nearly straight lines, one or more specially
prominent lines along the dorso-lateral border. Sides of animal ir-
regularly reticulated or angulated with yellow markings; under
surface pale blue, bordered with faint yellow.
Rhinophores deep indigo or black, the rhinophoral aperture border-
ed with yellow; gills 12 or 13, black, bordered with yellow, and carry-
ing blue cilia; under surface of head blue, with yellow spots.
Length, when expanded, three and a-half inches.
Three specimens, dredged in about ten fathoms on the north side
of Harrington Sound. I dissected one of these and found that the
stomach is lodged entirely within the mass of the liver. The ali-
mentary canal is sharply deflected forward (dorsally) beyond the
buccal or cesophageal tracts, and is caught up in a nerve ring pro-
ceeding from the supra-cesophageal ganglia.
This species appears to be third or fourth of the genus found in
the western Atlantic. It differs clearly from the C. picturata of
Morch (C. Mérchii, Bergh, Mus. Godef., part xiv) and C. gonatophora
of Bergh, two West Indian species. In the scheme of coloring the
species appears to be nearest to Doris pulcherrima of Cantraine (Mat-
acologie Méditerranéenne, p. 57, Pl. 3, fig. 6, = D. Villafranca? of
Risso), from which, however, it differs in a number of details, such
as the number of gills, ete.
Onchidium (Onchidiella) trans-Atlanticum, n.sp. (Pl. 16, figs. 4, 4a.)
Body convex, smoke color or dark olive ; lighter, dirty or greyish
green on the under surface ; pedal disk considerably more than one-
third the width of base, yellowish green; mouth margin papillose,
bunchy; under surface obscurely or obsoletely tuberculose ; dorsal
surface closely verrucose, with finer granules interspersed between
the warts.
Ahal aperture immediately beyond the extremity of foot, infra-
margina! to a raised border; respiratory orifice between the anal
pore and the apex of body.
328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Length about three-quarters of an inch.
About a dozen specimens, found in a rock hollow on the north
shore just beyond Wistowe, near Flatts Village, at an elevation
of about two feet above the water.
This is, as far as I am aware, the only species of Onchidium that
has thus far been recorded from the western Atlantic. Its occurrence
is, therefore, of considerable interest as bearing upon the subject of
geographical distribution. Nearly all the species of the genus are
confined to the Eurafrican and Indo-Pacific waters, although one
species is known from Arctic America, one from the Californian
coast, and one from the west coast of South America (Bergh,
in Semper’s Reisen im Archipel d. Philippinen, Land Mollusks,
VI).
The Bermudian species appear to be most nearly related to
O. Carpenteri, from the Californian coast, but differs from it in color.
The positions of the anal and respiratory apertures differ from what
is indicated by Stearns (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1878) to
exist in the west American form, although agreeing with the deter-
minations made by Bergh for manifestly the same species.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 329
NOVEMBER 6.
The President, Dr. Jos. Lerpy, in the chair.
Forty-nine persons present.
NovEMBER 13.
Mr. Coarues Morris in the chair.
Thirty-six persons present.
A paper entitled “Contributions to the Life History of Plants
No. III.” By Thomas Meehan, was presented for publication.
’
NOVEMBER 20.
Rev. Henry C. McCook D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Twenty-four persons present.
The President was directed to convey to Mrs Clara Jessup
Bloomfield Moore the thanks of the Academy for her gift of Five
Thousand Dollars as an addition to the fund endowed by her father,
the late Augustus E. Jessup.
NOVEMBER 27.
The President Dr. Jos. Lerpy, in the chair.
Thirty-four persons present.
Dr. W.S. W. Ruschenberger read his biographical notice of the
late Geo. W. Tryon Jr. prepared at the request of the Academy.
Remarks on the fauna of Beach Haven, N. J—Prof. Lerpy stated
that he had spent the last two summers at Beach Haven, on which
he made the following remarks: The place, a summer resort, is
situated on the island of Long Branch, a sand bar but a few feet
above the ocean level, 22 miles long and little more than half a mile
wide, off the New Jersey coast, from which it is separated by Little
Egg Harbor and Barnegat Bays. The island consists of the ocean
rea flanked by long low sand hills and meadows extending to the
bays. It is treeless s, but produces frequent patches of wax-myrtle,
Myrica cerifera. While the variety of marine anjmal life in the
vicinity is comparatively small, a few forms adapted to the special
localities are abundant. The ocean beach consisting mainly of fine
silicious sand without pebbles, between tides, swarms with the mole
330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
crab, Hippa talpoidea, and the little mollusk, Donaz fossor. Above
tides, the beach oft-times is lively with sand-fleas, among which are
conspicuous the Talorchestia macrophthalma, and less commonly the
T. longicornis. Still higher extending to the sand-hills, the sand-
crab, Ocypoda arenaria, is frequent. The mud of the bays and
sounds swarms with the scavenger snail, I/yanassa obsoleta, while
the meadows abound with the marsh snail, Melampus bidentatus.
The borders of the meadows are thickly planted with the horse-
mussel, Modiola plicatula, or are honey-combed by the fidler crab,
Gelasimus pulgilator. The bays supply the market with abundance
of the oyster, which is extensively cultivated for the purpose. The
clam, Venus mercenaria, also occurs in the greatest abundance, and
is constantly gathered for the market. The squirt-clam, Mya
arenaria, is likewise suppiied from mud flats of the bays. The
edible crab, Callinectes hastatus, often occurs in the bays in great
numbers. The previous summer, the bottom appeared to swarm
with them, but the last summer they were less numerous, in conse-
quence, as the fishermen report, of great numbers having been de-
stroyed by the severe cold of last winter. In a visit to Beach
Haven, in February, I observed many recently dead crabs thrown
up on the ocean beach, and feasted on by multitudes of the isopod
crustacean, Cirolana concharum.
The previous summer also, the lady-crab, Platyonichus ocellatus,
was frequent on the ocean beach near low tide, but during last sum-
mer was almost absent. It probably, also suffered from the cold of
last winter, for in February, at Atlantic City, I found a number
recently dead, and likewise feasted on by the Cirolana.
In the bays the spider crab, Libinia canaliculata, the shrimp,
Palaemonetes vulgaris, and the hermit crab, Pagurus longicarpus,
are in abundance, and the P. pollicaris is not infrequent. The
shrimp is infested to a wonderful degree with a parasitic crustacean
Bopyrus palaemoneticola. The horse-shoe crab, Limulus polyphem-
us also occasionally occurs on the ocean beach.
The sand of Beach Haven is remarkably sonorous; when scraped
in walking, it emits a sound like that produced by sliding a rubber
shoe on the pavement.
The condition of the ocean beach varies with the direction of the
winds and violence of the waves. Mostly, it is remarkably uniform
and free from organic debris, and is composed of fine, white quartz
sand without pebbles, and with streaks and patches of black sand,
which from its greater specific gravity is incessantly sifted from the
white sand by the winds and waves. On one occasion, during the
prevalence for several days, of a strong north-east wind, the beach
above high tide was covered with a broad stratum of black sand
from a fourth to an inch thick, over which the white sand was
blown like columns of smoke and accumulated at the base of the
sand hills where it looked by contrast like snow drifts. The organ-
ic debris cast ashore mostly consists of materials carried out from
the bays, commonly, masses of eel-grass, Zostera marina, and bunch-
4
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. B01
es of bladder-wrack, Fucus vesiculosus; the latter often attached to
a horse mussel, on which the plant grew. Frequently attached to
the plants are various animals, especially Bugula turrita, Obelia
commissuralis, Perophora viridis, Lepas fascicularis, ete. Occasion-
ally there are thrown ashore a live beach-clam, Mactra solidissima,
a dead shell of the same with attached branches of Sertularia argen-
tea, the collar-like sand egg-cases of Natica and the chaplet ones of
Fulgur. In the experience of two summers medusae were rarely
wafted ashore, and these were in fragments and pertained to Cyanea
arctica and apparently Aurelia flavidula.
Goose barnacles, Lepus fascicularis occasionally are not infrequent;
and more rarely JL. anatifera, attached to fragments of timber, is
thrown on the sands. High up on the beach, at the base of the
sand-hills and often extending into the valleys between them are
multitudes of bleaching shells, the remains of occasional severe
storms. Most of the shells are those of the beach clam, Mactra sol-
idissima, which, everywhere’on the open coast of New Jersey, ap-
pears to be the most common lamellibranch, except the little Donax
fossor. The younger shells of the Mactra are often observed along
shore, with a circular hole through the umbo, made by Natica.
Some years since, at Atlantic City, I observed a number of beach
clams, in the sand between tides, which were in possession of Natica
heros in the act of boring the shell.
Among the occasional shells on the beach, fragments of large ones
of Pholas costata are not infrequent, and yet an experienced clam
catcher, who is familiar with the ordinary animals of the locality
informed me that he had never found a living one.
My friend Joseph Willcox and I made several attempts at dredg-
ing in Little Egg Harbor, but with very little result of interest.
Near the mouth of the bay, we drew up great quantities of Mytil-
us edulis, less than half grown, accompanied by many star-tishes,
Asterias arenicola. In some positions we took numerous dead shells
of the oyster and clam, Venus mercenaria, preyed upon by the sul-
phur colored boring sponge, Cliona sulphurea. This, after drilling
and tunneling the shells in all directions, continues to grow into
masses from the size of one’s fist to that of the head, in which condi-
tion it is known to the clam-catchers as the “ bay pumpkin.” The
skeleton of this sponge is constructed of calcareous pin-like spicules.
It also attacks and preys on the shell of the living oyster, but ap-
pears not to do so on the living clam. The sedentary habit of the
former, no doubt, facilitates its attacks. The shells of the oyster
and clam, Venus, bored in a sieve-like manner, and freed from the
sponge, are frequently thrown on the ocean beach, and with them
rarely the shell of a Mactra bored in the same manner, but I could
not ascertain whether the Cliona lived on the shore of the open
ocean.
Another sponge frequently observed growing on living oysters
and on dead shells of the same and of the clam, Venus, is called by
the catchers the “red beard,” Microciona prolifera. It is bright
332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
vermilion color when alive, but brown when dead, and masses of it
in the latter condition are often found on the ocean beach. It isa
silicious sponge and does not prey on the shells of mollusks.
From an oyster bed we took up some young oysters, an inch to
two inches long, with the shell perforated by the “‘ drill,” Urosalpina
cinerea. The perforation, made in the vicinity of the adductor mus-
cle, about admits an ordinary bristle. An oyster catcher, James R.
Gale informed us that the “drill” was introduced into the locality,
with spat brought from the coast of Virginia. With the Urosal-
pinx we took another snail, Anacliis similis, which Mr. Gale assured
us was more destructive, as a borer, to young oysters than the form-
er. Another snail which we took, the Eupleura caudata, Mr. Gale
says has the same habit.
Attached to oysters were also found a great profusion of the poly-
zoon Vesicularia dichotoma.
Of the mollusca of the vicinity of Beach Haven I observed the
following :
GASTERPODA.
Ilyanassa obsoleta. Exceedingly abundant.
Melampus bidentatus. Exceedingly abundant.
Fulqur cariea.
Fulgur canaliculata.
Natica heros.
Natica duplicata.
Urosalping cinerea.
Eupleura caudata.
Anachis similis.
Bittium nigrum.
Crepidula fornicata.
Crepidula convexa.
Crepidula plana.
LAMELLIBRANCHIATA.
‘Mactra solidissima. Exceedingly abundant.
Donax fossor. Exceedingly abundant.
Venus mercenaria. Exceedingly abundant.
Mya arenaria. Abundant.
Solen americanus. Common.
Tagellus gibbus.
Ceronia deaurata. One dead specimen.
Cochlodesma carum.
Thracia leana. One dead specimen.
Cyclocardia borealis. One dead specimen.
Astarte undata.
Astarte castanea.
Petricola pholadiformis.
Pholas truncata.
Pholas costata.
Cyclas dentata.
y
a]
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 393
Scapharea transversa.
Arca pexata. Common.
Arca transversa.
Mytilus edulis. Abundant.
Modiola plicatula. Exceedingly abundant.
Pecten irradians. Common.
Anomia glabra. Abundant.
Ostrea virginiana. Exceedingly abundant.
Teredo navalis.
Of Crustacea the following were observed :
Callinectes hastatus.
Platyonichus ocellatus.
Cancer wrroratus.
Ocypoda arenaria.
Gelasimus pugnax.
Gelasimus pugilator.
Libinia canaliculata.
Panopeus Sayi.
Pinnotheres ostreum.
Eupagurus pollicaris.
Eupagurus longicarpus.
Hippa talpoidea.
Gebia affinis.
Palaemonetes vulgaris.
Orchestia palustris.
Orchestia agilis.
Talorchestia longirostris.
Talorchestia macrophthalma.
Gammarus ornatus.
Unceiola irrorata.
Caprella geometrica.
Erichsonia attenuata.
Cirolana concharum.
Bopyrus palaemoneticola.
Livonica ovalis.
Lepas fascicularis.
Lepas anatifera.
Timulus polyphemus.
The Turret Spider on Coffin’s Beach—Dr. Henry C. McCoox
remarked that he had spent July and August, 1888, at Annisquam,
Mass., a port of Cape Ann at the mouth of the Squam river where it
enters into Ipswich Bay. The eastern shore of the bay opposite
Annisquam consists in part of a stretch of sand hills, known as
Coffin’s beach. The sand is of a beautiful white color and is massed
at places in elevations of considerable height, constituting what is
known as the “saad hill,” or “the dunes.”” The fragrant bay bush
grows in clumps along the edges and summits of these irregular sand
elevations, and this is intermingled with patches of tough grass.
334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
At his first visit to this beach he discovered several burrows of
Lycosa arenicola Scudder, popularly known as the Turret spider.’
Subsequently he explored the field and found numbers of these
Lycosids domiciled in the sand and spread very generally over
the dunes. They came down very close to the high water mark.
Thirteen burrows were found quite near together, seven in a circle
of six feet in diameter. Most of these burrows were about half an
inch in diameter. Two were Jocated within twelve inches, and sev-
eral others within two feet of the edge of the sandy ridge which
marks the point of highest tide. The tubes vary in size and depth.
Some are scarcely larger than a quill, some, indeed, not much larger
than a good big darning needle. These were occupied by young
spiders. The adult spiders occupy burrows in the sand about twelve
inches or less in depth; the younglings make holes four inches deep
or less.
In digging for spiders Dr McCook began to remove the sand ten
inches or more from the opening of the burrow. Thus the dry sand
immediately surrounding dropped away into the excavation, leaving
the silken tube which lined the burrow adhering to the grass stalk
or twig which he had inserted within it. The burrows proved to be
silk-lined for » space of from four to seven inches, the lining however,
being of a very thin texture, not like the tough silken tube with which
the Trap-door spider lines her nest, or which the Purseweb spider
erects along the trunks of trees. Below that point the burrow enters
into the sand unlined. The top of the sand is quite dry, but the
bottom part, wherein the lower portions of the burrows are made,
was invariably found to be damp, and of course closely packed, so
that it was not very liable to fall into the excavation. A litle cir-
cular ridge of sand ordinarily surrounds the opening of the burrow,
but he saw in no instance anything like the tower of straws and sticks
which this spider builds in the meadows and fields of New Jersey,
Pennsylvania and other points where it has been observed. The
drifting of the sand before the wind seemed to have little or no effect
upon the burrows which were always found quite open and free around
the mouth. Heavy rains which fell during the season had no appre-
ciable effect upon the burrows or their inmates although the tubes
must often have been filled with water.
The spiders captured were all of a light hue as compared with the
same specimens found in our vicinity. Specimens almost identical
with these were found by Dr. Joseph Leidy in the sand at Beach
Haven, New Jersey; and this pale coloring appears in all other littoral
specimens examined. The influence of environment, manifest in the
lighter coloring of this spider, was also seen in a grasshopper or locust
which is quite abundant on Coffin’s beach. It is almost as white as
* Psyche, vol. II, p. 2, 1877.
2 Emerton (“ New England Spiders of the Family Lycoside” Trans. Conn.
Acad. vol. vi, 1885) describes the species as Lycosa nidifex Marx, for what reason
he does not state. Scudder made the spider known in 1877; Dr. Marx gave his
description in the ‘*‘ American Naturalist’? May 1881]. The priority is undoubtedly
with Scudder’s name.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 335
the sand over which it was found hopping. These grasshoppers
probably furnish food for the spiders, but the only remains of animal
food found within the burrows were those of a large brownish
beetle, several specimens of which were picked up on the beach.
Among the other denizens of the beach are ants of a small species
whose nests are well nigh numberless. They are made in the sand,
but it seemed that the little creatures must have considerable difh-
culty in preserving their galleries and rooms from continual destruc-
tion by the caving in of the incoherent particles. However, they do
manage it, although in digging to find the character of their galleries
the speaker could not so manipulate the sand as to prevent it from
tumbling into the formicaries and thus hindering him from studying
of the interior. He did not know what the ants feed upon, although
he found some of them engaged at the carcass of one of the brown
beetles above alluded to, and no doubt the flotsam of the sea thrown
upon the beach affords them abundant material for food. He made
a number of visits to these sand dunes both by day and night, pro-
longing his stay to a late hour in the evening in order to discover
something of the outdoor habits of the colony of Turret spiders, but
succeeded in learning very little that is new.
A lady artist who with some companions was sketching upon the
beach, (for Annisquam is a favorite field for painters,) informed Dr.
McCook that about dusk a large spider was seen moving over the
sand towards the water. Supposing this to be one of the above colony
the question at once arose, do they come down from the dunes to the
wide fiat stretch of beach, that is covered at flood and that is uneov-
ered at ebbtide, in order to prey upon the sea life that may be left
at the retiring of the waters? Two afternoons and nights were spent
from five until nine and ten P. M.endeavoring to solve this prob-
lem, but without any results. He then tried another method. Visit-
ing the beach in day-time he captured a couple of mature spiders ;
placed them upon a smooth stretch of clean sand and permitted them,
and when necessary compelled them by prodding, to move over the
7 surface. They left upon the sand a
é
peculiar track which is here roughly
represented by two sections taken
} t y {, from different parts of the trail.
oJ td * Having made a careful sketch of
° * ? these foot prints he returned early
« e § next morning and made a careful
ch i ys examination of the beach for a con-
r <<. # siderable distance along the shore.
Many tracks of various kinds of creatures, including such insects
as beetles and grasshoppers, and also of some small vertebrate
animals, were found.
But by far the greatest number were tracks which correspon-
ded precisely with those made on the previous day by the captured
Arenicolas. Multitudes of these were seen upon the sand covering
the surface and slopes of the hills and extending to the very border
336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
of the surf line. They traversed the ground which had been cover-
ed by the tide, but which for a considerable distance is there exposed
at the ebb. These foot-prints could be traced everywhere as issuing
from and returning to the burrows which he had marked by flagging
the grass stalks in their neighborhood. It was thus demonstrated, in
this indirect way, that the narrative of his artist friend was correct,
and that the Turret spiders do issue from their burrows during the
night and perhaps at other periods and traverse the sandy flats, no
doubt in search of prey. One half grown spider was captured while
wandering on the flat.
These ‘spider tracks were in themselves an interesting study, and
Dr. McCook expressed regret that he did not sketch a longer consec-
utive series. The motion of the feet was so rapid that he could not
determine the order in which they were placed down, nor identify the
mark made by any particular foot. The scratch in the figures he
thought might have been made by the spinnerets at the apex of the
abdomen trailing i in the sand.
Dr. CHARLEs S. DoLtiey had observed similar tracks upon the
sandy beach of Lake Ontario, near Rochester, which were made by
the same spiders that dwell in that vicinity. He had found the spi-
ders sheltered under the drift on the very edge of the shore whither
they had doubtless gone in pursuit of prey or to drink.
Messrs Auguste Sallé of Paris, Louis Bedel of Paris and Dr.
David Sharp of Wilmington, England were elected correspondents.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
EXPLANATION OF Puatses IX, X, XI.
The lettering is the same on all the figures.
A. Anus.
Agl. Anal Glands.
B. Bladder.
Cl. — Clitoris.
F. Fallopian Tube.
k. Kidney.
| ml. Miillerian Ducts.
: MG. Mammary Glands.
0. Ovary.
R. Rectum.
S Scrotal Pouches.
Sr. Supra-renal Capsules.
| t: Testicle.
) iw: Urethra.
Uge. Urogenital Canal.
Ure | Wreter:
Ut. Uterus.
V. Vagina.
W. = Wodllfian Ducts.
Corrections. Page 189, line 19, omit “and.”
Note, line 3 from bottom for “altenus” read “alternis,”
for “alteris” read “alternis,” for “foemias” read ‘‘foe-
minas.”’
So
aes
= w
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA., 1888 PLATE XIX
# hy,
(=
PLL |
UHHH ‘}
\ |
Witihy
+I
ce
SMA
Sat
WAN
Wy
SAN ay
AA
SRR a
WAN Nas N\A \\\ \ x Ni
WACHSMUTH AND SPRINGER ON CROTALOCRINUS '
y}
att
ra
ier re HS
HEH
Wiis
reeytti
perrprriniiri
bt hraae
sae
Ties
ij a
roe
oe
sesh he oi
RAGE ae
?
rrennipye es
LL ST
Lites.
ana Ke
SS AY
nF
eS
>
LL LI eee
wy
a fal n 5 \
AAS
n
PLAS AS
ra ainn nian int
‘
APs
oo
oo
~]
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
DISCOVERY OF THE VENTRAL STRUCTURE OF TAXOCRINUS AND
HAPLOCRINUS, AND CONSEQUENT MODIFICATIONS IN
THE CLASSIFICATION OF THE CRINOIDEA.
BY CHARLES WACHSMUTH AND FRANK SPRINGER.
Since the publication of our paper “on the Summit Plates of
Blastoids, Crinoids and Cystids, and their Morphological Rela-
tions,’ * we have made several important discoveries bearing on this
subject, which have materially modified some of the views expressed
therein, as well as at some places in the Revision of the Palzeocri-
noidea.
Hitherto we have recognized in the summit of the Palzeocrinoids
a central plate, surrounded by four large proximals and two small-
er ones, with anal plates interposed between them. In our earlier
writings we regarded the two small proximals as representing pos-
teriorly a fifth plate; but these, as we have explained (Revision Pt.
III, p. 47), are really the two posterior radial dome plates, pushed
in by the anal structures, the three other radial dome plates being
placed at the re-entering angles of the four larger proximals. This
was clearly pointed out on Pl. VII, in figures 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, and
on Plate VIII, figs. 1, 3, in which the plates formerly considered as
the smaller proximals were marked as actinal radials, and designated
by the letters “xr.” In fig. 7, Pl. VII, they correspond to, and prob-
ably are, the first or inner covering pieces of the ambulaecra. After
discovering that these plates are situated radially and not inter-
radially, we met with frequent difficulty in identifying the two small-
er proximals, and mistook for them some of the plates which we
now clearly see are anal pieces. In some cases, and especially in
very complicated forms, we observed intercalated between the prox-
imals, touching the central piece, certain plates which we regarded
as the representatives of the first and second radials of the dorsal
cup, absent in the vault of simpler forms; while we considered those
underneath which the bifurcation of the ambulacra takes place—
being the radial dome plates in the simpler forms—as the representa-
tives of the third or axillary radials.
From the internal structure we found that the radiation of the
ambulacra was from underneath the central plate, in a similiar man-
ner asthe ambulaera from beneath the five orals in the Neocrinoidea,
1 Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, March, 1887.
23
398 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
and it was this, principally, that led us to the supposition that the
central plate, and this only, represented in the vault of the Palzeoeri-
noids the five orals collectively, and that the four large and two
smaller proximals were interradial vault plates, corresponding to the
interradials of the abactinal side (Rev. III., pp. 44-59). The latter
was contrary to the views originally expressed by us (Rev. LI, pp. 15
and 16), when we supposed that “the six proximals surrounding
the central plate represented the basals or genitals.” “The great
objection to this interpretation was that it involved a homology
between six plates and five, and we were so greatly impressed with
the force of it, that we were afterwards led to consider these plates
as interradials, as to which on the dorsal side a division of the pos-
terior interradial into two plates by the interposition of an anal
plate is a frequent occurrence in Palocrinoids. It seemed to us
therefore very natural that a similar division of the posterior plate
should be found on the ventral side.
Dr. P. Herbert Carpenter, like ourselves, recognized a central plate
and six proximals, but he regarded the former asthe actinal representa-
tive of the dorso-central or terminal plate of the column in the Pen-
tacrinoid larva, and established for it the term “oro-central,” as a
distinct element in the vault of the Palseocrinoids, unpresented in
other Echinoderms. He adopted the theory that the surrounding
six proximals are the homologues of the basals, and as such are the
oral plates—he considering that the posterior one was divided by
anal plates into two. His views on this subject are fully set forth
in the Challenger Report on the Stalked Crinoids, pages 158 to 184,
and the same interpretation of the plates in question was reasserted
by Etheridge and Carpenter in the Catalogue of the Blastoidea in
the Geological Department of the British Museum, pages 66 to 75.
Although this conception of the morphological relations of the
proximals agreed with the ideas we originally entertained, as before
mentioned, we found ourselves unable to reconcile it with the diffi-
culty arising out of a homology of six plates which surround but do
not cover the oral center, with a set of five closed oral plates which
cover the mouth. This objection did not exist as to the central
plate which covers the oral center, and it seemed to us, therefore,
more reasonable to regard that plate, though undivided, as the re-
presentative of the ftve orals, than to consider it an entirely new ele-
ment in Echinoderm morphology, which the so-called “oro-central”
of Carpenter certainly was. Our theory of the relations of the sum-
—_
SS
.
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399
mit plates, in conformity with these ideas, was discussed in the Re-
vision of the Palzocrinoidea, Part. III, pages 44 to 59, and after-
ward in greater detail in our paper on the Summit Plates, above
referred to.
Another consideration which strongly influenced us in adopting
this view was the supposed presence of a central plate in Haploeri-
nus, to which considerable importance was attached both by Car-
penter and ourselves in our discussions of the oral question, though
leading us to very different conclusions. On page 56, Revision,
III, we said: “A far less objectionable interpretation of the central
plate than that given by Carpenter would be to regard it as a pos-
terior oral. In this case the orals would be represented by five
plates, and not by six; the anus would be placed outside the oral
ring, and the radial dome plates would occupy the same position to-
ward the orals as the calyx radials toward the basals. But it would
place the mouth underneath the posterior oral, and it offers no ex-
planation of the central piece in Haplocrinus.”
This theory seemed to us at that time very plausible, and we
should have advocated it, if it had not been for the central plate
in Haplocrinus, which we discovered, as we supposed, in a speci-
men of H. mespiliformis, our observation being verified by Carpenter,
to whom we sent the specimen for examination, (Challenger Report,
‘page 158).
When we took up a year ago, the investigation of the Larvi-
formia, the group to which ‘Haplocrinus belongs, we had before us
the original specimens of H. clio from New York, and found
ourselves unable to discover any suture between the so-called central
plate, and the posterior vault plate, and we began to suspect there
was something wrong about the central plate. During a visit of one
of the writers to Europe in the winter of 1887-8, he procured in the
Eifel mountains a very large series of good specimens of H. mes-
piliformis, with a view to ascertaining if possible the real fact about
the central plate, and also the anal opening which was fully as great
amystery. These specimens at once disclosed the fact that the
“central plate” is a myth, and that what had before been taken for
it was simply a more or less tongue-like or polygonal prolongation
of the posterior plate, sometimes surmounted by a small node—the
“knopf” of Goldfuss. We had mistaken a fracture in our original
specimen for a suture on the posterior side, and have seen another
in which a similar mistake might have been made if one had that
|
540 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
specimen alone. The real structure of the vault of Haplocrinus is
as follows: The five triangular plates composing the ventral pyramid
meet in the center by sutures which are often difficult to see. The
posterior plate is the largest, and projects in between the two postero-
‘lateral ones, completely separating them, and interlocking with the
antero-lateral plates by a variety of plans, from a simple zigzag suture
to a triangular or dovetailed insertion, or a long slender tongue ex-
tending into the latter plates, which are cut away to fit it (Pl. X VIII,
figs. 6° and 62). This projection stands sometimes at a lower level
than the other part of the plate and the adjoining plates, leaving a
depression in the center which is sometimes partially occupied by a
small node. In other eases a high ridge runs from the posterior
plate over the central space, branching to the two antero-lateral
plates (Pl. XVIII, fig. 6®.). It thus appears that the whole ventral
surface in Haplocrinus is covered by five large plates which meet in
the center as in Allagecrinus.
The anal opening in Haplocrinus has not heretofore been correct-
ly identified, but it has been generally claimed to be located at the
suture between two radials and the posterior vault plate. In the
Revision III, pp. 157 and 162, we alluded to a small pore we had
observed in one specimen of H. mespiliformis, the position of which
is indicated in fig. 1,on Pl. V, of that work. We afterward became
satisfied that this pore was due to chemical action, or some im-
perfection in the test and was not organic, as subsequent examina-
tion of a very large number of specimens of the same species, better
preserved, failed to disclose any opening in that position. After we
discovered that the so-called central plate was nothing but a pro-
longation of the posterior vault plate, it became easy to distinguish
that plate in the specimens, and we began a careful search upon that
side, from the radials up, for the anal opening. We soon found a
small, scar-like opening or pit, with a slightly thickened and well
defined rim, situated just within the upper angle of the triangular
depression on the posterior plate (Pl. XVIII, fig. 62). A similar
structure was observed in a large number of specimens, varying in
form from that above described to a small tubercle in which no
opening could be detected. It was always in the same position, and
we have been unable, after the closest examination, to discover any-
thing like it upon either of the other four plates in any of the
specimens. We ground down a number of specimens on the pos-
terior side, and in every one found that this was an actual opening,
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341
piercing the plate, in a similar manner, and in the same position as
the anal opening pierces the deltoid in Orophocrinus, and we could
not find on these ground specimens, any indications of another open-
ing lower down. ‘These facts led us to the conclusion that the above
described opening must be the anus, and that it was probably closed
by minute pieces as in Orophocrinus. We think it quite probable
that the tubercular elevation which appears in several of the speci-
mens, may represent the closed condition, the plates being too small
to be distinguishable, especially in fossils whose preservation is so
peculiar that the suture lines between the large vault plates are
often invisible.
So long as the central plate in Haplocrinus was recognized, we
saw good reason to believe in the existence of a similar plate in
other groups of the Palzeocrinoidea, especially as a plate similarly
situated over the center of radiation was so conspicuous a feature in
the vault of many different genera. But after it became evident
that no such plate in fact existed in Haplocrinus and allied forms,
the idea recurred to us that the plate, so apparently central in
many Platycrinidae and Actinocrinidae, might after all be the pos-
terior oral, pushed inward to a central position by anal structures,
which we had formerly suggested. With the objection arising out
of the supposed condition of Haplocrinus removed, this interpreta-
tion seemed to us to be one of the greatest force, more likely than
any other to answer the conditions of a valid homology, and to
obviate the principal objections urged by Carpenter and ourselves,
respectively, to other theories.
Upon comparing the summit plates of the Platycrinidae and
Actinocrinidae, it will be seen that the so-called central plate is
always inserted between the four large proximals, so that in most
cases it occupies, more or less, the center of figure, being enclosed on
the posterior side by anal plates, and abutting against them. In
Dorycrinus (Pl. XVIII, fig. 2), an enormous development of the
central plate is shown. In Agaricocrinus (Pl. XVIII, fig. 3), the four
proximals have been separated from it by the intercalation of other
1 Upon our communicating to Dr Carpenter several months ago our observations
upon Haplocrinus as above set forth, he informed us that Prof. Beyrich, of Kerlin,
had independently discovered the same facts, both as to the construction of the
ventral pyramid, and the location of the opening- which we consider to be the anus,
and that Beyrich also regards this as the anal opening, while he (Carpenter) thinks
it an open question whether it be the anus or a water pore, in which latter case
the anus would remain undiscovered.
j
342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1888.
plates; while in the later Talarocrinus (Pl. X VIII, fig. 7) they seem
to have disappeared entirely, leaving only the central plate, from
which the covering plates to the ambulacra pass directly out. In
forms like Batocrinus (fig. 5), and Eretmocrinus (fig. 10), where
there is a strong, nearly central anal tube, we find the central plate
resting against, and forming the base of the tube, and the four prox-
imals pushed far over to the anterior side, and greatly displaced.
In some forms of Platycrinus the central position of the posterior
plate is well marked (Rev. III. Pl., VII, figs, 5, 6, 7, 8, and PI.
VIII, fig 6), varying somewhat in degree. Some recently acquired
specimens of this genus exhibit most clearly a transition from a
centrally located plate surrounded by proximals and anals, char-
acteristic of the foregoing figures, to a set of five nearly equal
plates, occupying the center of figure in the vault, and from whose
five re-entering angles the ambulacra pass out to the arms, as shown
by the beautiful specimen in fig. 15, (and also by figs. 4, 8, and 9).
In all these cases it will be observed that the posterior plate is in-
serted between the four proximals to a greater or less extent, sepa-
rating the postero-lateral ones, so that the five plates meet in the
vault in a manner substantially similar to the five plates composing
the ventral pyramid of Haplocrinus. No one who is acquainted
with the structure of palaeozoic crinoids will doubt that the five
unsymmetrically arranged plates in the vault of Dorycrinus, Batoert-
nus, ete, are structurally identical with the five nearly equal plates
centrally located in the specimens of Platycrinus above mentioned.
And it will be seen at once that all the disturbance observable in’
different degrees in these various forms was primarily caused by
the anal structures, which pushed the plates—especially the posterior
one—out of their primitive position. Regarding these five plates as
the orals, it will be found that the five radial-dome-plates lie within
the re-entering angles all around, and that the two rings of plates
thus correspond exactly in their relative position with the basals and
radials upon the dorsal side in the Crinoidea, and the genitals and
oculars in the Echini.
The above interpretation of the plates meets with no serious diffi-
culty from a morphological point of view. The only objections
occuring to us that might be urged against it are: 1. that the mouth
would be situated beneath the posterior oral; and 2. that some
species of Tularocrinus and Dichocrinus have in the summit in place
of five orals a single very large plate, from underneath which the
<=
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343
ambulacra pass out to the rays. The first of these objections, which
was raised by us already in Revision III, p. 56, is readily explained
if we suppose that the posterior oral was pushed inward over the
mouth by the plates connected with the anus, and that this became
a constant character in palaeontological time. The presence of a
single large central plate in Tularocrinus, etc, may be accounted for
by resorption of the four anterior orals, the posterior plate actually
performing the functions of all. It might also be possible that this
large platé in these forms represents the whole oral pyramid, five
plates coalesced, in a similar manner as the basals in some instances
at the dorsal side.
These considerations were quite sufficient to convince us that the
five orals of Neocrinoids were represented in the Palaeocrinoids by
both the central plate and four large proximals taken together ;
thus in a large measure reconciling the conflicting views of Carpen-
ter and ourselves upon this question—the orals being found at last
to consist of a portion of the proximals which he has claimed, with
the addition of the central plate which we have contended for.
This rational result, as often happens in such cases, adopts what was
sound, and rejects the errors in the views of both parties.
The evidence which we had obtained was entirely satisfactory to
us, and we were prepared upon the foregoing facts to announce our
final conclusion, as above stated, when we made a most unexpected
discovery, which in our judgment not only settles the oral question
in conformity with these views beyond all controversy, but bears so
strongly upon questions of classification, that it may justly be regard-
ed as one of the most important discoveries ever made in palaeozoic
crinoids.
In the Ichthyocrinidae the ventral structure has been hitherto
almost totally unknown. Some small plates had been seen on the ven-
tral side in a few instances, apparently belonging to a plated integ-
ument, but not in a condition to afford much information, and its
real nature has been a matter of conjecture and theory. We have
been of the opinion that it was a vault, covering a subtegminal
mouth and ambulacra, but pliant, yielding to motion in the calyx
and arms; while Carpenter believed that it was a disk paved by
plates as in some of the Neocrinoidea. It was evidently of the most
fragile construction, and this, together with the fact that in this
family the arms are generally found closely folded and firmly im-
pacted over the vault, was strongly against the probability of ever
b44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
finding the ventral covering in place. We had seen, however, in’
some specimens of Tuxocrinus from the Kinderhook beds at Le
Grand, Iowa, that there was an integument of some kind taking
the form of pouches along the ventral side of the rays, and_ this in-
duced a faint hope, in view of the unusually fine preservation of the
fossils at that locality, that something more might eventually be
found out about it.
On the 9th of August last, we made an excursion to Le Grand,
for the purpose of obtaining some needed material for our work on
the Crinoids of North America now in progress. Upon arriving at
the station we met Mr. George Cull, the agent of the Chicago and
Northwestern Railway, to whom we were already indebted for many
favors. While exhibiting to us some interesting fossils collected
by him in that vicinity, he produced a specimen of Taxocrinus with
the greater part of the rays broken off. We saw at once that it had
the ventral covering preserved in place, though largely imbedded in
a matrix of exceedingly fine calcareous mud. Upon being inform-
ed that the specimen possessed especial value as throwing light upon
important scientific questions, he presented it to us, with the re-
mark: “I will donate it to Science.’ For the valuable assistance
he thereby afforded us he has our grateful thanks, and in this we are
sure that every naturalist who is interested in the morphological
study of Echinoderms will join us.
Although we saw at once that there was an integument of very
small pieces, with covered ambulacral furrows running toward some
large plates in the center, it was not until we had with great labor,
and the most delicate manipulation, cleaned the specimen from the
fine adherent matrix. that we discovered the extraordinary fact
that it has an external mouth, surrounded by five parted oral plates,
with the ambulacra converging to it and passing in between the orals.
The specimen belongs to a species which we have described and
figured for the 8th volume of the Illinois Geological Survey, now in
press, as Tazxocrinus intermedius. It represents a form of Taxo-
erinus in which there is a strong tendency toward the free and
spreading rays of Onychocrinus, to which genus, indeed, we were for
some time inclined to refer it. Several specimens of it have been
found before, but all of them had the arms closely folded, and were
more or less flattened by pressure. This individual, exceptionally,
was deposited with the rays well extended and without any flatten-
ing, leaving the ventral side in an almost natural position. Most
hl
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345:
of the rays are broken off a little above the first bifurcation, so that
the whole structure is plainly visible, and, except in one or two
places, is in the most perfect condition (Pl. X VIII. figs. 12 and 1°).
The ventral surface is covered by an integument of very small,
irregular plates, attached to some larger plates within the dorsal cup,
and the marginal plates along the free rays, forming in connection
with the latter along the rays pouches or sacs which extend far up
along the arms, being traced in other specimens to the second and
third bifurcation. Along the median radial portions of this integu-
ment rest the ambulacra, which pass from the middle of the disk to
the rays, following their bifurcations. There are two rows of sub-
ambulacral pieces, transversely elongate and alternately arranged,
forming the floor of the groove. The groove is bordered by side
pieces, and roofed over by two rows of interlocking covering plates,
which seem to have been moveable, as they are open in several places
in the specimen,—indeed they appear to be mostly in that condition.
The anterior ambulacrum is perfect, with the covering pieces in place,
and slightly gaping. In the right antero-lateral ambulacrum the
covering plates and side pieces have slipped off from the subambu-
lacral plates, and lie interradially to the left of them, but are other-
wise not much disturbed. In the other three ambulacra the covering
pieces for the most part are gone, leaving only the floor with the
subambulacral plates in position. The plates covering the interpal-
mar areas are also well shown in the specimen at three sides; at the
two others the integument is not intact, and the plates lie scattered
upon the surface. When one sees the exceedingly frail character of
this covering, he may well wonder at the exceptional good fortune
by which it is preserved in this specimen, and will not expect to find
it soon again.
The central region is occupied by five rounded or very obtusely
polygonal plates, interradially disposed, rather elliptic in outline.
The two antero-lateral plates are tolerably good-sized, and the
postero-lateral ones slightly smaller. All four of them have a con-
siderable thickness, extending downward below the level of the
ambulacra, and also rising somewhat above it. The posterior plate
is nearly three times as large as any of the others, and almost twice
as long as wide, extending well in between the two postero-lateral
plates.
The relative positions of these plates are exactly like those of the
five plates at the summit of the forms of Platycrinus illustrated on
346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Plate X VIII, figs, 4, 8, 9,10, 15, except that they do not meet in the
center, but leaveaslightly excentric, obtusely pentagonal oral opening,
transversely elongated, its longest side next to the posterior oral plate.
Into this opening, which is deep, and contains at the bottom some
dark-colored substance, converge the ambulacra, their lips turning
downward at the five corners. They enter between the five plates,
touching them, and completely separating the visible portions of
those plates from each other. Whether there is any lateral projec-
tion beneath the ambulacra, by which they come in contact again,
cannot be seen, but from the form of the exposed portions we should
think not.
That the five plates around the center, although somewhat unequal
in size, represent the five orals of the recent genera Rhizocrinus,
Hyocrinus, and Holopus, and that the integument of small pieces is
a disk and not a vault, nobody will deny after seeing the specimen.
And a comparison of the parts in Taxocrinus with the summit plates
in Platycrinus, Actinocrinus, etc, leaves no room for doubt that these
are likewise orals. In the posterior interradius (Pl. XVIII, fig. 1,
c), there is a small lateral appendage or proboscis composed of a row
of rounded quadrangular plates gradually tapering upward. This
appendage is supported by a small anal plate, which rests upon the
right upper corner of the posterior basal and the right posterior
radial, both of which are somewhat indented to receive it. The ap-
pendage seems to be attached by its inner side to the integument, and
there are to the right of it, within the posterior interradius three
small tapering ridges composed of very small plates, which look like
branches from it; upon close inspection, however, they are seen to be
folds in the perisome, into which they are incorporated at their upper
ends, in a similar manner as the row of larger plates. Atthe upper
end of the appendage there are a great many minute pieces closely
packed together, and we think it probable there was an opening at
this point. In the two other specimens (Pl. X VIII, figs. 1b, and 1d),
the structure is more clearly shown. Neither of them has supple-
mentary ridges or folds, and it is plainly seen that the large plates
composing the proboscis are bordered by numerous small pieces, by
means of which they are connected with, or incorporated into the
perisome. The upper end of the appendage is rounded off, and stands
well out from the perisome, but we have been unable to ascertain
from the specimens whether it is perforated by a canal, or solid as in
the remarkable recent genus Thaumatocrinus, which in the structure
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 347
of its posterior side bears a striking resemblance to the form under
consideration. From all that we can see on our three specimens, and
some examples of Onychocrinus exsculptus, in which a similar set of
plates and parts of the perisome are preserved, we do not believe that
there was a second appendage in the disk as in Thawmatocrinus, but
think that the row of large plates supported the anus. The shape
of the visible portions of the disk varies in the three specimens, and
it is evident that the whole perisome was pliant and could be expand-
ed or contracted.
A similar integument has been found between the rays in Taxocrinus
robustus W. and Sp. from the same locality, a new Taxocrinus from
the St. Louis limestone, and in Onychocrinus asteriaeformis from the _
Burlington limestone. In a specimen of Onychocrinus diversus
lying on the ventral side, and from which we removed the basal and
some of the radial plates, giving an inner view from below, we can
see in two rays the alternating subambulacral plates converging near
the center, but not the orals nor any part of the perisome. In one
of Onychocrinus exsculptus we find remnants of the perisome and
traces of the oral plates, however not in position. The last two
specimens are those mentioned by us in Revision Pt. I, p. 32, on
one of which we based our statement (Rev. I, p. 5+), under Onycho-
crinus, that “in the median portion of the vault there are six rather
thin but large apical dome plates”, which we were afterwards in-
clined to modify, as we could not make out satisfactorily the ar-
rangement of the plates (Rev III. pp 20, and 67). In several speci-
mens of the last named species we have seen the anal appendage,
with the integument extending either way to the rays, and the
same thing was long ago observed by Meek and Worthen (Geol.
Rep. Illinois., Vol. ITI, p. 494.).
It is thus evident that the ventral covering of Tuxocrinus consist-
ed of perisomic plates with external mouth and food grooves, and
five oral plates, surrounding the mouth and separated by the ambu-
lacra. We have now very little doubt that the structure thus dis-
covered is substantially that of the Ichthyocrinidae generally, and
that the ventral side of the calyx in this family is morphologically
in the condition of Thaumatocrinus, and similar to that of Hyocrinus
and Rhizocrinus.
Although we have heretofore entertained a different opinion, we
yield most cheerfully to the proofs, and we are heartily glad to be
the means of bringing to light one substantial fact to take the place
348 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
of theories, even though some of our own views suffer in consequence.
We also take pleasure in bearing this testimony to the soundness of
Dr. P. H. Carpenter’s views as to the nature of the ventral covering
in the Ichthyocrinidae. He always considered that this family rep-
resented an approximation to the Neocrinoids, and that the integu-
ment was comparable to a disk and not to a vault.
This discovery is also a confirmation of the opinion always insist-
ed upon by us, as a conclusion necessarily following from the struct-
ure of the calyx and arms, that the ventral covering of the Ichthyo-
crinidae was pliable, yielding to motion in the calyx and arms, and
emphasizes the distinction between this group and other Palaeozoic
Crinoids based on the summit structure, as pointed out by us at the
beginning of our writings (Rev. I, p. 5), although, we admit, to a
higher degree than we ever anticipated.
Recurring now to the orals, it is easy enough to understand from
the structure of Taxocrinus how a set of five equal plates, symmet-
rically disposed over the mouth as in the larva of Antedon, could be
so altered by the presence of anal structures, as to bring the mouth
beneath the posterior plate. . It is readily conceivable, that by the
encroachment of the anal plate, the posterior oral was pushed to a
central position, and remained permanently in that condition. The
transition from five unequal to five equal orals through such forms as
Platycrinus (Pl. XVIII, fig. 15), seems also quite apparent. The
fact that the covering plates of the ambulacra in our specimen rest
against the lateral edges of the orals, is contrary to the observations
heretofore made among recent crinoids in which orals have been
observed. In all of them the ambulacra pass in at their outer mar-
gins, and the plates are parted so as to form open slits. In the
Camarata the orals remain closed, and the ambulacra,—when ex-
posed at all,—with their food grooves closed, enter the vault on or
before approaching the orals.
We therefore consider the evidence entirely conclusive that the
homologues of the five oral plates of the young Antedon and the
adult Holopus, Hyocrinus, Rhizocrinus and Thaumatocrinus are to be
found in the so-called central plate and four large proximals in all
Camarata in which these are developed—the two smaller proximals,
heretofore considered as the equivalent of a fifth, being anal plates.
The question now naturally arises, what are the morphological
1 Challenger Report on the Stalked Crinoids, pp. 42, 181 and 182, and else-
where.
s
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 349
relations of the ventral plates in Haplocrinus, in view of the discov-
ery that it has no central plate? Those plates meet in the center,
and cover the mouth substantially in a similar manner as the five
orals in Platycrinus; being, however, more alike in form and size,
and more regular in their arrangement. They also closely resemble
the five orals of the Pentacrinoid larva of Antedon, but, unlike
them, are suturally connected with one another as well as with the
radials. The plates also occupy the position of the five interradials
of Cyathocrinus and the deltoids of the Blastoidea; resting like the
latter upon the limbs or upper extensions of the radials.
We have heretofore contended, against the views of Carpenter
and others, that the ventral plates of Haplocrinus are interradials
and not orals, believing the latter to be represented by the “central
plate,’ which we took to be the homologue of the so-called central
plate of Actinocrinidae and Platyerinidae.
It would seem to follow naturally that with the elimination of the
central plate from the question, the chief objections to considering
the five summit plates as orals, which impressed us so strongly
before, would now be removed. A serious morphological difficulty,
however, is still found in the position of the opening which we
suppose to be the anus. This, as we have already described, pene-
trates the middle portion of one of the vault plates—a structure not
found in any other known Crinoid, either in the adult or larval
state. The position is the same as that of the anus in the deltoid of
the Blastoid genus Orophocrinus, which complicates the case still
more.
It is further a fact that in the lowest Silurian Camarata inter-
radials are more profusely represented than among Carboniferous
forms, frequently extending over the whole ventral surface of the
calyx, while the orals apparently are unrepresented. From this it
would seem. to follow that if Haplocrinus represented a larval form
of the Palaeocrinoidea, the plates in question could not be orals, or
the structure would appear to be at variance with the palaeontolog-
ical development of the group.
For these difficulties we are unable at present to offer any ex-
planation, but nevertheless we admit that there are very strong rea-
sons for regarding those plates as orals. They present a striking
resemblance to the five plates composing the unopened oral pyramid
of the Pentacrinoid larva before its separation from the radials
by perisome, and there are unquestionably very strong grounds
300 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
for considering Haplocrinus and allied genera as larval forms.
Taking into consideration all the facts as now disclosed, and espe-
cially the non-existence of a central plate, we must admit the weight
of the evidence is in favor of the supposition that the ‘plates cover-
ing the ventral surface in Haplocrinus, and Allagecrinus are orals,
and that these orals are permanently closed in the Haplocrinidae
without the assistance of interradial plates. In accepting this as
probably the correct interpretation of those plates, we now recognize
also in Symbathocrinus and Pisocrinus five large orals as covering
the greater part if not all of the ventral surface, more or less similar
to those of Haplocrinus, though with a very different anal arrange-
ment in Symbathocrinus, and probably also in Pisoerinus.
A still broader question remains to be considered, viz: the effect
of the late discoveries upon the classification of the Crinoidea, gener-
ally. In proposing the Palaeocrinoidea as a distinct order of the
Crinoids, we considered the presence of a subtegminal mouth, and
the closed state of the food-grooves. as the most important char-
acters by which they were distinguished from Mezozoic and more
recent forms. But it is evident that since the discovery of an open
mouth in the Palaeozoic genus Taxocrinus, we can no longer by this
means separate the earlier from the later crinoids. Carpenter did
not agree with us as to the importance of the subtegminal mouth,
and he proposed to separate the Palaeocrinoids from the Neoeri-
noids principally upon other features which he discussed in detail in
the Challenger Report on the Stalked Crinoids, pages 149-155. A
slight examination will show that all these other characters meet
with so frequent and important exceptions in both groups, that it
is not safe to depend upon them.
According to Carpenter, in the Neocrinoidea underbasals are re-
presented rarely, in the Palaeocrinoidea frequently (Challenger
Report, p. 149). | Several years ago we discovered that there is a
regular alternation in the arrangement of the successive parts of
crinoids below the radials, which furnishes a most important guide
for distinguishing between monocyclic and dicyclic crinoids, by the
structure of the column and cirri. It was stated on page 7 of the
Revision, Part I1I,—with a most unfortunate transposition of terms
in printing, which we corrected on page 294,—and which may be
graphically expressed by the following sketch :—
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301
|
| Dreyelic. Monocyclic.
|
_ |
1. | Basals. | Interradial. Interradial.
|
2. | Underbasals. Radial.
3. | Column.’ Exterior angels of. Interradial. Radial.
Column. Sections of. Interradial. Radial.
4. Column. Sutures. Radial. Interradial.
Column. Sides. Radial. Interradial.
Column. Cirri when present. Radial. Interradial.
| Column. Axial canal. Radial. Interradial.
We have found this rule to be without exception among palozoic
crinoids, and upon the strength of this, and an examination of the
column of such Neocrinoids accessible to us as possessed an angular
column, or cirri, we came to the conclusion, as stated in the Revision
III, p. 8, that “probably many Neocrinoids either possess small
underbasals, or these were present in their larval form.” We became
more and more of the opinion that the Neocrinoids, for the most part,
were built on the plan of dicyclic crinoids, and we again stated (Rev
III, p. 71), that “all Neocrinoidea, or at least the most of them, in their
larval state may have possessed rudimentary underbasals, hidden by
the column.” On pages 294-299, we discussed this question more
at length, and stated our conclusion to be (p. 298) that “either the
rules which meet with no exceptions among Palaeocrinoidea, as far
as we know, do not hold good for the Neocrinoidea, or the genera to
which we alluded, and which are built otherwise upon the plan of
dicyclic crinoids, really possessed rudimentary underbasals during
life, as Extracrinus and certain species of Millericrinus, or that
perhaps underbasals were present in their larva. The ventral surface
1 Our observations respecting the column were naturally restricted to species
in which the stem and axial canal are angular, and in alluding to the sections and
sutures of the column we refer to species with a pentapartite stem. In cases in
which only basals are visible, and the angles of the stem are interradial, underba-
sals invariably are present beneath the column.
34500 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
of the centro-dorsal in some species of Antedon is almost identical
with that of the top stem joint of Millericrinus; the plate is also
interradial (Pl. 6, fig. 11), and rests, as in the Apiocrinidae, against
the outer face of the basals, not within the basal ring. It is similar
in other Comatulae, in all of which the centro-dorsal is interradial,
and upon this, mainly, we base the opinion that perhaps also the
Comatulae in their early larva had rudimentary underbasals. That
these plates if present were not observed, is not surprising, as they
may have been very minute, and been covered entirely by the
column.”
So strongly were we impressed with the conviction that the Com-
atulae were dicyclic crinoids, that we urged European investigators
to make a fresh search for the underbasals in the larva, notwith-
standing that no trace of them had been found by Wyville Thomson,
the two Carpenter, Gétte and others, who had extensively studied
the embryology of Antedon.
It was therefore with no little satisfaction that we received the
information in July 1887 that the underbasals, whose existence we
had thus predicated upon palaeontological evidence, had actually
been discovered in the early larva of Antedon rosacea. This import-
ant discovery was made by Mr. H. Bury, who announced it at the
Manchester Meeting of the British Association in 1887. Mr. Bury’s
paper giving the full details of his investigations, has not yet appeared,
although understood to be in press. The results,showever, are stated
by Carpenter" as follows: “ while this paper was in press an important
discovery was announced by Mr. H. Bury at the Manchester Meeting
of the British Association. He has found the underbasals in the
ciliated larva of Antedon rosacea; but they soon fuse with the top stem
joint (centro-dorsal), and all trace of them is lost when the cirri
appear. This is a very striking confirmation of the views of Messrs.
Wachsmuth and Springer, whose palacontological studies had led
them to express the belief that the underbasals might be present in
the early larva of Comatulae.”
Upon the same grounds, we think, we may safely postulate a
dicyclic base in the extensive families of Apiocrinidae and Pentacrin-
idae, and all other Neocrinoid families in which the so-called centro-
dorsal or top stem joint is described as forming an integral part of
the calyx as in the Comatulae, and whose stem, when angular, is
1 Notes on Echinoderm Morphology, No. XI, Quart. Journ. Microscop. Sci.,
Vol. XXVIII, New. Ser. p. 311.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ° 303
directed interradially. In two species of Millericrinus rudimentary
underbasals have already been found by De Loriol,' and in both of
them the plates in question are attached to the top stem joint.
From these facts we may fairly say that the dicyclic plan prevails
far more generally among Neocrinoidea than among Palaeocri-
noidea.
It is very interesting to note, in this connection, that the under-
basals in many of the Ichthyocrinidaeare of an exceedingly rudiment-
ary nature. In Ichthyocrinus they are scarcely ever seen at all, being
usually visible only on the interior of the dorsal cup, In Taxocrinus
they are always hidden by the column, and sometimes visible only
within the calyx, which led Schultze to call them “ eryptobasalia. ”
In Forbesiocrinus and Onychocrinus they are nearly always concealed
by the column, and furthermore in some cases they seem to be fused
with the upper joint of the column, for they separate from the
basals and remain attached to the column when the latter is broken
off. It is therefore a suggestive fact that in Millericrinus polydactylus
and M. Orbignyi, the two species in which De Loriol discovered
underbasals, these were in a precisely similar way separated from the
basals and firmly attached to the column.
Another distinction relied on by Carpenter is that in Neocrinoids
“by far the greater number of genera have five equal and similar
basals, with five equal and similar radials resting upon them.” He
excepts Hyocrinus, which has three basals, and Holopus and Eudesi-
erinus in which the radials are not symmetrical; and he adds: “but
this want of symmetry is not due to the intercalation of any anal
plates asin nearly all Palaeocrinoids.” He therefore admits a certain
amount of asymmetry in Neocrinoids, so long as not due to anal plates,
though he elsewhere attaches some importance toa similar irregularity
in some Palaeocrinoids, when confined to basals and radials only, and
not in any way connected with anal plates, as for example Kucalypto-
erinus.”
Another point characteristic of the later crinoids brought out by
Carpenter is that “the articular facets of the first radials occupy the
whole width of their distal faces, so that the lowest parts of the rays,
whether divided or not, are of nearly the same width as the radial
plates which bear them (Chall. Rep. p. 155). Exceptions to this are
found in Hyocrinus, Plicatocrinus and Marsupites. It is true that
1 Paleont. Franc., Vol. XI, Crinoides Pts. 110 and 116.
2 Challenger Report, p. 151.
24
354 - PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
in the Palaeocrinoids there are many families in which the articular
facet of the first radial simply occupies the middle of its distal edge,
but this is not the case with the Ichthyocrinidea, the most of the
Poteriocrinidae, Cupressocrinidee, and Symbathocrinidae.
The main point, upon which Etheridge and Carpenter,’ and after-
wards Carpenter alone,” distinguished the two groups was stated to
be the regularly pentamerous symmetry of the calyx in Neocrinoids
contrasted with the asymmetry of the Palaeocrinoids, in which “ the
pentamerous symmetry of the calyx’ is almost always disturbed by a
greater or less modification of the plates on the anal side.” From
this Carpenter was obliged to except the genus Thaumatocrinus, as to
the Neocrinoidea, which has well developed anal plates.
A far greater number of exceptions are found in the Palaeoerinoidea,
among the Camarata as well as the [nadunata and Articulata.
Among the first may be mentioned Do/atocrinus, Stereocrinus, Centro-
erinus, Technocrinus, Corymbocrinus, Eucalyptocrinusand Callicrinus,
in which the anal interradius cannot be distinguished in the dorsal
cup from the four others; Lyriocrinus, Ripidocrinus, Thylacocrinus,
Rhodocrinus, and Gilbertsocrinus, in which it is rarely distinct ; and
Briarocrinus whose irregularity is not caused by anal plates. Among
the Inadunata there are Codiacrinus, Lecythiocrinus, Stemmatocrinus
and Erisocrinus, in none of which tbe usual anal plate is known to
exist. Among the Articulata, we note Ichthyocrinus and Niptero-
erinus as being in a similar condition as Briarocrinus. In some of
the above genera, however, there is an irregularity in the basals; yet
this is not due to anal plates, but to a coalescence of two or more
of the plates, a variation which is also found in the recent genus
Rhizocrinus, and among the underbasals in the Antedon larva.
1«On Allagecrinus, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Apr. 1881, pp. 295 and
296.
2 Challenger Report on Stalked Crinoids, p. 150.
3 Tt must be observed that the term ‘‘ calyx’? was used by Dr. Carpenter in the
Challenger Report, and by us at that time, to designate the part of the test below the
arm bases. Finding more and more the necessity of having a more stable terminol-
ogy, which would be applicable to the Crinoids generally, we have agreed with Dr.
Carpenter upon the following terms, which will be used by both of us hereafter for
descriptive purposes, viz :—
Crinoid minus the stem = Crown.
Crinoid minus stem and arms = Calyx.
All parts of the calyx below the arm bases = Dorsal cup.
The ventral perisome with mouth and ambulacra = Disk.
All parts covering the disk — Vazlt.
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 395
In alluding to the symmetry or asymmetry of the calyx, we must
consider only the arrangement of the plates in the dorsal cup, as the
ventral covering in all crinoids, whether composed of vault or disk,
is more or less disturbed by the anus.
We do not regard it as a good distinctive character that in the later
erinoids the basals are generally pierced by interradial canals or
grooves in connection with the chambered organ, when not a vestige
of them is seen in Marsupites, and similar grooves are found in
Catillocrinus, Mycocrinus, Crotalocrinus and many Fistulata. Nor
do we think it of much importance that in some palaeozoic forms the
first division of the rays does not take place upon the third radial, or
that in one or two cases the first radials themselves are axillary, when
among Neocrinoids Metacrinus, as well as Plicatocrinus, form excep-
tions to this rule.
Another of Carpenter’s distinctions is that in the Neocrinoidea
with the exception of Thawmatocrinus, the primary radials are in
contact with one another by the entire length of their sides; but the
fact is that there are also among the Palaeocrinoidea a number of
genera, both of the Ichthyocrinidae and IJnadunata, in which a
similar structure is found.
Now to the presence of interradials, a character upon which we
placed so much importance as separating the older from the later
erinoids. . We held that interradials were present in all groups of
the Palaeocrinoidea, but among the Neocrinoidea only in Thawmato-
erinus. This applies very well to the Camarata and perhaps to all
Fistulata, but it is possible that among the latter, in certain Carbon-
iferous genera, especially within the Poteriocrinidae, their interradials
became resorbed. Interradials are also absent in the Larviformia,
if we regard their large ventral plates as orals. We also doubt if
the so-called interradials of the Ichthyocrinidae are the homologues
of the interradials in the Camarata, but rather regard them as com-
parable with the unevenly distributed, interradially disposed plates,
which occur in some of the Apiocrinidae, and which we take to be
perisomic.
The so-called interradials of the Apiocrinidae, which occur only ina
few species, vary among individuals and are irregular in their ar-
rangement. According to De Loriol’ they are represented various-
ly by one or three plates in the lower row, even in the same species.
Owing to this irregularity they have been regarded by us as “enor-
1 Paleont. Francaise, 1st Serie Anim. snvertebr., Crinoides, p. 272.
306 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
mously developed perisomic plates” (Revision, Pt HI, p. 63), and
not as true interradials, although they present a more rigid appear-
ance than perisomic plates generally have. Our views have been
strengthened by De Loriol’s important discovery of the plates cover-
ing the ventral surface in Apiocrinus roissyanus.* According to
his description the space between the rays, from the first or the first
two interradial pieces up, are occupied by transverse series of two or
three small, somewhat regular plates, which gradually lose their reg-
ularity, and at the top of the third radial become for the most part
entirely irregular and unequal. They differ in their form and
arrangement in every one of the interradial spaces, and pass into
a conical “ventral sac,’ which rises to the top of about the ninth
brachial piece. The plates composing this ventral covering are
equally irregular, and, though tolerably strong, are not absolute-
ly rigid. De Loriol considers them as constituting a pliable integu-
ment, and not a solid vault like that of Actinocrinus, but in the
specimen the central portion was not preserved and he could not dis-
cover the condition of the mouth, nor could he find traces of the
ambulacra. In the same paper, on page 14, De Loriol also describes
a specimen of Apiocrinus magnificus, in which the interradial
spaces between the third radials, and up to the first brachial piece,
are occupied by numerous irregular plates, dissimilar in the different
spaces. He considers these interradial plates, in both species as be-
longing to the “ventral sac,” which was capable, in his opinion, of
contraction or expansion.
A similar irregularity in the interradials exists among the Ichthyo-
erinidae. In Jchthyocrinus interradials and interaxillaries are gen-
erally wanting, but in the one species in which they have been found
their arrangement seems to be rather uniform in the different spaces.
In Forbesiocrinus, which also has interradials, we frequently find two
plates in the first row at the azygous side, in other cases but one. In
Taxocrinus, when the rays are close together, there are sometimes no
interradials at all, or, when there are more than one, the first is
followed by one or two smaller plates. In Taxocrinus Thiemei, the
type specimen has neither interradials nor interaxillaries, while other
specimens in our collection, not otherwise distinguishable, have one
to three interradials. In Tuaxocrinus interscapularis (Iowa Geol.
Rep. 1858, Vol. L., Pt II, Pl. 1, fig. 3), we find a single plate inter-
1 Note sur Quelques Echinodermes Fossils des Environs de la Rochelle. 1887.
p- 11.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. B57
calated opposite the second and third radials and an interaxillary
between the second secondary radials. In Onychocrinus, and those
forms of Taxoerinus which resemble it in the expansion of the rays,
like 7. intermedius, there is frequently a large first interradial, suc-
ceeded by a variable number of smaller ones; while in other cases
(Pl. XVIII, figs. 1 a, b, c) the lower plates themselves are quite
irregular, following the curvature of the rays. They are connected
with their fellows in the same interradius by the plates of the disk,
which are attached to their inner edges. In both these genera the
structure of the posterior interradius resembles that of the recent
genus Thawmatocrinus in having a succession of anal plates forming
a lateral proboscis-like projection, connectea for more or less of its
length with the perisome. Lecanocrinus, Pycnosaccus, Cyrtidocrinus
and Mespilocrinus have an azygous and anal plate, but as a rule no
interradials. | Lecanocrinus macropetalus of New York has no
interradial plates; while a specimen from Sweden, which agrees with
the genus otherwise, has at each side one large interradial. Calpio-
erinus' has an azygous plate passing well down between the basals
toward the underbasals, and from one to four interradials in the
same species. Sagenocrinus’ has a remarkable azygous plate in line
with the basals—the sixth parabasal of Angelin—and some varia-
bility in the other interradial spaces, although on the whole it isa
rather symmetrical form.
The irregularity in the arrangement of the interradials, so frequent-
ly found in this group, their presence between the higher radials,
and absence upon the first primary radials in species, and even among
individuals of the same species, has always presented to us a difficulty
in classifying the Ichthyocrinidae with the Palaeocrinoids.
1 Calpiocrinus is not the aberrant genus which we supposed from Angelin’s
figures (Rev. I, p. 30, 88). A good series of specimens from Dudley, not other-
wise distinguishable from C. fimértatus and C. heterodactylus,—which are probably
synonymous—shows that it has the usual calyx plates of the family—three under-
basals and five basals. In a specimen of C. ovatus, the underbasals are concealed
by the column, and it is probable that this is the case in most of the Swedish speci-
mens, and that in some instances the peculiar azygous plate, in line with the basals,
has led to a misconception of the latter plates.
2 Examination of the specimens leaves little dcubt that Sagexocrinus belongs
to the Ichthyocrinidae. We noted its resemblance to 7axocrinus (Rev. II, p.
202), and it always appeared to us out of place in the family Rhodocrinidae,
which is greatly improved by its removal. Our generic diagnosis, made entirely
from the figures and insufficient descriptions, is defective and incorrect in some
particulars, and will be improved hereafter, as the genus has been discovered in
America.
358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1888.
The interradials in the Apiocrinidae, extending up between the
rays, connecting with, and forming a part of the ventral covering,
find a close parallel in those of many of the Ichthyocrinidae, and
since the discovery of a disk and open mouth in Taxocrinus, we
have not the slightest doubt, that these plates represent the same
elements in both groups, forming in both of them parts of the disk,
and that perhaps the same is the case with the interradials and
interaxillaries of Uintacrinus, which in many respects resemble those
of the Ichthyocrinidae.
The subtegminal mouth, which we supposed to be the best char-
acter of the Palaeocrinidea, proves to be subject to exceptions fuliy
as great as the others. Our recent discoveries show that in some
palaeozoic crinoids, and probably in the Ichthyocrinidae generally,
the mouth is exposed, and there is no vault aside of theorals; and
we are not certain but that we may find other exceptions among
the later Poteriocrinidae and Encrinidae. We now know that there
are no additional elements in the oral system of palaeozoic crinoids,
but that the mouth opens out in a very similar manner by the part-
ing of the orals as in the larva of recent forms, and this leads us to
put less faith than before in the condition of the mouth as a char-
acter for the subdivision of the Crinoidea. For these may well be
different stages in the development of the mouth, represented in
palaeontological time, and we need not be surprised to find at some
time a Silurian Ichthyocrinoid with the orals closed, or a Haplo-
crinoid with the orals parted.
From this review of the principal characters relied upon to dis-
tinguish the earlier from the later crinoids, it will be appareni that
the exceptions are so numerous as to leave nothing stable or definite
on which to base such important primary divisions, and we are again
confronted with the problem of rectifying the classification of the
Crinoidea, or proposing a new one. It is true that many of these
exceptions are due to differences which tend to separate the Ichthyo-
erinidae from the Palaeocrinoids, and unite them with the Neo-
erinoids; and it might be the simplest, as well as the least radical
change, to modify the definition of the Neocrinoidea so as to admit
the Ichthyocrinidae, which would thus fall exactly into that place
among them, for which Carpenter was always obliged to make an ex-
ception in favor of Thaumatocrinus. In so doing, however, we
would be bringing together some of the earliest and latest forms»
which would render the name Neocrinoidea wholly inappropriate.
SS ee
ao
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309
The two groups would be separated chiefly upon the condition of the
mouth, and the name ‘“Stomatocrinoidea,’ which we proposed in
1879 (Revision I, p. 22), might be revived. The greatest objection
to this plan, however, lies in the possibility, as before mentioned, of
finding an Ichthyocrinoid with closed mouth, or a Haplocrinoid
with parted orals, which would upset the whole arrangement.
To attempt to modify the definition of the Palaeocrinoidea so as
to admit forms with an external mouth, is in our opinion entirely
out of the question, and would simply increase the difficulties now
encountered, because there could not be pointed out a single reliable
character by which the two groups could be distinguished.
After considering the question in all its new aspects, as presented
by the facts recently brought to light, it is our best judgment, that
all attempts to subdivide the Crinoidea by separating the palaeozoic
from the mesozoie and later forms as natural divisions, will have to
be abandoned, and some mode of separation sought for, entirely in-
dependent of geological age. In that case, the names Palaeocrinoidea
and Neocrinoidea—unless in the sense of mere conventional terms
for designating the palaeozoie and later crinoids—will have to be
laid aside.
To this end we think that four well defined groups can be dis-
tinguished as independent primary divisions of the Crinoidea, viz:
1.- Camarata.
2. IJnadunata, including the branches Larviformia and Fistulata.
3. Articulata, * including the Ichthyocrinidae, and possibly Uin-
tacrinus and Thaumatocrinus.
4. A fourth division to include the most of the mesozoic and re-
cent crinoids, for which the name Canaliculata’ might be very ap-
propriately adopted. These divisions will be suborders or orders,
depending upon the rank which may be ultimately assigned to the
Crinoidea—a question we think still open for discussion. In the
definition of them many classificatory criteria, such as the condition
of the mouth, the presence or absence of interradials, the relative
proportions of the actinal and abactinal regions in the calyx, which
1 The Crotalocrinidae, which we formerly assigned to the Articulata, have
been found to belong to the Camarata, as we have shown at length in another
paper.
2 This name was proposed by Prof. E. J. Chapman in a paper entitled “A
classification of Crinoids,” Toronto, 1874, to include the genera Pentacrinus,
Antedon, Encrinus, Eugeniacrinus, Apiocrinus, Bourgueticrinus, and Rhizo-
crinus.
360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
when applied to the older and later crinoids seem to lose much of
their significance, will form strong and distinctive characters. Pa-
laeozoic and recent crinoids may, if necessary, be brought together in
the same group, according to their zodlogical characters, free from
embarrassment arising from restrictions as to geological age.
The Camarata, Inadunata and Articulata would be defined, as to
their most general characteristics, substantially as we have already
defined them in the Revision of the Palaeocrinoidea, with some
modifications as to the ventral structure in the Inadunata and Ar-
ticulata, to conform to recent discoveries.
We are strongly of the opinion that the recent genera Holopus,
Bathycrinus and Hyocrinus might very properly be arranged under
the Larviformia. All three are monocyclic, and like the Haplo-
erinidae and Symbathocrinidae retain through life large oral plates.
But while the orals in these two families are closed and rest direct-
ly upon the radials, in the above named recent forms they are part-
ed, and separated from the radials by a narrow band of perisome,
which, we strongly suspect, was also the case in the Gasterocomidae.
The aberrant genus Thaumatocrinus might be referred to the Ar-
ticulata, with which, for the most part, it agrees in the asymmetry
of the calyx and the construction of the azygous side. Uintacrinus
will very likely fall into the same group; while the Encrinidae will
probably find a resting place among the Fistulata, and perhaps also
Marsupites.
The removal of these genera would leave the Canaliculata as a
very compact, well defined group. It would contain only crinoids
which are dicyclic, or built upon the dicyclie plan, and in which the
underbasals are anchylosed to the top-stem-joint, the two together
forming the centro-dorsal. All of them would be free from any
disturbance by anal plates, and the basals in all of them, so far as
known, would be perforated by interradial canals or furrows in con-
nection with the chambered organ.
The disposition of the later crinoids, as herein indicated, is mere-
ly suggestive, as we prefer to leave their arrangement to Dr. P. H.
Carpenter, who has made them a special study.
We shall not at present undertake more than to submit for the
consideration of our fellow naturalists the conclusions to which we
have been led by the evidence of recent discoveries, leaving to a
future occasion the framing of detailed definitions of the divisions
we have proposed in case they should meet with favor. A con-
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361
sensus of opinion on this subject is much to be desired, and would
greatly facilitate future studies.
From an interchange of notes with Dr. Carpenter we understand
that we are now in substantial agreement upon the oral question, but
he will shortly state his own views at length in a paper now in prepa-
ration. Should the views herein set forth contribute toward the es-
tablishment of a sound classification, we shall consider that our long
controversy with Dr. Carpenter, both in print and by letter, has borne
good fruit, and we shall waste no regrets over the fact that in some
points the result has proved that he was right and we were wrong.
We give herewith a corrected diagnosis of the family Ichthyo-
crinidae to conform to the ventral structure as we now know it.
family ICH THY OCRINIDAE.
Test pliable. Symmetry of the calyx irregular and usually dis-
turbed by anal plates. Base dicyclic. Underbasals three, unequal,
rarely visible beyond the column; the smaller one directed toward
the right postero-lateral radial,’ frequently anchylosed to the upper
stem joint. Primary radials perforate; variable in number among
species and individuals from two upward; either abutting laterally,
or separated by one or more plates. Radials and arm joints united
by muscles and ligaments; line of union more or less undulating,
frequently with patelloid projections from the proximal margins of
the plates; articular surface usually occupying the whole distal face
of the first and succeeding radials. Arms uniserial, apparently
without pinnules. Interradials irregular in form, size and arrange-
ment, sometimes entirely wanting in species in which they are usually
present ; their lateral faces provided with deep ligamentous fossae.
Posterior interradius with or without anal plates; the latter, when
present, frequently associated with an azygous plate. Disk, so far as
known, paved with irregular perisomic plates, and larger plates
between the rays. The center of the disk occupied by five unequal
orals surrounding the mouth. Mouth exposed, at least in the later
forms. Food grooyes lined by moveable covering pieces. Column
large, decreasing in size rapidly near the calyx. Geological Position:
Palaeozoic. From the Lower Silurian to the Upper Coal Measures.
1 Tn the Revision, Pt. III., Pl., VI, fig. 23, we represented the underbasals of /ch-
thyocrimus incorrectly as directed anteriorly. We have since examined numer-
ous specimens of various genera, and find the small underbasals located, as above
stated, in all of them.
362
Fig.
ils
12:
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVIII.
Taxocrinus intermedius W. and Sp.
Specimen showing the irregularly arranged interradial
plates and pouches along the free rays ; 1” posterior view
of the same specimen, showing the lateral proboscis, and
the perisomic plates; 1% posterior side of another speci-
men, showing the proboscis and folds in the perisome; 1%
the proboscis and ventral perisome in another specimen ;
1 ventral view of the same specimen as !°, showing the
ventral perisome, the ambulacra, mouth and parted orals.
Vault of Dorycrinus mississippiensis with an extremely
large posterior oral.
Vault of Agaricocrinus Wortheni. The orals very irregu-
lar and separated by small accessory pieces.
Vault of Platyerinus discoideus with more regularly ar-
ranged oral plates.
Vault of Batocrinus elypeatus, the orals pushed over to the
anterior side by the subcentral anal tube.
Haplocrinus mespiliformis, posterior aspect, showing the po-
sition of the anal opening; 6% showing the 5 large anal
plates, and the tongue-like projection of the posterior
oral; 6% another specimen, showing the “knopf’ of Gold-
fuss at the upper end of the posterior oral, and the proxi-
mal arm joints.
Vault of a new species of Talarocrinus, with a single large
plate in the center.
Vault of Platyerinus Yandelli, the posterior oral pushed
out of place by the proboscis.
Vault of Platycrinus americanus with more regular orals.
Vault of Eretmocrinus coronatus. The orals very much
displaced by the proboscis.
. Vault of Rhodocrinus Whitei, apparently without oral
plates.
Vault of a new Rhodocrinus from New Mexico, like the
preceding species apparently without orals.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363
Fig. 13. Oral plates of Amphoracrinus quadrispinus.
Fig. 14. Inner floor of the orals of a Pisoerinus from Indiana.
Fig. 15. Vault of a young Platycrinus symmetricus W. and Sp., with
almost uniform orals.
(All specimens in the collection of Wachsmuth and Springer)
364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
CROTALOCRINUS: ITS STRUCTURE AND ZOOLOGICAL POSITION.
BY CHARLES WACHSMUTH AND FRANK SPRINGER.
The type of Crinoids that has been described under the name
Crotalocrinus, is one of the most extraordinary yet brought to light
from paleozoic rocks. Its net-formed radial appendages, so widely
different from those of any other known Echinoderm, and resem-
bling rather the fronds of a Bryozoan than the arms of a Crinoid,
have long made it a puzzle to naturalists, and the efforts of all
writers up to the present time—ourselves included—have contribu-
ted but little toward any satisfactory determination of its systematic
relations. Though so highly differentiated in its structure, the
genus is confined to the upper Silurian, so far as known. It has
been found in the island of Gothland, Sweden, where it was first
noticed by Hisinger in 1828, and afterwards described by him as a
Cyathocrinus in 1837. It was also found at Dudley, England by
Parkinson in 1808, who called it the Turban or Shropshire Eneri-
nite; and it was redescribed by J.S. Miller in 1821, as Cyathocrinus
rugosus. No trace of it has ever been discovered at any other locality.
Good specimens are, rare and difficult to obtain, so that the facili-
ties for its study, outside of the countries where it occurs, have
hitherto been practically nil.
The arm structure was not understood until 1854, when Johannes
Miller figured and described under the name Anthocrinus Lovent
the principal Swedish species, although Austin had established the
genus Crotalocrinus in 1843, for the English form, without figure
and with a very meagre description. Angelin’s elaborate work on
the Swedish Crinoids in 1878, contained numerous beautiful figures
of apparently perfect specimens, and seemed to give the most ample
illustrations of every part elucidating the structure of this curious
fossil. Upon these descriptions and figures, and without any oppor-
tunity to study even a single specimen, we prepared our description
of the genus, and discussions relating to it, as they appeared in Part
III of our Revision of the Palzocrinoidea.
Not long after the publication of this work, we found reason to
believe that our interpretation of the structure and affinities of
Crotalocrinus was erroneous, and that much of what we had written
on the subject was altogether worthless. During a visit of one of
us to Europe last winter, he had an opportunity of examining the
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365
best known English specimens, in the British Museum and other
collections, and by considerable effort succeeded in obtaining some
excellent material for more detailed study, both from England and
Sweden. Besides this we have enjoyed the unexpected privilege of
studying a number of the original specimens used by Angelin. For
this we are indebted to Dr. Gustay Lindstrém, Curator of the
Paleontological Department of the National Museum at Stockholm,
who on being informed of our perplexity regarding this genus, upon
his own motion, sent us these and other specimens, with liberty to
study them at our leisure; and also furnished us most important
information in the way of drawings and observations upon other
specimens. It was an act of thoughtful kindness for which we find
it difficult to adequately express our gratitude, and if this paper
shall be found to be of any value to our fellow naturalists, it will be
in a very large measure due to the facilities thus generously afforded
us.
In the Revision of the Paleocrinoidea, Part III, pp. 140-143, we
referred Crotalocrinus and Enallocrinus to the Articulata, and at
various places (pp. 18, 19, 56, 64, 65) based some of our arguments
as to the character of this suborder upon the supposed structure of
these two genera. On pages 18 and 19 of Part ITI, we stated that “In
the Crotalocrinidae, which include Crotalocrinus and Enallocrinus,
the whole ventral surface, in what appear to be the best preserved
specimens, is composed of strong, convex plates, without definite
arrangement. In these specimens there is no central plate, nor
proximals, nor traces of ambulacra (Icon. Crin. Suee., Pl. VIL, fig. 3a;
Pl. VIII, figs. 6, 7, and Pl. X XV, fig. 2.); there are, however, other
figures of Angelin, apparently of a closely allied species (ibid. PL,
XVII, fig. 3a), in which the plates paving the ventral surface are much
more delicate, and consist of a central plate, large proximals, and sev-
eral rows of covering pieces, without the intervention of either anam-
bulacral or interradial plates. It would be difficult, with the utmost
stretch of our imagination, to recognize in the former figures either
proximals or central piece, which, as admitted by Carpenter, are
present in all these crinoids, and we think there can be little doubt
that the two sets of figures represent different parts of the animal,
the one the disk, the other the vault, and that the one covered the
other. A similar opinion was evidently entertained by Zittel
(Handb. d. Palaeont. I, p. 357), who stated that Crotalocrinus pos-
sessed five ‘grosse Oralplatten, bald unter der Decke, bald dusserlich
|
;
|
|
366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
sichtbar.’ According to our interpretation, the calyx of the Crotalo-
crinidae extends ventrally to the oral pole, and the ambulacra,
central piece, and proximals are subtegminal, covered by interradial
plates, which extend out to the lower rows of covering plates and
side pieces (Icon. Crin. Suec., Pl. VIII, fig. 6, and Pl. X XV, fig. 2).
A similar condition probably prevailed in the Ichthyocrinidae, with
which the Crotalocrinidae have close affinities.”
As our reference of these genera to the Articulata was based ex-
clusively upon the figures, especially those of Angelin, it will be well
to examine them now in the light of the knowledge we have since
obtained. The only figure of those quoted that gives the vault
structure correctly, is fig. 3a, on Plate XVII. It shows very plainly
four large proximals and a large plate toward the posterior side,
which, according to the terminology we then employed, we regarded
as a central plate. The proximals are elongate-nail-shaped, and
two of them touch the incurved ends of the upper faces of the first
radials, while two others abut against a small interradial plate, and
the larger posterior plate against small plates around the anus.
Within the re-entering angles, between every two of the large plates,
there are several series of small pieces ramifying toward the arm
openings and laterally connected. Dr. Lindstrom has sent us a
very carefully prepared drawing of a specimen which he thinks is
the original of the above mentioned figure. This is reproduced by
us on Pl. XX, fig. 4. The structure appears substantially the same,
but the details are better defined in this figure than in the former,
showing that the proximals touch the first radial only at one side,
while at the other sides one, two, or three small interradial plates
are interposed. Within the five re-entering angles formed by the
five orals (central plate and four large proximals),* rest five com-
paratively large radial-dome-plates, which are followed by several
rows of small alternating pieces. That the latter are covering
plates which were continued along the arms is well shown in both
figures.
A totally different structure was exhibited by figs. 6 and 7, PI.
VIII, of Crotalocrinns pulcher, and by fig. 3a, Pl. VII, and fig. 2
Pl. XXV, of Enallocrinus scriptus, all purporting to show the plates
of the ventral side completely. In all of these figures the arrange-
* The so-called “ proximals”’ and “central plate,” as we have shown else-
where, are now regarded by us as representing the five oral plates, the central
plate being the posterior oral, modified and displaced by anal structures.
he, ae a
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367
ment of the plates covering the visceral cavity is extremely irregular,
scarcely any two plates being alike. There is neither a central
plate, nor anything that might be compared with the four large
proximals, and no plates coreesponding to, or which might be identi-
fied as covering plates until the region of the arms is reached. In
Pl. VIII, fig. 6, the plates appear ornamented by small nodes up to
the second bifurcation of the ray, and a similar ornamentation cov-
ers the anal structure, of which portions are visible. This ornamen-
tation is so marked, and gives to this part of the figure such a total-
ly different aspect from the higher branches of the rays, in which it
is entirely absent, that we regarded it as a vault, from underneath
which the covering plates emerged. The whole figure gives one the
impression that it was made from a very perfect specimen, in which
the minutest details of structure were exceptionally well preserved.
The other figure—7-on the same plate exhibits a similar vault, but
with less elaboration of ornament and surface details. Covering
plates are here visible only upon the parts which extend beyond the
limits of the calyx, nor is there any trace of proximals or central
plate.
Figure 3a, of Pl. VII, which is said to represent “ pars perisomatis
ventralis” of Enallocrinus scriptus, shows a complete uninterrupted
covering of the whole ventral surface of the calyx and portions of
the rays. As in the other figures, the plates are wholly wanting in
definite arrangement, no summit plates can be discovered, and the
covering pieces, as before, begin at the periphery of the calyx.
Another figure of the same species, apparently from a most beau-
tifully perfect specimen, to judge from the drawing, is given on PI.
XXYV, fig. 2. It is stated in the explanation of the plate to be the
same specimen as fig. 1, seen from above, and there is no reference to
any imperfection or restoration. It appears to show all the plates
of the ventral covering from the center of the summit to a long dis-
tance out upon the arms. In this figure, as in the preceding, there is
a complete absence of any regular plan of arrangement among the
plates forming the ventral part of the calyx. It would be impossi-
ble by any degree of imagination, to identify among them anything
like summit plates or covering pieces, the latter commencing beyond
the limits of the calyx. The plates are generally represented as no-
dose, and those toward the middle as the largest, but beyond this
there is nothing in the figure to distinguish any of them.
368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
It was upon the information derived from these figures that we
based our conclusion—hasty as it may have been—that there were
two integuments in these genera, one above the other ; one representing
the perisome containing the ambulacray the other a vault of irreg-
ular pieces, and to some degree pliable.
We could not see how two such totally different structures as those
shown by Pl. XVII, fig. 3a, and Pl. VIII, fig. 6, could represent the
same elements in one and the same genus, and we therefore adopted
the idea of a double covering as the only solution we could find, al-
though after considerable hesitation, feeling that such an arrange-
ment was quite anomalous, and without a parallel elsewhere. We
were also influenced in no small degree by the fact that Prof. Zittel,
who had the opportunity to see the Swedish collections, interpreted
the structures in a similar way.’ F
We could not, of course, imagine that such magnificent figures as
are represented in Angelin’s work’ in the absence of any explana-
nation to that effect, could be wholly imaginary as to the most im-
portant parts of the structures illustrated. The fact is, however, as
we now know, that all these important figures are to a large extent
fictitious ; that the middle portions of them, where the summit plates
and covering pieces of the vault should have been found, were not
shown in the specimens at all, but were filled in by the artist accord-
ing to his own notion of their probable structure.
The only specimen in the National Museum at Stockholm which
shows any part of the vault structure of Crotalocrinus, aside from
the original of fig. 3a, Pl. X VII, has been sent to us for examination.
It is evidently the original from which fig. 7, P]. VIII was composed ;
for Dr. Lindstrém informs us that there is no other which can be
regarded as the type of that figure. It shows the lanceolate areas
and covering plates along the arms beyond the calyx very well, but
1 Handb. d. Pal. Vol. i, p. 357.
2 It is but justice to the distinguished Swedish palzeontologist to remark that
his work on the Crinoids of Sweden was not complete at the time of his death.
His descriptions seem to be rather preliminary notes made for his own use, pre-
paratory to a more detailed study. These were collected after his death and
published, together with twenty-nine plates illustrating them, under the direction of
the Royal Academy of Sciences of Sweden. It is not strange under such circum-
stances there should be errors, and in pointing out some of them in this paper we
have no intention of discrediting a work which has been of great service to
paleontology by bringing to notice one of the most magnificent crinoidal faunae
ever discovered.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 369
the middle is entirely broken away, leaving, however, partially in
place a few plates around the.anal opening. There is nothing in the
specimen from which the form and arrangement of the summit plates
could be even inferred. —«
Of fig. 3a, Pl. VII, Dr. Lindstrém writes: “The figure is not
correct. The central plates are totally wanting, as in al/ specimens
of Enallocrinus I have seen, and there are no vestiges left to infer
its true nature. There can be no satisfactory drawing made of it.”
Among the specimens sent us from Stockholm was one labeled
“WIT 3,” which we suppose to be one of the originals from which
Angelin’s Pl. VII, fig. 3a, was in part deduced. We have figured
it to illustrate our description of Enallocrinus (Pl. XX, figs. 6a,b),
and we learn that there are no other specimens of Enallocrinus
which show any more of the summit than this.
As to fig. 2, Pl. X XV, Dr. Lindstrém writes: “I cannot con-
ceive how such a drawing could have been executed out of it. The
upper side is so badly preserved that no good figure can be taken.”
The original of the splendid figure 6, Pl. VIII1— Crotalocrinus pul-
cher—which was from the Marklinean Museum at Upsala, cannot
be found, and we are therefore unable to give any particulars about
it. We have not the least doubt, however, that this figure, which is
stated to be enlarged (how much, we do not know), is even a greater
fiction than the others. In our own specimen of C. pulcher from
Sweden (Pl. XIX, figs. la, 5, ¢), we succeeded in exposing enough
of the summit, while cleaning around the ventral tube, to show that
it is composed of covering pieces, interradials and summit plates,
just like the Cambridge specimen (Pl. XIX, fig. 3).
These four figures, thus shown to be to a large extent incorrect and
misleading, were the ones on which we entirely relied in the statement
above quoted from Part III of the Revision. That statement was
eritized by Dr. P. Herbert Carpenter in a paper “On the structure
of Crotalocrinus,” in which he asserts, that “in their [our] statement
that ‘there is no central piece, nor proximals, nor traces of ambulacra’
in the figures of Crotalocrinus pulcher and Enallocrinus scriptus, they
appear to me to be seriously in error.””?
It must be observed first, that in this portion of the paragraph
quoted, we were speaking solely of the vault proper, and not of the
rays and arms beyond the limits of the calyx. We distinctly
refer to the existence of “covering plates and side pieces to which
1 Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1886, p. 339.
370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888 ,
the interradials extend” (p. 19), and on page 143, in our diagnosis
of the Crotalocrinidae, we stated: “ Ambulacral furrow deep, rami-
fying with the arm branches, covered by alternating plates, and
bordered by side pieces.” The ambulacra and covering pieces over
them, in the arms, which those figures all show, were therefore clear-
ly recognized by us always.
It is worthy of note, however, that Carpenter, while pronouncing
us “seriously in error” in saying that there is no central piece, nor
proximals, nor traces of ambulacra in the figures of Angelin above
referred to, does not undertake to point out the presence or location
of either one of those elements upon the figures in question, although
he expresses on p. 403 his belief “that the small covering plates of
Crotalocrinus rugosus are the representatives in a smaller crinoid*
‘of the large rigid plates’ shown in figures 6 and7, * * * * while
I shall also continue to believe, until the contrary is demonstrated,
that the central plate and proximals are among the irregular pieces
occupying the oral pole in the originals of these two figures.” Nei-
ther does he inform us that the figures themselves are totally incor-
rect and fanciful, although at that time fresh from an examination
of the type specimens at Stockholm.
Carpenter says (op cit. p. 399) that “ while the summit plates are
clear and well defined in some species and genera, there are other
closely allied forms, in which these plates are almost or entirely un-
distinguishable among the large number of plates to be found in the
vault. I will only mention one instance in illustration of this state-
ment, viz. Cyathocrinus iowensis and C. multibrachiatus, both of
which are figured by Wachsmuth and Springer (Revision Part. ITI,
p- 65, PI. IV, fig. 6, and Pl. V, fig. 7), the former with, the latter
without any distinct summit plates. ”
These two figures, as the explanation shows, represent specimens
in which the summit plates were in an imperfect condition, indica-
ting a process of resorption or modification going on, and were
expressly given for the purpose of illustrating this fact. The summit
plates, as we stated on page 49 (Rey. Pt. II), “are in their arrange-
ment, as arule, very regular, and only disturbed by the anal tube.”
We stated further on the same page that the apparent disturbance
in some species with a large number of arms was due to a misconcep-
tion of the plates. It is true that in some forms the summit plates
are not so readily distinguished as in others, and there are some genera,
* C. rugosus appears generally to be a much larger species than C. pudcher.
ee
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 371
mostly Silurian, of different families, in which the vault is composed
of an integument of innumerable minute pieces in which they are
undistinguishable, and, in our opinion, do not exist. But we know
of no other case of a vault composed of well defined and even
ornamented plates, in which in the same genus there was a total
absence of plan of arrangement in one species, and well defined
summit plates and covering pieces in another. It seemed to us
impossible that the summit plates and ambulacra, which were so
distinct and conspicuous in the one specimen, should be entirely absent
in another species of the same genus; and the only solution of the
mystery which we could arrive at, was that in the latter they must
be subtegminal, and that the covering of irregular pieces, shown in
the four figures above quoted, was broken away in the specimen
which exhibited the summit plates. *
As we have said before, we had no opportunity to study the
Crotalocrinidae from actual specimens when we prepared the
Revision. It required but a single glance at the specimens from
Dudley and Gothland coming under our observation lately, to show
us that our conception of the structure and relations of Crotalocrinus,
and its congener, was completely erroneous, and that our views
respecting the subtegminal summit plates and double covering are
without foundation in the facts. We now renounce them altogether,
and all conclusions or arguments based upon the supposed existence
of these structures are hereby withdrawn. The same inspection of
specimens that disclosed to us our error, revealed with equal clear-
ness the real nature of those plates, and left not the least necessity
for inferring the existence of summit plates among the irregularly
arranged vaults of Angelin’s restorations.
While it is of course unpleasant to be obliged thus to correct
descriptions and repair arguments upon which we have laid consider-
able stress, we regret it in this case the less, because the result at
which we have arrived regarding the systematic position of Crotalo-
erinus and Enallocrinus, confirms in a most satisfactory manner the
validity of the great groups which we have recognized as subdividing
* The references to these figures in Part III of the Revision were unfort-
unately mixed up in the printing. They should be corrected as follows: on page
64, 7th line from bottom, for “ Pl. 6,” read “ Pv. 8,” and for “ figs. 15 and 25,”
read figs. 2 and 75;” and in the 6th line from bottom, for “Pl. 13,” read “ Pi.
8.” On p. 65, 6th line from top, for “ Pl 6,” read “ P/. 8.”” We also misunder-
stood Angelin’s fig. 15, Pl. 25, and Joh. Miillers’ fig. 10, Pl. 8, and our references
to them should therefore be ignored.
372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
the paleozoic crinoids, and proves that, while the groups themselves
are entirely correct, our error consisted simply in a wrong under-
standing of the family, which led us to assign it toa group to which
it does not belong.
Let us now proceed to ascertain to what group Crotalocrinus
should be assigned.
We established the suborder Articulata to include the group
defined by us under the family name Ichthyocrinidae with the addi-
tion of Crotalocrinus and Enallocrinus, (Revision III, p. 140). It is
clear from what we now know of their structure, that the two latter
cannot remain among the Articulata as that suborder has been
defined by us. *
There is no doubt that Crotalocrinus possesses some characters
belonging to each of the three groups which we introduced in the
third part of the Revision. It resembles the Articulata in the peculiar
articulation of the arms. In the arrangement of some of its calyx
plates it bears a very close relation to the Inadunata, especially
Cyathocrinus, to which genus J. S. Miller referred it. Like that it
has three rings of plates, the upper one including a single anal plate.
A casual glance at the structures succeeding these would lead one to
think them somewhat similar to the unconnected rays of the Inadu-
nata, but a more careful study will show that they are constructed upon
the same principle as the same parts in some groups of the Camarata.
They are actually neither true radials nor free arm plates, but, as in
the Platycrinidae, represent a transition between them. As in Platy-
erinus there are but two primary radials, the upper one a small
triangular axillary, to both sides of which the secondary radials are
attached, resting both against its sloping sides and upon the first
radial. They are overlaid by the tertiary radials, of which the lower
ones often, in a similar way, rest upon the secondary radials and the
first primary.
All these plates, in a most peculiar and unique manner, are solidly
fitted together with eack other and the first primary radial, and have
at their ventral face a wide, deep, diverging groove, arched by strong,
rigid covering plates, with a large tubular cavity underneath, which
in reality forms a part of the cavity of the calyx, like in the free
radial appendages in some forms of the Platycrinidae and Actino-
* The actual discovery by us of the disk of Zaxocrinus with an external
mouth, which we have elsewhere described, has settled all debate as to the summit
structure of the Ichthyocrinidae.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 373
erinidae. The mode of insertion of the higher radials upon the first
primary is similar to that found in Pterotocrinus (Pl. XIX, fig. 6),
and Marsupiocrinus (Pl, XIX, fig. 7, and also Angelin’s Pl. X XII,
figs. 1, and 28, Pl. XX VII, fig. 4), and is upon the very same
principle that prevails in the Platycrinidae generally.
A further striking resemblance to the Platycrinidae is to be
observed in the structure of the vault. We give for comparison fig-
ures of three of the most perfect vaults of Crotalocrinus ever found.
Fig. 4, on Pl. XIX is from the Swedish specimen already described
as the original of Angelin’s Pl. XVII, fig. 3a. Fig. 3 is from a
specimen formerly in the Fletcher collection at Dudley, but now be-
longing to Cambridge University. It differs somewhat from the
others in the form of the four smaller orals, which are nearly equi-
lateral instead of clavate, and in having a few more interradials.
Fig. 2° is from a Dudley specimen in our own collection. We can
see enough of the vault in our specimen of C. pulcher from Gothland
to show that it is built upon the same plan as in the three specimens
of C. rugosus illustrated, but it cannot be exposed sufficiently to afford
a good figure without mutilating the specimen more than is justi-
fiable.
Taking all these facts together, the vault of Crotalocrinus seems
to have been composed of well developed oral plates (four proximals
and a central), large interradials, several anal plates, with anus in
form of a subcentral opening or a tube, and covering plates. The
latter are solidly inserted in the vault between the other plates, so as
to form a part of the wall, contrary to the Inadunata, in which the
covering plates, and the ambulacra generally, rest upon the edges of
the other vault plates.
Taking now for comparison the vault of Marsupiocrinus tennes-
seensis (Pl. XIX, fig. 7), we find the same arrangement of orals; the
same solid covering pieces incorporated into, and forming part of the
vault, originating at the re-entering angles of the five orals, and pass-
ing outward to the arm bases; we also find a system of interradial
and anal plates substantially like that of the Cambridge specimen of
Crotalocrinus (Pl. XX, fig. 3). Indeed, if we had the vaults alone
of these two specimens under examination, it would not be a very
easy matter to point out why they might not belong to the same ge-
neric type. Certainly no one can look at the two figures, and not be
entirely convinced that they represent the same plan of summit
structure. And if we then compare the parts above the first radials
d74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
in the two forms, there cannot be the slightest doubt that they be-
long to the same group, and that that group is the Camarata. It
might indeed be fairly said that the calyx of Crotalocrinus, in all
that determines its subordinal rank, is nothing more than a dicyclic
Marsupiocrinus. The mode of union of the plates in the dorsal cup
is also somewhat similar in the two genera. There are in both of
them along the suture lines small conical pits, which penetrate a
short distance inward but do not pass through the test (Pl. XIX, fig.
5); the inner half of the apposed faces is peculiarly striated, indicat-
ing a sort of syzygial union. On the other hand, the vast multipli-
eation of arms, with their lateral connection into a net-work, con-
stitutes a wide differentiation of this type from any other group of
the Camarata, and is without a parallel among crinoids generally.
But this is a character which does not affect the fundamental plan
of structure, which unites it unquestionably with the Camarata.
Another very remarkable character of this family is the perfora-
tion of the.higher radials and arm joints by a dorsal or axial canal,
which in the higher radials is very large, ramifying to the arms, and
in Crotalocrinus extends to their extremities. The canals of each
ray unite into one on the inner surface of the first radials, and pass
downward toward the base. This perforation, and the fact that the
arm joints are united also by muscles instead of ligaments only, dis-
tinguishes the family sharply from all other Camarata. It was this
mainly that led us to place them among the Articulata not knowing
the solid structure of the vault. The arms in this group must
have possessed a high degree of flexibility, being found sometimes
closely folded together lengthwise, often spread out horizontally—
even dropping over the calyx—and sometimes compactly inrolled
for a considerable distance from the ends, as shown in our figure (PI.
XIX, fig. 1a).
There is one point in Crotalocrinus which is not clear to us, and
on which our specimens do not seem to throw much light. Johannes
Miiller' gives the following description of the ventral structure of
the arms. “ Dieser Canal [speaking of the ventral furrow along the
the arm joints] ist quertiber von kleinen Plittchen verdeckt, welche
meist alternirend in einander greifen. Zu den Seiten stehen auf der
Volarseite der Glieder, die Ambulacra einfassend, dusserst zarte
Pinnulae oder schmale Saumpliattchen, von denen mehrere (3-4)
auf die Linge eines Gliedes kommen. Diese Pinnulae sind unge-
1 Ueber den Bau der Echinod. Abh. Berl. Akad. d. Wissensch. 1853, p. 189.
— a
————————
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 375
gliedert, nur an der Basis scheint sich zuweilen ein Sttickchen
abzusetzen. Die Hohe der Pinnulae gleicht am breiteren Theil der
Hand der Dicke der Glieder.”
In the specimens which we have examined, the small alternating
‘plates which cover the ventral furrow are very plainly seen, but we
find no trace of the so-called “pinnules or saumpliattchen,” which
were figured and described by Miller and Angelin. It is evident
that the alternating inner plates, covering the ventral furrow, are
the “saumplattchen” or covering pieces, and not the outer ones along
the lateral margins of the furrow, which, if they exist at all, proba-
bly are ad-ambulacral plates ; they cannot be pinnules in the ordi-
nary sense, for there are, according to Miller, 5 to 4 to each arm-
joint. In one of our specimens (Pl, XIX, figs. 1a, 6), high up along
the arms, the covering plates are perfectly seen in place, and there
appear at their sides in some places, along the margin of the furrows,
what seem like serrated edges, several to a joint, and it may be that
Miiller and Angelin took these edges, which rise somewhat above
the level of the covering plates, for pinnules. If these are the struct-
ures figured by Miiller and Angelin (Bau. d. Echinod. Pl. VIII, figs.
7 and 8; and Icon. Crin. Suec., Pl. X XV, figs. 19, 19a), then the
projecting parts are mostly broken away in our specimens, and in all
others we have seen.
The arms of the species named by Miiller Anthocrinus Loveni—
but which Angelin considered to be a synonym of Crotalocrinus
pulcher—were described by him as resembling the five leaves of a
flower, which when spread out would not connect, but when closed
were folded up, and overlapped each other. It is possible that this
is the case in that species, and in fact his cross-section (Op. cit. Pl.
VIII, fig. 4) clearly indicates it. But we have had before us three
specimens from Sweden and one from England, considered to be
C. rugosus, all having the arms completely spread, in some cases
bending downward, and in these the arms are certainly in lateral
contact, not only within the rays, but continuously all around. Also
the cross-section of the arms of this species, given in Murchison’s
Siluria (3rd Ed. p. 247, fig. 4a), shows the continuous connection of
the arms, and how they fold in upon themselves when closed. The
specimen figured in Pl. XX, fig. 4, which, in our opinion, is not C.
rugosus but an undescribed species, represents a form in which the
rays may have been disconnected as in C. pulcner. It differs widely
from both species in the first radials, which are excavated and have
376 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
large, limb-like projections, deeply incurved between the bases of the
rays. This form which occurs also at Dudley, associated with C.
rugosus, is usually labeled as such in collections.
The reticulate arm structure, which distinguishes Crotalocrinus
from all other crinoids, is its most interesting character. The arms
are deeper (from the dorsal to the ventral side) than they are wide,
they extend to a great length, and bifurcate just often enough, and
at such intervals in C. rugosus, to fill up the spaces necessary to form
a complete circle with the arms in lateral contact out to the periph-
ery, and the number of branches in the adult specimen, when perfect
must have been enormous. In our specimen of C. rugosus (Pl. XIX,
fig. 1), at the height of the fifteenth joint, there are forty rami to
each ray, and this is not more than one third their full length, so
that the number of ultimate divisions would amount in this speci-
men to at least five orsix hundred. The joints at the same height
are of the same length, and the sutures are in the same line all
around, so that they form regular concentric circles. Each joint has
two lateral projections given off from the middle part of each side,
which meet with those of adjacent branches, forming points of union
by which the arms are connected throughout, but leaving open
spaces or meshes which produce the reticulate appearance. The arms
of Enallocrinus resemble those of Crotalocrinus in their mode of bi-
furcation and extraordinary length, but are not connected laterally
except for a few of the lower joints. They have, however, frequent-
ly, if not always, lateral projections along the joints on each side, and
hence possess the cross-shaped arm joints of Crotalocrinus (Pl. XIX,
fig. 62"). The sutures between the joints are also in the same line,
and do not alternate as we formerly supposed.
The mode of insertion of the higher radials upon the first radial
is very peculiar, and has not hitherto been understood. We might
have still remained in ignorance about it, had it not been for the
fortunate discovery among our Dudley specimens of an isolated first
radial with the succeeding radials attached, so that we could see
them from all sides (Pl. XX, fig. 4). By the aid of this, and a
very interesting, much weathered specimen, loaned us. by Dr.
Lindstrém, we are enabled to describe and illustrate the position of
these parts quite satisfactorily. The plates from the second radial
up are of considerable size, but they are not always visible on the
dorsal side. In C. pulcher they are plain enough (Pl. XX, fig. 1),
but in C. rugosus they often appear as mere points or thin edges
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. B77
(Pl. XX, tig. 22.). The other ends emerge upon the ventral side,
where they present a considerable surface, containing a large ambu-
lacral groove. In order to attain this position, the plates, which are
wedge-shaped, bend inward and upward until their opposite ends
stand nearly at right angles to each other, and the arms at their
origin pass out in a horizontal position. This can be seen in fig. 2°
Pl. XIX, which represents a vertical section, giving a side view of
the same succession of plates as is shown dorsally by fig. 2*, and
ventrally by fig. 2. on the same plate. The successive pieces are
numbered in each figure to correspond, and by comparing them,
and remembering that they present three different views of the same
elements, we think there will be no difficulty in understanding them.
We cannot see the least evidence of mobility of these plates until
they become free from the first radial, and thus attain the rank of
arm plates. Whenever the arms are found folded up, the bending
from a horizontal to a vertical position takes place in the lower
arm plates, and not in the higher radials. The lanceolate areas,
which are such a conspicuous feature of the ventral surface, and
extend from the second axillary to the fifth or sixth bifurcations,
are formed by a great thickening along the outer edges of the
marginal plates of two adjacent rays, and therefore consist of two
rows of arm plates, respectively radials, decreasing in width in their
upward arrangement.
The anus is excentric, and in C. pulcher takes the form of a large
tube, while in all authentic specimens of C. rugosus it seems to be a
simple opening. The form and position of the tube have been
wrongly described by us. | Angelin’s beautiful looking figure, pur-
porting to show it to its full length (Icon. Crin. Suec., Pl. X VU,
fig. 1), originating at the edge of the calyx, and lying outside the
arms, proves to be an ideal figure, based upon the erroneous inter-
pretation of some fragmentary pieces. Our specimen (PI. XX, fig.
1°.) shows the base of the tube very well, but not its full length. To
judge from the fragments, shown by Angelin’s Pl. XXV, figs. 8—
13, it must have been of considerable length in some specimens. It
seems to have been somewhat more highly organized than the anal
tube of the Camarata generally, and to approach the ventral sac of
the Fistulata. The actual length has not been observed, but from
the manner in which the large cavity within tapers in different speci-
mens, we have no doubt that the opening is at the upper end, and
378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
represents a true anal tube, whatever other function it may have
possessed. Nothing is known of the anal opening of Enallocrinus.
We give herewith new definitions of the Crotalocrinidae and their
two genera Crotalocrinus and Enallocrinus, to take the place of
those given by us in the Revision, Part III, p. 143, and pp. 147—
152, and we request all who may be using the Revision to substitute
them at once.
We now direct attention to another point of considerable interest.
which has been developed by this investigation. A very perplex-
ing figure was given by Angelin (Pl. XVII, fig. 2b), and a some-
what similar one by Murchison (Siluria, 3rd Ed., p. 247, fig. 5),
which show certain extensions apparently from the inner rim of the
first radials, and which superficially resemble the so-called “consoli-
dating apparatus” of Cupressocrinus. A closer examination of
Angelin’s figure shows these extensions to be composed of small
plates; both figures, however, are misleading, for our specimens
show that the plates forming those extensions do not rest against
the inner edges of the first radials as represented, but upon their
upper faces, as correctly shown in Angelin’s Pl. XVII, fig. 2a.
They are nothing but the exposed ventral surfaces of the second
primary and succeeding radials, the elevations being the projecting
margins along the ambulacral grooves. Neither do they extend so
far inward as would seem from Angelin’s figure, they project in-
ward only for a short distance, and form underneath a surface of at-
tachment for certain organs hereafter described.
Miller described and figured correctly (Op. cit. p. 189, Pl. VIII,
fig. 5), the inward curvature of the plates, but we cannot agree with
him in his statement that by means of this curvature a roofing is
formed over the periphery of the calyx. This is not confirmed by
the specimens, in which the calyx is covered by summit plates, in-
terradials, etc., and the grooves around the periphery are roofed over
by solid covering plates—leaving only the lateral margins exposed
—in connection with, and forming part of the calicular cavity. The
structure is clearly seen in our fig. 12, Pl. XTX, in which the grooves
are shown open except in one ray, where the covering plates are
restored from the same part in another specimen.
Another figure of Angelin (Tab. VIL., fig. 7a) gives an inner
view—that is, from below; not ‘“‘superne visus,”’ as erroneously stated
in the explanation of the plate—of a specimen of C. pulcher of
which he speaks as showing the so-called “consolidating apparatus.”
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379
Carpenter in his paper on Crotalocrinus' explains that “the calyx is
broken across near the level of the top of the basals, so that the inter-
nal faces of the radials and the following plates are exposed to view,
with the remarkable striations upon them, which were regarded by
Angelin as corresponding to the consolidating apparatus of Cupress-
ocrinus,’ and he proceeds: “It is possible that, like this structure,
they may represent an uneven surface for the attachment of muscles
and ligaments, but whatever else they may be, the strize are certain-
ly not hydrospire slits, as supposed by Wachsmuth and Springer in
1879 * * * *, But in any case they will no longer be able to re-
fer to this family as Palzocrinoids which ‘probably have hydro-
spires within the calyx,’ and to use this supposed fact as an illustra-
tion of their theory that Blastoids, Cystids and Crinoids are so close-
ly linked together that they are not entitled to rank as Classes of
Echinoderms equivalent to the Urchins and Starfishes.”
We have been able to study the organs in question in our speci-
men from Gothland (Pl. XIX, fig. 1), and in two of those used by
Angelin, loaned to us from the National Museum of Stockholm, in
all of which they are very well shown. They are totally different
structures from the so-called consolidating apparatus of Cupresso-
erinus, which we regard as muscle plates for the attachment of
muscles and ligaments to move its huge arms. The muscle plates
of Oupressocrinus are appendages of the first radials, and form part
of the upper surface of the vault, similar to the muscle plates of
Symbathocrinus, in which we know from direct observation that they
constitute parts of the vault, only the central space being closed by
additional plates. _ In both genera those plates are apposed by cor-
responding faces upon the first brachials, and there is no roof or
covering of any kind above them, they being necessarily external if
they served for places of muscular attachment to move the arms.
The case is totally different in Crotalocrinus in which the parts in
question are roofed over by very solid covering plates, leaving little
more than the faces forming the lanceolate areas exposed. Angelin
applies the name “consolidating apparatus” not only to the over-
hanging margins of the radials, but also to the lamelle under-
neath, to which Carpenter refers as “remarkable striations,” possi-
bly for “the attachment of muscles and ligaments.” These so-call-
ed striations consist of parallel lamellose walls or partitions, located
in regular sets within chambers or recesses, which underlie partly
1 Op. cit, p. 406.
380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
the overhanging margins of the higher radials constituting the
lanceolate areas, partly the outermost interradial, and are limited on
either side by the inward extensions of the second and succeeding
radials. There are two sets of these lamelle to each interradius,
those of adjacent rays meeting laterally and entering the same
chamber where they are closely connected ; while those of the same
ray stand at an angle from each other, and are apparently disconnect-
ed except by a mere point. Each set is composed of ‘five to seven
folded lamelle, with continuous walls forming loops at each end.
They stand upright, and seem to be attached at their lower ends to
the inner surface of the first radials, and those in the same ray come
together by their upper ends at a small angle under the small trian-
gular second radial, where it projects farthest inward. The upper
ends are further attached along the inner walls of the higher radials
and the outer interradials, underneath which the two adjacent sets
meet by parallel plates and form a close connection. The arrange-
ment at the anal side is not clearly shown in any of the specimens.
In Enallocrinus we have not been able to discover anything of: the
lamellee, but we had for examination but a solitary specimen show-
ing the interior of the calyx. There are seen, however, the same
chambered spaces in which they might rest, and we have little doubt
they existed in that genus also. Their position and structure in
Crotalocrinus rugosus are shown in our figures 12 and 1° on Plate
XIX. :
From our description it must be clear that these laminated struct-
ures do not possess any of the characteristics of muscle-plates. Their
position in paired sets is interradial; they are completely internal,
and have no visible connection with the arms, nor do they present
any surface for the attachment of muscles or ligaments; but on the
contrary are very frail structures, having in some places little parti-
tions connecting the walls, and giving the whole a somewhat porous
appearance. On the other hand if we compare them with the hydro-
spires in the Blastoid genus Orophocrinus, one cannot help being
struck with the resemblance in form, position and arrangement. We
will not assert unqualifiedly that they are hydrospires, but we are
very confident that they are not muscle-plates, nor anything of that
nature, and if they are not of the same character as the similar
organs in Orophocrinus, which have been universally considered to
be hydrospires, then we must acknowledge ourselves completely at a
loss for anything in echinoderm morphology with which to compare
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 381
them. There is nothing else like them in any known crinoid. If
they are hydrospires, then they certainly do afford a strong illustra_
tion of the close alliance between Blastoids, Cystids and Crinoids. If
they are not hydrospires, we should like to know what they are.
Enallocrinus is evidently very closely allied to Crotalocrinus. The
genus occurs at Dudley, England, whence we obtained specimens
showing the arms better than the Swedish ones, but nevertheless our
material for the study of this type was by no means so satisfactory
as that of Crotalocrinus. The English specimens are all more or
less crushed, and do not throw much light on the structure of the
calyx.
Angelin’s figures purporting to show the vault are imaginary, as
we have before shown. The only specimen in the Stockholm Muse-
um showing any part of the ventral covering has been sent to us for
examination, and we give two views of it (Pl. XX, figs 5 ="). It
is somewhat abnormal, two of the rays being grown together in
such a way as to modify the arrangement of some of the plates. It
is one of the specimens from which it is supposed Angelin’s figure
3a, Pl. VII was constructed. The insertion of the higher radials
upon the first radials is upon the same plan as in Crotalocrinus, es-
pecially the species shown by Angelin’s Pl. XVII, fig. 8a, and our
Pl. XX, fig. 4, and from this, and what little we can see of the ventral
covering in the specimen above alluded to, we conclude that the
vault must have been constructed substantially like that of Crotalo-
erinus.
We figure a flattened specimen from Dudley (Pl. XX, fig. 6%),
which shows the arrangement and bifurcations of the arms, but not
by any means to their full length. We have another set of arms
which seem to have their filiform extremities nearly complete, and
from this we should infer that the specimen we have figured shows
but little over half the length of the arms. Figs. 6% and 6% illus-
trate the projections from the sides of the joints, in the same speci-
men. We consider them importaat characters, perhaps representing
the projections on the arms of Crotalocrinus, and indicating a tend-
eney toward the reticulate arm structure, which is the only well
marked distinction between the two genera.
The specimen represented by Angelin’s Pl. XV, figs. 1, la, and 2,
as Enallocrinus assulosus, and which Dr. Lindstrém assures us is
correctly figured, represents in the reduced lateral connection of the
arm bases, and the presence of small interradials on the dorsal side,
’
382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
a considerable departure from the typical form of the genus. It is
inconsistent with the generic definition of Angelin, who described it
as having “interradialia nulla.’ It is a variation in the direction
of the English form of Marsupiocrinus—M. coelatus—(Pl. XX, fig.
7), which differs in its dorsal interradials from M. tennesseensis in al-
most the same way.
Crotalocrinus and Enallocrinus form a good family, which is con-
nected through Marsupiocrinus* with the other Camarata.
Suborder CAMARATA.
Family CROTALOCRINIDAE.
Base dicyclic, symmetry bilateral. Calyx throughout composed
of rigid plates. Dorsal cup constructed almost exclusively of under-
basals, basals, the first radials, and a small anal plate. Higher
radials up to the third or fourth order irregularly wedge-shaped,
their sharp ends directed outwards or sometimes hidden from view,
their larger ends, which curve upwards, grooved for the ambulacra.
The plates rest partly upon the first radials, partly against the radials
of the preceding order, being with the former, and with one another,
and laterally with those of adjoining rays, firmly united by suture.
Arms capable of great mobility ; uniserial; long ; dividing into very
numerous branches, which are free, or connected laterally by tis-
sues so as to form a net-work around the calyx, either continuous, or
limited to the rays and forming five reticulate leaf-like arms. The
arm branches are perforated by large axial canals, which penetrate
also the higher radials.
Ventral surface of calyx flat, composed of five unequal orals—the
posterior one the larger—five radial dome plates, one or more inter-
radials, and several series of covering pieces which take the rigid
form of vault plates.
Column large, round; central cayity extremely large.
CROTALOCRINUS Austin.
1842. Austin, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 1, Vol. X, p. 109.
1843. Austin, ibid., Ser. 1, Vol. XI, p. 198.
1848. Morris, Cat. Brit. Fos. (Ed. 1), p. 50; (Ed. 2), p. 75.
1 Tt is an interesting fact as showing the keen perception of that veteran
English naturalist, that Th. Austin in 1843 (Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser., II, Vol.
XI, p. 198) referred C. rugosus to the Marsupiocrinidae, a family named, but not
defined by him.
oo
ie“)
(oh)
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
1854. Salter, apud Murchison, Siluria, (Ed. 2), p. 219; (Ed. 3), p.
247, figs. 4, 5, 6, 7.
1855. McCoy, Brit. Pal. Foss., p. 54.
1873. Salter, Cat. Mus. Cambr., p. 123.
1878. Angelin, Icon. Crin. Suec., p. 26, Pl. 7, Pl. 8, Pl. 17, Pl. 25.
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Paleont., L., p. 356, fig. 244.
1882. De Loriol, Pal. de France, tome 11, Crin., p. 51.
1886. Wachsmuth and Springer, Rey. Palzoer., Pt. IIIL., p. 165.
1886. P.H. Carpenter, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. for November,
p. 397.
Syn. Cyathocrinus, 1821, J. 8. Miller, Nat. Hist. Crin., p. 89, with
plate ; Anthocrinus, 1853, Joh. Miller, Abh. Akad. Berlin,
pp. 188-192, Pl. 8;
1855. Roemer, Lethza. Geogn. (Ausg. IIT), p. 255.
1855. Quenstedt, Handb. d. Petref., IV, p. 948, Pl. 75.
1857. Pictet, Traité. de Paleont., IV, p. 312, Pl. 100. .
1860. Bronn, Klassen. d. Thierreichs., (Actinozoa), Pl. 27.
1862. Dujardin and Hupé, Hist. Nat. Zooph. Echinod., p. 117.
GENERIC DIAGNOSIS.
When the arms are closed the crinoid resembles an elongate bud
with folded leaves; when these are spread, it is wheel shaped, with
five lanceolate areas between the bases of the rays. Calyx sub-
globose, flattened above. |
Underbasals 5, large, pentangular, of uniform size. Basals 5, very
large, extending three fourths the height of the calyx, all hexagonal
except the posterior one, which is higher and has the upper angle
truncated for the reception of a comparatively small, quadrangular
anal plate, which rests between the first radials.
First radials much wider than high, their distal faces thickened,
either concave or straight, and occupied by small, shallow depres-
sions for the reception of the second and higher radials, which to the
third or fourth order rest partly upon this plate. The second radial
occupies a very small space at the middle of the first, where it ap-
pears as asmall, trigonal bifurcating plate, sometimes scarcely visible
dorsally. From its dorsal or outer side to its ventral side, the plate
is very long and slender, bent upwards almost to a right angle, so as
to bring the face opposite to that exposed dorsally into a horizontal
position, and on a level with the vault. The secondary radials rest
against the sloping faces of the second primary, and upon the first ;
they are bifurcating plates, and as such support immediately the ter-
384 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
tiary radials, which in C. rugosus, sometimes together with the first
plate of the fourth order, rest partly upon the first radial. All of
these plates, in various ways, are firmly attached to the first radial,
and united suturally with one another, and all of them, by curving
upwards and inwards, extend from the dorsal to the ventral surface
of the calyx, forming as such a sort of transition between true radi-
als and arm plates, in a similar manner as the higher radials of the
Platycrinidae, which they resemble in their arrangement. The plates
are wedge-form, thinning out toward the dorsal cup, where they are
seen as mere points or lines, or one or more of them are invisible al-
together. Their larger upper faces, which are exposed ventrally, are
deeply grooved for the reception of the ambulacra, and, when the
covering plates are in position are only partly exposed. The plates
above the fourth order are not in contact with the first radials, and
may be regarded as true arm-plates, which they resemble in form
and in point of mobility.
The arms are long and branch frequently ; they are connected lat-
erally by points of attachment from near the middle of each joint,
with open spaces between them, forming together a sort of network
around the calyx with innumerable elongate meshes. In C. rugosus
the network is continuous around the calyx, but in C. pulcher the
rays are separated, and form five broad reticulate leaves, which, when
closed over the calyx, overlap each other, contrary to the case of C.
rugosus in which the undivided network is closely plicated and fold-
ed. The lower plates of the rays, to the third or fourth order, are
immovably connected among each other and with the first radials ;
but higher up in the rays, where the plates are no longer in contact
with the first radials, an articulation by strong muscles and fosse
takes the place of suture. The arm joints, owing to their lateral pro-
jections, have the form of a cross with short arms: they are long flat
on the dorsal surface, laterally compressed, with straight sides, and
deeply grooved on the ventral surface for the reception of the am-
bulacra.
The ambulacral furrows are arched by covering pieces, 3 to 4
to each side of the arm joint, alternately arranged. The arm
joints are disposed in regular dichotomizing longitudinal rows, |
as well as in regular concentric transverse rows, the points of union
occupying the same line all around. Each arm plate is pierced with
a very large dorsal canal, and the bifurcating ones with two, which
meet in the middle of the plate; they ramify to the ends of the arms,
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 385
and all converge into one in the second radials, thence passing down-
ward along the inner surface of the first radials toward the basals.
The bifurcations near the calyx are unequal, the sloping faces of the
axillaries next the outer margins of the rays being considerably
wider than the inner ones, and the plates which they support are as
large in proportion. This continues on to about the sixth axillary,
above which the bifurcations gradually become regular, and the
outer plates attain the same width as the inner ones. By this peculiar
arrangement there appear, when the arms are spread, along the outer
plates of adjacent rays, five well marked lanceolate areas, to the top
of which the rays remain in lateral contact. The bifurcations along
the arms are extremely numerous, and take place at various inter-
vals, sufficient to fill up the full segments of the circle when the arms
are extended; they taper but slightly, are very long, and become
thread-like at the ends.
The higher radials from the first primary up project inwards, beyond
the periphery of the calyx ; the second projects the farthest, and the
plates of the second order slope away from it, as also those of the
third. The latter form the proximal ends of the lanceolate areas
whose overhanging margins, together with the outermost interradial,
form a roof,under which are located five large recesses or chambers,
interradial in position, each of which is occupied by two sets of lami-
nated structures, in form and arrangement closely resembling the
hydrospires of the Blastoid genus Orophocrinus. Each set apparently
is composed of five to seven folded lamellae with continuous walls
and loops at each end ; they stand upright, face laterally the inner
walls of the overhanging primary radials, their upper ends attached
to the inner floor of the outer interradial, being thus completely
covered by vault structures.
Vault flat, on a level with the spreading arms; composed of five
oral plates (the so-called central plate and the four large proximals).
The posterior oral (central plate) is large, somewhat elongate, its an-
terior end resting between the truncate faces of the four others, the
posterior end againt small anal plates. The four small orals vary
from elongate-clavate (Pl. XX, figs 2°. and 4) to almost regularly
hexagonal (Pl. XX, fig. 3). Outside the orals, and alternating with
them, are five somewhat irregular radial plates, which are axillary,
giving off two sets of covering pieces, two rows of plates to each set,
all in lateral contact ; they are heavy, convex plates, a little wider
than high, alternately arranged, and solidly inserted into the vautt.
26
386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Between the covering plates, and abutting against the four smaller
orals, are two or more interradials, the inner ones the larger. Be-
tween the radial-dome-plates, and against the large posterior oral,
are numerous small anal plates which embrace the anus, and of
which the outer ones face the anal plate of the dorsal cup. The anus
is excentric, and its form varies among species, being either extended
into a tube, or placed at the top of a small protuberance. The tube
apparently reached considerable length, and seems to have been
composed of several rows of transverse pieces longitudinally ar-
ranged, with a large octagonal cavity.
Column very large; terminating in numerous rootlets. Canal
large, round.
Geological Position, ete. Upper Silurian of England and Sweden.
Last of Species :—
1840. Crotalocrinus pulcher Hisinger, ( Cyathocrinus pulcher), Leth.
Suec., Supp. IL., p. 6, Pl. XX XIX, figs. 5 a. b-1878, Angelin,
Iconogr. Crin. Suec., p. 26, Pl. VII, figs. 5—7 a, b; Pl. VIII,
figs. 1—9a; Pl. XVII, figs. 1, la—d; Pl. XXV, figs. 3—
20.—1879, Zittel, Handb. d. Palaeont., Vol. I, p. 357, figs. 2,
4, 4 a—e.— 1886, W. and Sp., Revision Paleeoer., Pt. III, p.
150.
Syn. Anthocrinus Loveni Joh. Miiller, 1853, Abh. d. Berl. Akad. d.
Wissensch., p. 192, Pl. VIII, figs. 1—11.—Pictet, 1857, Traité
de. Paléont., Vol. IV, Pl. ¢, figs. 8 a, b, e—Dujardin and
Hupé., Hist. nat. Zvoph. Echinod., p. 117.—Quenstedt, 1885,
Handb. d. Petrefactenk., IV, p. 943, Pl. 15, fig. 4.
Upper Silurian, Gothland, Sweden, and Dudley, Eng.
1821. Crotalocrinus rugosus Miller, (Cyathocrinus rugosus), Nat.
Hist. Crin., p. 89., with plate-—1837, Hisinger, ( Cyathocrinus
rugosus), Leth. Suec., p. 89, Tab X XV, fig. 3; also Antckn,
Heft IV, p. 217, Pl. VIL,- fig. 3—1839, Phillips ( Cyatho-
crinus rugosus), Murchison’s Silur. System, p. 672, Pl. 18, fig.
1.—1843, Austin, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 1, Vol. XI,
p. 198.—1843, Morris, Cat. Brit. Foss., (Hd. I), p. 50.—1850,
D’Orbigny, ( Cyathocrinus rugosus), Prodr. d. Paléont., Vol.
I, p. 46.—1854, Salter, apud Murchison, Siluria, (Ed. 2), p.
219, (Ed. III, p. 247), figs. 4—7, and Pl. 13, fig. 3—1855,
McCoy, Brit. Pal. Foss., p. 55.—1873, Salter, Cat. Mus.
Cambr., p. 123.—1878, Angelin, Icon. Crin. Suec., p. 26, Pl.
VII, fig. 4; Pl. XVII, figs. 8, 8a. (not figs. 3, 3%.>)—1879,
-
1888. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 387
Zittel, Handb. d. Paleont., L., p. 357, fig. 244.—1885, Quen-
stedt, ( Cyathocrinus rugosus), Handb. d. Petrefactenk., IV, p.
943, fig. 349.—1886. W. and Sp., Rey. Palzeocr., Pt. III, p.
150.
Upper Silurian. Gothland, Sweden and Dudley, Eng.
1878. Crotalocrinus superbus Angelin, Iconogr. Crin. Suec., p. 26,
Pl. XVII, figs. 2, 2a, b—1886, W. and Sp., Rev. Paleoer.,
Pt EEGs 150,
Upper Silurian. Gothland, Sweden.
Crotalocrinus (undescribed species). Pl. III, fig. 4 (Referred by
Angelin, Pl. XVII, figs. 3, 3a, b, to C. rugosus).
Upper Silurian. Gothland, Sweden and Dudley, Eng.
ENALLOCRINUS D’Orbigny.
1850. D’Orbigny, Prodr. d. Pal. 1., p. 46; Cours. élém., IT, p. 142.
1854. Salter, apud Murchison, Siluria, (8rd Ed.), p. 247.
1857. Pictet, Traité d. Pal., IV., p. 320.
1862. Dujardin and Hupé, Hist. nat. Zooph. Echin., p. 154.
1878. Angelin, Icon. Crin. Suec., p. 25.
1879. Zittel, Handb. d. Pal., L., p. 356.
1886. Wachsmuth and Springer, Rev. Paleocr., Pt. III, p. 150.
Syn. Apiocrinites (Hisinger) in part ;
Millericrinus (D’Orbigny) in part ; Anthocrinus (Quenstedt) in part.
\
Generic Diagnosis—Calyx similar in form and construction to
that of Crotalocrinus; interradials sometimes appearing dorsally.
Arms not reticulate.
First radials wide, their distal faces usually occupied by a deep
lunate excavation in which the second primary and one or two higher
radials rest; sometimes, however, truncate. Second primary and
higher radials inserted and connected as in Crotalocrinus, curving
upward and appearing on the ventral side in a similar way. Rays
completely disconnected from the first radials up, and the arms be-
coming free variously between the first to the fourth bifurcation.
Second radials perforated by a large axial canal which passes down-
ward; it ramifies within the higher radials, and passes into the
arms, but apparently does not extend to their full length.
Arms uniserial, very long, tapering little, bifurcating at lengthen-
ing intervals toward the upper parts into very numerous equal
branches, the ultimate divisious being extremely attenuate ; the arms
capable of being spread out horizontally. Arm joints shorter than
in Crotalocrinus, with parallel sutures; those of adjacent branches
388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
opposite each other not alternating. ‘Toward the upper ends of the
arm joints there are more or less conspicuous transverse projections
—one from each side of the joint—which are more prominent and
elongate at the ventral side. They border the arm furrow, and give
to the arm, when viewed from the side, a pectinate appearance,
which is more strongly marked toward the distal ends of the arms
(Pl. XX, figs 62°). . Ambulacral furrows shallow, with covering
plates arranged in the usual way. '
Vault apparently similar to that of Crotalocrinus ; median part
unknown ; ambulacra toward the periphery roofed over by convex
alternating pieces having the form of vault plates, which pass out
over the arms. Anal opening unknown.
Column round, very large, with short joints and thin walls; canal
round and of extremely large size.
Geological Position, ete. Upper Silurian of Sweden and England,
List of Species:
1878. Enallocrinus assulosus Angelin, Icon. Crin. Suec., p. 26, Pl.
XV, figs. 1—4. Upper Silurian, Gothland, Sweden.
1828. E. scriptus Hisinger ( Cyathocrinites?), Anteckn IV, p. 217 ;
Pl. V, fig. 9; Pl. VII, fig. 1—1831. (Apiocrinites (?) serip-
tus), Anteckn V, p. 123, Esquisse d’un tableau des Petref.
de la Suéde, p. 23.—1837. Leth. Suec., p. 89, Pl. X XV, figs.
1 and 2.—D’Orbigny, 1840 (Millericrinus scriptus), Hist.
Nat. Crin., p. 94, Pl. XVI, fig. 29.—1850. Prodr. d. Pal., I,
p- 46.—Angelin, 1878, Icon. Crin. Suec., p. 25, Pl. VII, figs.
1—8a; Pl. IX, figs. 18 and 19; Pl. XXV, figs. 1—7; Pl.
XXVII, figs. 17—20a.
Syn.—Enallocrinus punctatus Hisinger, Leth. Suec., p. 89.—
Millericrinus punctatus D’Orbigny, Hist. Nat. Crin., p. 94,
Pl. XVI, fig. 30—Enallocrinus punctatus Salter, apud
Murchison, Siluria, (Ed. 2), p. 218.—Anthocrinus scriptus
and A. punctatus, Quenstedt, Handb. d. Petref., IV, p. 944,
PL (5, figs Gea: :
Upper Silurian. Gothland, Sweden and Dudley England.
1 We have observed these projections on the arms only in the English specimens.
We give it as a generic character, as we think it likely the Swedish ones will show
it also when sufficiently well preserved; and because we consider it of some im-
portance, as representing the projections on the arms of Crotalocrinus by which
these were connected, and thus exhibiting a tendency toward the reticulate struct-
ure.
1888.]
ie, 1*
Fig. 1°:
Big. 1°:
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 389
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PratE XIX.
Crotalocrinus rugosus. Ventral aspect of a large specimen
from Sweden, showing the inner floor of the calyx, the
lanceolate areas, and the outstretched arms with their deep
ventral grooves, and in places their covering pieces ; the
tips of the arms coiled up so as to expose their dorsal face.
The covering pieces at the lower right hand corner re-
stored from another specimen.
(Collection of Wachsmuth and Springer.)
Oblique view of a portion of the same specimen, showing
the lamellae beneath the overhanging margins of the high-
er radials.
Ventral view of a portion of the arms enlarged.
Figs. 2° Diagramatic figures showing the arrangement of the high-
er radials in Crotalocrinus rugosus; 2% the dorsal side; 2”
the ventral side; 2° a vertical section through the dotted
line in 2. The numbers refer to the same plates in all
three figures, i.e. 1. and 1” to the first and second prima-
ry radials, 2' to the secondary radials, 31 and 32 to the
tertiary radials, 41 and 4? to the quaternary radials;
the succeeding plates are brachials.
Ventral aspect of the same species from a specimen in the
National Museum of Stockholm, showing the rigid cover-
ing plates around the margin of the calyx.
A portion ofa first primary radial of the same species with
the higher radials in place resting upon it.
(Collection of Wachsmuth and Springer.)
Enlarged view showing the markings on the lower face of
a first radial of the same species.
Radials and lower arm plates in Pferotocrinus.
The radials and lower arm joints in Marsupiocrinus ten-
NESSEENSIS.
PLATE XX.
Crotalocrinus pulcher. Anterior view of a specimen with
arms from Gothland, Sweden.
(Collection of Wachsmuth and Springer.)
>
Fig.
Fig.
om
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Posterior view of the same specimen, showing the base of
the proboscis.
Calyx of a small specimen of Crotalocrinus rugosus from
Dudley, England.
(Collection of Wachsmuth and Springer.)
Ventral aspect of the same specimen.
Ventral aspect of Crotalocrinus sp.?
(Drawn from a gutta percha cast. Original in the Muse-
um at Cambridge, England.)
Crotalocrinus sp. und., from Sweden. Ventral view, from
a fine drawing by Mr. G. Liljevall. (Original in the
National Museum at Stockholm).
Enallocrinus scriptus. Posterior view of a specimen from
Sweden in the National Museum at Stockholm. 5”: ventral
view of same specimen, showing portions of the covering
plates in some places; the middle of the vault broken
away.
Enallocrinus scriptus. Anterior view of a nearly complete
specimen from Dudley, England (Collection of Wach-
smuth and Springer), 6% transverse section of column of
same specimen, showing the large central canal; 6% en-
larged side view of a portion of the arm, showing the
pectinated projections; 6% Dorsal view of same.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 391
CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE LIFE HISTORIES OF PLANTS. No. III.
BY THOMAS MEEHAN.
Smilacina bifolia. Observing in a large tract of Smilacina bifolia
that the leaves were for the most part at a very light angle, indeed
almost vertical, it seemed to afford a good opportunity to test a
prevalent idea that, in such cases, the stomata are nearly equal in
numbers on each surface of the leaf. Dr. J. B. Brinton kindly made
a careful microscopical examination of some leaves I furnished him
with, but he found no difference in this respect to leaves with a
purely horizontal direction. On a small section, of which he hands
me a drawing, there was only one stoma on the upper surface,
while there were fifteen on the under surface.
Dichogamy and its significance. Dichogamy has reference to the
relative period of maturity of stamen and pistil. When the stamens
are in the advance the flowers are said to be proterandrous ; when the
pistil is mature before the stamens, the flower is proterogynous. Usu-
ally the term is employed in connection with hermaphrodite flowers.
But as it is a mere question of the time required for the development of
the sexual organs necessary to the perfecting of a complete individual,
it is obvious that we may extend the term so as to include monececious
and dicecious plants.
The law under which the separate sexual organs are retarded in
their growth in some instances and accelerated in others. cannot
but have supreme importance in the study of vegetable biology. If
we can trace the working of this law in the hermaphrodite flower to
the extent of acceleration or retardation for but a single day, we can
easily get to understand how some plants may come to have the
maturity of these organs days apart, and to finally divide into
monoecious or dioecious classes.
Among the contributions I have made to botanical science, few
impress me with more importance than the determination of the fact
that a degree or measure of heat capable of exciting the male organs
to growth, may yet be wholly inadequate to start growth in the
female (see Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences 1885, p.
17.)
I observed that the aments of walnuts, hazel-nuts and similar
plants were often perfected weeks and occasionally months before
the female flowers were in conditon to receive pollen, and that it
392 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
was only in seasons when the stamens and pistils matured simulta-
neously, that large crops of nuts followed. I had overlooked at that
time, the fact that something similar had been placed on record be-
fore. In the Transactions of the Horticultural Society of London,
vol. v, 1824, is a paper by Rev. George Swayne, showing that the
filbert crop in Kent fails two years out of five; that some seasons
the catkins mature before the female flowers open, and at others not
till afterwards, and that failure to produce a crop results from the
absence of pollen at the period when the female flower is in receptive
condition. All I can, therefore, claim as original is the formula that
varying measures of heat influence variously the separate sexes,—
the smaller measure influencing the male, while the female still con-
tinues to rest.
Since my observations were made on the hazel, I have extended
them to other plants. It has long been known that in many of the
Central States coniferous trees that produce seeds abundantly farther
north, rarely have one perfect seed in those regions. I know this is
so in the vicinity of Philadelphia. The Norway spruce may pro-
duce cones by the cart-load, with not an ounce of seed m the lot.
Since the observations above cited I find that the male flowers ma-
ture long before the female, and affords a satisfactory reason for the
failure. Further north, where winter does not coquette with spring
as here, they remain in rest equally, and advance together. In their
gregarious, forest condition, no doubt the extent of surface conduces
to an equilibrial condition of climate not surrounding isolated trees
in a cultivated state.
In brief, I may enumerate a number of coniferz, alders, walnuts,
chestnuts, oaks, hickories and the hazel-nut as among those that I
carefully watched for the few years past, noting a wide range of
difference each season between the times of maturing of the male
and female flowers. The season of 1887-8, I noticed was favorable
to a simultaneous maturity of the sexes. I exhibited specimens in
the spring of 1888, to the Botanical Section of the Academy, and
had no difficulty in predicating on the fact of simultaneity an
abundant harvest of nuts, which has been fully realized. I have
since been observing the working of this principle in elms and
maples—hermaphrodite plants ; the species under observation being
Ulmus americana, and Acer dasycarpum. The trees of the former
were comparatively young, but had flowered the first three years
without perfecting more than a seed here and there. I had no
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 393
difficulty in perceiving in these elms and maples in the spring of
1887, that the pollen had been dispersed weeks before the pistil was
mature. The past season (1888) examination showed the anthers
bursting simultaneously with the receptive conditions. ‘There was
an abundant crop of seeds. The maple is usually inclined to dicecism.
Although the flowers may seem perfect, the stamens in some fertile
flowers never proceed beyond anthers that give no pollen, while in
other cases perfect stamens with filaments and fertile anthers are
produced, when the gyncecium seems unable to fulfil its functions.
But the elm, at least here, seems a full hermaphrodite, yet only this
season of three successive ones, had it full hermaphrodite functions.
In the two first it was so very proterandrous as to be barren. It
was not proterandrous this year, though I cannot say it was pro-
terogynous. It was, in fact as well as in name, hermaphrodite.
Surely I am warranted in presenting the formula, that varying
measures of temperature variously affect the separate sexual organs,
and that the dichogamy has its origin in this simple circumstance.
It is interesting to note how near we may get to a great truth
without actually perceiving it till long afterwards. In 1868, I
announced, through the Proceedings of the Academy, my discovery
that Mitchella repens was not merely heterostyled but practically
dioecious. I had subsequently found a white-berried variety which
bore berries freely when surrounded by its companions, but I never
had one during the many years it was under culture in my
garden. Up to that time and subsequently, the course of these
phenomena was obscure. Mr. Darwin, in Forms of Flowers (Chap.
VII), observes: ‘“ But according to Mr. Meehan Mitchella itself is
dioecious in some districts. * * * Should these statements be
confirmed, Mitchella will be proved to be heterostyled in one district
and dioecious in another.” With our present light we can readily
see how this may easily be.
Now what is the significance of dichogamy? The general view at
the present time is substantially the same as given in the work
above quoted. There Darwin expresses it in these words: “ Va-
rious hermaphrodite plants have become heterostyled, and now ex-
ist under two or three forms; and we may confidently believe that
this has been effected in order that cross-fertilization should be as-
sured.”
With the new light I have thrown on the origin of dichogamy, I
am sure the great Darwin would be ready to modify this view. It
cannot have the significance we all thought it had at that time.
394 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
We now see that a plant may find itself in a climate or in sur-
roundings favorable to an early development of stamens; in anoth-
er case in a locality or country where the reverse will prevail.
Dichogamy will then vary. We also know that heredity plays a
part in fixing a constantly recurring local tendency, so that a plant
having acquired a tendency to proterandy or it may be to proter-
ogyny, would continue to carry the habit long after the superinduc-
ing causes had passed away. Plants remaining for ages in a local-
ity where the conditions would be favorable to a wide difference
between simultaneity, would probably become in time moneecious
or dicecious, and all this, as we see, from no particular assurance
that cross-fertilization would thereby be affected.
In trying to reach generalizations of this character, we should
not, however, forget that in nature, things seldom follow from a
single cause, but from the operation of united forces. In this con-
nection I have shown, (see Proceedings of the American Association
jor the Advancement of Science, Salem, and subsequent meetings, ) that.
sex itself is largely influenced by the amount of nutrition available
when the primordial cell is fertilized. If sex itself may be influ-
enced by nutrition, the subsequent growth of its representative or-
gans may still further be influenced, which would introduce into
the consideration an additional element aside from temperature
alone.
I have my own postulate as to the significance of dichogamy.
I rest here by the simple proposition that whatever its significance,
it arises from no effort innate to the plant itself, but from an outside
force that can have little interest in cross-fertilization.
(It is proper to say that an abstract of this paper was read before
the American Association for the Advancement of Science, at Cleve-
land. See Botanical Gazette for September 1888.)
Trientahs Americana, Pursh. There can be but little doubt that.
Trientalis Americana grew freely over what is now the city and
county of Philadelphia. It is still found in adjoining counties, and
here and there are old botanists who remember having collected it
on the confines of the county; but it is not included in Barton’s
Flora, now over 60 years old,—nor in Darrach’s Catalogue, or any
published list so far as I know. In an old chestnut wood at Chest-
nut Hill, my brother Joseph detected a small patch this summer,
that has evidently been there for ages, but overlooked,—and this
suggests some thoughts on its habits and past geographical record of
general interest.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 395
I have collected this plant in its various forms over widely sepa-
rated portions of the American continent,—Canada, the Alleghanies,
California and Alaska,—and though holding its own wherever
found, it does not show evidences of the extension that must have
characterized it in the past, when, with no remarkably special-
ized organs favoring distribution, it managed to travel in its various
forms—as T. Europea, T. Americana and T. Arctica—over the whole
north of Europe and across the American continent to Behring’s
Straits. So far as I have seen in the localities named, the plants
seem to produce seeds, though not abundantly; but there are no
evidences of seedlings. In the Chestnut Hill location, the only tract
on which the plant is found is but a few hundred square feet, yet
though unnoted, it must have been confined to this limited area foy
at least a hundred years, or perhaps for many centuries. The piece
of wood is a favorite botanical hunting ground. I myself have
wandered through it for over a quarter of a century, and the early
Philadelphia botanists—sharp-eyed as they were—would surely have
seen it here if at all common in those times. It is worth while
considering how so great a wanderer in remote ages should
have acquired such remarkable stay-at-home habits in recent times.
Some conditions favorable to distribution must surely have existed,
which have disappeared in modern ages. What can these changes
be?
So far as persistency is concerned I note a fact, not recorded any-
where, that the plant is stoloniferous, bearing a small tuber at the
end of aslender thread, which reproduces the plant next year, the
whole of the previous years’ plants, except these little tubers, dying
away. In this way the plant, through its progeny, can be a traveler
at the rate of two or three inches a year. It is remarkable that this
character is not noted by systematic authors, for the specimens in the
herbarium of the Academy taken at various times during the flowering
period, from different parts of the world, exhibit traces of the little tu-
bers at the ends of stolons that have evidently been passed over for
true roots. It is hardly to be supposed that the plants have wan-
dered wholly by the aid of these little tubers, valuable as they
must be for persistency when once a foot-hold has been obtained.
We are forced to the conclusion that at some former period it re-
ceived much more aid from seed and seedlings than it receives in
modern times.
396 : PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
As we are often aided in the study of the geographical wanderings
of plants, a list is appended of comparatively local plants, found in
companionship with Zrientalis on the 3rd of June.
Allium Canadense _ Pogonia verticillata
Amelanchier Botryapium Polemonium reptans
Cypripedium pubescens Pyrola elliptica
Hypoxys erecta Pyrus arbutifolia
Mediola Virginica Viburnum acerifolium
Mitchella repens Viola pubescens
Goodyera pubescens Veratrum viride
Osmunda spectabilis Aspidium eristatum.
Oxalis violacea
On the glands in some Caryophyllaceous flowers. It cannot be
said that the existence of glands near the base of the common
chickweed and its allies, has been wholly overlooked, but they are
seldom referred to, and no attempt has been made to read their
significance.
In regard to the chick-weed, Stellaria media, Withering notes in
the British Flora (p. 547) “stamens glandular at the base.” Dr.
Bromfield notes of a closely related species, Stellaria ulignosa,
“stamens 10, those alternating with the petals inserted on shortish,
flattened glands; near, but not close to the base of the germen;
being, in fact, above the latter and at the top of the conical enlarge-
ment of the calyx below the sepals” (Flora Vectensis 71). At p.
75, the same author notes of Arenaria serpyllifolia “ stamens 5 to 10,
those alternating with the sepals placed on a projecting glandular
base, five shorter, having apparently abortive anthers.” Of Honck-
enya peloides, both Torrey and Gray and Withering note the ten
glands alternating with the stamens; and Hooker remarks of Cher-
leria sedoides that it has glands inside the five stamens.
Examining with a pocket lens, some flowers of the chickweed,
between two and three o’clock in the afternoon early in May, I
noticed the glands had secreted an enormous amount of liquid.
The little globules were nearly as large as ordinary pin heads.
It did not occur to me, at that time, that the period of the day
had anything to do with the phenomena, but I was led to ex-
amine other allied species of plants the next day. I did not detect
any, and I particularly examined Cerastiwm viscosum and had about
concluded that the existence of prominent glands and a free exudation
of liquid was peculiar to the chickweed, when, examining about the
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 397
same time of day as in the former case, I found the exudation as
abundant in the Cerastium also. Profiting by this hint, and exam-
ining at this time of day all species coming under my notice, I can
say that glands exist in Cerastium viscosum, O. arvense, Arenaria
serpyllifolia, Stellaria longifolia, S. media; I could not find the
glands in Stellaria pubera.
It is well known that in Caryophyliacee generally, there are
usually ten stamens, in two series,—the outer alternate with the
petals,—the inner five alternate with the outer, and opposite the
petals. There are often less by abortion, in which case it is the
members of the inner series that disappear. No glands are between
the stamens of the inner series. There are never but five, and these
alternate with outer stamens. The outer series mature the anthers
a day before the inner series mature them (except, I believe, in S
pubera) ; but the liquid exudation occurs with the maturity of the
anthers of the first series.
The liquid (in the chickweed) has a slightly sweet taste, and is
very viscid, as a little taken out with the point of a pen-knife and
rubbed between finger and thumb, testifies.
The five outer stamens in Arenaria serpyllifolia bend inwards, and
the abundantly polliniferous anthers rest on the apex of the stigmas,
completely covering the stigmas with own-pollen. The inner ones
turn outwardly, resting on the petals or nearly so, and seem to have
anthers wholly destitute of pollen. In Cerastium viscosum, the pollen
matures before the pistils. At the time the pollen scatters, the fasicle
of pistils are keeping close company. Soon afterwards they diverge,
push themselves up among the pollen-clothed stamens, and are cer-
tainly self-fertilized in most, if not absolutely in all cases.
Examining the chickweed as it grew over a very large tract of
waste ground, and soon after noon, when with a close naked-eye ob-
servation the comparatively large globules can be seen glistening in
the sun,—one can scarcely neglect asking nature the chief object of
this enormous production of sweet liquid,—for the collective quan-
tity from these millions of flowers may be truly styled enormous.
It has been asserted that nectar is given to flowers to attract insects
for the purpose of cross-fertilization, and many observations confirm
the deduction in numerous instances. Certainly the nectar attracts
and as certainly the visits often result in fertilization—sometimes
by the flowers’ own pollen, oftener by the pollen from flowers on the
same or neighboring plants, and occasionally from flowers from
398 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888. |
plants under different conditions, the true Darwinian idea of cross-
fertilization. But I could see no bees visiting the chickweed for
this banquet of nectar set before them. As the flowers are arranged
for self-fertilization, there could be no assistance to the flowers in
this work even did bees visit them. If insects came, in no way does
it appear they could be of any advantage. Because I did not see
any bees using the nectar during warm days following the first ob-
servations, it does not follow that they never resort to it. Bees go
to those flowers where their hard task is the easiest. I have often
seen them collecting pollen from chickweed, when a few warm early
spring days attracted them from the hive, but at soon as the male
catkins of the willow mature, with their very abundant crop of pollen,
they leave the chickweed, and indeed most other flowers, while the
willow pollen lasts.
Later on, about the middle of May, I found nectar-collecting
honey bees working freely on Cerastium viscosum. It is never safe
to say bees or other insects do not visit certain flowers. It depends
largely on the supply of material. When abundant they evidently
have preferences, and let the more difficult tasks alone.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399
BIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE OF GEORGE W. TRYON, Jr.
BY W. S. W. RUSCHENBERGER, M. D.
“* for, go at night or noon,
A fiend. whene’er he dies, has died too soon,
And, once we hear the hopeless He zs dead,
So far as flesh hath knowledge, all is said.”’
Fames Russell Lowell—Ayassiz.
The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia requested me,
February 7th, 1888, to prepare a biographical notice of the late
George W. Tryon, Jr. for publication in its Proceedings. He died
February 5. The suddenness of the event shocked all his personal
aud many of his merely scientific friends, far and near. One (Mr.
C. E. Beddome), who is in every sense qualified to justly appraise
his worth, said to me in a note, dated Tasmania, April 4, not very
long since received,—‘“ I have respected him as one of the grandest
conchologists of the day. I feel that I have lost my most valued
correspondent; but what must be the loss of your academy and the
conchological world. His great work ‘ Manual of Conchology,’ not
yet finished, will be the grandest monument that could be erected to
his memory.”
Eminence, fairly acquired by a toiler on any path of learning or
scientific research, wins admiration, especially from those moving
forward on the same quest, whether in his neighborhood or in places
widely remote; and after he dies, they become more or less curious
about his origin and career. Some are pleased to seek causes of his
success in the circumstances of his life, assuming that social environ-
ment sways the formation of character, just as physical conditions
surrounding certain organisms are supposed to influence their de-
velopment. Students of this class ask where the eminent man was
born and raised and trained, as well as what notable features char-
acterized the locality where he grew to be distinguished among his
associates. Those of another sort, who confide almost entirely in
the doctrines of heredity, are disposed to ascribe the notable qualities
of a contemporary to his parents and their ancestors, thus failing to
recognize in him any merit wholly and clearly his own. They seem
to forget that uncommon intellectual force, mental capability is not
always traceable to heredity or to environment in any considerable
400 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
extent. All the great heroes of science and literature did not have
scientific ancestors or scientific environment. The genius of neither
Franklin nor Shakespeare was an inheritance.
George Washington Tryon Jr. the eldest son of Edward K. Tryon
and his wife, née Adeline Savitd, was born May 20, 1838, on Green
street between Front and Newmarket streets, then in the district of
the Northern Liberties. The place of his birth is about twelve or
fifteen hundred yards, to the northward and eastward of the State
House of Philadelphia,—Independence Hall. The locality was
never a fashionable quarter of the city. It abounds in alleys and
courts of small tenements, having small windows glazed with eight
by ten inch panes, and roofs of cedar shingles, as may be seen to-day.
A substantial, industrious people, most of them engaged in mechan-
ical pursuits, inhabited the neighborhood, the alleys and streets of
which were the play-grounds of their many children. It is now as
it was fifty years ago, only the signs of age in some spots are prob-
ably more apparent.
George Washington Tryon, a gunsmith, had trained his son,
Edward K. Tryon in the manufacture and trade in fire-arms and
sportmen’s accoutrements, a business which he had established and
conducted successfully during a quarter of a century or more. He
retired in 1837, leaving his son in possession of the establishment.
George W. Tryon Jr. at an early age manifested a retiring, cheer-
ful and considerate disposition. His interest in the sports and
games of boys was not sufficient to divert him from books. | When
about seven years old he began to collect specimens of natural his-
tory. The taste was encouraged by giving him a room at home in
which to display them to members of a society of infant naturalists
which he formed. From the start, shells received most of his atten-
tion.
The observant and reflective character of the child’s mind is
notable. He early discovered that a nomenclature was necessary to
satisfactorily arrange even a small collection of specimens. He in-
vented one. He named shells according to their shapes or colors, as
the round shell, the white shell; one of such irregular form as puz-
zled him to designate he called the funny shell. The habit of gath-
ering specimens of natnral history begun without method in infancy,
and more and more systematized as his experience and observation
matured, was life-long. His first and predominant love for shells
increased with his years and made him an industrious votary of
conchology.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 401
He was taught the rudiments of learning at home. After he had
passed through one or two private schools for children, it was deter-
mined that he should receive academic instruction in the Friends’
Central School, because it was regarded to be the best available. It
was then in Race between Fourth and Fifth streets, and now is at
the 8. W. corner of Race and Fifteenth streets. :
He became a pupil of the institution in October 1850, and con-
tinued till his school days ended, June 1853. During the almost
three years here his attention was given only to English studies
and drawing. The transfer of the family residence, in 1852, to
Pittville, one of the purlieus of Germantown, five or six miles
from the business centre of Philadelphia, did not interrupt his regu-
lar attendance at school, nor hinder the growth of his museum.
The family returned to, and was permanently established in the city,
in 1869.
Very soon after leaving the Friends’ Central School he employed
tutors in the city and studied French, German, and Music until he
had acquired knowledge enough, to write and speak the languages
sufficiently well for practical purposes, and to understand the princi-
ples of musical composition. About this time with some of his
young friends he formed a musical society or club. Their perform-
ances enlivened the evenings at their country homes.
His interest in books created in him a desire to be an author.
His first effort in this direction was a history of the United States
finished when he was twelve years old, but not printed. A few
years later he announced that literary and scientific work would be
his permanent occupation. But, at the earnest request of his parents,
he relinquished the project, for a time, and engaged in mercantile
work in his father’s establishment. At the age of nineteen, 1857,
he was given a share in the business, and on the retirement of his
father in 1864, he became the principal of the firm, and so contin-
ued till 1868, when he retired with a modest income, sufficient in
his estimation to justify indulgence in unrestrained pursuit of science
and letters.
He found relaxation from business cares in music. Though not a
notably skilful player on any instrument, he was acquainted with
the science of music.
He wrote a comic opera in three acts, entitled, Amy Cassonet or
the Elopement, which was acted at the Amateur Drawing Room,
and published; but it was in no sense successful. The copyright is
dated 1875.
27
402 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
He sought to spread a love of music among the people and to
elevate their taste. With this in view he joined in the management
of the Germania Orchestra for a season. It was a failure. His
partner disappeared, and Mr. Tryon had to supply pecuniary defi-
ciencies.
Tn connection with a musical-publication firm—Lee and Walker,—
he edited and published, prior to 1873, librettos of fifty-two stand-
ard and popular operas. During 1874 and 1875, he revised and
edited the sheet-music publications of Lee and Walker, and in the
same years edited The Amateur ; a monthly magazine of music and
literature. He also arranged a series of operatic songs which were
published, in 1875, under the title of Operatic Gems. In 1884, he
published “Sacred Songs for Choir and Home Circles, a Collection
of Solos, Concerted Pieces, Hymns, ete.,” the music of which consist-
ed largely of selections from the scores of the more popular operas.
Mr. Tryon was a warm admirer of the fine arts, and occasionally
amused himself with painting.
Music and the fine arts were secondary occupations; they never
diverted him from the pursuit of natural history.
He was elected a member of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia, June 1859. From that time till the end of his life no
one did more to promote the interests of the institution. His ser-
vices were many and important. The society is largely indebted to
Mr. Tryon for the edifice which it now occupies. On his motion,
November 14th, 1865, a committee was formed “ to devise methods
for advancing the prosperity and efficiency of the academy, by the
erection of a building” ete. He was appointed chairman of the
committee. The measures recommended by it were adopted. The
election of a Board of Trustees of the Building Fund followed, Jan.
11,1867. Mr. Tryon was appointed Secretary and held the office
till he died, twenty-one years. He was a member of the building
committee. No one labored more assiduously in every way to pro-
mote the completion of the enterprise which he had started. He
gave $3000 to the building fund; and his generosity enabled the
Conchological Section of the Academy to give to it as much more.
Mr. Tryon was elected a Curator of the academy, January, 1869,
and resigned July, 1876. Under his direction and personal attention
the numerous collections of the museum were safely transferred, in
Jannary 1876, from the old, and arranged in the new building. This
arduous task was admirably performed.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 403
At his instigation the Conchological Section of the Academy of
Natural Sciences was founded, December 26, 1866. He was a con-
stituent member, and its Conservator from December, 1875, thir-
teen years. His skill in conchology is manifest in the admirable
arrangement and classification; and his incessant carefulness, in the
excellent condition of the collections which were under his official
charge. According to the annual report of the Section, December
1887, they consisted of 189,150 specimens, contained in 51,327 trays
each with an appropriate label. This enormous collection, and an al-
most complete conchological library of 954 volumes, besides 455
pamphlets, bound in 26 yolumes, all accessible under one roof, render
the facilities of study of the subject in the academy unsurpassed.
April 9, 1867, he made a special deposit of more than ten thousand
species of shells and more than a hundred jars of specimens, chiefly
of naked mollusks, in alcohol, gathered during his life-long devotion
to the subject, on condition that none should be loaned. They were
appropriately intercalated with the academy’s collection. The dupli-
cates were sold, by his direction, and the prdceeds of sales covered
into the treasury of the Conchological Section. It is notable that
he did not stipulate that this very large contribution—the largest
private collection in this country—should be kept separate from the
rest of the museum and designated by his name, which is a
usual condition attached to donations of private natural-history
cabinets to public museums. It was his opinion that it is unwise to
accept cabinets on such terms, because it must result sooner or later,
in encumbering the museum with the care of numberless and useless
duplicates, for which space cannot be easily afforded.
The records show that Mr. Tryon contributed valuable specimens —
to the museum every year during the remainder of his life.
He gave, May 7, 1867, 119 volumes and 56 pamphlets on conchol-
ogy to the library.
The first number of the American Journal of Conchology, of
whith Mr. Tryon was the editor and proprietor, was issued, Febru-
ary 1865. Seven volumes were published, the last number in May,
1872. After the institution of the Conchological Section of the
_Academy it was issued, nominally, by the publication committee of
the Section, of which Mr. Tryon was chairman, but he was still the
editor. The third and subsequent volumes contain summaries of
the proceedings of the Section at its stated meetings.
404 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
To the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences, and to
the American Journal of Conchology Mr. Tryon contributed sixty-
four papers, between 1861 and 1873, inclusive, a list of which is ap-
pended. -
In conjunction with Mr. Wm. G. Binney, in 1864, Mr. Tryon edited
the complete writings of C. S. Rafinesque on recent and fossil conch-
ology. In 1866, he published A Monograph on the terrestrial mol-
lusca of the United States; in 1870, A Monograph of the Fresh-
water univalve mollusca of the United States; in 1873, American
Marine Conchology, and A Monograph on the Streptomatidee (A mer-
ican Melanians) of North America. This work was prepared at the
instance of the Smithsonian Institution, and published in its Miscel-
laneous Collections, in December. It was a result of several years’
study. The manuscript was completed in 1865, and laid aside. At
the end of seven or eight years, he again took up the subject, which
he regarded as “ one of the most interesting and difficult branches of
American Conchology,” and found himself “inclined to question
many of the conclusions ” which he had reached. In the preface of
the work he says:—‘ A more enlarged acquaintance with fresh-
water shells convinces me that a much greater reduction of the
number of species than I have attempted must eventually be made;
but until the prolific waters of the Southern States have been sys-
tematically explored, and a great collection of specimens obtained,
which shall represent every portion of those streams and include as
many transitional forms as can be procured, a definite monograph
of our Melanians cannot be written.”
More conclusive evidence of Mr. Tryon’s habitual devotion
to accuracy in all his work than is contained in the history of the
preparation of this monograph is not required.
Mr. Tryon, for the sake of relaxation, left Philadelphia, May
1874, and returned September 19. During an absence of four
months, he visited England, Holland, Belgium, Germany, France,
Switzerland, Italy. “
In aseries of letters he wrote good-humored, cheerful sketches of
his impressions of people and places at which he halted on his way.
They were published in the Amateur; a monthly magazine of Music.
and Literature.
He visited England and the continent of Europe again in 1877.
His route included Liverpool, London, Paris, Marseilles, and thence
along the coast of the Mediterranean to Nice, San Remo, Genoa,
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 405
Pisa, Rome, Naples, Sorrento; returning through Venice, Florence,
Turin, Geneva, Chamouni, Berne, Mayence; the Rhine, Cologne,
Brussels, Antwerp and back to London, Liverpool and home, in the
autumn.
Now, naturally imbued with the love of truth exclusively for the
truth’s sake ; possessed of the true methods of scientific inquiry, and
equipped with the results of his life-long home studies of the mol-
lusca, as well as of his observations in the European museums and
cabinets, Mr. Tryon devised the plan of his greatest work—Manual
of Conchology—and promptly began its execution.
The plan embraced four series of volumes. The first series of
eleven or twelve volumes is devoted to the marine univalves; the
second, of six or seven, to the terrestrial mollusca; the third, of four
or five, to the marine bivalves, and the fourth, of four or five vol-
umes, to the fluviatile genera.
The Manual of Conchology, completed according to the author’s
plan, will consist of from twenty-one to twenty-nine octavo volumes,
all fully illustrated.
The scope of this great work is described in the “ advertisement ”
or preface of the first number, which was finished and ready for pub-
lication in the last week of December, 1878. Mr. Tryon says, the
Manual “ will include, in systematic order, the diagnoses of all the
genera and higher divisions of the mollusca, both recent and fossil,
and the descriptions and figures of all the recent species; together
with the main features of their anatomy and physiology, their em-
bryology and development, their relations to man and other animals,
and their geological and geographicai distribution.”
The numbers of the first series were issued quarterly. Volume
IX was completed December 1887. The nine volumes include 3125
pages of text, illustrated by 680 plates of 12.055 figures.
The first number of the second series—terrestrial mollusea—was
distributed January 1885, and thereafter quarterly to the close of
Vol. III, December 1887. The three volumes contain 942 pages of
text, illustrated by 187 plates of 6,454 figures.
Conscious that he probably might not live to complete his enter-
prise, but without foreboding, Mr. Tryon interested Mr. H. A. Pils-
bry init. To him he freely imparted his purposes and views in
connection with it, so that he might continue the publication, should
it become necessary. Mr. Pilsbry, who had the unreserved confi-
dence of the author, has succeeded him in his office and will edit
OO a
406 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
the work according to the plan. It will be published by the Conch-
ological Section of the Academy, of which Mr. Pilsbry is the Con-
servator.
Mr. Tryon published the first volume of Structural and System-
atic Conchology, in 1882; the second, in 1883, and the third and
last volume, in 1884. The three volumes contain 1195 octavo pages
of text, illustrated by 140 plates of 3,087 figures.
During the last ten years of his life, Mr. Tryon wrote 5262 octavo
pages on conchology, illustrated by 1007 plates of 21,576 figures. |
To the labor of composition the business cares of publication were
added: he was the publisher of his own works.
Until his admission into the Friends’ Central School, October
1850, whatever religious impressions he may have imbibed in child-
hood, if any, came from the Sunday School and the example and
teaching of his parents who were Lutherans. After leaving school,
June 1853, he became interested in the Society of Friends and reg-
ularly attended its meetings during several years. For reasons, no
doubt conclusive and satisfactory to himselt, he left the meetings of
the Friends, and, from about the year 1876, he was usually present
at the stated services of the First Unitarian Church of Philadelphia,
When it was proposed, about 1883, to construct a new building for
the church Mr. Tryon was chosen one of its trustees. The work
interested him. He gave very generously ($1000) in aid of its com-
pletion. He was long chairman of the Society’s committee on
music, and, until his death, was prominent among those who, in
various ways, actively promoted the interests of the church.
He was not, however, rigidly sectarian. Knowing that there is
difference on every question that interests men, his natural spirit of
tolerance swayed his views.and conduct relatively to those holding
opinions opposite to his own.
He printed for private circulation, a pamphlet entitled, Church
and Stage, with the motto, Fiat justitia, ruat celum. It contains
twelve octavo pages, and is dated March 15, 1880.
The object of the paper is to uphold the drama as a proper means
of popular instruction in spite of its general condemnation by
clergymen.
After stating substantially that, in western Europe as well as in
ancient Greece, the stage is the off-spring of the ceremonies of public
worship—that the mystery play, which followed the liturgical drama,
was the first form of the serious national stage in England, France,
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 407
Italy, Spain and Germany,’ he contends that in as much as the
theatre has originated independently and exists under many types
of civilization—Chinese, Japanese, Indian, Greek, Roman and mod-
ern European—and the influence of the Christian Church exerted
against it through so many centuries has failed to extirpate it, the
institution is likely to continuously thrive. Therefore, instead of
persistently denouncing the stage, it would be more politic to
kindly endeavor to point out and eliminate from it all acting that
is, in any degree, detrimental to morality.
His manner of treating the subject may be seen in the following
quotations :
“The first charge is, ‘that dramas are frequently immoral stories,
abounding in covert or open indecencies of language or action—
sometimes actually blasphemous.’ We appeal to any regular theatre
goer whether his experience does not partially confirm this. Even
those who frequent dramatic representations with the intention of
encouraging only meritorious and unobjectionable plays, occasionally
through ignorance of the matter of some new drama, or misled by
uncandid notices of the press, find themselves ‘assisting’ at repre-
sentations, quite bad enough to destroy their faith in the theatre.
Our own experience, however, and we believe that it will be borne
out by the experience of every play-goer who has not depraved in-
stincts, is that plays are usually entirely innocent, and those of a
serious character are intended to and do inculcate good morals and
right living, that they teach man’s whole duty with, (no words are
more expressive), dramatic force; that is to say, they make an im-
pression such as can never be made by either reading or lecture ;
for, to the power of trained declamation is added the verisimilitude
of scenery and action. The eye as well as the ear receives and
transmits the lesson to the brain and heart. No sermon can be
so effectual for good, simply preached from the pulpit as when it is
embodied in appropriate action:—that brings it home to us in all
its reality ; it is no longer a mere abstraction.
The play’s the thing
Wherein I'll catch the conscience of the king.
“Such is a good play, better than the best sermon, not only more
powerful but more far-reaching in its beneficent mission.
“Then if we take up the clerical charge once more, and agree
that the amount of evil done by conveying this indecency or blas-
1 See Harper’s Magazine, Dec. 1888, p. 62.
408 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
phemy through the vividness of dramatic portrayal is incalcuable ;
that it familiarizes the auditors with wrong thinking, speaking and
doing, and thus lowers the moral tone of the community, on the
other hand, a good play, by parity of reasoning, should have an
equally incalculable good influence, and we believe that it has. The
vast majority of men [who] are not attracted towards the church,
find themselves unable to comprehend its methods, endure its limita-
tions, or perhaps appreciate its motives—and for these, else left
without moral instruction, the play yields along with its human
interests and entertainment, its realistic teaching by example as
well as precept.
“Nay more, the clergyman who objects to the representation of
the prayer scene in ‘ Hamlet,’ does not hesitate to read the passage,
or to hear it read, perhaps by the very actor who is accustomed to
play the part, and who will throw into it all the emotion and all
the action that the lecture platform permits him. He will even
listen to this recital in the opera house probably, and without
alarming his conscience ‘ because it is not a dramatic performance,
but only a recital.’
“Thus, to be consistent, it seems that we must at least tolerate
upon the stage, that which we approve in the library or lecture
room. But this point is not yet exhausted: there are various con-
ceptions of morality perhaps, and that of the churchman is not
necessarily the highest. No one will deny that among theatre-goers
are to be found persons who are as cultivated in religion, morals
and manners, as tender of conscience, as responsive to the call of
duty as any of the abstainers. Is it not rather illiberal then to
assume that these persons only visit the theatre because they, in this
particular, disregard the voice of conscience? Again, the lower
classes of mankind, who frequent the sensational second-class play,
who read the equally sensational second-class ‘ weekly ;’ are they to
be frowned down on account of the vulgarity of their amusements?
The uncultured cannot become educated christian people at a bound:
generations of refining influences are required to effect the transfor-
mation. For these men and women in process of enlightenment,
with yet unformed, or badly formed tastes, the theatre is a civilizing
agent of far greater power than it is for their betters.
“Tt may be taken for granted that actors as well as audiences are
susceptible to the moral or immoral lessons of the drama, and if,
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 409
as we assert, the vast majority of plays exert great, though un-
obtrusive moral influence, then so far as their profession may be
supposed to affect their conduct we should expect to find actors
respectable and worthy the acquaintance of the pure and noble.
But, it will be said, there is abundant evidence that at least many
actors are dissolute people, that they live low, vagabond lives, are
indecent in language and conduct, drunkards, gamesters, irreligious.
The evidence, alas! is abundant, and if it could be proven that the
proportion of actors who are disreputable is larger than in other
professions, we might accept the fact as some evidence of the cause
assigned for it; but it is notorious that in all public professions
lapses from rectitude are numerous.
“ A word in conclusion concerning those who, whilst despising
the stage and its associations, yet avail themselves of its fruits. They
owe their best music to its inspiration ; their best choir singers there
received their education; their minister is himself indebted to it,
either directly or indirectly, for the force and grace of style and dec-
lamation which render him so impressive. Without the stage you
would not be possessed of Shakespeare—whose single influence for
good has certainly far outweighed all the evil which the theatre has
ever done mankind. Those who while discountenancing the theatre,
read Shakespeare or hear him read; who listen with delight to the
operatic overture or aria; who hang entranced upon the eloquence
of the rostrum, are meanly, (I had almost written dishonestly)
enjoying the fruits of an institution which they condemn.”
Whether Mr. Tryon’s championship of the stage be acceptable
or not, few persons will fail to perceive in it his philantrophic dis-
position and love of justice, as well as the degree of his inclination to
render homage to the Muses.
To those who would withhold all such matters from a biographical
account of a scientist as not pertinent, and to those whose hostility
to the theatre is relentless, the above citations may seem too long;
but they may be excused. They prove that his mental scope took in
very much more than the truths of natural science; that the com-
paratively inferior and ignorant classes of society had his sympathy,
and that he was ready to help improve their mental and moral level.
Thus, they indicate a feature of his character not portrayed else-
where in his writings. None will deny that a feature partly or
410 ' PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACA&%®EMY OF [1888.
wholly left out obscures or spoils the likeness, even in a finished
painting of a friend.
Mr. Tryon was notably cautious and conservative in scientific
work. The personal reputation incident to success he did not appre-
ciate very highly, nor regard to be among the objects of scientific
research. Just as a private in the ranks, forgetful of all the labor
and perhaps blood he has contributed towards it, delights in the
glory of his regiment, wholly unmindful of the personal distinction
he may have fairly earned for himself, so Mr. Tryon toiled to pro-
mote the welfare and fame of the academy, within the bounds of
which he seemed to have merged his scientific aspirations. Few
have been like him in this respect; but his example may have fol-
lowers. Natural modesty, an almost reclusive disposition made him
reluctant to hold office. He often refused to permit friends to nom-
inate him for prominent positions in the society, and was apparently
indifferent to the honor of membership in other associations. He
did not care to publish that he was a corresponding member of the
California Academy of Natural Sciences, from December 1862; of
the Boston Society of Natural History, from March 1864; of the
Royal Society of Tasmania. from June 1886, nor of any other in
which his name had been enrolled. ;
Mr. Tryon’s good sense and unselfish nature ; his cheerful, unpre-
tentious deportment at all times, won for him affectionate respect
and enduring friendships. Because he was punctual, prompt and
efficient in doing, within the limits of official duty, whatever con-
cerned the interests of the academy, he deserved and had the
unreserved confidence of all.
The quantity and quality of work done during his happy career
are perennial vouchers of his unremitting industry and varied abil-
ity. It is doubted whether a collegiate training and the Master’s
degree would have facilitated his progress and enabled him to ac-
quit himself better in any sense. A genius for discovering his own
deficiencies, and then filling them by opportune selfhelp, was a
practical substitute for an Alma Mater.
Mr. Tryon’s abiding desire to increase our knowledge of conchol-
ogy, which he has done so much to advance, is manifest in his last
will and testament, dated March 18th, 1886.
He bequeathed to the Conchological Section of the Academy cer-
tain real estate to be a source of a permanent trust fund, the income
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 411
from which is to be applied to augment the Conservator’s salary, to in-
erease the collection of shells, as well as to other purposes, at the
discretion of the Section. All profits which may be derived from
his conchological works and from his conchological publication bus-
iness are to be added to the fund.
This provision, in connection with the present vast collections and
an almost perfect library, goes far towards establishing in the United
States the centre of conchology at the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia.
Mr. Tryon was methodical in all his ways, and unswervingly firm
of purpose. He always did what he believed to be right in face of
all opposition; but he tranquilly considered argument against his
opinions, and gracefully yielded them whenever he could not answer
it. He passed much of his time in the academy at work among its
collections and books. For health’s sake he appropriated time for
daily exercise in the open air, without much regard to the state of
the weather. On Saturday, January 28, 1888, while the temperature,
ranged between 12° and 17° F. and the wind was blowing freshly
from the north-west, he walked briskly in an easterly direction more
than a mile, and returning faced the wind. Paroxysms of difficult
breathing forced him to stop many seconds, and several times. On
reaching home he was much depressed physically ; his circulation
was abnormally slow and weak, but he soon rallied and seemed to
be surely recovering. In the course of two or three days a kind of
roseola, to which he had been liable at times since an attack of scar-
let fever in childhood, appeared, and towards the last became hem-
orrhagic. He died February 5, the eighth day after his cold walk.
His father, a brother and a sister survive him. His mother died
December 23, 1869. He was a bachelor. As far as known he was
at no time inclined to change his celibate condition.
Accepting a definition that poetry is merely the blossom and
bloom of human knowledge, Mr. Tryon was Laureate of the king-
dom of the mollusca. He well knew all its inhabitants—they were
thousands—and characterized every typical one in descriptive lines
—full of knowledge but without poetic cadence or poetic measure of
any kind. But his whole attention was not given to those mollusks.
He had eyes for all natural objects. He was fond of flowers, had
studied botany successfully, and learned to botanize. In the summer
it was his custom to take long walks in the country. On reaching
home from those walks he was almost sure to be laden with flowers
412 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
and grasses, gathered by the way, some for study in connection with
his herbarium, which was large, and others to bedeck certain rooms
in the house. And now and then a mineralogist was surprised to
hear him talk so knowingly about minerals. Indeed, his acquaint-
ance with natural history, generally, was sufficiently intimate to
make the title of naturalist appropriate to him. His knowledge of
nature and natural things was a pure accomplishment, in no sense
associated with his bread-wining work while he was the successtul
man of business.
This imperfect sketch of an eminent benefactor of the academy
is fittingly closed with the following tributary stanzas, written by
his friend, our fellow member, Mr. John Ford, Feb. 15, 1888.
IN MEMORIAM.
As falls the oak, mature and strong in limb,
A giant ’mong its fellows tall and grand,—
So fell the peer of those whom Science crowns,
Th’ immortal Tryon, type of noblest men.
Not human hearts alone do feel the blow
That struck him down in life’s meridian,—
The leafy woods, the vales, and quiet streams
Where Nature’s gems he sought, alike are grieved.
E’en Neptune mourns the loss of one who knew
His sea-born children all by sight and name;
And from their games the Tritons sadly turn
To breathe a requiem through horns of pearl.
His form is gone, but deathless evermore
On pages manifold his thoughts remain ;
And there, like ripened fruits, they wait the hands
Of all who would their charming flavor prove.
Though well we know the victor’s fadeless crown
His brow adorns, and that he dwells in peace,
Yet do our hearts, remembering the past,
Still long to meet him face to face again.
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 413
List oF ParerRs AND BOOKS WRITTEN
BY GEORGE W. TRYON JR.
On the mollusca of Harper’s Ferry, Va. Proc. Acad. Nat. Se.
Philad. 1861, pp. 396-399.
Synopsis of the recent species of Gastrochenide, a family of
acephalous mollusca. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad. 1861, pp. 465-
494.
On the classification and synonymy of the recent species of Phola-
didz. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad. 1862, pp. 191-220.
Description of a new genus, (Diplothyra) and species of Phola-
didze, (Dactylina Childensis.) Proce. Acad. Nat. Se. Philad. 1862,
pp. 449-450.
Notes on American Fresh Water Shells, with descriptions of two
new species (Vivipara Texana, Amnicola depressa.). Proce. Acad.
Nat. Se. Philad. 1862, pp. 451-453.
Monograph of the family Teredide. Proc. Acad. Nat.Se. Philad.
1862, pp. 493-482.
Contributions towards a monography of the order of Pholadacea,
with descriptions of new species. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad.
1865, pp. 143-146.
Descriptions of two new species of Fresh Water mollusca, from
Panama, (Planorbis Fieldii, Amnicola Panamensis,). Proc. Acad.
Nat. Se. Philad. 1863, p. 146.
Description of a new Exotic Melania, (M. Helenz.). Proc. Acad.
Nat. Se. Philad. 1863, pp. 146-147.
Descriptions of new species of Fresh Water Mollusca, belonging
to the families Amnicolide, Valvatide, and Limnzeide, inhabiting
California. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad. 1863, pp. 147-150.
Description of a new species Pleurocera (P. plicatum.). Proce.
Acad. Nat. Se. Philad. 1863, pp. 279-280.
Description of a new species of Teredo, (T. Thomsonii) from New
Bedford, Mass. Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. Philad. 1863, pp. 280-281.
Descriptions of two new species of Mexican Land-Shells, (Helix
Rémondi, Cyclotus Cooperi.). Proc. Acad, Nat. Se. Philad. 1863,
p. 281.
Synonymy of the species of Strepomatide, a family of Fluviatile
Mollusca, inhabiting North America. Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. Philad.
1865, pp. 806-322.
OE a at Rin ke Pe a ere
414, PROCEEDINES OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Synonomy of the species of Strepomatide, a family of Fluviatile
Mollusca inhabiting North America. Proc. Acad. Nat. Se.
Philad. 1864, pp. 24-48, 92-104; 1865, pp. 19-36.
Description of two new species of Strepomatide; Goniobasis
Haldemani, Pleurocera Conradi. Amer. Journ. Conchol. I, 1865,
p- 08.
Descriptions of new species of Pholadide. Amer. Journ. Conchol.
I, 1865, pp. 39-40.
Observations of the new genus Io. Amer. Journ. Conchol. I,
1865, pp. 41-44.
Catalogue of mollusca, collected by Prof. D. S. Sheldon, at Dav-
enport, Iowa. Amer. Journ. Conchol. I, 1865, pp. 68-70.
Observations on the family Strepomatidse. Amer. Journ. Conchol.
I, 1865, pp. 97-135.
Catalogue of the species of Physa, inhabiting the United States.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. I, 1865, pp. 165-173.
Descriptions of new species of Melania. Amer. Journ. Conchol.
I, 1865, pp. 216-218.
Descriptions of new species of Amnicola, Pomatiopsis, Somato-
gyrus, Gabbia, Hydrobia, and Rissoa. Amer. Journ. Conchol. i,
1865, pp. 219-222.
Descriptions of New Species of North American Limneide.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. i, 1865, p. 223-231.
Review of the Goniobases of Oregon and California. Amer.
Journ. Conchol. i, 1865, pp. 236-246.
Catalogue of the species of Limnza inhabiting the United
States. Amer. Journ. Conchol. i, 1865, pp. 207-258.
Description of a new species of Mercenaria; (M. fulgurans,)
Amer. Journ. Conchol. i, 1865, p. 297.
Monograph of the family Strepomatide. Amer. Journ. Conchol.
i, 1865, pp. 299-341 ; ii, 1866, pp. 14-52, 115-133.
An abnormal specimen of Planorbis bicarinatus. Amer. Journ.
Conchol. ii, 1866, p. 3.
Descriptions of new fresh-water shells of the United States.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. ii, 1866, pp. 4-7.
Descriptions of new exotic fresh-water Mollusca. Amer. Journ.
Conchol. ii, 1866, pp. 8-11.
Description of a new species of Rissoa; R. exilis. Amer. Journ.
Conchol. ii, 1866, p. 12.
a " a
= “ " on
Ee CS SS
Raarera ry
ee
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415
Note on Mr. Pease’s species of Polynesian Phaneropneumona.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. ii, 1866, p. 82.
Description of a new species of Vivipara; V. Waltonii. Amer.
Journ. Conchol. ii, 1866, pp. 108-110.
Descriptions of new Fluviatile Mollusca. Amer. Journ. Conchol.
ui, 1866, pp. 111-113.
Observations on an abnormal specimen of Physa gyrina. Amer.
Journ. Conchol. ii, 1866, p. 114.
Note on the lingual dentition of the Strepomatide. Amer. Journ.
Conchol. ii, 1866, pp. 184-135.
Monograph of the terrestrial mollusca oF the United States.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. IT, 1866, pp. 218-277, 306-327: iv, 1869,
pp. 9-22.
Description of a new species Columna; C. Leai. Amer. Journ.
Conchol. ii, 1866, pp. 297-298.
Descriptions of new species of Melaniidee and Melanopside.
Amer. Jour. Conchol. ii, 1866, pp. 299-301.
Description of a new species of Septifer; S. Trautwineana.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. ii, 1866, p. 301.
Description of a new species of Helix; H. Bridgesi. Amer.
Journ. Conchol. ii, 1866, p. 303.
On the terrestrial Mollusca of the Guano Island of Navassa.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. ii, 1866, pp. 304-305.
Notes on Mollusca collected by Dr. F. V. Hayden in Nebraska.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. iv, 1869, pp. 150-151.
Catalogue of the families Saxicavide, Myide, and Corbulide.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. iv, 1869, (Append.), pp. 59-68.
Catalogue of the family Tellinide. Amer. Journ. Conchol. iv,
1869, (Append.), pp. 72-126.
Descriptions of new species of terrestrial Mollusca from Anda-
man Islands, Indian Archipelago. Amer. Jour. Conchol. v, 1870,
pp- 100-111.
Descriptions of new species of marine bivalve mollusca in the
collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. v, 1870, p. 170-172; vi, 1871, pp. 23-24.
Note on Cyclophorus foliaceus, Reeve (non Chemnitz) and C. Leai,
Tryon. Amer. Journ. Conchol. vi, 1871, pp. 25-26.
Notes on Dr. James Lewis’ paper “On the shells of the
Holston River.” Amer. Journ. Conchol. vii, 1872, pp. 86-88.
Catalogue of the family Cyprinide. Amer. Journ. Conchol.
vii, 1872, p. 252.
416 PROCEEDINGS CF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Catalogue of the recent species of the family of Glauconomyide.
Amer. Journ. Conchol. vii, 1872, pp. 253-254.
Catalogue of the recent species of the family Petricolide. Amer.
Journ. Conchol. vii, 1872, pp. 255-258.
Catalogue of the recent species of the family Cardiide. Amer.
Journ. Conchol. vii, 1872, pp. 259-275.
Catalogue and synonymy of the recent species of the family
Lucinide. Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. Philad., 1872, pp. 82-96.
Catalogue of the family Chamide. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad.
1872, pp. 116-120.
Catalogue of the family Chametrachzidz. Proc. Acad. Nat.
Se. Philad., 1872, pp. 120-121.
Descriptions of three new species of marine bivalve mollnsea;
Crassatella Adelinze, Lucina distinguenda, Circe bidivaricata. Proce.
Acad. Nat. Se. Philad., 1872, p. 130.
Catalogue and synonymy of the family Galeommide. Proc.
Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad. 1872, pp. 222-226.
Catalogue and synonymy of the family Leptonide. Proc. Acad.
Nat. Sc. Philad., 1872, pp. 227-229.
Catalogue and synonymy of the family Laseide. Proce. Acad.
Nat. Se. Philad. 1872, pp. 229-234.
Catalogue and synonymy of the family Astartide. Proc. Acad.
Nat. Sc. Philad. 1872, pp. 245-258.
Catalogue of the family Solemyide. Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. Philad.
1872, p. 258.
On a series of land and fluviatile Mollusca from Utah. Proc.
Acad. Nat. Se. Philad. 1873, pp. 285-286.
The complete writings of Constantine Smaltz Rafinesque on Re-
cent and Fossil Conchology. Edited by William G. Binney, and
George W. Tryon Jr., members of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia. 8vo, pp. 96+-40-+8 = 144; plates 3; figures 69.
Bailliere Brothers, New York; J. B. Bailliere et Fils,, Paris; H-
Bailliere, London; C. Bailly Bailliere, Madrid. 1864.
A Monograph of the Terrestrial Mollusca inhabiting the United
States. With illustrations of all the species. By George W. Tryon
Jr., editor of the American Journal of Conchology ; member of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia; corresponding
member of the Boston Society of Natural History; the Lyceum of
New York; the California Academy of Natural Sciences; the
Zodlogischen botanischen Gesellschaft in Wien, ete. Published by
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 417
the author, 625 Market street, Philadelphia, 1866. 8vo, pp. 159-++
XLIYV ; plates 18, with colored duplicates; figures, 430. Bailliere
Brothers, New York; J. B. Bailliere, et Fils, Paris; Triibner &
Co., London; C. Bailly—Bailliere, Madrid; Asher & Co., Berlin.
A Monograph of the Fresh water univalve molluseca of the
United States, in continuation of Prof. S. S. Haldeman’s work, pub-
lished under the above title. By George W. Tryon Jr. Published
by the Conchological Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia, 1870. 8vo, pp. 238, plates 32.
American Marine Conchology: or descriptions of the shells on
the Atlantic coast of the United States, from Maine to Florida.
By George W. Tryon Jr.. member of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia. Published by the author, No. 19 N,
Sixth street, Philadelphia, 1873. 8vo, pp. 208; plates 44; figures
550.
Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, (253). Land and Fresh-
Water Shells of North America. Part IV. Strepomatide (Ameri-
ean Melanians). By George W. Tryon Jr... Smithsonian Institu-
tion, Washington, December, 1875. 8vo, pp. LYV+435; 838
figures, intercalated with the text.
Manual of Conchology ; Structural and Systematic ; with illustra-
tions of the species. By George W. Tryon Jr., Conservator of the
Conchological Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia. Published by the author. Academy of Natural Sciences,
Corner Race and Nineteenth streets.
Vol. I, 1879. Cephalopoda. 8vo, pp. 316; plates 112; figures
671
Vol. II, 1880. Muricidze including Purpurine, 8vo, pp. 289;
plates 70; figures 977.
Vol. III, 1881. Tritonide, Fusidze, Buccinide. 8vo, pp. 310;
plates 87; figures 1287.
Vol. IV, 1882. Nassidee, Turbinellid, Volutids, Mitride. 8vo,
pp. 276; plates 58; figures 1545.
Vol. V, 1883. Marginellidee, Olivide, Columbellide. 8vo, pp.
276; plates 63; figures 1351.
Vol. VI, 1884. Conide, Pleurotomide. 8vo, pp. 400; plates
65; figures 1550.
Vol. VII, 1885. Terebride, Cancellariidze, Strombide, Cypreide,
Ovulidz, Cassidide, Doliide. 8vo, pp. 309; plates 75; figures
1301.
28
418 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888_
Vol. VIII, 1886. Naticidee, Calyptreeide, Onustide, Turritel-
lidee, Vermetidee, Ceecide, Eulimidee, Pyramidellide, Turbonillide -
8vo, pp. 461; plates 79; figures 1582.
Vol. EX, 1887. Solariidse, Ianthinide, Trichotropide, Scalariide,
Cerithiidee, Rissoidee, Littorinide. 8vo, pp. 488; plates 71; figures
1991. (The first serie: will be completed in eleven or twelve
volumes).
Second series TERRESTRIAL Mouuusca. ,
Vol. I, 1885. Testacellidee, Oleacinide, Streptaxidee, Helicoidea,
Vitrinide, Limacidee, Arionide, ete. 8vo, pp. 364; plates 60 ; fig-
ures 1698.
Vol. II, 1886. Zonitide. 8vo, pp. 265; plates 64; figures 2072.
Vol. III, 1887. Helicidze (begun; to be completed in three or
four volumes). 8vo, pp. 313; plate 63 ; figures 2664.
Third series—Marine Bivalves—4 or 5 volumes.
Fourth series—Fluviatile genera—4 or 5 volumes.
Norre—The second, third and fourth series will be continued
and completed by H. A. Pilsbry, Conservator of the Conchological-
Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.
Church and Stage, Philadelphia, March 15, 1880, (printed for
private use). 8vo, pp. 12.
Structural and Systematic Conchology: An introduction to the
study of the Moliusca. By George W. Tryon Jr. Conservator of
the Conchological Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia. Published by the author, and issued from the
Academy.
Vol. I, 1882. 8vo, pp. 312; plates 22; figures 256.
Vol. II, 1883. 8vo, pp. 430; plates 69; figures 1539.
Vol. III, 1884. 8vo, pp. 453; plates 49; figures 1492.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 419
DECEMBER 4,
Mr. Coarues Morris in the chair.
Twenty-five persons present.
Theories of the Formation of Coral Isl *, CHARLES MorRRIS
remarked that there exist, as is well known, two theories of the
formation of coral islands, the subsidence theory of Charles Darwin,
and the recent theory propounded by John Murray and others,
which claims that the phenomena can be explained without calling
in the aid of subsidence. It was not his purpose to offer any argument
on this controverted question, and he would simply say that the
Darwin theory seemed to him much the most probable, the objec-
tions to it being, in his view of the case, far less cogent than Hee
to the Murray theory.
If the subsidence theory were accepted, however, there was one
consequence necessarily deducible from it which, so far as he was
aware, had not yet been definitely considered, and which was not
without scientific importance.
The area occupied by coral islands in the Pacific is, as stated by
Dana, 6000 miles in length and from 2000 to 2500 miles in width,
thus covering from 12,000, 000 to 15,000,000 square miles. This
includes a blank central area of 1 000,000 square miles in which the
subsidence is supposed to have been too rapid to permit coral growth,
beyond which is a region of small atolls, and outside this the region
of ordinary atolls. Outside this again is a region in which barrier
and fringing reefs replace atolls, and if this region be included the
total area of subsidence must have been, according to Le Conte,
about 20,000,000 square miles.
The depth ‘of subsidence is var iously stated. Dana considers that
the extreme subsidence was at least 9000 or 10,000 feet. Later
authorities give it at about three miles. As regards the average sub-
sidence of the whole area it may perhaps be safely assumed as not less
than 5000 feet, possibly considerably more. If the Darwin subsidence
theory be accepted, then, an area of sea bottom equal to that of the
largest continent must have sunk bodily to a depth of at least a
mile.
This subsidence may have been correlative with a considerable
elevation of the land surface, but there is no reason to believe that
there was any equal elevation of other portions of the ocean bed.
There are many evidences of local elevation, but all of them taken
together are unimportant as compared with the great subsidence
over the coral island area, and may have been balanced by local
subsidence elsewhere. Yet such an immense subsidence, with no
corresponding eleyation of the ocean bottom, could not take place
without adding greatly to the capacity of the ocean basin. It formed
what we may speak of asa huge valley in the ocean bed, of 20 000,000
420 PROCEEDINGS OF TIE ACADEMY OF [1888.
square miles in area and one mile in average depth. The filling of
such a valley with water must necessarily have caused a marked
lowering of the general ocean level. If the figures above given be
assumed as correct it is easy to calculate the amount of depression
of sea level.
The area in question is equal to that of Asia and Europe combined,
and the effect of its sinking would be equivalent to that of the sink-
ing of the Eurasian continent till covered with water to the average
depth of one mile; since to fill such a valley in the ocean bed would
require as much water as to cover a continent sinking to the same
depth. The area named is very nearly one seventh | es the whole
ocean area, and to fill it to a depth of one mile would cause a general
oceanic depression of one-seventh of this depth, or about 750 feet.
If the average subsidence be taken at a somewhat greater figure, say
7000 feet, the consequence would be a depression of the ocean level
of 1000 feet.
This is no fanciful conclusion. If the subsidence stated really
took place, without important elevation of the ocean bed elsewhere,
such a lowering of the general ocean level must necessarily have
occurred to an extent governed by the average extent of subsidence.
The effect on the relations of land and ocean altitude would be
equivalent to an elevation of the whole land surface of the earth to
a height of 750 or 1000 feet, or some other height dependant on the
real degree of subsidence.
Such an effect must have left its marks, in the exposure of con-
siderable areas of new land along sloping shores, in the draining of
bays and estuaries, the possible conversion of bays into partly or
fully land-locked seas, and other drainage results. In fact if such a
virtual elevation of all the shore regions of the earth took place it
would seem as if it must have left some generally traceable indica-
tions, which would furnish an argument in favor of the subsidence
theory. Yet it may have been so “complicated with actual elevations
and depressions of the land surface as to destroy evidences of its
existence in most localities. That land drainage and shore eleva-
tion did take place to a considerable extent during the Tertiary
epoch is acknowledged, but whether these were due to actual eleva-
tion, or toa sinking of the ocean level, is a problem which cannot
be definitely solved without much fuller evidence than we possess
at present.
The following was ordered to be printed :—
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 421
ON TWO NEW SPECIES OF STARFISHES.
BY J. E. IVES.
While engaged in reviewing the starfishes in the collection of the
Academy, I found two forms belonging to the genera Pteraster and
Coronaster which do not appear to have been described. They may
be thus characterized:
Pteraster tesselatus, n. sp.
Dorsal surface very convex ; arms tapering at their aboral ends,
and much recurved. Supradorsal membrane regularly reticulated ;
reticulation forming obliquely arranged hexagonal areas, which are
very apparent upon the sides of the arms. No spicules found in the
supra-dorsal membrane. Paxilize about 2 mm. high. Each paxil-
la surmounted by eight radiating spinelets enclosing a number of
The spinelets when examined under the mi-
croscope are found to be composed of two or more
connected many-sided hollow cylinders, the sides of
which are perforated by elongated apertures as shown
in the figure representing a portion of a cylinder
highly magnified. The distal ends of the spinelets
are inserted into the delicate membranous bands which
form the reticulation of the supra-dorsal membrane.
Some of the spinelets perforate this membrane in the
centres of the hexagonal areas, projecting slightly on
the surface. On the dorsal surface of the disk and arms, especially
in the hollows of the inter-radial portions of the disk and of the
recurved arm, there are numerous minute folds of the integument
that produce a somewhat granulate appearance of the membrane.
There are 25-30 spiracula in each hexagonal area. The oscular
orifice is surrounded by a number of webbed spinelets.
On the ventral surface the actino-lateral spines are short, about
70 on each side of the ambulacral furrow. There are a correspond-
ing number of ambulacral combs. At the base of the arm each
comb has 6 spines; the three outer spines are the longest and about
equal; the fourth (counting from the outside) rather smaller, the
fifth very small, and the rudimentary sixth spine very minute, and
directed towards the aboral end of the arm. The number of spines
429 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
in a comb decreases towards the end of the arm. The ambulac-
ral feet are in two rows, 80-90 feet in each ray. There are twelve
spines at each angle of the mouth forming a single web. The four
central spines are the longest, the first pair of spines on the outside
of these rather smaller, the next half the size of the last pair, and the
two outermost pairs very short. Two large well developed secondary
mouth-spines in each interradial angle.
Greatest diameter of specimen from tip of one arm to tip of an
opposite arm 100 mm.; proportion of radius of disk to radius of arm
as 1 to 2: height of disk 55 mm.
A single specimen; color in alcohol, dull yellowish grey.
This species differs from Pteraster pulvillus, Sars, to which it appears
to be closely allied, by its longer arms; the absence of large conical
papillee upon the supra-dorsal membrane; its greater size, being
about half as large again; the relatively much greater number of am-
bulaeral combs and actino-lateral spines, and the different size and
number of the spines of the ambulacral combs. It also appears to
be closely allied to Pt. semireticulatus, Sladen, but may be distin-
guished from it by the prominent central spinelets of the paxille,
which perforate the supra-dorsal membrane; the greater number
and difference in size of the spiracula; the absence of any tendency
towards a quadruple arrangement of the ambulacral feet—the great-
er number of ambulacral and mouth spines, and in its greater size
being about 3} times as large as Pt. semireticulatus. It differs al-
together from Pteraster aporus, described by Dr. H. Ludwig from
Behring Sea,—Pé. aporus having no oscular orifice. Pt. aporus ap-
pears to be the only species of Pteraster that has hitherto been de-
scribed from that region. ;
Below, I give a list of the species of Pteraster that have been
deseribed up to the present time.
P. militaris, O. F. Miller. Zool’ Dan. Prodr. p. 234; Muller and
Troschel, System der Asteriden, pp. 44, 128, pl. VI, fig. 1;
Sars, Oversigt af Norges Echinodermer, p. 48, Tab. iv, v,
vi, fig. 1-13.
P. militaris, O. F. Miiller; var. prolata, Sladen. Trans. Roy. Soe.
Edinb. xxxil, p. 153.
P. puvillus, Sars. Oversigt af Norges Echinodermer, p. 62, Tab. vi,
figs. 14-18, Tab. vii, viii, ix, figs. 1-6.
P. multipes, Sars. Vidensk. Selskabs. Forhandlinger, 1865, p. 200;
Fauna littoralis Norvegiae p. 65. Tab. viii, figs. 1-17.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 425,
P. Dane, Verrill. Proce. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. vol. xii, p- 386;
Trans. Conn. Acad. vol. i, p. 568, pl. LX, fies. Lh, ita;
P. afims, H. A. Smith. Ann. Nat. Hist. (4), vol. xvii, p. 108.
P. rugatus, Sladen. Journ. Linn. Soe. vol. xvi, p. 195.
P. stellifer, Sladen. Journ. Linn. Soe. vol. xvi, p- 195.
P. semireticulatus, Sladen. Journ. Linn. Soc. vol. xvi, p. 195.
P. caribbeus, Perrier. | Comptes Rendus xcii, p. 59; Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool. ix, p. 13; Nouv. Arch. Mus. (2) vi, p. 216.
P. aporus, Ludwig. Zoologische Jahrbiicher 1886, p. 293.
Coronaster bispinosus, n. sp.
Twelve long slender arms.
Dorsal skeleton of disk reticulated ; formed of imbricated ossicles,
and enclosing irregularly shaped meshes in which are found from
four to ten respiratory tubes. Distributed irregularly on the skele-
ton of the disk are short spines, each bearing a little cluster of cross-
ed pedicellariz. Madreporic plate small and submarginal.
Dorsal skeleton of arms reticulated: Reticulation formed by
five longitudinal bands of imbricated ossicles, connected at about :
every fourth plate by similar transverse bands, forming large rec-
tangular meshes. Meshes longest in the direction of the arms, con-
taining a large number of tentacular papilla. Sometimes closer and
irregular in shape at the base of the arms. At the junction of the
longitudinal and transverse bands, stand long pointed spines, each
spine surrounded about its middle by a closely packed cluster of
crossed pedicellariz.
Each of the adambulacral plates carries an inner and outer spine,
the outer spine being slightly more adoral than the inner one, thus
showing a tendency of the two spines to alternate.
Length from centre of disk to end of arm, 140m; radius of disk,
12m.
Color of the single specimen in alcohol pale flesh color, with the
skeletal portions white.
This form undoubtedly belongs to the genus Coronaster of Perrier
(Echinodermes du Travailleur et du Talisman, Annales des Sciences
Natureiles, VI? Serie, T. XIX. No. 8, 1885.) He gives, however, as
a character of the genus the existence of a single spine on each ad-
ambulacral plate, whereas in Coronaster bispinosus there are two
such spines to each plate. This character of the genus must there-
fore be modified in order to admit this species.
424 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888_
The form described differs from Coronaster Parfaiti, Perrier, the
only other species of the genus, principally by the character above
mentioned, viz, the existence of two spines on each adambulacral-
plate. It also differs by its greater size, the radius of the disk being
twice as great, and the arms from the centre of the disk to their tips,
three times as long. /
4
i
2
;
ney
-
a et io Sh
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. —~ 425
DECEMBER 11.
The President, Dr. Jos. Lrrpy, in the chair.
Twenty-three persons present.
A paper entitled “Description of a New Species of Orithopristis
from the Galapagos Islands.’ By David S. Jordan and Burt
Fesler, was presented for publication.
Double Cocooning in a Spider —Dr. Henry C. McCook remarked
that spiders may be divided into two groups in relation to their
cocooning habit. The individuals of one group habitually spin
several cocoons. Those of the other group habitually spin but one.
The latter, however, are subject to some variation, the reasons for -
which have not been satisfactorily explained. Epeira diademata
for example, habitually spins but one cocoon, and yet the Spanish
investigator Termeyer,’ in the early part of this century, discovered
and announced that she would spin as many as six cocoons when
specially nourished. The fact struck the speaker as an extraordinary
one, and he had never yet quite obtained consent to fully admit it.
There are some facts, however, which have recently been uncovered
that show a tendency to a variation of habit in this line in one of
our familiar orb-weavers. Several years ago a clerical friend, the
Rey. Dr. P. L. Jones, had brought him two cocoons of Argiope
céphinaria (Walck.)? which had been spun on his premises by the
same spider. The fact seemed to him strange and interesting, and
he reported it. About a year ago, Mrs. Mary Treat brought to
Dr. MeCook’s notice the fact that she had discovered what appeared
to be a variety of Argiope cophinaria, which makes four cocoons,
and which she had accordingly named Argiope multichoncha? She
sent him a string of these cocoons of which there were four of the
usual shape and “about the usual size, strung within a few inches of
each other. They were spun on the wall of a kitchen in a house in
western Missouri. Mrs. Treat also sent the spider which spun the
cocoons. The specimen was very much dried up and in such a con-
dition that the speaker could not make a very satisfactory study of
it, but he found nothing in it differing in the least degree from
Argiope cophinaria. If it be the same species, what are the peculiar
circumstances that have caused such a remarkable variation in the
habit? or is it true that this species does, more frequently than has
been supposed, indulge herself in the luxury of an additional egg
sac? Two cocoons of this lot were opened and found to contain
young spiders that had EA but died within the egg-sac probably
1 See Walckenaer’s Sn, és Vol. I, p. 162.
2 Arg. riparia { Hentz).
3 American Naturalist, December 1887, p. 1122.
426 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888,
because of their unnatural condition. The spiderlings were not
counted but they were very numerous.
Through information kindly given by Dr. Leidy, the President of
the Academy, Dr. McCook was permitted to study on the 31st
October last, (1888,) an example of this duplex cocoonery which
occurred in the Farmer’s Market of Philadelphia. He visited the
market house at 12th and Market Streets, which is one of the largest
and best of its sort in our city. He had no difficulty in finding the
cocoons which had been preserved, and made a study of them whieh
is here submitted. The facts are as follows: Some time during the
summer of the present year, Mr. Charles Moore observed upon his
meat stall a spider whose beauty attracted his attention, and which
proved to be a female ‘of Argiope cophinaria. She had probably
been brought into the market from the country, hidden among the
leaves of some vegetable, as the huge Tarantula and the large Lateri-
grade spider, Heterapoda venatoria, are brought to our port from the
West Indies in bunches of banannas and other fruits. However,
she may have floated in as a young balloonist from some city garden,
for the species is very abundant in open grounds within city limits.
Instead of brushing her down and killing her after the usual manner
of dealing with such creatures, Mr. Moore took a fancy to preserve
her, and would allow no one around his stall to inflict any injury
upon her. Her movements were necessarily somewhat impeded and
modified by the business of the place, and several times she changed
her web until at last she spun it in a position that was practically
free from interruption. This was quite at the top of the stall, the
main foundation line, two feet long, was stretched from a standard
beam to the end of a projecting iron hook-rod. The spider became
quite a favorite and those around the stall amused themselves by
feeding her with flies. She would take the flies thrown into her web,
coming down from her habitual perch against the central white
shield which characterizes her snare, to get them.
Sometime between the 10th and 20th of August she began to make
her first cocoon. Mr. Moore, of course, made no careful study of the
process; but he said that it was spun early in the morning; that at
first the spinning work thrown out was as white as snow; that the
spider then began to wrap it up, and it grew smaller and smaller as
she wrapped, rolling it around with her feet. After the white ma-
terial had been spun, a brownish silk was used, and when the spider
had completed her task, the ball was not more than half as big as
it seemed to him at first. About a week or ten days thereafter, she
made a second cocoon, placing it in a position 15 inches above the
other. Both of the cocoons were in site precisely as left by the
spider. The web, however, had been destroyed, but the speaker
noticed that an irregular mass of spinning work was laid along the
heam between the two cocoons, which after a little observation
proved to be the last snare which the spider had made in a collapsed
condition. The foundation line had been broken and the web had
thus shrunken up against the post. By delicate and careful manipu-
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 427
lation, he was able to draw out this mass, and was delighted to find
that he could restore with very little damage the spider’s orb, the
central shield and zigzag ribbons being quite intact.
The cocoons were both of them spun within tents of crossed lines
five or six inches long and four or tive wide, and had a thickness of
between two and three inches. The lines constituting the under
edges of the tents were attached to the post of the stall on which the
web was spun. The lower cocoon which was spun first, had the top
lines of the surrounding tent stayed against an iron bar used to
support meat hooks. The upper tent has its roof lines sustained and
drawn out from the post by the foundation line of the orb. The
lines of which these tents were spun were of a greenish yellow silk,
similar to that which the spider uses in preparing the cocoon. He
took the cocoons home and dissected them. The lower one was one
and one-fourth inches long, seven-eighths inch wide; was composed
of a soft yellow silken plush, and inside was constructed precisely
like the ordinary egg-sac of this species. It contained 120 eggs, all
of them sterile. ‘The only peculiarity in the cocoon was that the
stem which one usually finds at the top was missing. The second
cocoon was not quite so large, one inch long, and five-eighths inch
wide, but it was more perfect in shape, containing the usual stem.
The eges within this cocoon were also sterile, and the number did
not exceed 50. As he had on several occasions counted over a
thousand eggs in the cocoon of this species, it will be seen that the
spider was not in a normal condition. Indeed he had concieved the
idea that in most cases where this spider spins more than one cocoon,
it will be found that the eggs are not fertile, and that on the con-
trary when the eggs are in the normal condition, but one cocoon
will be made.
We may probably account for the making of the second cocoon
by some abnormal condition of the ovaries which prevented the oyi-
positing of all the eges at once. The first lot when extruded were
protected in the usual way; subsequently Nature compelled the
mother to get rid of the remaining eggs, and, moved by the same
impulse that caused her to cover the first lot, she was excited to
overspin the second also.
This species will make an imperfect or but part of a cocoon in
confinement, and Dr. McCook exhibited a specimen which shows
that she sometimes does likewise in natural site. This is a branch
which in one place shows the beginning of a cocoon, being the little
cup against which the eggs are always spun, and also what appears
to be the inner egg-bag. There is nothing more, and the whole is
stayed and shut in by the usual tent-like spinning work. Near by
is a perfect cocoon secured in quite the same manner. If we suppose
that those two were made by the same spider (as is highly probable)
we may infer that the original cocooning purpose of the mother was
diverted in some manner, perhaps by alarm, which drove her from
the spot. She returned to enclose the work partially done; but
moved by the-urgency of motherhood, presently found a neighboring
site and finished her maternal duty.
da
428 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
The Value of Abbot's Manuscript Drawings of American Spiders.—
Dr. Henry C. McCoox reviewed some recent criticisms upon a
communication presented by him to this Academy. He spoke as
follows:
In the last number of “Psyche,”* Mr. J. H. Emerton prints a
criticism upon my paper in the Proceedings of the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia,* based upon the recent discovery —
of Mr. John Abbot’s drawings of American spiders. This criticism
requires some comment.
i Mir: Emerton intimates doubt of what he calls my “offhand
identificattons.” I spent between one and two hours in the Zoologi-
eal Library of the British Museum, aided by the courteous officials.
I confined my attention almost wholly to the one tribe with which
I am most familiar, the Orbweavers. Of those I published in my
paper twenty one (21) numbers, embracing seventeen species. Mr.
Emerton says: In 1875 I looked over these same drawings at the
British Museum “I, like Mr. McOook, made hasty identifications of
such few of them as I could.” It might have been true thirteen
years ago that Mr. Emerton was unable to determine accurately that
number of common species within the time which I gave to them,
« but I do not hesitate to say that he could not plead such inability
now after his study and publication of the New England Epeiride.
At least, I should have small opinion of my own attainments if I
could not identify “off-hand,” from the admirable drawings of John
Abbot, such familiar species as most of those named in my list. I
think that any entomologist, familiar with Mr. Abbot’s work, who
will substitute for spiders seventeen species of insects with w hich he
is most familiar, will quite agree with me that such determination is
not one of great difficulty.
2. Mr. Emerton does.scant justice to my paper by leaving the
impression that its conclusions are based wholly upon the offhand
identifications of an hour or two. On the contrary, that was a
small part of my work. I took carefully the numbers of Abbot’s
drawings with his notes thereon, as well as my own notes upon the
same made on the spot. After my return home, I diligently com-
pared these with Walckenaer’s number, and satisfied ‘myself that
the two exactly corresponded. I then went over W alckenaer’s des-
eriptions in the original (French),’ and compared them with the
species themselves in my collection, verifying thus my first identifica-
tion. This occupied the leisure hours ‘of several months; and.the
indications and, in part, results of all this work may be seen in my
paper, where I give the evidence and references by w hich the student
can test my work if he will take the pains to do so.
3 Mr. Emerton institutes a comparison between my published
list and a few numbers identified by him, from which he derives a
1 Psyche, the organ of the ‘Cambridge Entomological Club,” Vol, 5, No. 149—
150, Sept.—Oct. 1888.
2 1888, pp. 1-6,‘‘Necessity for Revising the Nomenclature of American Spiders.”
3 Histoire Naturelle des Insectes Apteres, Vol. IT. :
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 429
moral as to “the uncertainty of off-hand identifications of these draw-
ings by two persons both familiar with the common spiders of the
Northern States.” But the inference is wholly deceptive, for the
basis of his comparison is entirely faulty and unfair. He published
a list of thirteen (13) numbers, noted by him as identified thirteen
years ago when he visited the British Museum. Of these, four
numbers are of other species than Orbweavers; two other
numbers are Orbweayers which I did not notice or did not list.
Emerton includes all these in his estimate; but it is manifest that
any comparison, in order to yield just results, should throw out these
six numbers not listed or considered by me, and should be con-
fined wholly to the seven numbers w hich both of us attempted
to identify. Such a comparison justifies a conclusion quite the
reverse of Mr. Emerton’s. We agree as to the following: Nos. 121,
116, 117, 79 and 80—five out of the seven. How stands it as to thie
remaining two numbers, (one species) 77 and 78? Mr. Emerton
marks them with a generic name, “ Uloborus.” JI list them as
“ Cyrtophora caudata “Hentz,” but in a secondary place, and in a
foot-note express my uncertainty as to the identification, and think
they may prove to be my own species C. bifurca. Concerning the
only species, (embraced in these two numbers) about which we differ,
T express my uncertainty, and Emerton merely gives a generic name,
showing his uncertainty as to the species. In other words, we are
both more or less uncertain, and thus we agree in that respect also.
T submit. therefore. that instead of justifying Mr. Emerton’s inference
of uncer tainty, and thus casting doubt upon my identifications, the
contrary is shown, for we actually agree in one way or another on
every number concerning which both give an opimion. In other
words, we e absolutely agree concerning five-sevenths of the numbers
mutually identified, and agree to be uncertain concerning the other
two-sevenths.
As to which list is nearer the truth in the one uncertain factor,
T do not venture to decide. ‘Turning to the original description of
Walckenaer,’ one finds that he is left in doubt, and the doubt can per-
haps not be removed. Walckenaer makes one of the numbers a variety
of the other. If we read the description of the animal itself, Mr.
Emerton’s identification as Uloborus is well justified; but when we
turn to Abbot’s account of the habits of the spider, we find that
they differ entirely from all we know of Uloborus, and correspond
exactly with the peculiar habits of Cyclosa caudata, especially the
habit of covering the central diameter of its vertical net with pellets
of silk mixed with insect detritus. Uloborus spins a horizontal
snare; has many ribboned decorations as caudata frequently has,
but never has been observed, so far as I know, to decorate her orb
with insect scalpage.
1 Op. cit., p. 144.
eS SR Se ue
i
oat
et RS ERS
~—
LS es
Sa eee
od
430 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
4. Mr. Emerton’s conclusion concerning the questions raised by m
paper is that we should wait until all the common spiders of America
are described before attempting to determine priority of names.
This seems to me very curious reasoning. Emerton has described
and figured all but two of the spiders contained in my list of Abbot’s
drawings. Does he intend us to count his work as worthless for
comparative service? I think better of it than that. With his
New England “Epeiridze” and Hentz’s “Spiders of the United States”
in my hand, I have no doubt at all of my ability to determine
positively therefrom the ultimate names of many species by comparing
the same with Walckenaer’s descriptions and Abbot's drawings.
What we need chiefly is a facsimile copy of the latter somewhere in
America; but in lieu of that, that some one should take up the
matter in London with a good collection of American spiders.
Meanwhile, no naturalist ought to doubt that it is our duty to recog-
nize the Walckenaer species which we know by whatever means to
be identical with descriptions made by Hentz, repeated by Emerton
and others, and now thoroughly familiar and recognizable. As to
the doubtful species, there can, of course, be no question that they
lrad better remain as named by Hentz and more fully described by
others. Walckenaer’s descriptions are undoubtedly incomplete and
some are positively bad, but they are no worse in this respect than
many of Hentz’s, and in my opinion are just as readily identified b
the aid of Abbot's drawings as are Hentz’s descriptions by the aid of
his own drawings.
At this point I may submit the opinion of one who stands at the
very head of living araneologists, Professor T. Thorell, who thus
writes me from Italy in a letter dated April 7th, 1888: “The dis-
covery of Abbot’s drawings of American spiders is indeed a fact 2
the greatest interest, not only to American but to all arachnologist
and I congratulate you upon having had the luck to make thie
discovery. Of course I have read with great attention what you
have said on the subject, As to me, I do not entertain the least
doubt that you and Professors Leidy, Lewis and Dall are right, and
that the earlier names should in all cases be adopted. The law of
priority must be respected, and is the only one that prevents arbi-
trariness and that ‘gives stability to nomenclature. I think, then,
that in all such cases, in which Walckenaer’s species can with toler-
able certainty be recognized, his names should be preferred to names
more lately published, even if these names are more commonly used,
or the species better described or figured under these newer names.”
The weight of this distinguished authority can not be questioned,
and I place it in the scale against the judgment of Mr. Emerton.
I venture to add from the same letter the following sentence, with
the earnest expression of hope that the suggestion therein may be
realized: ‘Would it not be possible to haye Abbot’s work publish-
ed? There are in America so many wealthy citizens who are
willing to make sacrifices for scientific purposes; and in this case an
appeal to the national feeling of your country men, would not, I
%
ha
it. et a ary
.
a
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 431
think, be out of place.’ Over against such an expression as this [
am willing to place my critic’s words, “Mr. McCook is inclined,
however, to set too high a value on these drawings.”
5. Finally, I think I may say under all the cireumstances that
I am excusable for believing that my so called “discovery” of
Abbot’s drawings was a genuine novelty. I cannot remember a
single allusion in any araneological literature to the existence in the
British Museum or elsewhere of those drawings. The last reference
made to them of which I have knowledge was Dr. L. M. Underwood’s
paper on the “Progress of Arachnology in America,” in the American
Naturalist of November 1887. The author alludes to Abbot’s
manuscripts (miscalling him “Thomas,” by the way, instead of
“John”), and adds, “Knowledge of the date of preparation of this
series of drawings s, as well as its present place and condition is want-
ing. But it was in London as early as 1802, and was purchased by
Baron a cuaer i in 1821.” Mr. Emerton, i in his several admira-
ble monographs, makes no reference to the fact that he knew of the
existence of the drawings, and does not make the slightest attempt
to compare the list in his possession with the descriptions of Walck-
enaer. This seems to me all the more remarkable in view of the
fact, as above shown, that he had accurately determined some of
Hentz’s species as identical with some of Abbot’s numbers, and could
readily have made the further step of determining their correspond-
ence with Walckenaer’s descriptions. His reasons for this reserve
are doubtless satisfactory to himself, and I will not venture to eriti-
eize them; but will say that I am quite satisfied with having taken
the opposite course and given to the world, at the earliest available
opportunity, the information which had accidentally been placed in
my possession, and which I believed at the time to be new and
valuable. That it was new to most students of spiders has been
made very certain by the responses to my paper. That it is valuable
may in some minds admit of doubt; but, on the whole, I think that
I have shown here, if not before, that the measure of doubt is very
small.
Food of Barnacles—Pror Lripy stated that last summer, in
June, while walking on shore at Beach Haven, N. J., he picked up
a bunch of Goose-barnacles, Lepas fascicularis, attached to a frag-
ment of a grass stem, Spartina. Finding at the time nothing else
of interest, he examined the SpeCmner, not having previously dissec-
ted a Barnacle since 1848, when he observed the eyes in Balanus
rugosus (See Proc. 1848, 9)
All the specimens of Lepas, of which there were nine, had the
body distended with a brownish-yellow Cyclops, in large number,
fresh in appearance and generally entire. Under the cheninnene
he at first suspected that they might be a larval form of the Lepas,
though aware of the fact that the cirripeds proceed from a Nauplius
embryo, which passes through a Cypris stage before assuming the
Barnacle condition. On further inv estigation he was convinced
DS Ce Pe a ee a a ee
—* 3
432 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888. |
that the Cyclops were food and filled the stomach. It appeared
remarkable that they should have been so well preserved and not —
erushed by the strongly, six-toothed mandibles of the Barnacle.
Some additional specimens of this species and a few of Lepas anati- —
fera, subsequently examined did not contain such an accumulation
of similar food; but usually the contents of the stomach consiste
from two to half a dozen small gastropods with the shell, several
species of entomostraca, some sand grains and a few vegetable fibres.
In all, the brood-capsule, a thin elliptical lamina, situated between
the body and the shell, contained Nauplius larvae.
¥
4
DECEMBER 18.
Mr. CHarues Morris in the chair.
Sixteen persons present.
DECEMBER 25.
The President, Dr. JosepH Lerpy, in the chair.
A paper entitled “Notes on Geology and Mineralogy” by John
Eyerman was presented for publication.
The death of Dr. Casper Wister, a member, Dec. 20, was an-
nounced. |
1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 435
The following annual reports were read and referred to the Pub-
lication Committee :—
REPORT OF RECORDING SECRETARY.
In view of the full reports of the Treasurer, the Curators, the
Librarian and the various sections of the Academy, the Recording
Secretary has, as heretofore, but little to report apart from the
statistics of the meetings of the society and the operations of the
Publication Committee.
One hundred and sixty-eight pages of the Proceedings for 1887
and two hundred and seventy-two pages of the current volume have
been issued and distributed. Provision has been made for twenty
plates in illustration of the papers presented for publication during
the year. These number thirty-four and are by the following au-
thors :—
Rey. H.C. McCook 5, W. D. Hartman 3, Jos. Leidy 2, D.S. Jordan
2, Harrison Allen 2, Angelo Heilprin, 2, Thomas Meehan 2, Charles
Wachsmuth and Frank Springer 2, H. C. Chapman and A. P.
Brubacker 2, H. C. Chapman 1, Otto Meyer 1, B. H. Wright 1, A.
M. Fielde 1, E. N.S. Ringueberg 1, KE. A. Kelly 1, C. Ochsenius 1,
John Ford 1, C. R. Keyes 1, H. F. Osborn 1, H. A. Pilsbry 1, J. E.
Ives 1, John Eyerman 1, R. W. Schufeldt 1. One of these has been
withdrawn by the author and the others are all in course of publica-
tion although two or possibly four will have to be held over until
the issue of the first sheets of the volume for 1889.
Eighteen additions haye been made to the list of foreign corre-
spondents to whom the issues of the Proceedings are distributed, the
number being now four hundred. The domestic exchanges are
now sixty-eight, an increase of seven over last vear. The subscrip-
tion list remains the same, so that five hundred and eighty-two
copies of the one thousand printed are promptly distributed.
The second part of the ninth volume of the quarto Journal con-
sisting of one hundred and ten pages and five lithographic plates
was distributed, after much vexatious delay in the printing office, on
the sixth of August. Fifty copies were sent to foreign and twelve
copies to domestic exchanges, while thirty-nine copies were supplied
to subscribers, making a total distribution of one hundred and one
copies of the five hundred printed.
29
454 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
The average attendance at the meetings has been about the same
as last year. Communications, which have been interesting and
varied, have been made by Messrs Leidy, Heilprin, Lewis, Meehan,
Chapman, McCook, Koenig, Dolley, Ryder, Horn, Brooks, Dall, —
Rothrock, Binder, Willcox, Morris, Wilson, Kelly, Foote, Sharp,
Meyer, Woolman, McKean, Robinson, Ford, Brinton, Redfield, U.
C. Smith, Ives, Holstein and Le Boutillier.
Eleven members and four correspondents have been elected. The
deaths of thirteen members and two correspondents have been an-
nounced and two members, Messrs C. L. Kilburn and Rev. Geo.
D. Boardman, have resigned.
The vacancy in the Council caused by the death of Mr. S. Fisher
Corlies was filled June 26, by the election of Mr. Wm. W. Jefferis.
The following extract from the will of the late Geo. W. Tryon Jr.
was read at the meeting of Feb. 14, 1888 :—“I give to the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia my collection of shells now deposited
with that society conditioned that they shall not be loaned or re-
moved from the immediate custody of the said Academy and of its
Conchological Section.” The bequest was accepted on the condition
as stated.
A bond of indemnity having been given Feb. 14 to the executors
of the estate of the late Mary R. D. Smith, the Academy was placed —
in possession of the sum of $1201.49 the proportion of said estate
bequeathed to the society by Miss Smith.
The thanks of the Academy were voted to Dr. Charles Schaffer for
his gift of $4939.58, the amount received by him as commissions —
while acting as executor under the will of the late John Bryden to
whose estate, in accordance with the wish of Dr. Schaffer, the gift
has been credited.
A like vote of thanks was tendered to Mr. Theodore D. Rand for
the gift of $100.00, the amount received by him for professional
services in connection with the same estate.
The Academy having considered a deed of trust executed by Mrs.
Emma W. Hayden for the endowment of the Hayden Geological
Fund of Two Thousand Five Hundred Dollars, in memory of her hus- —
band the late Prof. Ferdinand V. Hayden, the interest of which to- —
gether with a bronze medal is to be awarded annually for the best
publication, exploration, discovery or research in the sciences of —
geology and paleontology, by a committee to be appointed by the
Academy, the said deed of trust was accepted by and ordered to be
Oe am.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 435
executed on behalf of the Academy, May, 1, 1888, and the following
resolution for the appointment of the required committee was
adopted :—
Resolved—That a committee not exceeding five, to be appointed
under the deed of trust of Mrs. Emma W. Hayden, shall first be ree-
ommended by the Council of the Academy and shall be selected
from the members at large and their names submitted to a vote of
the Academy annually, and if said vote of the Academy shall show
their election, they shall act as such committee under said deed.
The thanks of the Academy were ordered, November 20, to be
conveyed to Mrs. Clara Jessup Bloomfield Moore for her liberal addi-
tion of $5000.00 to the Jessup Fund endowed by her father, the late
A. E. Jessup. By subsequent action of the Council the entire amount
was ordered to be placed to the credit of that portion of the fund
which is appropriated to the assistance of young naturalists.
All of which is respectfully submitted.
Epw. J. Nouan.
Recording Secretary.
REPORT OF CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.
The duties of the Corresponding Secretary during the past year
have been neither important nor onerous.
The correspondence has related mainly to the publications.of the
Academy, being either acknowledgments from corresponding socie-
ties or the usual letters transmitting their publications.
The acknowledgments number sixty by letter and forty-three by
eard, divided as follows:
By card, American societies 25, Foreign 20.
By letter, American societies 15, Foreign 45.
The letters of transmittal represent thirty-eight bodies, of which
but one is American. These, with the latter exception, are very
nearly all those continuing their sendings through the International
Exchange Agency.
' During the past year the duties of the office were kindly perform-
ed by the Curator-in-charge for five months in the interval of the
Secretary’s absence abroad.
An opportunity was afforded of seeing personally the officers
in charge of the libraries of some of our corresponding societies, and
436 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.5
of examining the series of our publications on their shelves. The
deficiencies which we could probably supply were indicated, as well
as those not at our disposition.
Allexpressed themselves satisfied with the sending of our publica-
tions by mail and promised to do the same when the size of their
volume permitted.
During the year there have been lected four Correspondents of |
the Academy all of whom have been promptly notified.
The duty of acknowledging donations to the museum which by the
by-laws, devolves on the Corresponding Secretary, has been assum-
ed by the Curator-in-charge. The Corresponding Secretary
would again suggest such modification of the laws as will render
this legal. The reasons for the change are too obvious to need ex-
planation. ;
Respectfully submitted, .
GEORGE H. Horvy, M. D.,
Corresponding Secretary.
REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.
The additions to the library recorded since November 30, 1887
amount to 3957, an increase of 577 over those received during the
preceding year. They consisted of 659 volumes, 5284 pamphlets
parts of periodicals and instalments of continued works and 14
maps.
The accessions have been received from the following sources:—
Societies, . . . . . - - ~- 1619 | Geological Survey of Minnesota, 4.
Editors, . . . . 838 | Ministry of Public Works in
Lvs Williamson Fund, yee WOO-a ance ie 4
Authors, . na ey geen EAE Geological Survey of New South
‘Thomas Meehan, : o) i4avely Wales; 3
Geological Survey of Sw ede - 29 | Geological Survey BE Canaan 3
Geological Survey of Russsia, . 25 | Mr. Wm. J. Potts, . 3
Wilson Hand) = Raa ee el eos ei Ceolopreal Survey of New Jersey, 3
Australian Museum, . . . . . 21 | Executors of the late Dr. Geo.
In Exchange,.._. in 6, wei gh ye Meartin: 3
Government of Victoria, ee lon | eerote Angelo Heilprin, 2.
Treasury Department, . . . . 12 | Geological Survey of Kentucky, 2
Department of Agriculture, . . 12 | Mrs. L. Fox, . . 3
Department of the Interior, . . 10 | Mr. Charles E. Smith, ae 2
Geological Survey of India, . . 10 | Mr.J. H.Redfield,. . . .« .- 2.
Department off states. eeus-) 9 | Mrs. Dr. C. Hering, io 2
Hon. Chas. M. Betts, ; 7 | South African Museum, .. . 2
Engineer Department U. S. A,, 7 | Indian Museum at Calcutta, . . 1
’
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 457
Geological Survey of New Zealand, 7 | Henry C. Gibson, 1
Geological Survey of Roumania, 6 Departmentof Mines, Nova Scotia, 1
‘Geological Survey of meena Dr. Benjamin Sharp, 1
vania, 6 | California State Mining Bureau, 1
Her Britannic Majesty’s s Gor ern- Prince Albert of Monaco, . 1
BOSD Gare py y magne 6 | United States Coast Surv a; cies 1
‘Smithsonian Institution, Bus a lee 5 | M. Marlet, : Sa 1
Brushy Miusenmy +. 223) 8) 5 ae City Hospital, ]
WWarDepartment, . 2 . . . 5 r. Charles Schaffer, ih
University of Aberdeen, . . . 4 Bo Indian Covent 1
Geological Survey of Portugal, . 4 | Dr. J. W2 Eckfeldt, 1
They were assigned to the several departments of the library as
follows :—
Sloumnaiswms se a | 2 USS) |\*Ornithology; Ua AIA) Ewe iew oe
MCcolooyvam ee ties -s iar 3) (267 || Anthnopologysy | sey sen ee ne
Botany,. . Se eee, Loyal ene yel opedias-m aya tn eer 9
“General Natural History, ee ce Ove lehthyolorgy. 8
oncholosy;'"). 5. .). . « 43 | Bibliography, 8
WMiterloay, 8 7. . ... 42. | Languages, 7
pintomolorye 9. 6, > 27%... ~All Helminthology, 6
Wiecrolmes 5, a POD Geortaphive 5
Anatomy ‘and Pysiology aerate SO al UAT al OPiyy ieee caret Ae nein 4
HOVSicalSclences sh bet s(t) 32) El erpetologys, 0) 9 haperueeey as 3
“Voyages and Travels, so io, of) ee) Jalen eonilinng, ec GO 2
Euuiicbocnumentss «= = . « « 28) Unclassified; .. 4. sa =) 2
DENEIMIGMGYee Rees 1 os 3 ke
The appended list of additions will indicate more specifically the
nature of the year’s increase.
We have procured from the publishers in Germany the parts
lacking in the set of De Martius, Flora Brasiliensis, received last year
from the Brasilian Government, and the work is now complete as
far as issued.
The revision of the catalogue of Journals, commenced last year, has
been completed with the exception of the Scandinavian and Russian
publications. It is hoped that the entire work may be finished be-
fore the end of the year.
With the assistance of Signor Fronani, whose services I have been
again enabled to secure, two hundred and thirty-four letters asking
for supply of deficiencies, were sent in September to foreign societies.
Seventy-four answers have already been received and the increase of
accessions over those recorded last year is mainly, if not altogether,
‘due to the liberality of our correspondents in supplying us with the
volumes and parts asked for.
The card catalogue, exclusive of periodicals, was completed early
in the year and the geographical entries of journals have also been
finished. Cross references and title entries of the latter are now in
course of preparation. This will complete the catalogue within its
438 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
present scope which, it will be remembered, provides for author en-
tries only in the special departments, with a few exceptions such as.
oficial geological reports and scientific explorations which are also-
catalogued under the names of the regions described. It is of the
utmost importance that the preparation of a subject catalogue be un-
dertaken as soon as possible, for while most of our readers know
their authors, a properly classified index to the broader subdivisions.
of special departments of the library would result not only in a say-
ing of time but in a more thorough and reliable acquaintance with
the work already done. To complete such a catalogue within any
reasonable limit of time, the employment of skilled assistance will be
absolutely necessary, and, it is to be regretted, the Academy at pre-
sent is unable to incur this expense. An effort will be made, how-
ever, with such clerical aid as the librarian may be able to secure, to:
go on as far as possible with the work in the time at his disposal
during the year. Progress will necessarily be very slow, in cénse-
quence of many unavoidable interruptions.
Since the last report 321 volumes have been bound, including 68:
volumes of pamphlets, and 45 volumes are now in the hands of the
binders.
A careful enumeration of the library was made at the beginning
of November. There are, bound and unbound, 30831 volumes at
present on the shelfs, including 615 bound volumes of pamphlets,.
The latter embrace 8621 separate titles. To these may be added
1445 volumes in the library of the Entomological Section. Many
of these are, however, duplicates of those in the main library. The
latter are divided as follows :—
VotuMEs PaMPHLETS VoLumes PamMPpHLeT™
Journals :— | Conchology 980 455
Germany 34380 | Ornithology 737 319:
France 2515 | | Bibliography 584
Great Britian & Ireland 2435 | Mineralogy 489 345
N. America 1612 | Physical Science 454 493-
Scandinavia & Russia 1302 | _, Anthropology 376 180:
Austria 900 | Kncyclopedias, Dictionaries 369
Italy 625 | Helminthology 268 263
Switzerland 459 | Public Documents 264
Belgium : 378 | Ichthyology 262 174
Asia B28 Agriculture 252 184.
Spain and Portugal 166 Mammalogy | 246 184
Africaand Australia 143 '*Medicine }aea6 645
South America 100 | 14391 Chemistry 226 227
General Natural History 2350 564 Geography 203
Geology } 2205 1997. Antiquities and Fine Arts 161
Botany | 1867 768 | Herpetology 161 143
Voyages and Travels 1532 67 Microscopy 48
Entomology III4 32 | Miscellaneous 36
Anatomy and Physiology | ozo | 781 |; 30831 . 862k.
All of which is respectfully submitted,
Epwarp J. No.Lan,
Librarian.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 439
REPORT OF THE CURATORS.
The Curators present the following statement of the Curator-in-
Charge, Prof. Heilprin, as their report for the year 1888 :—
The Curator-in-Charge respectfully reports that the collections of
the Academy are in good condition, and that their status, as far as
classification and arrangement are concerned, has been materially
improved during the year As heretofore, the Academy has prof-
ited largely through the work of volunteer specialists, and is
hence placed under special obligation to those who have thus gen-
erously contributed their time and assistance. To Mr. J. H. Red-
field, Conservator of the herbarium, and to Mr. Thomas Meehan, it
is almost wholly indebted for the careful work that is being system-
atically applied toward the expansion and proper distribution of the
botanical collections; while to the officers of the Entomological Sec-
tion-and of the American Entomological Society it is placed under
obligation for work done in connection with the department of ento-
mology. In the death of Mr. George W. Tryon, Jr., its Conservator
in the department of conchology for thirteen years, the Academy
has lost one of its truest and most efficient members—one who had
for a full quarter of a century given much of his daily time to the
interests of the institution. That the department will feel for some
time the want of his vast experience, and the absence of his governing
influence, there can be no question; but it is hoped that under
the special direction of the new conservator, Mr. H. A. Pilsbry,
and of the Conchological Section, it will be kept in that command-
ing position which it has so firmly and justly held.
In the departments other than those here specified the work has
been done almost wholly under the direction of the Curator-in-
Charge and his assistant, Mr. J. E. Ives. Asin preceding years the
alcoholics have been completely overhauled, and it is satisfactory
to be able to report that there has been practically no loss in this part
of the Academy’s collections since the preparation of the last annual
statement. It is less agreeable to report that during the latter part
of the present year several attempts to force the ornithological cases
have been made, with the result of robbing the collection of some 200
specimens of South American and Australian birds, mainly repre-
sentatives of the family Tanagride. The greater number of these
have been recovered, and it now seems that the full loss resolves it-
self to possibly not more than a half-dozen specimens. A change
440 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1888.
in the construction of the locks is urgently needed, and it is recom-
mended that steps looking toward the greater security of the cases”
be immediately taken. The ornithological collections have largely
profited during the year through the labors of Mr. Witmer Stone,
who has, amidst other work, very carefully reviewed the extensive
and intricate family of the Tanagridze, and determined the greater
number ot the species that belong to this group. His work shows
that the Academy’s representation is a very full one, falling, in point
of species, but little short of that of the British Museum. A nu-
merical estimate of the entire collection of mounted birds in the
Academy shows it to comprise somewhat more than 23,000 speci-
mens; in addition to this there is a collection of some 3000 skins.
The work of systematically cataloguing this vast collection has
been begun, but much time must necessarily elapse before such a
catalogue can be satisfactorily completed.
The entire museum collection of minerals has been rearranged
during the year, the specimens of the different mineral speties being
distributed strictly according to geographical position. -This meth-
od, it is believed, will largely facilitate comparative study. The
Wm. 8. Vaux collection continues to receive the close and valuable
superintendence of its special Conservator, Mr. Jacob Binder, through
whom it has been brought into a condition of rare complete-
ness. A large proportion of the more commanding specimens which
now distinguish the collection have been obtained through purchase
on the special selection and recommendation of the Conservator.
In most of the other departments of the museum the work has
been mainly of a general character. Mr. Ives, under the direction of
the Curator-in-Charge, has very carefully reviewed and redetermined
the species of Ophiuroidea and Asteroidea, and thereby added very
materially to the extent of the collection represented. Two new
species, a Pteraster and a Coronaster, were determined.
By a resolution of Council of April it was recommended that a
hand-book of the Museum be prepared by the Curator-in-Charge, in
conjunction with the members of the Board of Curators. In
conformity with this recommendation the Curator-in-Charge has de-
voted much time toward the preparation of such a hand-book, and it
gives him pleasure to report that the same is now almost finished
and ready to go to press. It is herewith submitted for approval to
the Board of Curators.
The additions to the museum during the year—ietailed in the ae-
companying list of donations—have been both abundant and import-
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 441
ant. Through the kindness of Dr. H.C. Chapman the Academy has
received a fine selection of marine invertebrates from Bar Harbor,
Maine, many species of which had not hitherto been represented in the
general collection. The Zoological Society of Philadelphia has also
contributed largely in material from their gardens, and thereby filled
in many gaps that could not otherwise be readily closed.
The trip to the Bermuda Islands which was planned by the Cura-
tor-in-Charge, and toward which the Academy generously contrib-
uted its assistance, proved successful beyond anticipation, and
has resulted in placing in the Academy’s museum a large and im-
portant collection of sub-tropical marine forms, the greater number
of which are now for the first time represented, and many of
which are new to science. The results of the expedition, which
are now in course of publication in the Academy’s Proceedings,
prove what benefits may be derived from zoo-geographical research
of this kind, undertaken with only moderate expense, and with
no special preparation. The value of this form of scientifie re-
search has been indicated in previous reports, and attention is once
more directed to the advisability of endowing a moderate z00-geo-
graphical research fund, the interest from which should be expended
annually in the exploration of the numerous regions which still
await investigation. It is believed that no other method could be
suggested which would yield such important scientific results, and at
the same time render the Academy a virtual centre of scientifie ac-
tivity in the country.
The Curator-in-Charge again desires to call attention to the ab-
solute need of an extension to the present accommodations ; the exist-
ing conditions are becoming more serious every year, and render a
change, if the efficiency of the institution is not to be lessened, im-
perative. The collections can no longer be advantageously increased,
nor can they be satisfactorily cared for in their restricted quarters.
Portions of the library are being gradually encroached upon, and
the work-rooms are all filled. The need for a suitable lecture-hall
or amphitheatre is pressing, and the same is true of special students’
rooms and laboratories. It is earnestly hoped that the generous
public of this city, who have so kindly lent their assistance before,
will not allow the most important iastitution of the kind in the
country to go in want. The attempts to obtain aid from the State,
although often repeated, have thus far proved abortive; but an ef-
fort will again be made during the coming session of the Legisla-
ture.
442 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Attention is again called to the important question of Sunday
opening. The numerous requests for admission into the museum on
Sundays clearly speak the public mind, or at any rate, the wish of a
large number of the city’s inhabitants. The Academy of the Fine
Art and the Zoological Society have set an example in the right
direction, and there seems to be no reason, beyond an inadequacy of
funds to maintain such opening, why our Academy should not fol-
low the lead. Sunday-opening would certainly be a charity to that
large body of useful citizens whose daily employment debars them
from the advantages which the institution otherwise offers.
During the year specimens for study have been loaned to Prof.
R. P. Whitfield, of New York; to Prof’s. Osborn and Scott, of
Princeton ; to Dr. G. Baur, of New Haven; to Dr. George Marx, of
Washington ; and to Dr. Harrison Allen, of this city.
Respectfully submitted,
ANGELO HEILPRIN,
Curator-in- Charge.
JosEpH Lerpy,
Cl’n Curators.
REPORT OF THE CURATOR OF THE WILLIAM &.
VAUX COLLECTIONS.
The Curator of the William S. Vaux Collections respectfully sub-
mits his sixth annual report to the Council of the Academy.
The collections are in good order and condition, the only change
made since the report of 1887, being the introduction of one hundred
and two specimens purchased within the year and added to the
collection. These specimens have been purchased at a cost of
$420.10.
The collections now consist of the following :—
No. of minerals reported 1887, : : : : : 6,786
No. of minerals purchased 1888, —. : : : : 102
Total, 5 : 4 : eee: : ; 6,888
Archeological specimens (same as reported in 1887), . 2,940
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 443
The growth of the collection, since it came into the Academy’s:
possession is as follows :—
Specimens purchased in 1884, : : : : 60:
Specimens purchased in 1885, _.. : : ‘ : 104
Specimens purchased in 1886, .. ; : : : 114
Specimens purchased in 1887, —. , ‘ , : 156
Specimens purchased in 1888, _.. 5 ‘ : . 102
Total, : P : F h : : : 536
The aggregate cost of the 536 specimens has been . $2506.80
Most worthy of mention among the additions of the year are a
fine specimen of Calcite in Malachite, a superb Vanadinite and
Wulfenite from Arizona; these specimens, in color and erystalo-
graphic form, are the finest ever brought to the city. Other inter-
esting specimens are a single crystal of Gadolenite 6 inches in width
by 9 inches in length, said to be the largest crystal ever found ;
fine large crystals, of Troostite, Tryolite, Erenite, Opal, Turquoise,
Thenardite, Trona, Hyalite, Colemanite and others.
A number of species not heretofore represented in the collection
have been added.
The visitors to the collection have not been as numerous as in
former years; it may be remarked, however, that those who do visit
it are persons especially interested in mineralogy or archzology
who have made use of it more for the purpose of study than for the
gratification of mere curiosity.
Respectfully submitted,
JACOB BINDER,
Curator.
REPORT OF THE BIOLOGICAL AND MICRO-
SCOPICAL SECTION.
During the year thirteen stated meetings were held with an
average attendance of ten members.
Four public lectures were given.
The following gentlemen were elected members and contributors.
Members. John T. Pennypacker,
cf Lancaster Thomas.
Pe a i a a re Re ee |
Ad4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Contributors. Dr. Xavier Sudduth,
‘i Frank Zentmayer,
ms Edwd. Bancroft.
Honorary Member. Dr. J. Gibbons Hunt.
The section lost the following by death and resignations.
By death.—Paul P. Keller, Joseph Zentmayer, S. Fisher Corlies.
By resignation — Members, J. D. Sergeant, Dr. Carl Seiler, Charles
F. Banes, John Lambert.
Contributor, Walter Banes.
Communications were made upon the following subjects :—
December 5, 1888., Orthochromatic plates in differentiating
details of color in photographing sa objects, by Mr. W.
H. Walmsley.
December 5, 1888. Some new results in removing embryos from
the uterus, by Prof. John Ryder.
December 5, 1888. Upon the fungus Rhytisma acerina, by
Dr. L. Brewer Hall.
December 5, 1888. Upon the fungus Badhamia fasciculata, by
Mr. Harold Wingate.
January 16,1888. Public lecture, by Rev. Dr. H.C. McCook upon
spiders and spiderlings
February 3, 1888. Public lecture, by Prof. W. P. Wilson upon
plants that feed on insects.
February 6, 1888. Presentation of a number of slides, by Dr.
Isaac Norris Jr.
February 6, 1888. A series of slides illustrating the anatomy of
the mouse’s head, by Prof. Ryder.
March 5, 1888. Lecture by Professors Wilson and Ryder assisted
by Mr. Holman with the projecting microscope, upon Celloidin
mounts and the method of making sections of delicate tissues.
April 2, 1888. Upon the sexual habits of the Scale insects by
Dr. L. Brewer Hall.
April 2, 1888. Molluscum contagiosum, by Dr. M. B. Hartzell.
* April 2, 1888. The histology of the Skate with special reference
to the formation and growth of the thymus gland and of peculiar
sense organs, by Prof. Ryder.
April 2, 1888. Upon some interesting forms of fungi, by Dr. J«
B. Brinton.
May 7, 1888. Upon Enterideum, by Mr. Harold Wingate.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 445,
May 7, 1888. Upon insect fertilization of plants with special
reference to the common chickweed and the glands found at the
base of the stamens, by Mr. Thomas Meehan.
May 7, 1888. Upon the formation of vessels in the corion and
amnion, by Prof. Ryder.
May 21, 1888. Upon the specific differences between Lampo-
derma and Comatricha, by Harold Wingate.
April 21, 1888. Upon Cribraria argillacea by Dr. George A.
Rex.
June 4, 1888. Upon two new species of Badhamia, B. reniformis
and B. claviceps.
June 4, 1888. Upon the pollen of Cyrpripedium acaule, by Dr.
L. Brewer Hall.
June 18, 1888. Upon the use of the parabolic reflector, by
Harold Wingate.
October 1, 1888. Upon the pollen of Cobea scandens, by Dr. G,
Ac weX.
October 1, 1888. Upon Bacillus tuberculosis, by Dr. G. A. Rex.
October 15, 1888. Upon Analine staining, by Prof. Ryder.
October 15, 1888. Upon chicken and hog cholera, by Dr. J.
Cheston Morris.
November 5, 1888. Public lecture, by Prof. John Ryder upon
the claims of biological research.
November 19, 1888. Upon the methods of teaching topographi-
cal histology, by Prof. Ryder.
November 19, 1888. Upon the formation of cartilage and bone.
by Prof. Ryder.
The officers of the Section for the ensuing year are :—
Director, : : ; ; Harold Wingate.
Vice Director, ‘ : : John C. Wilson.
Recorder, . : : : Dr. Robert J. Hess.
Corresponding Sec. : : Dr. Charles Schaffer.
Treasurer, . ; : : Dr. Isaac Norris, Jr.
Curator, ‘ Chas. P. Perot.
Very pereseecetall submitted,
RovertT. J. Hess, M. D.,
Recorder.
446 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
REPORT OF THE CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION.
The Recorder of the Conchological Section respectfully reports
that during the year ending Dee. Ist, 1888, the Academy has con-
tinued to publish such conchological papers as have been offered.
Two members have been elected. The loss to the section by
death has been the severest in its history. On January 21st, 1888,
our honored Treasurer, Mr. Wm. L. Mactier, was called from works —
to reward, and we had hardly turned from paying our last tribute
of respect to his memory, when we were again summoned to perform
the same service for our beloved Conservator, the eminent Conchol-
ogist, George W. Tryon Jr. who died February 5th, 1888, while
yet in the prime of life.
At a special meeting of the Section called for the purpose and
held February 22nd, 1888, appropriate minutes prepared by the
Director were adopted and by direction sent to the families of the
deceased.
William Laurence Mactier, a member of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia since Jan. 1860, was born in the city of
New York, May 28, 1818, and died at his home in this city Jan. 21,
1888.
His father, Henry Mactier, was a native of Scotland, and his
mother, a daughter of Augustine Hicks Laurence and Catherine
Luquer, was born in New York.
Mr. Mactier had been prepared for admission into the College of
New Jersey, intending after completing his general education there
to devote himself to the medical profession. But unexpectedly,
conclusive reasons forced him to abandon the project, and seek a
more speedy route to a livelihood in mercantile affairs—he, became
a man of business. The extent and character of his preliminary
education fostered in him a taste for letters which he cultivated
during his leisure so well that the College of New Jersey conferred
upon him the honorary degree of Master of Arts.
Mr. Mactier was one of the constituents of the Conchological See
tion of the Academy; and from the date of its institution, Dec. 26,
1866, was its treasurer. During twenty-two years he discharged all
the duties of the office efficiently and promptly.
He served in the Council of the Academy, and was a member of
its Committee on Instruction and Lectures.
He contributed $285 to the building fund, and was a member of
the Board of Trustees thereof.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 447
He was a member of the Musical Fund Society of Philadelphia,
and read a historical sketch of the institution before the Society
Jan. 29, 1885, which was published. He was treasurer of the So-
ciety from 1864 to 1880,—sixteen years
1881.
He was long a member of the Philadelphia Atheneum. At forty-
six consecutive annual elections of the Philadelphia and Reading
Railroad Company he was one of the judges of the election.
He was active in the Board of Publication of the Presbyterian
Church; a Director of the ‘“ Mercer Home ;” Secretary of the Pres-
byterian Hospital; a member of the Deacon’s Court, and associate
superintendent of the Sunday School of the Second Presbyterian
Church of Philadelphia. .
The position which he held, the work he did, are significant of his
friendliness to natural science, of his benevolence and public spirit
as well as of the excellence of his character.
Resolved, That in the death of William L. Mactier the Concholog-
ical Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia,
has lost an estimable member and efficient treasurer, that, in testi-
mony of appreciation of our loss and as a tribute to his memory,
this brief of his virtues be entered upon the record of Proceedings,
and that a copy thereof be transmitted to his family by the Re-
corder.
and vice-president since
The Director’s extended and appreciative biographical notice of
Mr. Tryon is published in the present number of the Proceedings of
the Academy.
Our Conservator, Mr. H. A. Pilsbry, reports :—
“The principal additions to the museum consist of suites of Medi-
terranean shells from Malta and the Balearic Isles received from
Messrs B. Tomlin and Alfred Caruana; of Sandwich Is. land
shells, a large series from Mr. Baldwin; and new Tasmanian shells
from C. E. Beddome. From the family of the late Wm. L. Mactier,
a number of interesting forms mostly of well known marine species.
A large number of American species have been received, among
which may be mentioned alpine land shells from Colorado, Florida
marine shells and a series of Texas shells. A full list of the dona-
tions are included in the “ Additions to the Museum.”
The total number of additions made is 46, amounting to 605 trays,
3455 specimens. The collection now contains 192,605 specimens in
51,930 trays. A valuable series of alcoholic specimens has been re-
ceived from Mr. Bryant Walker, Detroit, Mich. In the museum,
448 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
the arrangement of the families Neritide, Phasianellide and Turbi-
nide has been nearly completed.”
No changes have been made in the By-Laws of the Section.
The officers of the Section for 1889 are :—
Director, . : ; . W.S. W. Ruschenberger.
Vice-Director, . : . John Ford.
Recorder, . ; ; . Edward J. Nolan.
Treasurer, . 3 : . S. Raymond Roberts.
Secretary, . : . . John H. Redfield.
Librarian, . ; .. Edward J. Nolan.
Conservator, : . » Henry A. Pilsbry,
apeeually submitted,
S. Raymonp Rosperts,
Recorder.
REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL SECTION.
The Vice-Director of the Botanical Section respectfully reports a
continued interest on the part of the members. The membership
continues about as heretofore, the meetings have been regularly at-
teuded, and many facts of great interest brought to the attention of
the Section and discussed by the members. The Section is out of
debt with a small surplus in its treasury.
The officers elected for the year ensuing are :—
Director, : : : . Dr. W.S. W. Ruschenberger.
Vice-Director, Z F . Thomas Meehan.
Recorder, . ; : . Dr. Charles Schaffer.
Cor. Secretary and Treasurer,. Isaac C. Martindale.
Conservator, . : ’. John H. Redfield.
A most gratifying announcement is the completion of the great
task of mounting all the specimens in the herbarium of North
American plants as covered by Gray's Synoptical Flora. This was
commenced in 1878, by the Conservator, Mr. John H. Redfield, as-
sisted at various times by Messrs. F. Lamson Scribner, Isaac Burk
and the late Charles F. Parker.
The encouraging growth of the herbarium noted in our former
annual reports, still continues. The large number of 1039 species
were added to our former list, making 28,306 as the total number
of species of vascular plants represented in the herbarium.
:
;
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 449
The Conseryator’s report to the Section, giving the details of these
additions, is added as a part of this report. .
Respectfully submitted,
THoMAs MEEHAN,
Vice-Director.
Conservator’s Report for 1888.—The Conservator of the Botanical
Section reports that during the year closing Dec. 10th, the additions
to the herbarium consist of 2525 species, of which 2296 are vascular
plants, and 229 are Lichens, Fungi and Alge. Of the 2296 species
of vascular plants 1040 are believed to be new to our collection, 77
of them being of genera not before represented. 693 species are
North America, 1414 are from Tropical America, 171 from the East-
ern Continent, and 18 are Australian.
It is gratifying to know that the rate of increase has not declined,
and that so large a portion of it is of forms not previously represent-
ed.
The most important addition of the past year is the completion of
the collections made by Dr. H. H. Rusby in Bolivia and the neigh-
boring regions in 1885 and 1886, consisting of 983 species of which
nearly 600 are believed to be new to us. Including the portion of
this collection received by us the previous year, the whole consists
of 1453 species. These have been contributed by members of the
Section, supplemented by the proceeds of duplicate plants sold by
its order. Other valuable additions to our representation of the
flora of Tropical America are—266 species collected by C. G.
Pringle in the Province of Coahuila, Mexico, and 100 species
collected in the Mexican Province of Tabasco and presented by Sr.
Jose N. Rovirosa, from whom we have reason to expect further con-
tributions.
The number of species of vascular plants in the herbarium of the
Academy, at the date of the last report, was estimated at . 27,267
to which add the accession of new species of this year OAD
giving the estimated present total. 3 : . 28,307
of which 8200 are North American, that is from wile region covered
_by Gray’s Synoptical Flora.
In May last was completed the work of mounting the special
herbarium of North American plants. This work was begun in
1878, and has been continued from year to year in the intervals. of
other duties. In this the Conservator received most efficient aid
30
450 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
from the late Charles F. Parker, from F. L. Scribner and more recent-
ly from Mr. Isaac Burk.
A complete list of the additions to the herbarium is appended,
and will appear in its proper place under the head of “Additions to -
the Museum.”
Respectfully submitted,
JoHN H. REDFIELD,
Conservator. —
REPORT OF THE MINERALOGICAL AND
GEOLOGICAL SECTION.
The Director of the Mineral and Geological Section of the Acad-
emy of Natural Sciences, would respectfully report that meetings of
the section have been held nearly every month during the year except
the summer months. Some of these have been quite well attended,
at others the attendance has been small. On the whole, he
regrets to say, the itnterest has not been as great as in former years,
but this has been largely due to absence of active members from
causes beyond their control.
The meetings during the latter part of the year have been better
attended and more interest has been manifested than in the earlier
part, so that the outlook is more favorable.
The following officers were elected to serve during the ensuing
year :—
Director, p ‘ ; . Theodore D. Rand.
Vice-Director, : : . Dr. W.S. W. Ruschenberger.
Treasurer, . : ’ . John Ford,
Conservator, . ; ' . William W. Jefferis.
Recorder and Secretary, . . Dr. Charles Schaffer.
Respectfully submitted,
TueEo. D. RAnp,
Director.
REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF INVERTEBRATE
PALEONTOLOGY.
The Professor of Invertebrate Paleontology respectfully reports
that he has during the year delivered a course of lectures on geology
oe
é 1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 451
which, as heretofore, has been illustrated or supplemented with prac-
tical field demonstrations. He has also delivered in the hall of the
Academy, a number of lectures before the Teachers’ Institute of this
* city, and contributed four lectures to the Friday Evening course of
the Academy. During the month of July be conducted a class in
the exploration of the Bermuda Islands, which had hitherto received
but little attention from naturalists. The inquiry extended as well
to the zoological as to the geological features of the island group,
and has resulted in bringing to the museum a rich store of materi-
al, the greater part of which is new to the collections. |The details
of the exploration, to which reference is also made in the Curator’s
Report, are being published in the Academy’s Proceedings.
The collections in the department of Invertebrate Paleontology re-
main pretty much as they were last year. A number of additions,
but none of any great significance, have been received. Perhaps
the most valuable of these is a collection of cretaceous plants from
Kansas, obtained from C. H. Sternberg in exchange for certain vol-
umes of the Academy’s Proceedings. Mention should also be made
of a fine selection of crinoids from the Carboniferous formations of
the central United States, generously given to the Academy by
Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer, of Burlington, Lowa.
The general condition of the collections is good. But here as in
almost all other departments of the Academy’s Museum, additional
accommodations are badly needed.
. Respectfully submitted,
ANGELO HEILPRIN,
Professor of Invertebrate Paleontology.
REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF ETHNOLOGY AND
ARCH AOLOGY.
During the past year the course of lectures usually delivered by
me was omitted owing to my absence from the city.
The collections have received some but not extensive additions in
this department. It would be desirable and would benefit this
branch of instruction were all the ethnologic objects in the possess-
ion of the Academy arranged and classified separately from the
other collections, and according to the ethnic method of display. To
accomplish this the exclusive use of sufficient space would be needed
452 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1888,
to exhibit the objects and allow room to fill the lacune in the col-
lection. At present, this does not appear to be within the power of
the Academy ; but it seems proper to state that such an arrange-
ment is very desirable so that it may receive consideration in any +
future extension of the Society’s building. 5
Respectfully submitted,
D. G. BRINTON,
Professor of Ethnology and Archeology-
1888.]
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
453
SUMMARY OF THE REPORT OF WM. C. HENSZEY,
‘To Balance from last account
oe
“ee
46
a
.
“ec
“eé
“cc
ee
By Salaries, Janitors, etc......
« Printing and Binding Proceedings, etc
<< Printing and Stationery
late STAM wE OLAV IN Stes snaiaaasas ccc coscsccseiaece ses elceseececens
HORE D Chtemariarsntlen eieselens nse st sisscjencccaseceseessacinccescideceesmcnce
6s
ec
“ee
TREASURER,
For THE YEAR Enpine Nov. 30, 1888.
PHEKESHOI PUVESTMEN(S 5.505000. scicscsossnacesseaveseacesatecs
Interest on Money awaiting Investment..............00600+
Saleutax OM MIOTt CAGES .c..scecec seeds ccccsscocceesse seeks sae
Wilson Fund, toward Salary of Librarian
Rentals from Real Estate
State Tax on Mortgage Investments
Taxes and Water Rents
Gar dsemliraySeANGu BOXES scmscecesies loc eniewissiesesesisesiecceenesiees
Mitiniei pale xXpPENSES...c2--cescsreecorsoses Saves sasceAcerosiet sews
Repairs and Expenses to Real Estate
Glass and Glassware
Lecture Fees paid to Professors
PIPSEIMMEN Suse caiteaitelscaleasieesliscsiseeeecesessesivesacscecesclnesener
Cases and Drawers
Expenses Publication Committee
Real Estate Title Co., Insurance of Title to 3 Mortgages
OTHE SON) Oenewedtes ccs. casactiacs qdeceracbes se sesiieosiecesaapeesies
MRSC elAMEOUSsasaacieascccnssiouciwece ce coecw oe orieosuisclssses'secelssecies
Life Memberships transferred to Investment account.....
Ballance cecaenacscececinseaciecesecs«seriseessasiatene evasion
DPR O REE ROR EH eH ee RESET H EHH Heeetee eee eee
PMILEAEOG BOS eoacien sce sioas\owica'sas8 case ooclevesecsstecoeseaeastcenes
Contributions (semi-annual)
Life Memberships
Popular Lectures
Seem ee Heme eo eee ete enneee. eeeeeees
eee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee ee
SO ee rer rere ere as
Publication Committee—Sales of Proceedings, Journal,
Peewee sew eew cares
Pe ecw ee re PER e ee oer ae eae ees eeeeseresene
SALeROMm DT CateMbOOkSecssessec-cvecssncsesnes+ one soascacerecs
MIISCE MAN COUSceaces saci sselsscaniseseceiss siashs vee seitereceneeccsestaes
CORRE ee Reem ee eee eee eee eeeaseseseseees
ee
Peer ee Reem meee eee ere means esas resseesee
Peer eens e eee eeeeeeeesceee
eee ee TECH HOH eee ee Hemme e reese ee eeeeeeseees
Creme cere ree sereeseseeee
emer eee eee K ee eee eee Ee Hee EEE EE Eee Ee ee®
Co ee
emcee eee crests roe! Meee eeeeree eee eeseeeesese
Reece eee ee ree e eases ee sees
123 57
$10494 61
8891 95
$1602 66
ee ee Oe ee eee Se ee ee eee
OO BOSE CN BNE
oe epee tac ee ge oo eos ar en ee eo
> [SP ewes taro
on yer ee
ea
454 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
I. V. WILLIAMSON LIBRARY FUND.
Balance overdrawn Jastistatementse-cen ence- cmeee eteesee eee sence teeaneae meee 307 60
BOOKS eis edase ste eheran sss teres seciee an eu ee ssnevicueceeeenesen aes fee eaesseeeentee ee 2284 22
Collecting <.. <<. scenseenssAnnnn danscsbe doocte Saccgonntas tend dsicue heeeeme nae eee 84 66
daxes andy ales Ven tsecs-sceseseecces enema eneaeee ernie seectasetes eee meeeeae 200 55
Repaimsto ELOUSES...c.c0n fasecssase oo -eciasciiad ont ceemacaineeeven sept acae-heec een eaee 214 18:
$3091 21
Rents Collected)... t.c.sncscesesa mast cous sles agieeee sae eee: 1041 50
Ground: Rents: Collected . 22. cosc.n-sacse ue dete ns ea ooeresscmemeer 669 64
Amount transferred from General Fund (Interest on money
AW AICO MEV ESUEBEND | cca oewe ones relceabinesaee ene enceererrcr 185 00
Preportioniot Fepaiks ettinded: sn. sens eset sae seeecen eee oes 12 04
———— 1858 18
Balance overdrawn......sss.cseeees Rta ge eee eects $1233 03:
THOMAS B. WILSON LIBRARY FUND.
Balance overdrawn as per last stateMeNt.........eeeseeeeceeesecneeereseseceens 57 69
BOGUS. occck cecctse occu ctawone eek Sacelocee ove eon diss tre dulocs seri loneniawe sta escaceneere 231 16
Transferred to General Account toward Salary of Librarian............... 300 00
$588 85.
Tess: Income {rom Unvestmentssscs1---sclesissat cbltccess.ccuceceenccereaeccessetemte 525 00
BalanCeioverd ra wil.c--essescaccens som ceedecesln fateisesnecitnettesectices $63 85-
JESSUP FUND. (For assistance of Students.)
Balance lasksstatementscecscn ecscsc cco secs colseesecessmccecaieemeciice 288 OL
Interest: fram ImvestmMentSesss-o- cscs sees oor cecedeccocccenceras s=. 0860700.
——— eaenum
WISDUTSEMENtS coca sown ccdceck decccesceSsucesosivcecoscscecese cose eslncminnace coma aacees 480 00°
Balance ccs cetesietoceces uileah can soecenicewa nse cc oncceenaetececeeane $368 o1
WILLIAM S. VAUX FUND.
Balance per last statement.........-..---seeseeess seeeereeerseerenens 319 29
Interest from InvestMents...........sscecscceecerscsesesccceccereoees 700 00
——— 1019 29
Cash paid Jacob Binder for purchase of Minerals.........+se++e+seee-seeeeee - 400 00
Balance oh eh eect ee et cae seiee oon eee 619 2%
INVESTMENT ACCOUNT.
Balance per last stateMent........-2.seeesseeeevereeeeesecereserece 23149 76
Cash received from The Fidelity Insurance and Trust Co.
under the will of Mary Rebecca Darby Smith.......... 1201 49
“ received from Dr. Charles Scaffer Executor of the Es-
tate John Bryden deceased..........ssssseeeeeeeeceeeee scene 4939 58
“received of Theo. D. Rand to be added to amouut
received from Dr Schaffer for Bryden Estate.......... 100 00
“received from Emma W. Hayden (Hayden Memorial.) 2500 00
“ received from W. N. Johnson for 5% of sale of lot...... 800 7
«received from sale of lot to Charles R. Maguire and ©
transferred to Mrs. A. M. Paul cash portion............ 333 33
1888. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 455
“ received from sale of lot in Manayunk to Edward
ESS) Norse Se oc SCE Na eee te ie LN 300 00
“received from Mrs. Clara J. B. Moore (addition to Jessup
und). ..2.%6.2 Dinladedenoaatescnentevnsedesatetstat cea Seas - 6000 00
“transferred from General Account (3 Life Member-
SSAIIES locacoqic: Cig ie PRE Sem ee panrsre eee a eo 300 00
Sisal Pa GIS
Of the above amount there has been invested in 3 Mortgases:.a.cce cee
BME IYE DEODETINES. wos5550.5% vclaseletes iuiacbandeRhee
L. Woolman. Pleurobrachia, Atlantic City, N. J.
J. Willcox. Flustra foliacea, Pterogorgia, from Florida.
B. Sharp. Balanus concavus, Chesapeake Bay.
458 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
MOLLUSCA ( recent).
W. D. Hartman. Three new species of Partula. Thirty-six photographs of new
species of Partula and Achatinella.
W. B. Marshall. Bythinia tentaculata, from Albany, N. Y.
John Ford. Types of Matica Fordiana Simpson, and Oliva inflata var. ovum-
ralli Ford. Two species of Helix, Natica heros, Pyramidella, etc.
B. P. Ruggles. Six species of Spheriide from Vermont.
H. A. Pilsbry. Ten species of American A’ssotde@. Types of six new species.
Dr. W. H. Rush. Ten species of marine shells, dredged off Florida.
Bryant Walker. Fifty-four species of U. S. Limniades. Twenty-seven jars and
vials of alcoholic Limneide.
E. W. Roper. Three:species of Spheriide.
Miss A. M. Fielde. Zzmn@a from Swatow, China.
W.L. Mictier. Thirty one species of marine shells.
Wm. A. Marsh. Two species of fresh-water shells.
Wm. D. Averell. Three species of He/ix.
T. D. A. Cockerell. Fifty-two species of Colorado mollusks.
Frederick Stearns. Fourteen species of Bahaman shells.
b. H. Wright. Twenty-three Florida Uniones, including types of his new species.
Jos. Willcox. Fifty trays of Florida shells.
S. Raymond Roberts. Acme@ea vulgata from Ireland.
F. A. Sampson. Twenty-eight species of Missouri shells.
Chas. T. Simpson. Six species of Indian Territory shells.
Henry Hemphill. Ten species of fresh-water univalves.
Hon. F. E. Spinner. One species of Florida mollusk.
Prof. Angelo Heilprin. Four species of Cyprea.
B. Tomlin. Thirty seven species of European marine shells.
H. E. Dore. Three species of Oregon shells.
John Campbell. Cyprea. Sea ace cet
Alfred Carnana. Forty-five species shells from Malta (in exchange).
C. W. Johnson. Twenty-one species Florida shells.
J. A. Singley. Fifty-nine trays of Texas shells.
Wm. Baldwin. Seventy-eight trays of Sandwich Is. land shells.
C. E. Beddome. Four species of Tasmanian shells.
INVERTEBRATA (Fossil),
T. H. Aldrich. Twenty-two species from the Eocene of Wood's Bluff, Ala.
J. Singley. Six species from the Eocene of Texas.
L. Woolman. Sixty-four trays of Miocene fossils from well boring in Atlantic City,
N. J., Melanopsts Marylandica from Cape May. .
J. Willcox. Forty-eight trays of Tertiary fossils, from Florida; seventy-five trays
of Paleozoic fossils from New York State; Vasum horridum, Florida.
J. S. Salter. Nautilus, Veniella Conrai, Cretaceous of N. J.
Chas. Wachsmuth and Frank Springer. Twenty-one trays of Carboniferous crinoids,
from Kentucky, Alabama and Tennessee.
PLANTs (Recent).
Mrs. Virginia L. Rowland. Fine specimen (in spirits) of Chetvostemon plata-
noides, (Mexican Hand Plant) with oil painting of flowers and foliage of the
same.
Dr. J. Bernard Brinton. Carex Grayi, Brown's Mills, N. J., Arenaria serpylli-
folia, Millington, Md.; Dianthus prolifer, Maryland and Briza minor, Oregon.
Thomas Meehan. 186 species of plants, mostly exotic species in cultivation and
mostly new to the collection.
Isaac Burk. 84 species of plants collected by him in Florida and New Jersey.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 459
Prof. Edward L. Greene, University of California. 36 species of new or choice
California plants.
Prof. Thos. C. Porter of Lafayette College, Easton, Pa. 15 species of plants from
Pennsylvania and New Jersey.
Frank Tweedy, of U.S. Geological Survey. Evrigeron Tweedyi Canby, a new
species from Montana.
Wm. M. Canby. 18 species of European plants, and 10 species from the mountains-
of North Carolina and Tennessee, including the rare species Senecio Rugelia
Gr. and Buckleya distichophylla Torr.
Miss Adele Fielde, of Swatow, S. China. Boehmeria nivea (L.) Hk. and Arn.
with specimens of its fibre and of fabrics woven therefrom; acorns of Quercus
jissa Camp.
C. McIntyre. Nut of Phytelephas macrocarpa, (Vegetable Ivory).
Isaac C. Martindale. 32 species of North American and Ballast plants.
Thomas Meehan and John H. Redfield, supplemented by proceeds of Academy
Duplicates :—983 species of plants collected by Dr. H. H. Rusby mostly in
Bolivia in 1885 and 1866, a large majority of them being new to the collection.
J. M. Price through Wm. Hunt. 2 species of Australian Aucalypti, and 2 species of
Australian Acacza, cultivated in California.
Herbert Aldrich, Springfield, Mass., through Thos. Meehan. 5 species of Arctic
Plants, from north-western coast of Arctic America.
Dr. Geo. A. Rex and Dr. H. Wingate. 20th and 21st Centuries of Ellis and
Everharts’ North American Fungi.
Roberts LeBoutillier. Stveptosolen Famesonti, Miers, (cult.) a native of New
Granada; Staphylea Colchica Stev. (cult.) and Symphytum asperrimum Sims,
(Cult.) natives of Caucasus.
Miss Frances Whitney. Fasciate form of Ranunculus bulbosus L. from Brym
Mawr, Pa.
Aubrey H. Smith. 25 species of plants from mountains of western North Carolina
and New Hampshire, and Carex miliaris Mx. from Maine.
Prof. N. L. Britton, Columbia College, N. Y. Aesculus arguta Buckley, Kansas,
Corema aloa L. Portugal; Hicoria alba (L.), Hicoria microcarpa (Nutt.) and
Hicoria minima Marsh. from Staten Island, N. Y.
Wm. H. Dougherty. Clianthus Dampieri A. Cunn, native of Australia and
Leonotis Leonurus L. native of South Africa, both cultivated at Mt. Pleasant,
New Jersey.
John Donnell Smith. Specimens of Darbya umbellulata Gr. both pistillate and
staminate plants.
Prof. John H. Barbour, Trinity College, Hartford, Conn. Aimulus luteus L., na-
tive of California, established in fields, Norfolk, Ct.
Wittmer Stone. Oxvdaphus nyctigineus Sweet and Bromus sterilis L., introduced
at Wayne Junction near Philadelphia ; 41 species of vascular plants, 3 of Lichens-
and 23 of Algae collected by him in Bermuda.
Miss Van Wyck. Leaf of Afonogeton fenestralis Hk, native of Madagascar, from
Botanic Garden of Mauritius.
Mrs. Lewars. Sarcodes sanguinea Torr. (Snow-plant) from California.
Prof. Joseph T. Rothrock. 60 species of plants collected by himself in Manatee Co.,.
Florida, in spring of 1887. : ;
José N. Rovirosa. 100 species of plants from vicinity of San Juan Bautista, province
of Tabasco, Mexico, of which 52 are new to the collection,
Tohn H. Redfield. 266 species of plants collected by C. G. Pringle in province of
Coahuila, Mexico in 1887, of which 123 are new to the collection; 191 species
collected by himself in New England and 220 species mostly from westerm
states to supply desiderata in the Herbarium.
PLants (Fossil).
L. Woolman. Stg?//aria, Elkland, Pa. :
H. W. DuBois. Plant remains from the Trias of New Jersey; Sagenopterzs,
Newark, N. J.
460 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
MINERALS, Rocks, Etc.
‘W.W. Jefferis. Quartz in Mica; Epidote, Pa.; Garnets, New York City; Phlogo-
pite, Ontario; Moon-stone, Amelia C. H., Va., Haydenite, Beaumontite, Stilbite,
Chabazite, Siderite, from Baltimore; Bucholzite, Philadelphia; Bowenite, R. L.;
Phlogopite, Ontario and New York; Rose Tourmaline, Chesterfield, Mass. ;
Muscovite, Del.; Menaccanite, Parkerville, Pa.; Feldspar, Italy; Roxbury
Conglomerate ; Granite, Virginia City; Garnets, New York City.
J. M. Buck. Concretion formed on bolt, Pt. Pleasant, N. J.
Mineralogical Section A. N.S. Azurite and Malachite from Arizona; Bementite,
Green Tourmaline, from Franklin, N. J.; Ripidolite, Brewster, N. Y.; Se-
piolite, Ontario; Microlite, Amelia Co., Va.
‘C. E. Ronaldson. Syenite with nodules, Smedley, Pa.
S. Tyson. Tysonite, Colorado Springs, Col.
E. A. Kelley. Trap rocks. Cal.; Argentite, Montana.
M. Sommerville. Aragonite, Hyacinth, Epidote, Grossularite, Idocrase, and Ice-
land Spar, from France. '
H.W. DuBois. Artificial pumice; Stylolite, Delaware Water Gap.
Jj. E. Ives. Steatite with Dolomite, Lafayette, Pa. Selenite, Siliceous Concre-
tion, from Goat Island, N. Y.
J. M. Hartman. Hematite, Orinoco River.
W. H. Gifford. Worn rock, resembling implement.
J. E. Roberts. Umber, Lancaster Co., Pa.
1888. ]} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 46%
ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY.
1888
Abbott, Helen C. De S. Comparative chemistry of higher and lower plants. 8vo-
T. Aug. and Sept. Philadelphia, 1887. The Author,
Abercrombie, Hon. Ralph. Weather, a popular exposition of the nature of weath-
er changes from day to day. S8vo. New York, 1887.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Abich, Herman. Geologische Forschungen in den kaukaischeu Lindern. Ill,
Th. Geologie des armenischen Hochlandis. II Osthilfte. 4to. Wien,
1887. With folio atlas. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Geologische Fragmente aus dem Nachlasse Hermann Abich’s. I, Karten
und Profile "zur Geologie der Halbinseln Kertsch und Taman. II, Zur
Geologie der Ponza-Inseln.—Barometrische Héhenmessungen im Kirchen-
Sstaate, etc., etc. Text 4to, Atlas folio. Wien. 1887.
1. V. Williamson Fund.
Admirality manual of scientific enquiry. 5th Ed. Edited by Sir Robert Ball.
8vo. London, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Agassiz, Alexander. A contribution to American thalassography. Three cruises
of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey Steamer “Blake” from 1877
to 188). Two volumes. 8yo. Boston and New York, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Allen, Timothy Field. The Characeze of America. Paff I. The Author,
Observations on some American forms of Chara coronata. 4to T. May,
1882.
Thomas Meehan.
Allgemeine Naturkunde. Lief. 99-117. I. V. Williamson Fund-
Ami, Henry M. Flora Temiscouatensis. May, 1888. The Author..
Anderson, John, M. D. Anatomical and zoological researches; comprising an
account of the zoological results of the two expeditions to Western Yunnan
in 1868 and 1875; anda monograph of the two cetacean genera, Platanista
and Orcella. 2Yvols. 4to, Text and Plates. London, 1878.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Australian Museum, catalogue of the library. 8vo. Sydney, 1883. Guide to
' the contents of. Svo T. Sydney, 1883. List of old documents and relics.
8vo T. Sydney, 1884. Plan of the, and its contents. March, 1887.
Report of the Trustees for 1887. Ogilby’s catalogue of fishes. Part I, 1888.
Bale’s catalogue of zoophytes, 1884 See Authors. The Trustees.
Baer, K. E. Ueber Entwickelungsgeschichte der Thiere. 2er. Th. Schlussheft.
a 4to. 1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Baillon, M. H. Dictionnaire de botanique. 22e Fasc. I. V. Williamson Fund.
The natural history of plants. Vol. VIII. 8vo. London, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bale, W. M. Australian Museum. Catalogue of the Australian hydroid zoophytes.
8vo. Sydney, 1884. The Trustees.
Ball, John. Notes of a naturalist in South America. 8vo. London, £887.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ballot, C. H. D. Buys. Verdeeling der Warmte over de Aarde. Amsterdam,
1888. Royal Academy of Amsterdam.
Baltet, Charles. Le Surgreffage des Végétaux. Pe ebos: Meehan.
Banquet to commemorate the framing and signing of the constitution of the United
States. The Committee of Arrangements.
Barcena, Mariano. Informe sobre el estado actual del volcan de Colima.
The Author,
Barrande. J. Systéme silurien au centre de Ja Bohéme. VII, 1.
I. V. Williamson Fund,
462 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Bary, A. De. Comparative morphology and biology of the Fungi, Mycetozoa
and Bacteria. Translation by Henry E. F. Garnsey, revised by Isaac Bay-
ley Balfour. 8vo. Oxford, 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Baur, G. Beitrage zur Morphogemie des Carpus und Tarsus der Vertebraten. 1
Th., Batrachia. 8vo. Jena, 188. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Beecher, Charles E. A method of preparing for microscopical study the radulze
of small species of Gasteropoda. Nov. 18, 1887. 8vo T. The Author.
Berghaus H. Physikalischer Atlas. L. 14-16. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bibliotheca Zoologica. Herausgegeben von Dr. Rud. Leuckart und Dr. Carl
Chun. H. 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Binet, Alfred and Charles Féré. Animal Magnetism. 8vo. New York, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Boettger, Oskar. Die Reptilien und Amphibien von Madagascar. 4to. Frank-
furteay Von ae I. V. Williamson Fund.
Boguslawski, G. V. and Otto Kriimmel. Handbuch der Ozeanographie, II. $vo.
Stuttgart, 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bohemia. Naturwissenschaftliche Landesdurchforschung von Béhmen. VI, 4,
5, 6. I. V. Williamson Fund,
Bollman, Charles H. A preliminary list of the Myriapoda of Arkansas. 8vo T.
February, 1888. The Author.
Bombicci, L. Il Gabinetto Universitario di Mineralogia in Bologna XXVII
anni dopo la sua fondazione. Relazione terza. Bologna, 1888.
Un Museo didattico per l’insegnamento oggettivo elementare con monografie
circolanti. Fondato dalla Societa degl’ insegnanti. Bologna, 1888.
Sulla formazione della Grandine e sui fenomeni ad essa concomitanti. Bologna,
1888. The Author.
Borre, A. Preudhomme &. Liste des cent et cinq espéces de coléoptéres lamelli-
cornes actuellement authentiquement capturées en Belgique avec le tableau
synoptique de leur distribution géographique dans le pays. Jan. 7th, 1888.
The Author.
Bourgeois, M. L. Encycl. Chim. (Fremy). T. II. Metalloides. Reproduction
artificielle des mineraux. Svo. Paris, 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bourke, John G. Compilation of notes and memoranda bearing upon the use of
human ordure and human urine in rites of a religious or semi-religious
character among various nations. Washington, 1888. The Author.
Boury, E. de. Description de Scalidae nouveaux des couches Eocéne du Basin
de Paris et révision de quelques espéces mal connues. 8vo T. Paris,
1887.
Etude sur les sous-genres de Scalidze du Bassin de Paris. 8vo T. Paris,
1887. The Author.
Boutan, M. E. Encycl. Chimique (Fremy). T. IJ. Metalloides. Diamant. 8vo.
Paris, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bower, F. O. and Sydney H. Vines. A course of practical instruction in botany.
Parts land 2. 8vo. London, 1885-87. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Brandt, J. F. Ausfiihrliche Beschreibung der von C. H. Mertens auf seiner Welt-
umsegelung beobachteten Schirmquallen nebst allgemeinen Bemerkungen,
iiber die Schirmquallen iiberhaupt. 24 April, 1835. Mrs. Dr. C. Hering.
Brefeld,O. Untersuchungen aus dem Gesammtgebiete der Myologie. VII H.
Basidiomyceten, II. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Brehm, A. E. | Merveilles de la Nature. Les poissons et les crustacés. Les
poissons par H. E. Sauvage. Les crustacés par J. Kiinckel d’Herculais,
8vo. Paris, n. d. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Brezina, A. and E. Cohen. Die Structur und Zusammensetzung der Meteoreisen.
Lief. 2 and 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Brinton, Daniel G. The language of palzolithic Man. 8vo T. Oct. 5, 1888.
On the so-calied Alagiiilac language of Guatemala. 8vo T. 1887.
On an ancient human footprint from Nicaragua. 8vo T. 1887.
On the Chane-Abal (Four—Language) tribe and dialect of Chiapas. 8vo T. ~
Jan. 1888. The Author.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 463
Brinton, D. G., Henry Phillips Jr. and Monroe. B. Snyder. Reports of
the Committee appointed October 21, 1887, to examine into the scientific
value of Volapiik, presented to the American Philosophical Society, Nov.
18, 1887 and January 6, 1888. The Authors.
British Museum. Catalogue of the fossil Reptilia and Amphibia. Part 1, 1888.
Catalogue of the Passeriformes or perching birds. Oligomyodz. By Phillip
Lutley Sclater. London, 1888.
Guide to the shells and starfish galleries (mollusca, echinodermata, vermes)
in the Department of Zoology. Svo T. 1887. The Trustees.
Britton, N. L. Contr. from the Herb. of Columbia College, No. 5. New or note-
worthy North American Phanerogams. April, 1888. 8vo T.
Note on the growth of a vinegar plant in fermented grape juice. Jan. 10,
1887. 8vo T.
On an archean plant from the white crystalline limestone of Sussex County,
N. J. Jan. 9th, 1888. §vo. The Author.
Britton, N. L. and H. H. Rusby. Contr. from the Herbarium of Columbia College,
No. 4. A list of plants collected by Miss Mary B. Croft at San Diego,
MicxasassOctarara. 1887 Svo TU: The Authors.
Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen des Thier-Reichs. 45er Bd. V, 18, 19; 6er
Bde ie 57=62; IV, 18=22 V; 30; 31- Wilson Fund.
Brown, Jno. Allen. Palzolithic Man in N. W. Middlesex. Svo. London, 1887.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Brown, Nathan Clifford. A catalogue of the birds known to occur in the vicinity
of Portland, Me. 8vo T. 1882. Portland Natural History Society.
Bucquoy, E., Ph. Dautzenberg and G. Dollfus. Les mollusques marins du
Roussillon. Fasc. 14. : I. V. Williamson Fund.
Burckhard, Hugo. Andreas Gaill. Festrede, Universitat Wiirzburg. 4to T.
1887. University of Wiirzburg.
Burmeister, H. Atlas de la description physique de la Republique Argentine.
Ye Section. Mam.,2and3 L. Supplemente, text pp. 37-125.
1. V. Williamson Fund.
Burnham, S. M. History and uses of limestones and marbles. S8vo ‘lI. Boston,
1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
California State Mining Bureau. 7th annual report of, for year ending 1887.
Bulletin, No. J]. Sacramento, 1888. The Director.
Letter of State Geologist, 1864-65. Address, Jan. 30), 1868. Statement of
progress, 1872-73. _ Report of Secretary of War, Tyson’s memoirs, 1850.
In Exchange.
Call, R. Ellswoith. Memoranda on a collection of fishes from the Ozark Region
of Missouri. May, 27, 1887. 8vo T. The Author.
Canada. Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada. Annual reports
(new ser.) II, 1886, with portfolio of maps. Catalogue of Canadian plants.
By John Macoun, 1886. Part III, 1886. IV, 1888.
Meteorological Service. Report (Carpmail), 1885. The Survey.
Cape Horn, Mission Scientifique du, 1882-83, I, II, III, 1V, VI Arachnides, In-
sects, Bryozoaires. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Carruthers, G. T. The earth’s polar floods in perihelion. 8vo T. 25th March,
1888. The Author.
Casey, Thomas L. Onsome new North American Rhynchophora. Part I. New
York, 1888. S8vo T. The Author.
Challenger Reports. See Thomson, Sir C. Wyville.
Champlin, A. F. The Catawba language. 8vo T. Jan., 1888. The Author.
Chaper, M. Extraits d’un rapport de mission sur la cote nord du Vénézuéla.
The Author.
Cholera, statistics of, with sanitary measures adopted by the Board of Health prior
to and during the prevalence of the epidemic in Philadelphia in the summer
of 1849. 8vo T. Philadelphia, 1849. Wm. J. Potts.
Ciofalo, Saverio. Eco dell’ Isola. 4to T. Ottob. 22. The Author.
464 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1888.
Clessen. S. Die Mollusken—Fauna Oesterreich Ungarns und der Schweiz. LL.
1, 2,3. 8vo. Nurnberg, 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Cohen, E. Zusammenstellung petrographischer Untersuchungsmethoden. Strass-
burg. Marz, 1884. T. V. Williamson Fund.
Cohn, F. Kryptogamon-Flora von Schlesien. 4e L. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Cole, Jas. E. The Earth’s orbit and distance from the sun. Reason vs. imagina-
tion. The Author.
Colin, G. Traité de physiologie comparée des animaux, IT.. 8vo. 1588.
. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Combe, George. The constitution of man considered in relation to external ob-
jects. 8vo. Boston, 1835. Mrs. L. Fox.
Coolidge, Richard H. Statistical report on the sickness and mortality in the army
of the United States, Jan. 1839 to Jan. 1855. 4to. Washington, 1856.
William J. Potts.
Cooper, J. G. West Coast Pulmonata, fossil and recent. 8vo T. Dec. 31, 1887.
The Author.
Cooper, W. M. Track from Katoomba to Jenolan Caves. 8vo T. Sydney, 1885.
Trustees of the Australian Museum.
Cope, E.D. The Perissodactyla. 8vo T. 1887.
Synopsis of the vertebrate fauna of the Puerco series. Jan. 20, 1888.
The Author.
Cotes E. C. and C. Swinhoe. A catalogue of the moths of India. II and III.
Bombyces. 8vo. Calcutta, 1887. Trustees of the Indian Museum.
Cowan, Frank. Contributions to Anthropology. Paper No. 1. The principles
and practice of medicine in Chosen or Corea. Greenesburg, Pa., 1888.
8vo T. - The Author.
Crépin, Francois. Nouvelles recherches 4 faire sur le Rosa obtusifolia Desv.
Oct. 8th, 1887.
Les roses des Iles Canaries et de l’Ile de Madére. Nov. 12, 1887.
Thos. Meehan.
Culin, Stewart. China in America. Philadelphia, 1887. The Author.
Cutler, Rev. Manasseh. On the sea anemones of Swallow House or cave in the
rocks at Nahant near Lynn, Mass.
Dames, W. and E. Kayser. Palzontologische Abhandlungen, IV, 1, 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Danielli, Jacopo. Il Corridore Martinelli. Osservazioni antropologiche. 1888.
Tecnica antropologia. May 18, 1888. The Author.
Darwin, Charles. The life and letters of, including an autobiographical chapter.
2vols. 8vo. New York, 1887.
On the origin of species. 6th Ed. 8vo. New York, 1887.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Davidson, R. B. History of the United Bowmen of Philadelphia. 8vo. T-.
1888. Chas. P. Hayes.
Dawson, Sir J. William. The geological history of plants. S8vo. New York,
1888.
Note on fossil woods and other plant remains from the cretaceous and
Laramie formations of the western Territories of Canada. 4to T. May
25, 1887.
Peter Redpath Museum, McGill University Montreal. Notes on specimens.
Sept. 1888. Specimens of Eozoon Canadense and their geological and other
relations. Montreal, 1888. The Author.
Day, David F. Catalogue of the Niagara flora. A catalogue of the flowering
and fern-like plants growing without cultivation in the vicinity of the Falls
of Niagara. 8vo. Troy, 1888. Charles E. Smith.
De Candolle A. and C. Monographiz phanerogamarum prodromi. V, 1887.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Sur l’origine botanique de quelques plantes cultivées et les causes probables
de l’extinction des espéces. Jan. 1887. Thomas Meehan.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 465
De Hass, F. S. Buried cities recovered, or explorations in Bible Lands. 8vo.
Philadelphia, 1887. Angelo Heilprin.
Deichmiiller, J. V.. Die Meteoriten des mineralogischen Museums in Dresden,
1886.
Uber Urnenfunde in Uebigau bei Dresden, 1884. The Author.
Delaurier, E. Essai d’une théorie générale supérieure de philosophie naturelle et
de thermo chimie avec une nouvelle nomenclature binaire notative pour Ja
chimie minerale et organique. ler—4e Fasc. S8vo. Paris 1883-1884.
Nouvelle théorie fondée sur l’expérience de la cause de la production de
Yelectricité dans les piles hydro-et thermoélectriques et remarques sur les
courants électriques S8vo T. 12th Oct. 1885. Paris, 1886.
Procédé pour résoudre facilement ]és problemes de chimte les plus compliques
par des équations tangibles a l’aide des notations et d’une methode graphi-
que. 5 Oct. 1885. S8vo T. Paris, 1886. The Author.
Delgado, J. F. N. Commissao dos Trabalhos ygeologicos de Portugal. Estudo
sobre os Bilobites e outros fosseis das quartzites da base do systema Silurico
de Portugal. Supplements, 4to. Lisbon, 1888. The Survey.
Derby, Orville A. and Luiz F. Gonzaga. | Extrahido da Revista do Observatorio.
Meteoritos Brasilieros. Notas sobre meteoritos Brasilieros por Orville A.
‘Derby. Nota sobre a localidade do ferro nativo de Santa Catharina por
Luiz F. Gonzaga de Campos. Rio de Janeiros, 1888. The Authors.
Desor, E. et P. de Loriol. Echinologie Helvétique. Description des Oursins
fossiles de la Suisse. Echinides de la période Jurassique. 4to. Text and
Atlas. Weisbade, 1868-1872. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Detmer, W. Das pflanzenphysiologische Praktikum. S8vo. Jena. 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
De Toni, G. B. e David Levi. Civico Museo e raccolta Correr in Venezia. Col-
lezioni di storia naturale. I, Collezioni botaniche, l’Algarum Zanardini.
8vo. Venezia, 1888. The Authors.
Doye, John. A vindication of the Divine authority and inspired accuracy of the
Mosaic cosmogany and scriptural philosophy generally; 1757. Collated and
republished by the Biblical Science Defence Association. | Croydon, 1888.
The Society.
Dublin Science and Art Museum. Re orts, (1887) 1888. The Director.
Dubois, Alph. Compte Rendu des observations ornithologiques faites en Belgique
pendant l'année 1886.
Description d’un Rongeur nouveau du genre Anomalurus. Jan. 10th, 1886.
The Author.
Dulles, Charles W. Report on the Hydrophobia. June, 1888. The Author.
Durand, Th, Index generum phanerogamorum usque ad finum anni 1887 pro-
mulgatorum in Bentham et Hookeri ‘Genera Plantarum” fundatus cum
numero specierum synonymis et area geographica 8vo, Berolini, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Funda.
Another copy of same. Thomas Meehan.
Ecker, A. Die Anatomie des Frosches, le Abth., 2e Aufl. Braunschweig, 1888.
T. V. Williamson Fund.
Eckfeldt, John W. The lichen flora of Florida. 8vo T. 1887. The Author.
Emerton, James H. Life on the seashore or animals of our coasts and bays. 8vo.
Boston, (n. d). MANE Williams on Fund.
Encyclopedia Britannica. 9th Ed. XXIII. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Encyklopzedie der Naturwissenschaften. le Abth., 54-57; 46-50. 2e Abth-
46-50 I. V. Williamson Fund.
Endlicher, S. et C. F. P. de Martius. Flora Brasiliensis. Fasc. 2-5, 7-11, 13,
14, 95, 26: I. V. Williamson Fund.
Engelmann George. The botanical works of the late George Engelmann, collect-
ed for Henry Shaw, Esq. Edited by William Trelease and Asa Gray.
4to. Cambridge, 1887. Henry Shaw.
Engelmann, D. G. J. Die Geburt bei den Urvélkern. 8vo. Wein, 1884.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Sol
466 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Engler, A. und K. Prantl. Die natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien LL. 12-20.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Erichson, W. F. Naturgeschichte der Insecten Deutscilands. Je ALth., 6er
Bdioe le I. V. Williamson Fund.
Farlow, W. G. and A. B. Seymour. A provisional host index of the fungi of the
United States. Part 1. Polypetalz. 8vo. Cambridge, Aug., 1888.
W. G. Farlow.
Fedtschenko, Alexis. Reise in Turkestan. L.15,17. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ferrarius, Io. Bapt. Io. Bapt. Ferrarii Sinensis e Societate Jesu de florum cultura.
Libri lV. 8vo. Rome, 1633. , Thos. Meehan.
Ferry de la Ballone, C.de. Latruffe. Etude sur les truffes et les truffieres. 12mo.
Paris, 1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Finland. Expédition Polaire Finlandaise. Exploration internationale des regions
polaires, 1882-1883 et 1883-1884. Finnish Society of Sciences.
Fitzgerald, R. D. Australian orchids. Parts 6, 7, II, 1 2,
Trustees of the Australian Museum.
Flammarion, Camille. The wonders of the heavens. From the French by Mrs.
Norman Lockyer. n. d. Mrs. L. Fox.
Fokker, A. P. Untersuchungen iiber Heterogenese III, 8vo, Groningen, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ford, John. Description of a new species of Ocinebra. 8vo T. July, 1888.
The Author.
Forel, Aug. Appendices a mon mémoire sur les sensations des insects. 20 avr.
1888. Svo T.
Einige Bemerkungen iiber den gegenwartigen Stand der Frage des Hyp-
notismus nebst eigenen Erfahrungen, (und Nachtrag). 8vo. I. 1888.
The Author.
Forel, F. A. Le Lac Léman. 2meed. 8vo. Bale, 1886.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Formad, Henry F. Comparative studies of mammalian blood, with special re-
ferance to the microscopical diagnosis of blood stains in criminal cases.
8vo. Philadelphia, 1888. The Author.
Fouqué, F. Bibl. scient. contempt. Les tremblements de terre. 12vo. Paris,
1889. :
Santorin et ses eruptions. 4to. Paris, 1879. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Fouqué F, and A. Michel Lévy. Ministére des Travaux Publics. Mémoires
pour servir a l’explication de la carte géologique détailée de la France.
Minéralogie micrographique, roches éruptves francaises. 4to. Texte and
Planches. Paris, 1879. ;
Fraas, Oscar. Vor der Siindfluth. S8vo. Stuttgart, 1866.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Frazer, Persifor. A broader,field for the United States Geological Survey. 8vo T.
Sept. 1888.
Obituary notice of Henry Carvill Lewis. Aug. 1888. 8vo T.
The Author.
French, G. H. The butterflies of the eastern United States. Philadelphia, 1886.
Fritsch, A. Fauna der Gaskohle und der Kalksteine der Permformation Béhmens.
iS
Fritsch, Ant. and Joseph Kafka. Die Crustaceen der béhmischen Kreideforma-
sist tion. Fol. Prag. 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Fritsch, Gustav. Die elektrischen Fische. le Abth. Malopterurus electricus.
meee Fol, Liepzig, 1887. J. V. Willliamson Fund.
Fritsch, K. v and W. Reiss. Geologische Beschreibung der Insel Teneriffe. 8vo.
== Winterthur, 1888. J. V. Williamson Fund.
Frommel, Richard. Ueber die Entwickelung der Placenta von Myotus murinus.
“== Fol. Wiesbaden, 1888. J. Vs Williaa a
Garman, Samuel. On West Indian reptiles and batrachians in the Museum of
The Author.
Comparative Zoology. 8vo T. 1887.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 467
‘Gaudry, Albert. Les ancétres de nos animaux dans les temps géologiques. 12mo.
Paris, 1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.
“Geikie, Archibald. The teaching of geography. S8vo. London, 1887.
Text book of geology. 2nd Ed. 8yo. London 1885.
J. V. Williamson Fund.
“Geinitz, HI. B. Zur Dyas in Hessen. Kassel, 1886.
Nachtrage zu Funden in den Phosphatlagern von Helmstedt. Biiddenstedt
u.a. 1883.
Die Versteinerungen des lithographischen Schiefers im Dresdener Museum.
1881. The Author.
“Genth, F. A. Lansfordit, ein neues Mineral. 8vo T. (1888).
A letter to the Hon. the Board of Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania.
June 25, 1888. The Author.
*Gerstaecker, A. Das Skelet des Déglings, Hyperoodon rostratus. 4to, Leipzig,
1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
‘Gibson, John. Great waterfalls, cataracts and geysers, described and illustrated.
8vo. London, 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
“Gilbert, G. K. Statistics of the Philosophical Society of Washington. Svo T.
The Author.
“Gilbert, J. H. Results of experiments at Rothamstead, on the growth of root-
crops for many years in succession on the same land; being a lecture deliv-
ered July 27, 1887, at the Royal Agricultural College, Cirencester. 8vo T.
The Author.
‘Godman, F. Ducane and Osbert Salvin. Biologia Centrali Americana. Zoology,
Pt. 62-69. Botany, Pt. 24. I. V. Williamson Fund.
“Godwin-Austen, H. H. Land and freshwater mollusca of India. Plates and
Weetis etey WAIG I. V. Williamson Fund.
‘Goodall, Geo. L. The wild flowers of America. With illustrations from original
water color paintings by Isaac Sprague. 4to. Boston, n. d.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
‘Gosse, Phillip Henry. Actinologia Britannica. A history of the British sea-
anemones and corals. Svo. London, 1860. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Gould, John. The Birds of New Guinea. Pts XX—XXIII.
Supplement to the Trochilidze or Humming Birds. Pt. V. | Wilson Fund.
Grandidier, Alfred. Histoire physique, naturelle et politique de Madagascar.
NOVieeAtlasw lies Masce XVII i il) Dextes Ire,) artes, loenyhaser
XXII, Atlas, 16e. Fasc. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Gray, Asa. Memorial of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, 1888.
The Society.
Portrait of. Editors of Torrey Botanical Bulletin.
List of the Writings of. Mrs. Asa Gray.
Green A. H. Geology. Part I., Physical geology. 8vo. London, 1882.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Greene, Edward L. Pittonia. I, 1-3. 8vo. 1887. The Author.
Griiber, Wenzel.. Beobachtungen aus der menschlichen und vergleichenden
Anatomie, VIII. J. V. Williamson Fund.
Giimbel, K. Wilhelm von. Geologie von Bayern. I Th.. 45 L; Title and
Index. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Guerne, Jules de. Campagnes scientifiques du Yacht Monégasque L’Hirondelle.
Troisieme année, 1887. Excursions zoologiques dans les Iles de Fayal et
de San Miguel (Acores). S8vo. Paris, 1888. Prince Albert of Monaco.
Guppy, H. B. The Solomon Islands, their geology, general features and suitability
for colonization. Svo. London, 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Harden, John H. and Edw. B. The construction of maps in relief. 8vo T.
July, 1887. Edw. B. Harden.
Harvey, F. L. The fresh-water algee of Maine. 8vo T. The Author.
‘Haughton, Rev. Samuel. Geometrical illustrations of Newland’s and Mendelejeff’s
periodic law of the atomic weights of the chemical elements. April 28th
and May 14th, 1888. 8vo T. The Author.
468 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888,.
Heilprin, Angelo. The animal life of our sea-shore. S8vo. Philad. 1888.
The geological evidences of evolution. Jzmo. Philad. 1888. The Author.
Henshaw, Henry W. Perforated stones from California. Svo. T. 1887.
Smithsonian Institution.
Hertwig, Oscar and Richard. Untersuchungen zur Morphologie und Physiologie:
der Zelle. H. 1-4. 8vo. Jena 1884-85 I. V. Williamson Fund..
Hervey, A. B. Sea mosses. A collector’s guide and an introduction to the study
of marine alge. Svo. - Boston, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hidalgo, J. G. Livres de malacologie et de conchyliologie formant partie de la.
bibliothéque de Mr. J. G. Hidalgo. Juillet, I888. Madrid.
The Author.
Hildebrand, Bror Emil and Hans. Teckninger ur Sevenska Statens His-.
toriska Museum. H.1, 2,3. 4to. Stockholm 1873-1883.
Royal Academy of belles lettres, history and antiquities of Stockholm,
Hillebrand, Wm. Flora of the Hawaiian Islands. John H. Redfield.
Hinde, George Jennings. On the history and characters of the genus Septrastraea
D'Orb. (1849) and the indentity of its type species with that of Glyph-
astraea Duncan (1887). 8vo T. May, 1888.
Note on the spicules described by Billings in connection with the structure of
Archeeocyathus Minganensis. 8vo T. 1888. The Author.
Holden, Edward S. List of recorded earthquakes in California, Oregon and
Washington Territory. Svo T. Sacramento, 1887. The Author..
Holmes, Wm. H. The use of gold and other metals among the ancient inhabit-
ants of Chiriqui, Isthmus of Darien. 8vo T. 1887.
Smithsonian Institution...
Hooker, J. D. The flora of British India. Part XIX.
The East Indian Government.
Hooker, William Jackson and G. A. Walker Arnott. The botany of Captaim
Beechey’s Voyage. 4to. London, 1841. John H. Redfield.
Hough, Romeyn B. The American woods, exhibited by actual specimens and
with copious explanatory text. Part I., representing twenty-five species by
twenty-seven sets of sections. Svo. Lowville, 1888. In portfolio.
Dr. Charles Schaffer,
Howards L. O. United States Dep. of Agriculture. Div. of Entomology. Bul.
No. 17. The chinch bug: a general summary of its history, habits, enem-
ies, and of the remedies and preventives to be used against it. Svo T..
Washington, 1888. The Department..
Hoyle, William E. List of shells collected by John Rattay on the west coast of
Africa and the adjacent islands. 8vo T. The Author..
Hunt, T. Sterry. Coal and iron in Southern Ohio. The mineral resources of the
Hocking Valley: being an account of its coals, iron-ores, blast-furnaces
and railroad, witha map. S8vo. Boston, 1881. I. V. Williamson Fund..
Huxley, T. H. and H. N. Martin. A course of elementary biology. Revised
edition by G. B. Howes and D. H. Scott, with a preface by Prof. Huxley.
12mo. London, 1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Huygens, Christian. Oeuvres completes de, publiées par Ja Société Hollandaise:
des Sciences. Tome I, Correspondence, 1638-1658. 4to. La Haye, 1888.
The Society.
Hyatt, Alphzus. Evolution of the faunas of the Lower Lias. 8vo T. July,
1888
Values in classification of the stages of growth and decline with propositions.
for a new nomenclature. The Author.
India, Geological Survey of. Records XX, 3, 4, XXI, 1-8. Memoirs, Ser. IV,
3; Set MILL 57, SM Sy eevee The Survey.
Ives, James T. B. Strata map of part of United States of America, based on the
work of the U. S. Geological Survey to illustrate the fundamental facts of
geological science. New York, 1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.
_ Jacquin, Nicolai Josephi. Selectarum stirpium Americanarum historia. 4to.
Vindobone, 1763. Thos. Meehan.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 469
James, U. P. and Jos. F. On the monticuliporoid corals of the Cincinnati Group,
with a critical revision of the species. January and April, 1888. 8vo T.
‘The Authors.
Jolis, Aug. F. le. Le Glyceria Borreri 4 Cherbourg. (1888).
Liste des mémoires scientifiques. (1888). The Author.
Joseph, S. A. R. L’Archiduc. Climatologie comparée. Essais d’acclimation des
plantes et influence d’un hiver trés rigoureux 4 Fiume. 8vo. Alger, 1888.
M. Marlet.
‘Karston, Heermann. Géologie de l’ancienne Colombie Bolivarienne, Vénézuela,
Nouvelle Grenade et Ecuador. 4to. Berlin, 1886. :
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Kelley, Edw. A. University of Penna., Dep. of Biology. Syllabus of the anatomy
of the frog and terrapin. (1888). The Author.
Kentucky, Geological Survey of Geology of Bath and Fleming Counties. W. M.
Linney. Report for 1886, 1887. The Survey.
Shaler’s report of progress, Vols. 1 and 2. 1876-77. Purchased.
Loughridge’s report on the geological and economic features of the Jackson’s
purchase regions. 1888. 8vo. The Survey.
Kingsley, J. S. The Naturalists’ assistant.. Svo. Boston, 1882.
I.-V. Williamson Fund;
Kirchoff, Alfred. Unser Wissen von der Erde. JI, ler Th. 3 Abth.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Kobelt, W. Die geographische Verbreitung der Land-Deckelschnecken. 8vo T.
887. The Author.
Iconographie der schalentragenden europdischen Meeresconchylien. H. 8.
Ato. Cassel, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Prodromus faunae molluscorum testaceorum maria europaea inhabitantium.
Fasc. 4. 8vo. Nurnberg, 1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.
‘Kommission zu wissenschaftlichen Untersuchungen der deutschen Meere in Kiel
fiir das Jahre 1882 bis 1886. 5er Bericht, XII-XVI Jahrg.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
~ Kooperherg, Ph. Geneeskundige Plaatsbeschrijiving van Leeuwarden. 8vo.
S’Gravenhage. Urecht Society.
Kunz, George, F. Chatooga County, Georgia, Meteorite. Dec. 1887. 8vo T.
East Tennessee (?) meteorite. 8vo T. Dec. 1887.
Gold ornaments from United States of Columbia. 8vo T. Sept. 1887.
Gold and silver ornaments from mounds of Florida. Svo T. July, 1887.
Hydrophane from Colorado and silver nuggets from Mexico. Dec. 1887.
Svo T.
‘On a large garnet from New York Island. May 30, 1887. 8vo T.
A North Carolina diamond. Dec. 1887. 8vo T.
‘On the meteoric iron which fell near Cabin Creek, Johnston County, Arkan-
sas, March 27, 1886. Svo T. June, 1887.
On the new artificial rubies. Oct. 4, 1886. 8vo T.
‘On two new meteorites from Carroll County, Kentucky, and Catorze, Mexico.
March 1887. Svo T.
Powder Mill Creek meteorite. Dec. 1887. 8vo T.
Precious stones. Abstracts from Min. Resources of United States 1885, 1886.
8vo T.
Precious Stones. Article from Appleton’s Physical Geography. 1887. 8vo T.
Rhodocrosite from Colorado. Dec. 1887. 8vo T.
Taney County meteorite. Dec. 1887. 8vo T.
Waldron Ridge, Tennessee, meteorite. Dec. 1887. Svo T. The Author.
‘Lagorio, Alexander. Die Andesite des Kaukasus. 8vo T. Dorpat, 1878.
The Author.
Vergleichende petrographische Studien iiber die massigen Gesteine der Krym
8vo T. Dorpat, 1880. I. V. Williamson Fund,
SLakes, A. Geology of the Colorado ore deposits, 1888. Svo T. Denver, Col.
The Author.
470) PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Langille, Rev. J. Hibbert. Our birds in their haunts. Svo. Boston, 1884.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Lawes, John Bennet. Memoranda of the origin, plan and results of the field and
other experiments conducted on the farm and in the laboratory of Sir John
Bennet Lawes, at Rothamsted, Haerts. June 1888. The Author.
Lea, M. Carey. Contributions to the American Journal of Science for the year
1862. The Author.
Le Conte, Joseph. A compend of geology. S8vo. New York, 1887.
IV. Williamson Fund. |
Leder, H. Preisverzeichniss VI. Verkaiiflicher Mollusken der Kaukasuslander,
1885-88. ; The Author.
Liebig, Justus. Steel engraved portrait of. Mrs. Dr. C. Hering..
Lendenfeld, R. von. The Australian Museum. Descriptive catalogue of the
Australian seas. In two parts. Part I, Scyphomedusee. Part I, Hydro-
medusze. 8vo. Sydney, 1887. The Museum..
Leuckart, Rudolf. Zoologische Untersuchungen. 2es H. Salpen und Verwandte ;
3es. H. Heteropoden, Zwitterschnecken, Hectocotyliferen. 4to. Giessen.
1858 and 1854. I. V. Williamson Fund..
Leuckart, R. und Carl Chun. Bibliotheca Zoologica. Original Abhandlungen aus
dem Gesammtgebiete der Zoologie. H. ] and 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Light. S8vo. Edinburgh, 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Linden, J. Lindenia. Iconographie des Orchidees. III, 1-12, IV, 1, 2,3. '
Thomas Meehan..
Lintner, J. A. First and second annual reports on the injurious and other insects.
of the State of New York. Svo. Albany, 1882-85.
Some pests of the pomologist. Sept. 15th, 1887. 4to T. Boston, 1888.
; The Author.
Locard, Arnould. Etude critique des Tapes des cétes de France. 8vo T. Dec,
- The Author. -
Lockyer, J. Norman. Outlines of physiography. The movements of the earth.
8vo. London, 1887. T. V. Williamson Fund..
Louisiana, Hopkins’ third annual report of the geological survey of, 1872.
In Exchange..
Lutz, K. G. Das Buch der Schmetterlinge, L. 1-7. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Lydekker, Richard. Catalogue of British mammals in the British Museum. Part
V. Containing the group Tillodontia, the orders Sirenia, Cetacea, Eden-
tata, Marsupialia, Monotremata and supplement. S8yo. London, 1887.
The Trustees.
Macaré, Mde. F. J. M. Rethaan. Collection Macaré. Catalogue de la précieuse:
et superbe collection de coquilles d’espéces vivantes dont la vente publique
aura lieu le lundi Oaout, 1888 et jours suivantes. Svo T. Utrecht, 1888.
The Author..
Macfie, R. A. Copyright and patents for inventions. 2vols. S8yvo. Edinburgh,
1879-1883. The Author. ~
Macleay, William. Descriptive catalogue of Australian fishes. Iand II. 8vo.
Sydney, 1881. Trustees of the Australian Museum-~
Mallet, F. R. A manual of the geology of India. Part. 1V: Mineralogy (main-
ly noneconomic.) 8vo. Calcutta, 1887. The Survey.
Marcou, Jules. American geological classification and nomenclature. Cam-
bridge. May, 1888.
Sur les cartes géologiques a l’occasion du ‘‘Mapoteca Geologica Americana.’”
Besancon, 1888. The Author..
Margerie, Emm. de and Dr. Albert Heim. Les dislocations de 1’ écorce terre-tre-.
8vo T. Zurich, 1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Martens, Edward von. List of the shells of Mergui and its Archipelago. 8vo T_
The Author.
1888.] | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 471
Martini and Chemnitz. Systematisches Conchylieu-Cabinet von H. C. Kii ter.
358-354 L. Wilson Fund.
Martin, Daniel S. Geological map of New York City and vicinity. Mounted
sheet and 8vo pamphlet. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Martius, C. F. P. De and A. G. Eichler. Flora Brasiliensis. Fasc. XCVJI-CI.
The Government of Brazil.
Maryland. Fifth and sixth agricultural reports of James Higgins, A. M., M. D.
Annapolis, 1856. In Exchange.
Massachusetts. Commissioners of Inland Fisheries and Game; Report of, for the
year ending Dec. 31, 1887. S8vo T. Boston, 1888. | The Comissioners,
Report of a geological Survey of. By E. Hitchcock. Part I., Economic
geology. Amherst, 1832.
Report on the geology, mineralogy,” botany and zoology. By Edw. Hitch-
cock. 2nd. Ed. Amherst, 1835.
Report of the State Board of Education on the proposed survey of the Common.
wealth. Boston, 1874. In Exchange.
May, Joseph. Joseph Priestly, LL. D. A discourse delivered in the First Uni-
tarian Church of Philadelphia, on Sunday, March 18, 1888. Philadelphia.
The Author.
Maynard, C. J. The birds of eastern North America. 4to. Newtonville, 1881.
The butterflies of New England. 4to. Boston, 1886.
The Naturalist’s guide in collecting and preserving objects of natural history.
Revised edition. Svo. Boston, 1883. : I. V. Williamson Fund.
McCook, H.C. Description of new American species of orb-weaving spiders. .
8vo T. July, 1888.
Nesting habits of the American purseweb spider. Svo T. 1888.
Notes on the relations of structure and function to color changes in spiders.
8vo T. July, 1888.
A new fossil spider, Eoatypus Woodwardii. S8vo T. July, 1888.
Tenants of an old farm. 3d Ed. New York, 1886. The Author.
McCoy, Fred’k. Natural history of Victoria. Prodromus of the zoology of Victoria.
Decades I-XV. Government of Victoria.
McEwen, Jos. W. Prutobiology; or the philosophy of life. 12mo. Philadel-
phia, 1887. The Author.
Medical ad surgical history of the war of the rebellion. Part III, Vol. 1.
Medical history. Washington, 1888. War Department.
Meinert, Fr. Entomologische Meddelelser, I, 2, 3, 4. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Mendenhall, T. C. A century of electricity. 12mo. Boston and New York,
1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Meyer, “A, B. Abbildungen von Vogel-Skeletten herausgegeben mit Unter-
stiitzung der General-direction der Sammlungen fiir Kunst und Wissen-
schaft in Dresden. 4to. Dresden, 1879-1886. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Meyer, Otto. On Miocene invertebrates from Virginia. March 16, 1888.
‘ The Author.
Michigan. Jackson, Foster, Whitney and Hubbert’s reports. Messages and docu-
ments, 1849-50. Part IIT. In Exchange.
Milne, John. Earthquikes and other earth movements. 8vo. New York, 1886.
I. V. Williamson Fund,
Minardi, A. Sul catalogo dei coleotteri dei dintorni-di Termini Imeres2 egregio
Sig. Prof. Ciofalo. 4to T. The Author.
Minnesota, Geological and natural history survey of, anuual report. Bulletin
INosa2, 33/4. The Survey.
Captain John Pope’s report of an exploration of the territory of, 1850.
In Exchange.
Mojsisovics, E. r. und M. Neumayer. Beitrige zur Palaeontologie Osterreich-
Ungarns und des Orients. Bds. I-VI, 1-4, VII, 1, 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
472 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1888.
Moleschott, Jac. Untersuchungen zur Naturlehre des Menschen und der Thiere.
XIII, 6es H. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Moore, Charles. A census of the plants of New South Wales. 8vo. Sydney,
1884. Trustees of the Australian Museum.
Moore, Fred’k. Descriptions of New Indian lepidopterous insects from the col-
Jection of the late Mr. W. S. Atkinson. Heterocera, Part III, 1888.
E. Indian Government.
Morehead, Mrs. L. M. A few incidents in the life of Prof. James P. Espy. 12mo.
Cincinnati, 1888. The Author.
Morris, Augustus. Tobacco, its culture and the curing of the leaf. 8vo l. Sydney,
1877. Trustees of the Australian Museum.
Morris, Charles. The Aryan race, its origin and its achievements. Chicago, 1888.
The Author.
Mueller, T. von. Description of anew Melanostomaceous plant from New Guinea.
Svo T. Jan. 1886.
Description of a new Papuan Dilleniaceous plant. 8vo T. Feb. 1886.
Thomas Meehan.
Iconography of Australian species of Acacia and. cognate genera. Decade
1-11. 4to. Melbourne, 1887. Government of Victoria.
Notes on a new Papuan Uncaria. Feb. 1886.
The plants indigenous around Shark Bay and its vicinity. 4to T. ‘Perth,
1883.
Systematic census of Australian plants. Part I, Vasculares. Second annual
supplement for 1884. 4to. Melbourne 1882. Thomas Meehan.
Muenster, A. E. The 50th Jubilee of the Academician Nicolai Inanovitsch
Kokscharow, June 6, 1887, and short biography of him. 8vo. St. Peters-
burg, 1887. (In Russian.)
Mullan, John. Report on a construction of a military road from Fort Walla-
Wallz to Fort Benton, 1863. In Exchange.
Murray, Reginald A. F. Victoria geology and physical geography. 8vo. Mel-
bourne, 1887. Government of Victoria.
Nagtglas, F. Zelandia iliustrata. Verzameling van Kaavten, Portretten &c.
Middelburg, 1885.
Nansen, Fridtjof. Bergens Museum. Bidrag til Myzostomernes anatomi og
histologi. 4to T. Bergen, 1885. The Museum.
Naturwissenschaftl. Landesdurchforschung von Béhmen. Archiv, VI, 2, 4-6.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Newberry J. S. The coals of Colorado. July, 1888.
The future of gold and silver. Jan., 1888. S8vo T.
Geological Notes. The fauna and flora of the Trias of New Jersey and the
Connecticut Valley. Coelosteus a new genus of fishes from the lower
Carboniferous limestone of Illinois. A new meteorite from Tennessee.
Description of a new species of Titanichthys. Svo T. 1886—S7.
Geological Notes, If. A new species of Rhizodus from the mountain lime-
stone of Illinois 2. The fish fauna of the Erie shale of Ohio. April, 1888.
8vo T.
Rheetic plants from Honduras. Nov., 1888.
On the structure and relations of Edestus, with a description of a gigantic
new species. 8vo T. 1888. The Author.
New Jersey, Geological survey of, relief maps. Annual report of the State
Geologist for the year 1887. The Author.
New Mexico. Abert, Cooke and Johnston’s Reports. 8vo tracts.
In Exchange,
New South Wales. Department of Mines. Annual report for the year 1886.
Geology of the Vegetable Creek Tin-Mining Field, New England District,
New South Wales. 4to. Sydney, 187. The Department.
Mineral products of. 1887.
The railway guide of. 3rded. S8vo. Sydney, 1886.
F Trustees of the Australian Museum.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 475
Newton, Alfred. Early days of Darwinism. S8vo T. February, 1888.
The Author.
New York, Natural History of. Geological survey of the State of New York.
Paleontology. Vol. VI; Vol. VIL; Vol. V, pt. 2, Suppl.
Report of the State Geologist (James Hall), 1882-1887.
Geological survey of Counties of Steuben, Madison, Washington, Orange,
Essex, Seneca and Onondaga. From State agricultural reports. Reports
in relation to a geological survey of. Jan. 6, 1836.
Catalogue of the State Cabinet of Natural History, 1853. Natural History.
Part V. Agriculture, Plates, III. In Exchange.
New Zealand. Colonial Museum and geological survey of. 1886-87. Index.
Reports of geological explorations during 1885.
Annual reports geological survey 2(th—22nd, and 16th and 17th annual reports
of Botanic Garden. New Zéaland, 1886. The Director.
Noll, Fritz. Experimentelle Untersuchungen iiber das Wachstum der Zellmembran.
4to T. Wurzburg, 1887. University of Wiirzburg.
Nordenskidld, A. E. Vega-Expeditionens Vetenskapliga Iakttagelser, IV, V.
8vo. 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Nova Scotia. Department of Mines, report, 1887. The Department.
Ogilby, J. Douglas. Catalogue of the fishes of New South Wales with their
principal synonyms. 4to T. Sydney, 1886.
Trustees of the Australian Museum.
Oliver, Charles A. Description of a case of coloboma of the iris, lens and choroid,
with study of the visual fields. S8vo T. 1887. The Author.
Ormay, Alexander. Supplementa faunae coleopterorum in Transsilvania. Nagy-
Azeben, 1888. The Author.
Outerbridge, Alex. E., Jr. Pig iron: including the relation between its physical
properties and its chemical constituents. 8\o T. Philad., 18+8.
The Author.
Owen, Maria L. A catalogue of plants growing without cultivation in the
County of Nantucket, Mass. John H. Redfield.
Owen, Richard. Memoirs on the extinct wingless birds of New Zealand; withan
appendix on those of England, Australia, Newfoundland, Mauritius und
Rodriguez, 4to. Text and Plates. London, 1879.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Paetel, F. Catalog der Conchylien Sammlung. 5e-Se. L. The Author.
Paleontologie Francaise. re Ser., An. invert. Terrains tertiaires, L. J1-14.
Terrains jurassiques. L. 85, 86. Wilson Fund.
Palzontographica. Beitrage zur Naturgeschichte der Vorzeit (Zittel). XXXIV, 2-6
RONDO VE I Wilson Fund.
Pariatore, Filippo. Flora Italiana, continuata da Teodoro Caruel. VIII, Pt. 1.
The Author.
Peckham, Geo. W. and Eliz. G. North American spiders of the Family Attide.
Sept. 1885. The Author.
Pennsylvania. Second Geological Survey. Reports A 2, C7. Annual Report,
1886. I-IV. Text and Atlas. The Commissioners.
Same. Hon. Chas. M. Betts.
Péres dela Compagnie de Jésus. Mémoires concernant l’historie naturelle de
l’Empire Chinois. 8me Cahier. II, 1,2. 4to. Change-Hai, 1885.
J. V. Williamson Fund.
Pergens, Ed. Sur l’age de la partie supérieure du Tufeau de Ciply. Dec., 1887.
Remarques sur la réunion du calcaire de Mons et du Tufeau de Ciply. Juin,
1888. The Author.
Perrier, Edmond. Bibl. scient contemp. Le transformisme. 12mo. Paris, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Pfaff, Friedrich. Die Gletscher der Alpen, ihre Bewegung und Wirkung. 8vo.
Heidelberg, 1856. J. V. Williamson Fund.
Philippi, R. A. Die tertiaren und quartairen Versteinerungen Chiles. 4to,
Leipzig, 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
A74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888-.
Piaget, E. Les Pédiculines. Essai monographique. I Text, II Planches, Supple-
ment, 3-vols. 4to. Leide, I8S80-1885. 1. V. Williamson Fund.
Pietch, J. Herleitung und Ausprache der wissenschaftlichen Namen in dem E.
F. von Homeyer’ schen Verzeichnisse der Vogel Deutschlands. Wein, 1888-
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Pilling, J. C. Bibliography of the Eskimo language. 8vo T. Washington, 1887-
Bibliography of the Siouan Janguages. S8vo T. Washington, 1888. ;
Smithsonian Inst.
Pilsbry, H. A. Description of a new Hydrobia, with notes on other Rissoidz.
8vo T. 1886. The Author.
Pini, Napoleone. Molluschi terrestri e d’acqua dolce viventi nel territorio di
Esino. 8vo. Milano, 1876. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Pliny, C. C. Plini Secundi naiuralis historee Libri XXXVIT. Recognavit atque
indicibus instruxit Ludovicus Janus. Vol. I. Libr 1-VI. Editio altera
denuo recognita. 12mo. Lipsia. Dr. B. Sharp.
Pope, John. A tour through the southern and western territories of the United
States of North America, the Spanish dominations on the River Missis-
sippi, and the Floridas, the countries of the Creek nations and many
uninhabited parts. Svo. Richmond, 1792. (Reprint 1888).
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Report on artesian well experiments. | Messages and documents, 1859-9.
Part II. In Exchange.
Popper, Julius. The Popper Expedition. Tierradel Fuego. A lecture delivered
at the Argentine Geographical Institute, March 1887. _ Buenos Aires,
1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Portland catalogue of the Maine plants. 8vo T. Portland, 1868.
Portland Society of Natural History.
Portugal. Seccao dos trabalhos geologicos de Portugal. Communicagoes. I, 2.
Description de la faune jurassique du Portugal, II, 2. pp. 87-7o.
The Survey.
Poulsen. V. A. Botanical microchemistry, an introduction to the study of vege-
table histology. Translated with the assistance of the author and consider-
ably enlarged by Wiiliam Trelease. S8vo. Boston, 1886.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Prestwich, Joseph. Geology, chemical, physical and stratigraphical. Vol IT-
Stratigraphical and physical. 8vo. Oxford, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Providence Franklin Society. Report on the geology of Rhode Island. 8vo T.
Providence, 1887. Prof. Angelo Heilprin.
Purdie, Alex. Colonial Museum and Geological Survey Dept. Studies in biology
for New Zealand students. No.3. The anatomy of the common mussels
(Mytilus latus, edulis and Magellanicus.) 8vo T. New Zealand, 1887.
: The Geological Survey of New Zealand.
Purgold, A. Die Diamenten des mineralogischen Museums zu Dresden, 1882.
The Author.
Quenstedt, F. A. Die Ammoniten des Schwabischen Jura. H. 17-19. Text
and Atlas. I. V. Wiliiamson Fund.
Quilter, H. E. Land and fresh-water mollusca of Leicestershire. April, 1888.
The lower lias of Leicestershire. Svo T. Feb. 1886.
The metamorphosis of Galeruca nymphea Lin. Oct. 20, 1886.
The Author.
Rabenhorst, L. Kryptogamen Flora von Deutschland, Oesterreich und der Schweiz.
1, Bal; 3. Abth. 29,30 L; Ser Bd: 11 Ts INS:
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Rafter, Geo. W. How to study the biology of a water supply. S8vo. n.d,
On the use of the amplifier. Svo T. n.d. The Author,
Ragonot, E. L. Diagnoses of North American Phycitidae and Galleriide. 8vo
“Dvekanis SST The Author.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 47D
Ramsay, E. P. Australian Museum. Catalogue of a collection of fossils. Svo.
Sydney, 1883. ‘
Australian Museum. Hints for the preservation of specimens of natural
history. Sydney, 1887. The Trustees..
Ranvier, L_ Traité technique d’histologie. 7me. Fasc. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Rath, G. vom. Vortrige und Mittheilungen. Svo T. Bonn, 1888.
The Author.
Ratte, F. Australian Museum. Hints for collectors of geological and mineralog-
ical specimens. 2nd ed. I887. The Trustees.
Rayet, M. Commission météorologique de la Gironde. Observations pluvio-
métriques et thermomeétriques faites dans le département de la Gironde,
Juin, 1885 a Mai, 1886. Bordeaux, 1885. The Author.
Read, M. C. Western Reserve Historical Society, Cleveland, Ohio. Archeology
of Ohio. ‘Tract 73. The Author.
Reade, T. Mellard. ‘The origin of mountain ranges considered experimentally,
dynamically and in relations to their geological history. 8vo. London,
1885. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Rein, J. Gerhard von Rath, ein kurzes Lebensbild. 7 Mai, 1888. The Author
Renault, B. Bibl. scient. contemp. Les plantes fossiles.. 12vo. Paris, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Reuter, F. Observationes météorologiques faites 4 Luxembourg. II, III. 1887.
Institute, Luxembourg.
Reyer, E. Theoretische Geologie. 8vo. Stuttgart, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Richon, Charles et Ernest Roze. Atlas des champignons comestibles et vénéneux
de la France et des pays circonvoisins. Fasc. 8,9. Paris.
I. V. Williamson Fund..
Ringueberg, Eugene N.S. The Niagara shales of western New York. May,
1888. The Author.
Rossmassler’s Iconographie der europaischen Land-und Siisswasser Molusken
(Kobelt). III B. 3-6. T. V. Williamson Fund.
Roth, Justus. Allgemeine und chemische Geologie. I; IT, 1, 2,3. Svo. Berlin,.
1879-1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Roumania. Harta geologica generala. Sheets 10-13.
Ministerul Lucrarilor publice. Anuarulu Biuroului Geologicu. Anul 1§82—
Baer HNOnS eve Is Geological Survey of Roumania.
Rusby, H. H., M. D. The cultivation of cinchona in Bolivia. Oct. 1, 1887. 12mo-
oF
An enumeration of the plants collected by Dr. H. H. Rusby in South Ameri-
ca, 1885-86, I, III. The Author.
Russ, Karl. Die fremdlandischen Stubenvégel, IV, 8. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Russia. Comité Géologique Russe. Bulletin, 1887, Nos. 6-10; VI, 11, 12; VII,-
1-5, and supplement. Mémoires II, 4,5; III, 3; V, 2-4; VI, 1, 2; VII,
a2 The Survey.
Saccardo, P. A. Sylloze fungorum omnium hucusque cognitorum. Vol. IV
Hyphomycetes. S8vo. Patavii, 1886. II, III. 1V, VII, 1.
Ex. of Dr. G. Martin.
Sachs, Julius von. Lectures on the physiology of plants. Translated by H.
Marshall Ward, M. A. 8vo. Oxford, 1887.
Vorlesungen iiber Pflanzen Physiologie, Ye neubearbeitete Auflage. 8vo.
Leipzig, 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Sampson, F. A. and A. W. Vogdes. Notes on the subcarboniferous series at
Sedalia, Mo. Description of two new species of carboniferous trilobites-
Svo T. New York, 18588. The Author~
Sandberger, Fridolin. Untersuchungen iiber Erzginge. H.1]and2. 8vo. Wies-
baden, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Saporta, G. de. Bibl. scient. contemp. Origine paléontologique des arbres cul-
tivés ou utilisés par Vhomme. 12mo. Paris, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund
A76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
‘Sarasin, Paul and Fritz. Ergebnisse naturwissenschaftlicher Forschungen auf
Ceylon in den Jahren, 1884-85. I, 2,3; II, 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Savtschenko, P. Atlas des poissons vénéneux. Fol. St. Petersburg, 1886.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Schaffranek, A. Floral almanack, containing the flowering season of one thousand
and seven hundred phaenogamous plants of Florida. 4to. Palaka, 1888.
Isaac Burk.
Schenk, August. Die fossile flora der grenzchichten des Keupers und Lias
Frankens. 4to. Text and Atlas. Weisbaden, 1868.
; I. V. Williamson Fund.
Schimper, A. F. W. Die Wechselbeziehungen zwischen Pflanzen und Ameisen
im trophischen Amerika. Jena, 1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Schmidt, Adolf. Atlas der Diatomaceenkunde. L. 29-32.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Schoenlein, J. L. Abbildungen von fossilen Pflanzen aus dem Keuper Frankens
mit erlauternden Texte nach dessen Tode herausgegeben von Dr. August
Schenk. 4to. Wiesbaden, 1865. ~ I. V. Williamson Fund.
Schomburgk, R. Report on the progress and condition of the Botanic Garden
(South Australia) during the year 1885.-1887. The Author.
Schneider, Anton. Zoologische Beitrage. II, 2, I. V. Williamson Fund.
Schott, Charles A. U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, F. M. Thorn, Supt. Me-
thods and results. Secular variation of the magnetic declination in the
United States and at some foreign stations. Sixth Ed. Appendix, No 12.
Report for 1886. The Survey.
Scribner, F, Lamson. Fungicides, or remedies for plant diseases. 8vo T.
April, 25th 1888.
Dep. of Agric. Report of the Chief of the Section of vegetable pathology
for the year 1887. Washington, 1888. Report of the Mycologist, for the
year 1886. The Author.
Schiibeler, F.C. Vividarium Norvegicum. I, 2. University of Norway.
Seely, H. G. The fresh water aches of Europe. 8vo. London, 1886.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Selenka, E. Studien iiber Entwickelungsgeschichte der Thiere. IV, 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Semper, C. Reisen im Archipel der Philippinen. 2er Th. 2er Bd. 16 HL,
le Halfte; 5er Bd. 3e L. J. V. Williamson Fund.
Seynes, J. De. Recherches pour servira l’histoire naturelle des végétaux inférieurs,
II. Polypores. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Sharpe, R. Bowdler. Catalogue of the Passeriformes or perching birds in the
collection of the British Museum. Fringilliformes. Part III containing
the Family Fringillidae. S8vo. London, 1888. (Catalogue of Birds in
: British Museum, XII ) The Trustees.
Sievers, W. Ueber Schotter-Terrassen (Mesas) Seen und Eiszeit in Nérdlichea
Siidamerika. 4to T. Wien, 1887. The Author,
South American. Argentine Republic, message of the President, May 1, 1888.
8vo T. Buenos Aires. The Author.
Stearns, Winfrid Alden. Labrador, a sketch of its peoples, its industries and its
natural history. Svo. Boston, 1884. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Steiner, J. Die Functionen des Central-nervensystems und ihre phylogenese. 2er
Abth. Die Fische, 1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Stewart, Balfour and W. W. Haldane Gee. Lessons in elementary practical
physics. Vols. 1 and 2. 8vo. London, 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Strasburger, E. Handbook of practical botany. Edited by W. Hillhouse. 8vo.
London, 1887.
Ueber Kern und Zelltheilungen im Pflanzenreiche nebst einen Anhang tiber
Befruchtung. 8vo. Jena, 1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Suess, Edward. Das Antlitz der Erde. 2en Bd. Wien, 1888.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 477
Surgeon-General’s Office, U. S. Army. Index-Catalogue of the Library. Vol.
VIII. 8vo. Washington, 1887. IX. War Department.
Sweden. Sveriges Geologiska Undersékning. Ser. Aa. 92, 94, 97-99, 101, 102;
Ser. Ab. 11,12; Ser. Bb.5; Ser. C. 65, 78-84, 86-91. Six Maps.
The Survey.
Tait, P.G. Properties of matter. Svo. Edinburgh, 1885.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Taschenberg, O. Bibliotheca Zoologica. IT, 4, 5. I. V, Williamson Fund.
Tate, Ralph. Description of some new species of South Australian marine and
fresh-water mollusca. Oct. 5, 1886.
A revision of the recent Lamellibranch and Palliobranch mollusca of South
Australia. Oct. 5, 1886. The Author.
The Taxidermist’s manual. Svo. New York, n. d. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Teall, J. J. Harris. British petrography, pp. 196 et seq. I. V. Williamson Fund.
‘Thomas, Cyrus. Work in mound exploration of the Bureau of Ethnology. 8vo T..
Washington, 1887. Smithsonian Inst.
Thomson, C. G. Opuscula entomologica. Fasc. XI. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Thomson, Sir C. Wyville. Report of the scientific results of H. M.S. Challenger..
Zoology, XXIII; XXIV, text and plates; XX V-XXVII.
H. B. M. Government.
Torrey Botanical Club. Preliminaryc atalogue of Anthophyta and Pteridophyta.
April 25, 1888. Chas. E. Smith.
Trimen, R. and J. H. Bowker. South African butterflies. Vols. 1 and 2.- 8vo.
London, 1887. South African Museum.
True and particular relation of the dreadful earthquake which happened at Lima,
the capitol of Peru, and the neighboring port of Callao, on the 28th of Oc-
_tober, 1746. 2nd ed. London, 1748. Mrs. L. Fox.
Tryon, G. W., Jr. Manual of conchology, structural and systematic. Parts 36—
39. Ond Series, Pt. 12-15. The Author.
Tschermak, (GIDE mikroskopische Beschaffenheit der Meteoriten erlautert durch
photographische Abbildungen. 4to. Stuttgart, 1885.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Tuckermann, Edw., framed portrait of. J. W. Eckfeldt.
Tuckermann, Edw. A synopsis of the North American lichens. Part I, com-
prising the Parmeliacei, Cladoniei and Ccenogoniei. 8vo. Boston, 1882.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Uhler, P. R. The Albirupean formation and its nearest relatives in Maryland.
Jan. 6th, 1888. The Author.
Uhlworm, Oscar and F. H. Haenlein. Bibliotheca botanica. H. 9-11.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
United States. Chief of Engineers, United States Army, report of. 1886, 1-3.
1887, Pts. 1-4. Enos) Dep Us sae
Coast and Geodetic Survey, report of the Superintendent, showing the pro-
gress of the work during the fiscal year ending with June, 1886. to.
Washington. Treasury Department.
Commissioner of Agriculture, report of the, for the year 1887. S8vo. Wash-
ington. Dep. of Interior.
Commission of Fish and Fisheries. The fisheries and fisheries industry of
the United States. Section II. 4to. Washington, 1887.
The Commission.
Department of Agriculture. Botanical Division. Scribner’s report on the
treatment of the grape vine. Bulletin No. 6.
Department of Agricu!ture. Division of Entomology. Bulletin No. 10.
Riley’s, Our shade trees and their insect defoliators. 8vo T. Washington.
No. 19. Periodical Bulletin I, 1-5.
Department of Agriculture. Report of the Statistician, No. 50. New Series,
April, 1888. The Department.
Department of the interior. Census Office. Tenth Census of the United
States. Vol. XII.
A78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Department of the Interior. Bureau of Education. Circular of information,
1887, No. 2, 3.
Department of the Interior. Commissioner of Education, report for the year
1885-1886.
Department of the Interior. Commissioner of Labor, report of, 1887.
Department of the Interior. Commissioner of Pensions, report for 1888.
Department of the Interior. United States Geological Survey. Monographs
Vol. XII. Emmons’ Geology of Leadville. Text and Atlas.
Department of the Interior United States Geological Survey. J. W. Powell
Director. Mineral Products of the United States. Calender Years, 1882—
1886. The Department.
Department of State. Reports of the Consuls, No. 86-94.
Treasury Department. Bureau of Statistics, quarterly report of the Chief of.
June 30, 1887 and 1887-88, Nos, 1—4.
‘Treasury Department. Director of the Mint. Report upon the production
of the precious metals in the United States. 1880, 1883, 1884, 1885, 1886.
Treasury Department. Light-house Board, annual report for the fiscal year
ended June 39, 1887. Washington, 1887.
Treasury Department. Statistical abstract of the United States, 1887, tenth
number. The Department.
War Deparment. Annual report of the Chief of Ordinance to the Secretary
of War for the fiscal year ended June 30, 1887.
War Department. Signal Office. Tornado circular, No.1 1888.
The Department.
University of Aberdeen. Catalogue of the library. A-L; N-Z; Suppiement,
1875-87; Medicine A-Z. The University.
University of Cincinnati. Publications of the Cincinnati Observatory. 9. Zone
catalogue of 4050 stars, 1887. The Observatory.
Vayssiere, A. Atlas d’anatomie comparée des invertébres. F. 1, 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Valieri, Raffaele. Sul Gozzo esofta!mico curato e guarito dalla sola Canapa e suoi
preparati. Nopoli, 1888.
Sulla Canapa nostrana e suoi preparati in sostituzione del!a Cannabis indica.
Napoli, 1887. The Author.
Vejdovsky, Fr. Cislo I. Spisiiv poctenych jubilejni cenou kral. c spolecnosti
nauk v. Praze. Zrani, oplozeni a ryhovani vajicka. Svo. V Prage, 1888.
The Author.
Vermont. Fish Commissioners, report of, for the year 1867. Svo. ‘I. Montpelier,
1867. The Commission.
Vogt, Carl and Emile Yung. Traité d’anatomie comparée pratique. 11.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Vuillemin, Paul. Bibl. scient. contem. La biologie végétale. 12mo. Paris,
1888. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Wall, William S. The Australian Museum. History and description of the skele-
ton of a new sperm whale lately set up in the Australian Museum. Together
with some account of a new genus of sperm whales called Euphysetes.
Sydney, 1851. The Museum.
‘Walton, Elijah. The camel: its anatomy, proportions and paces. Fol. London,
1865. Henry C. Gibson.
Watson, Sereno. Contributions to American botany, XV. May 29, 1888.
The Author.
‘Weidersheim, Robt. Lehrbuch der vergleichenden Anatomie der Wirbelthiere
auf Grundlage der Entwicklungsgeschichte. 2e. Aufl. 8vo. Jean, 1886.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
White, Charles A. Contributions to the paleontology of Brazil. 4to. Rio de
Janeiro (1887 ?) The Author
Whitman, Charles Otis. Methods of research in microscopical anatomy and
embryology. 8vo. Boston, 1885, I. V. Williamson Fund.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 479
Wierzejski, Anton. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Siisswasserschwimme. 4 Apr.
1888. The Author.
Wigand, Albert. Botanisches Heft. 32s H. I. V. Williamson Fund.
‘Wilson, E. and H. E. Quilter. The rhaetic section at Wigston, Leicestershire.
Sept. 1884. The Author.
Wilson, Rev. J. Leighton. Western Africa: its history, condition and prospects.
8vo. New York, 1856. William J. Potts.
Wisconsin. First annual report on the geological survey of. By Edw. Daniels,
1854. Annual reports for 1876 and 1878. By T. C. Chamberlain.
In Exchange.
Woorsaae, Chamberlain J. J. A. The pre-history of the North, based on con-
temporary memorials. Translated, with a brief memoir ofthe author by H.
F. Morland Simpson, M. A. §Svo. London, 1886.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Yokoussi, Iinouma. S6-Mokan—Zoussets. (Japanese Botany).. I-X, XVI-XX.
8vo. , Thomas Meehan.
Zeiller, R. Ministere des travaux publics. Etudes des gites mineraux de la
France. Bassin houiller de Valenciennes. Description de la flore fossile.
Texte and Atlas. 2vols. 4to. Paris, 1888.
The Ministry of Public Works.
Zirkel, Ferdinand. Lehrbuch der Petrographie, Ier and 2er Bd. 8vo. Bonn,
1866.
Untersuchungen tiber die mikroskopische Zusammensetzung und Structur der
Basaltgesteine. Svo. Bonn, 1870. ;
Die mikroskopische Beschaffenheit der Mineralien und Gesteine. S8vo.
Leipzig, 1873. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zittel, Karl A. Handbuch der Paleontologie. I Abth., III Bd., 2 L.; II Abth.
6 L, I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zoologisches Station von Neapel. Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel.
Monogr. XV; XVI, 1, 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zopf. Wilhelm. Untersuchungen iiber Parasiten aus der Gruppe der Monadinen.
4to T. Halle, 1887. I. V. Williamson Fund.
JOURNALS AND PERIODICALS.
Adelaide. Royal Society. Transactions, IX. ; The Society.
Albany. Albany Institute. Transactions, IX, X. The Society.
New Yorks State Museum of Natural History. 86th-39th annual reports.
Bulletin I, 2, 3. The Trustees.
Ames, Iowa. State Agricultural College. Botanical Department. Bulletin,
1888. The College.
Amiens. Société des Antiquaires de Picardie. Bulletin, 1886, 1-4; 1887, =
. 4; 1888. Memoires, 3me. Ser. IX, XI. The Society.
Sociéte Linnéenne du nord de la France. Bulletin VIII, 175-186.
The Society.
Angers. Soc. Nat. d’ Agriculture, Sciences et Arts. Mémoires, dme. Ser., 1.
1. The Society.
Anvers. Société Royal de Géographie. Bulletin XTI, 2-5; XIII, 1, 2.
The Society.
Auch. Société Francaise de Botanique. Revue de Botanique, III, 61-72.
The Society.
Augsburg. Naturhistorischer Verein. 29er. Bericht, The Society.
Auxerre. Société des Sciences historiques et naturelles de Yonne. Bulletin
alee» The Society.
Baltimore. American Chemical Journal, IX, 6; X, 1-5. The Editor.
Johns Hopkins University. Circulars, Nos. 61-68. Studies from Biological
Laboratory, IV, 3, 4. ;
American Teal of Mathematics, X, 2, 3, 4. The University.
480 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Peabody Institute, 21st annual report. The Institute,
Bamberg. Naturforschende Gesellschaft, 14er. Bericht. The Society.
Basel. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, VIII, 2. The Society.
Schweizerische palaontologische Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, XIV. .
The Society.
Batavia. Naturkundig Vereen in Nederlandsch Indie. Natuurkundig Tijdschrift
voor Nederlandsch Indie. 8e Ser. VIII. The Society.
Bath. Postal Microscopical Society. Journal of Microscopy and Natural Science,
New Series I-4. The Society.
Belfast. Natural History and Philosophical Society. Proceedings, 1886-87.
The Society.
Naturalists’ Field Club. Annual Report, IT, 7. The Society.
Bergen. Bergens Museum. Aarsberetning for 1886. The Director.
Berkeley. Pittonia. 1-4. The Editor.
University of California. Register, 1887-88. The University.
Berlin. Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte, LI, II, 1,2; LIII, I, 1, 2. The Editor,
Botanischer Verein der Provinz Brandenburg. Verhandlungen, XXIX.
The Society.
Deutscher entomologischer Verein. Entomologische Zeitschrift, XXXI, 2,
pp- 147-885. The Society.
Berliner entomologische Zeitschrift, XXXII, 1. The Editor.
Deutscher Fischerei Verein. Cirenlars 1887, Nos. 4, 5; 1888, 1-3;
The Society.
Gartenflora, 1887 H. 1-24; 1888, H. 1-12. The Editor.
Deutsche geologische Gesellschaft. Zeitschrift, XX XIII, 4; XX XVIII, 2;
DB OG DEW Bie oka bye Be The Society.
Berliner Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte. Zeit-
schrilt fiir Ethnology, 1869-1887 and 7 supplements; XX, 1-3.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde. Sitzungsberichte, 1887, No’s. 9, 10;
1888, 1-5, 7. The Society.
Himmel und Erde, I, 1. The Editor.
Jahrbiicher fiir wissenschaftliche Botanik i XVIII, 4; XIX, 1-4.
FAA Williamson Fund.
Just’s Botanischer Jahresbericht, XIII, Je Abth., ‘i 2 Hi. 2e Athy Gees
H.; XIV, le Abth, les H. EVs Waltiamasou Fan
Kk. P. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen, mathematische, ]887;
physikalische, 1886. Sitzungsbericht, 1887, XL et. seq.; 1888, I-XXXVII.
The Society.
K@nigliche Preus. geologische Landesanstalt und Bergakademie. Jahrbuch,
1886. The Director.
Naturae Novitates. 1887, Nos. 22-25, 1888, No. 1-20. The Editor.
Naturwissenschaftliche Wochenschrift, III, 1-5, 7. The Editor.
Verein zur Beférderung des Gartenbaues. Verhandlungen, 1887, No. 6.
The Society
Bern. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, 1169-1194. The Society.
Besancon. Académie des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts. 1886. The Society.
Birmingham. Philosophical Society. Proceedings, V, 2. The Society.
Bistritz. Gewerbeschule. Jahresbericht, 13. The Society.
Bologna. Accademia deile Scienze. Memorie, 4e Ser. VII. The Society.
Bonn. Archiv fiir die gesammte Physiologie des ‘Menschen und der Thiere. XII,
7-12; XLII, 1-12; XLIII, 1-12 and Suppl. XLIV, 1-4.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Archiv fiir Mikroskopische Anatomie, XXX,4; XXXI, 1-4; XXX 1-3,
Register z. B. XXI-XXX, TV Williamson Fund,
Naturhistorischer Verein. Verhandlungen XLIV, 1, 2; LV, t-
The Society.
Bordeaux. Académie nationale des Sciences, Belles—Lettres et Arts. Actes,
3me Ser. 47e An. The Society.
1888. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 481
Société Linnéenne. Actes, XXXIV 4; XL, XLI. The Society,
Société des Sciences physiques et naturelles. Mémoires, 3e ser. II, 2; III,
: The Society.
Boston. American Academy of Arts and Sciences. Memoirs, XI, Pt. 5, No. 6,
Pt. 6, No. 7. Proceedings, XXIII, 1. The Society.
City Hospital. 24th Report, The Director.
Journal of Morphology (Whitman and Allis,) I. 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.
The New England Magazine, VI, 3. The Editor.
Ornithologist and Oologist, IX, 6; XIII. 5. The Editor.
Society of Natural History. Memoirs, IV, 1-6; Proceedings, XXII, pp.
369-528 ; XXIV, 1-32. The Society.
Braunschweig. Archiv fiir Anthropologie, XVII, 3,4; XVIII, 1, 2.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Naturwissenschaftliche Rundschau, II, 48-53, III, 1-46. The Editor.
Verein fiir Naturwissenschaft, Jahresbericht, 1880-1887. The Society.
Braunschweig. Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Mikroskopie, IV, 8, 4; V, 1-3.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bremen. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Abhandlungen, X, 1, 2. The Society.
Brescia. Ateneo. Commentari, 1887. The Society.
Brisbane. Royal Society of Queensland. Proceedings, V, 1, 2. The Society.
Bristol. Naturalists’ Society. Proceedings, n.s., V, 2, 3. The Society.
Brooklyn. Entomologica Americana, III, 8-12; IV, 1-8. The Editor.
Brooklyn Library. 30th Annual report, Bulletin, No. 25. The Librarian.
Briinn. K. K. Miahrisch-Schlesische Gesellschaft zur Beférderung des Acker-
baues, der Natur und Landeskunde. Mittheilungen, 1887. The Society.
Naturforschender Verein. Verhandlungen, XXV. Bericht der Meteorolo-
gischen Commission, 1885. The Society-
Bruxelles. Académie Royale des Sciences des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts. Bul-
letin, 3e Ser. XIII, 11; XIV, 12; 57 année, 1-8. The Academy.
Musée Royale d’ Histoire Naturelle de Belgique. Bulletin, V, 1.
The Director.
Société Entomologique de Belgique. Annales, XXXI. Compte Rendu, Ser.
III, 91-105. Table generale I-XXX. The Society.
Société Belge de Géographie. Bulletin, 1886, XI, 5, 6; 1888, 1, 2, 3.
F. V. Hayden.
Société Belge de Microscopie. Annales, XI. Bulletin, XIV, J-9.
The Society.
Société Malacologique. Proces-Verbaux, 1887, 3 juil.—3 dec.
The Society,
Budapest. Ethnologische Mittheilungen aus Ungarn. (Herrmann) I, 1.
The Editor.
M. Tudomanyos Akademia. Almanach, 1887. Ertekezések a Termeszettudo-
manyok K6rébél, XIII 1, 2; XV, 19; XVI, 1-6; XVII,1. Mathema-
tikai es Termeszettudomanyi Kézlomények vonatkozolog a hazai Viskonyo-
kra, XXI, 2-5. Mathematikai es Természettudomanyi Ertesité, IV, 7-9;
V, 1-5. Mathematische und Naturwissenschaftliche Berichte aus Ungarn,
IV. The Society.
Ungarisches National Museum. Természetrajzi Fiizetek. XI, 2.
The Director.
Buenos Aires. Museo publico de Buenos Aires. Anales, Ent. 2, 14.
The Director.
. Sociedad Cientifica Argentina. Anales, XXIV, 2-6; XXV, 1, 2, 5, 6.
The Society.
Sociedad Geografica Argentina. Revista, Nos. 51-59. The Society.
Buffalo. Historical Society. Annual report, 1888. The Society.
Caen. Société Linnéenne de Normandie. Bulletin, 4e Ser. I. The Society.
Calcutta. Asiatic Society of Bengal. Proceedings, 1887, Nos. 6-10. 1888, Pt.
1,2, 3. Journal, LIV, Pt. 2. No. 4; LV, Part 2, No: 5; LVI, Pt. 2, No.
jeA Vile Pt 2) No. at: The Society.
32
482 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Stray Feathers, X, 6. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Cambridge. Appalachian Mountain Club. Appalachia, V, 1, with map of White
Mountains; II, 2. Register, 1888. The Society.
Harvard University. Bibliographical Contributions, Bulletin, 39, 40, 41.
42nd. annual report of the Astronomical Observatory. The Trusees.
Museum of Comparative Zoology. Bulletin, XIII, 6-10; XIV; XV; XVI, _
1 exeVille ds 2 Memoirs, GV The Director.
Peabody Museum of American Archaeology and Ethnology, 21st annual re-
port. The Director.
Canada, Royal Society of. Proceedings and Transactions. 1887, V.
The Society.
Cape Town. South African Museum. Report of the Trustees, 1887.
The Tru-tees.
Cap Rouge. Le Naturaliste Canadien, XVII, 6—-X VIII, 4. The Editor..
Cardiff. Cardiff Naturalists’ Society. Report and Transactions, I-IV, VI-XV,
XVII, XIX, 2; XX, 1. The Society.
Cassel. Botanisches Centralblatt, XXVIII, 11-13; XXXIII, 1-14; 1880
XXXIV, 1-18; XXXV, 1-13; XXXVI, 1-7. I. V. Williamson Funda.
Catania. Accademia Gioenia di Scienze Naturali. Addunanza del 11. Dec.,
1887. The Society.
Champaign. Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History. Bulletin, II, 1-5, 7;
III, 1-4, 8. The Society.
Charleston. Elliott Society of Science and Art. Proceedings, II, pp. 121-200.
The Society,
Cherbourg. Société Nationale des Sciences Naturelles. Mémoires, XXI, 25.
The Society.
Chicago. Academy of Sciences. Bulletin, 1-19. Constitution and by-laws.
The Society.
Chicago Public Library. Sixteenth annual report. By-laws.
The Librarian.
Newberry Library. Proceedings of the Trustees to Jan. 5, 1888.
The Trustees.
Christiania. Archiv fiir Mathematik og Naturvidenskab, XII, 2-4. The Editor.
Norwegische Meteorologische Institut. Jahrbuch, 1885. The Director.
Chur. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Jahresbericht, XXX, XXXI.
The Society.
Cincinnati. Society of Natural History. Journal, VI, 4; X, 4; XI, 1-3.
The Editor.
Cleveland, Ohio, Magazine of Western History. Vol. VIII, No. 6, Oct. 1888.
The Editor.
Columbus. Ohio Meteorological Bureau. 5th annual Report. Report for July
and August, 1888. The Director.
Copenhagen. Botaniske Forening. Meddelser, II, 2. Botaniske Tidskrift, XVI,
4. The Society.
Naturhistoriske Forening. Videnskabelige Meddelelser, I, 1887.
The Society.
Société Royale des Antiquaires du Nord. Mémoires, 1887. The Society.
K. D. Videnskabernes Selskab. Oversigt, 1887, 3; 1888, 1. Skrifter, 6te.
Ser. IV, 4-7. The Society. —
Cordoba. Academia nacional de Ciencias exactas. Actas, V,3. Boletin, X, 1,
De excle als The Society.
Crawfordsville. Botanical Gazette, XII, 12-XIII, 11. The Editor.
Danzig. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Schriften, neue Folge, VI, 1.
The Society.
Darmstadt. Verein fiir Erdkunde. Notizblatt, IV, 8. The Society.
Denver. Colorado Scientific Society. Proceedings, Vol. 3. The Society.
Detroit. The Microscope, VII, 10. The Editor.
Dijon. Académie des Sciences, Arts et Belles-Lettres. Mémoires, 1885-86.
: The Society.
5
:
|
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 485
Dorpat. Naturforscher Gesellschaft. Schriften, No. 2,3, 4. Sitzungsberichte>
WEEE 25:S: The Society.
Dresden. K. Leop. Carol. Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher. Nova
Acta, 49-51. Leopoldina, 22, 23. Katalog der Bibliothek, L. 1.
The Society.
K. Mineralogisch-geologisches und prehistorisches Museum. Mittheilungen,
1869-1874-75; H. 1, 2. The Director.
Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft Isis. Sitzungsbericht und Abhandlungen,
1878, Jan-Juli; 1879, Juli-Dec.; 1887. Juli-Dec. The Society.
Dublin. Royal Geological Society of Ireland. Journal, No. 2, XVII, 2; XVIII,
2. The Society.
Royal Irish Academy. Proceedings, Science, IV, 6; Polite Lit. and Antiq.
48. Transactions, XXIX, 1,2. Cunningham Memoirs, IV. List of the
papers in the Transactions, &c. 1786-1886. The Society.
Diirkheim a. d. Hardt. Pollichia. Jahresbericht, 43-46. The Director.
Edinburgh. Botanical Society. Transactions and Proceedings, VI, 1-3; XVII,
: The Society.
Royal Physical Society. Proceedings, 1885-1887. The Society.
Royal Society. Proceedings, XII, p. 245 et seq. XIII, XIV. Transactions
ROOT A eX, NOX MTT, 2) 35 4s XXX 1. 2: The Society.
Emden. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Jahresbericht, 1867, No’s. 58-71, 1886.
The Society.
Erfurt. K. Akademie gemeiniitziger Wissenschaften. Jahrbuch, n. F., H. 15.
The Society.
Erlangen. Biologisches Centralblatt, VII, 1S—VIII, 17.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Physikalisch-medicinische Societat. Sitzungsberichte, 1879, 1880.
The Society.
Florence. Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale. Bollettino, 1888.
The Librarian.
Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano (Caruel), XX, 1-4. The Editor.
Societa Italiana di Antropologia, Etnologia e Psicologia comparata. Archivio,
SAVE 33) SOV, 1: The Society.
France. Association Francaise pour l’Avancement des Sciences. Comptes Rendus,
1885, I and II; 1886, I and II. The Society.
Frankfurt a/M. Deutsche Malaculogische Gesellschaft. _Nachrichtsblatt, 1887,
Nos. 11, 12; 1888, 1, 2,5-10. Jahrbiicher, XIV, 4. The Society.
M. Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, XV, 1—
8. Bericht, 1888. The Society.
Frankfurt a/O. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Monatliche Mittheilungen, II, 8—
ee Oar EVE AG Le Vi, 710; VI; 1-3: The Society.
Societatum Litterae, 1887 No. 11, 12; 1888, No. 4, 5, 6, 9. The Editor.
Frauenfeld. Thurgauische Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, XIV,
4, H. 8. The Society.
Freiburg, i. B. Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Bericht iiber die Verhandlungen,
100 The Society.
Gand. Archives de Biologie. VII, 1, 2,3; VIII, 1-4.
T. V. Williamson Fund.
Geneva. Institut National Génévois. Bulletin, F. 28. The Society.
Recueil Zoologique Suisse, 1V, 4. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Société de Physique et d’Histoirie Naturelle. Memoires, XXIX, 2.
The Society.
Genoa. Societa di Lettura e Conversazione Scientifiche. Giornale, IV, 5,6; V.
1-12; VIII, 3, 4, 8,93; X, lle. Sem. 5-7; 2e. Sem. 10-12;
The Society.
Gera. Gesellschaft von Freunden der Naturwissenschaften. Jahresbericht, X VIII—
XXVI. Verhandlungen, II, 1863-67; I1I, 1868-72. The Society.
Germany. Deutsche Anthropologische Gesellschaft. Festschrift zur Begriissung
des XVIII Kongresses in Niirnberg. The Society.
484 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Giessen. Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Chemie, (Fittica.) 1885, No-
4-6
—6. The Editor.
Glasgow. Geological Society. Transactions, I, 1,2; V,2; VI, 2. The Society.
Philosophical Society. Proceedings, XVIII. The Society.
G6rlitz. Oberlausitzische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Neues lausitzisches
Magazin, LXIII, 2; XLIV, 1. * The Society.
Gotha. Dr. A. Petermann’s Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes’ geographischer
Anstalt. XXXIII, 1I-XXXIV,11. Erganzungsheft, 88-91.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Granville. Denison Scientific Association. Bulletin I, II, 1, 2, III. Memoirs
sail The Society.
Graz. Botanisches Institute. Mittheilungen, H. II. I. V. Williamson Fund,
Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein fiir Steirmark. Mittheilungen, 1887.
The Society.
Verein der Arzte in Steiermark. Mittheilungen, Vereinsjahr, 1&87.
The Society.
Zoologisches Institut. Arbeiten, II, 3. The Society.
Groningen. Natuurkundig Genootschap. Vijfentachtigste Verslag, 1887.
The Society.
Gueéret. Société des Sciences naturelles et archéologiques de la Creuse. Mémoires,
2me, Seb. Lull. The Society.
Giistrow. Verein der Freunde der Naturgeschichte in Mecklenburg. Archiv,
DGGE The Society.
Halle a/S_ Verein fiir Erdkunde. Mittheilungen, 1887. The Society.
Zeitschrift fiir Naturwissenschaften, LX, 3-6. The Editor.
Halifax. Nova Scotian Institute of Natural Science. Proceedings and Transac-
tions, VII, 1, 2. The Society.
Yorkshire Geological and Polytechnic Society. Proceedings, New Series,
XSi: The Society.
Hamburg. Geographische Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, 1885, No 3; 1887-88.
The Society.
Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Abhandlungen, X. Bericht, 1886, 1887.
The Society.
Verein fiir naturwissenschaftliche Unterhaltung. Verhandlungen, V, VI. —
The Society.
Zoologische Gesellschaft. Bericht, 23—26er. The Society.
Hannover. Naturhistorische Gesellschaft. Jahresbericht, 34-37. The Society.
Harlem. MHollandische Maatschappij der Wetenschappen. Natuurkundige Ver-
handelingen, 3e. Verz. V,1. Archives. XXII, 2, 3. The Society.
Musée Teyler. Archives, III, 1. Catalogue de la Bibliothéque, V, VI.
The Society.
Société Hollandaise, XXII, 4, 2. The Society.
Heidelberg. Naturhistorisch-medicinischer Verein. Verhandlungen, n.f., IV, 1.
The Society.
Helsingfors. Finska Vetenskaps Societeten, 1838-1888, dess Organisation och
Verksamhet. Af. A. E. Arppe. 1888. Acta. XV. Bidrag H. 44-47. Of-
versigt, XXVIII, XXIX. The Society.
Hermannstadt. Verein fiir Siebenbiirgische Landeskunde. Jahresbericht, 1886—
87. Archiv, n. F. XXI, 2,3: The Society.
Houston, Texas. Texas State Geological and Scientific Association. Bulletin,
No. 3. The Society.
Iowa City. State Historical Society. Iowa Historical Record, April and July,
1888. The Society.
Jena. Anatomischer Anzeiger, II, 24-27; III, 1-28. The Editor.
Centralblatt fiir Bakteriologie und Parasitenkunde, I, 1, 2; II; III 3-26;
IV, 1-17. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Medicinisch-naturwissenschaftliche Gese!Ischaft. Zeitschrift, XXI, 3-XXII,
4. The Society.
Zoologische Jahrbiicher, III, 1-5. I. V. Williamson Fund.
(1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 485
Jersey City. The Exchanger’s Monthly, IIT, 2, 3. The Editor.
Karlsruhe. Naturwissenschafilicher Verein. Verhandlungen, X, 1883-1888.
The Society.
Kharkow. Université Impériale, Société des Naturalistes. Travaux, XXI.
The Society.
Société des Sciences expérimentales, Section Médicale. Travaux, 1886—
87, 1888. The Society.
Kieff. Société des Naturalistes de Kiew. Mémoires, IX, 1, 2. The Society.
Kiel. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Schriften, VII, 1. The Society-
Universitat. Verzeichniss, 1886, III; 1887, 1. Chronik, 1886-87, 1887—88-
Professoren und Docenten, 1665-1887. Fifty-four Theses.
The University.
Klagenfurt. Landesmuseum von Karnten. Carinthia, 1887. No’s. 11. 12; 1888
No’s. 1-8. The Society.
Klausenburg. Siebenbiirgischer Museum-Verein. Publicationen; Abhandlungen
1887, I. The Society,
K6nigsberg. Physikalisch-dkonomische Gesellschaft. Schriften, XX VII.
; _ The Society.
Kolozsvart. Erdélyi Museum-Egylet. Orvos-Termeszettudomanyi Ertesité, 1887,
peuiboi ll ge Ti ass LIT, 1), 2: The Society.
Lausanne. Musées d’Histoire Naturelle. Rapports annuels des Conservateurs,
1887. The Director.
Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles. Bulletin, No. 96. The Society.
Leeds. Geological and Polytechnic Society of the West Riding of Yorkshire.
Proceedings, IX, 3. The Society.
Philosophical and Literary Society. Annual report, 1887-8.
The Society.
Leipzig. Das Archiv, Nos. 39, 40. The Editor.
Archiv fiir Anatomie und Physiologie. Anatomische Abtheilungen, 1887, H.
4.5,6; 1888,1-6. Physiologische Abtheilungen, 1887, H. 5, 6 and
Supplement-Band; 1888, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Botanische Jahrbiicher, (Engler), IX, 2-5; X, 1-3. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Jahrexberichte iiber die Fortschritte der Anatomie und Physiologie, XIV, 2
Ai e ee NOVE Abth. 1, 25 XVI, 2: I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal fiir Ornithologie, XXXV, 8,4; XXXV,1. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Morphologisches Jahrbuch, XIII, 2-4; XIV, 1.2. 1. V. Williamson Fund.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Sitzungberichte, 1874, 1886, 1887.
The Society.
K. Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen, XIV, 1-9.
Bericht ii. d. Verhandlungen, Math.-Phys. Classe 1887. 1, 2.
The Society.
Verein fiir Erdkunde. Mittheilungen, 1886, 1-3; The Society.
Verein von Freunden der Erdkunde. 4er Jahresbericht, 1864. The Society.
Zeitschrift fiir Krystallographie und Mineralogie, XIII, 5—XIV, 6.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie, XLVI, 1-4; XLVII, 1, 2.
J. V. Williamson Fund.
Zoologischer Anzeiger, IV, 85; 1888, No. 265-292. The Editor.
Leyden. Nederlandsche Dierkundige Vereeniging. Tijdschrift; Deel I, 3, 4.
Ode. Ser. TI, 1, 2. . The Society.
Leyden Museum. Notes, edited by H. Schlegel, IX, 1-4; X, 1, 2.
The Editor:
Liége. Société Royale des Science. Mémoires, 2me Ser. XIV, XV.
: The Society.
Lille. Société Géologique du Nord. Annales, XIV. The Society.
Lisbon. Associagao dos Engenheiros civis Portuguezes. Revista, 215-226.
Collecgao de Legislacao de 1886 e 1887. The Society.
Liverpool. Free Public Library, Museum and Walker Art Gallery. 35th annual
report, ~ ; The Director.
486 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Geological Society. Proceedings, V, 3, 4. The Society.
Naturalists’ Field Club. Proceedings, 1887. The Society.
London. Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 5th Ser. 120; 6th Ser. I, 1-6;
II, 7-11. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Anthropological Institute. Journal, XVIII, 1-4 The Society.
Brit sh Association for the Advancement of Science, 57th Report.
Wilson Fund.
Chemical Society. Abstract, 48-57. Catalogue of Library. Journal 3/1,
302; Suppl.; 305-312. The Society.
Curtis’s Botanical Magazine, 1210-1221. I. V. Williamson Fund.
The Earth, Nos. 21, 27. The Editor.
Entomological Society. Transactions, 1887, No. 4; 1888, No. 1 and 2.
The Society.
The Electrician, XX, 479-547. The Editor.
Gardeners’ Chronicle, 3rd Ser., No. 48-98. The Editor.
Royal Geographical Society. Proceedings, New Ser. IX, 12; X. 1-11.
The Society.
Geological Magazine, 282-298. I. V. Williamson Fund. #
Geological Record, 1879, 1880-84. I. V. Williamson Fund, Fi
Geological Society. Quarterly Journal, No, 172-176. List, Nov. 1, 1887. i
The Society. a
Geologists’ Association. Proceedings, X, 3-7. The Society. 2
Grevillia. A monthly record of cryptogamic botany and its literature (Cooke), u
XVI, 79, 80, 81. Ex. of Geo. Martin. aa
Hardwicke’s Sciences Gossip, 276-287. I. V. Williamson Fund, a
Royal Horticultural Society. Journal V, 2-9; VI, VII, 1,2 Villas
The Society.
Ibis, 5th Ser, VI. 21-24. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Royal Institution of Great Britian. Proceedings, XII, 1. Li-t, 1887.
The Society.
he
_
it
Journal of Botany, British and Foreign, Nos. 300-311.
I. V, Williamson Fund.
Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Sciences, No. 110-114.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
7
‘
ly
Journal of Physiology, VIII, 6; IX, 1-4. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Knowledge, X, 26-37. The Editor.
Linnean Society. Journal, Botany 152-155, 159-162; Zoology, 118, 130;
131; 186-139. List, 1S87-S8. Transactions, Zoology, III, 5, 6; Botany,
ie ye UDO Es ile The Society.
London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine, 5th Ser. 151-162.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Royal Microscopical Society. Journal, 1887. No’s. 5, 6, Supplement; 1888,
1-5. The Society.
Mineralogical Society of Great Britian and Ireland. Mineralogical Magazine
and Journal, VII, 35, 36; VIII, 37. I. V. Williamson Fund.
The Naturalist, 149-160. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Nature, No. 943-993. The Editor.
Paleontographical Society. Publications, X LI. Wilson Fund,
Physical Society. Proceedings, Vol. IX, 2-4. The Society.
Queckett Microscopical Club. Journal, 2nd Ser. III, 20-22. — The Society.
Royal Society, Proceedings, No. 259-271. Philosophical Transactions, 178a,
178b. List, The Society.
Scientific Enquirer, II, 12. The Editor.
Society of Arts. Journal, XXNXV. The Society.
Society for Psychical Research. Proceedings, I, 12. The Society.
Triibner’s American and Oriental Literary Record, 2385-239.
The Publishers.
Zoological Record, 1886. ~ J. V. Williamson Fund.
- 1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 487
Zoological Society. Proceedings, 1888, 1-4. Transactions, VII, 7.
The Society.
Zoologist, 132-148. I. V. Williamson Fund.
London, Ca. The Canadian Entomologist, XIX, 12; XX, 1-1]. The Editor.
Louvain. Université Catholique. Annuaire, 52. The University.
Liibeck. Naturhistorisches Museum. Jahresbericht, 1887. The Society.
Liineberg. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Jahresheft, I, II, 1V-IX, XI, XII.
The Society.
Lund. University. “Acta, 1865-72; XXIII. The University.
Madrid. Real Academia de ciencias exactas, fisicas y naturales. Memorias, XXII,
APS XOX he The Academy.
Observatorio Resumen de Jas Observaciones, 1883. Observaciones Meteoro-
logicas 1882-85. The Observatory.
Sociedad Geografica. Boletin, XXIV, 1-3; XXV, 1, 2. The Society.
Manchester. Geological Society. Transactions, XIX, 11-20. The Society.
Literary and Philosophical Society. Proceedings, 25, 26. Memoirs, Ser VIII,
ES The Society.
Scientific Students Association. Annual Report, 1887. The Society.
Munhattan. Journal of Mycology, I, II, ITI, IV, 1-10. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Marburg. Gesellschaft ziir Beférderung der gesammten Naturwissenschaften,
Sitzungsberichte, Jahrg. 1886, 1887. Schriften, XII, 2. The Society.
Marveille. Musée d’Histoire Naturelle. Annales, Zoologie, II.. The Director,
Mendon, Il]. American Antiquarian, IX, 6; X, 1-6. The Editor.
Metz. Académie. Mémoires, 1883-84. The Society.
Verein fiir Erdkunde. Jahresbericht, 3er, 4er, 10er. The Society.
Mexico. Museo Nacional. Anales, IV, 2. The Society.
Observatorio Meteorologico—Magnetico Central de Mexico. Boletin Mensuel
I, 6, 7 and Suppi. The Director.
Sociedad cientifica ‘Antonio Alzate.’”? Memorias, I-12; II, 1-3.
The Society.
Sociedad de Geografia Estadistica. Boletin, I, 1, 2. The Society.
Sociedad Mexicana de Historia Natural. La Naturaleza, I, 2, 3. The Society.
Milano. L‘Electricita, Anno VII, 36. The Editor.
R. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze. Rendiconti, XVII, 18; XX, 17-19; XXI,
1-16. The Society.
Regio Istituto technico Superiore. Programma, 1887-88. The Society.
Middelburg. _Zeeuwsch Genootschap der Wetenschappen. Archief, VI, 3.
Levensberichten van Zeeuwen, le Afl. The Society.
Middletown Wesleyan University, Museum, 17th anuual report. The Director,
Milwaukee. Naturhistorischer Verein von Wisconsin. Proceedings, 1888, pp.
141-190. The Society.
Public Museum of the City of Milwaukee, 6th annual report. The Director.
Minneapolis. The American Geologist, I, 1-6; II, 1-5. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Minnesota Academy of Natural Sciences. Bulletin, II, 1; 1875; 1878-79.
The Society.
Modena. Societa dei Naturalisti. Atti, Ser. III, V. 3 pp. 49-128. The Society.
Mons. Société des Science, des Arts et des Lettres du Hainaut. Mémoires, 10me.
The Society.
Montevideo. Observatorio météoro!ogico del Colegio Pio de Villa Colon. Bole-
tin mensual, Ano I, 1-3. The Director.
Montpellier. Académie des Sciences et Lettres. Mémoires, Section des Sciences,
Gale The Society.
Montreal. Canadian Record of Science, III, 1-4. The Editor.
Moscow. Société Impériale des Naturalistes. Bulletin, 1887, No. 1-4, znd Ser.
I, Beilage. XV, 5. Mémoires, 2nd. Ser. I. The Society.
hen. K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen, mathem-phy-
sikal. Classe XV, 3; XVI,1,2. Sitzungsberichte, 1886, Nos. 1-3; 1887.
No. 1. Inhaltverzeichniss, 1871-1885, 1887, 2, 3. Gedachtnissrede, Jos,
von Fraunhofer, Carl Theodor y. Siebold. The Society.
488 » PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte. _Beitrage zur
Anthropologie und Urgeschichte Bayerns, VIII 1, 2. The Society.
Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, XXIV, 2,3,4; XXXV,1. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Deutscher und Oesterreichischer Alpenverein. Mittheilungen, 1886, 1887.
Zeitschrift, 1884 H. 3; 1885, 1886, 1887. The Society.
Miinster. Westfalischer Provinzial-Verein fiir Wissenschaft und Kunst. Jahres-
bericht, 15er. The Society.
Nancy. Société des Sciences. Bulletin, Ser. 2. III, 20. The Society.
Napoli. Circolo degli Aspiranti Naturalisti. Revista Italiana di Scienze Naturali
eS Aha The Society.
Societa dei Naturalisti in Napoli. Bo'letino, Ser. I, Vol. II. | The Society.
Zoologische Station. Zoologischer Jahresbericht, 1885, Nachtrag zur 1 Abth.,
L885. I. V. Williamson Fund,
Newcastle-upon-Tyne. Natural History Society of Northumberland, Durham
and Newcastle-upon-Tyne. Transactions, IX, 1. The Society.
New Hayen. Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences. ‘Transactions, VII, 2.
The Society.
The American Journal of Science, 3rd Ser. No. 204-215. The Editor.
Yale University. Report, July 1, 1887. Catalogue, 1887-88. The President.
New York. Academy of Sciences. Annals, 1V, 5-8. Transactions, VI, VII,
3-8. The Society.
Astor Library, 39th annual report. The Librarian.
The Auk, V, 1-4. The Editor.
American Chemical Society. Journal, V, 7-12; VI, 5-10. The Society.
Columbia College. School of Library Economy. Annual Register, 1887-8.
The Librarian.
Cooperative index to periodicals, ITI, 4-IV, 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Cooper Union for the advancement of Science and Art. 29th annual report.
The Director.
Forest and Stream, XXIX, 20-26; XXX, 1-26; XXXI,1-18. The Editor.
Garden and Forest, I, 1-39. The Editor.
American Garden, IX, 1-11. The Editor.
American Geographical Society. Bulletin, XIX, 4 and suppl. XX, 1-3.
The Society.
Industrial Education Association. Monographs, I, 1. The Society.
Library Journal, XII, 9—XIII, 10. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Literary News, VIII, 12; IX, I-11. The Editor.
New York Medical Journal, XLVII, 23-XLVIII, 21. The Editor.
Mercantile Library. Bulletin, No. 10. 67th annual report, © The Director.
Microscopical Society. Journal. II, 2, 6—-9a.; IV, 1-4. The Society.
American Museum of Natural History. Annual reports, 2nd—9th, 11th and
12th, 1887. The Director.
Popular Science Monthly. Index to Vols. I-XX. June, 1886; 1888, Jan. to
Dec. ; The Editor.
Science, 252-303. I. V. Williamson Fund.
State Pharmaceutical Association. Proceedings, 1(ith annual meeting, Cat-
skill, 1888. The Society.
Torrey Botanical Club. Bulletin, IX, 2; XIII, 9; XV,1-11. The Society.
Nijmegen. Nederlandsche Botanische Vereeniging. Nederlandsch Kruidkundig
Archief, V, 2. The Society .
Norway. Skandinaviske Naturforskeres. Forhandlinger, 30e Méde, 1886.
The Society.
Niirnburg. Naturhistorische Gesellschaft. Jahresbericht, 1887. The Society.
Odessa. Société des Naturalistes de la Nouvelle Russie. Zapiski, XII, 1, 2;
pi 0 Ie Bs The Socieiy.
Offenbach am Main. Verein fiir Naturkunde. Bericht, 26-28. The Society.
Omaha. Omaha Public Library, 11th annual report. The Librarian.
Ottawa. Ottawa Field-Naturalists Club. Ottawa Naturalist, I, 9-12; II, 1-7.
‘ The Society.
-1888.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 489
Oxford. Annals of Botany, I, 2-4; II, 5, 6. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Padova. Societa Veneto-Trentina di Scienze Naturali. Bollettino, IV, 2.
ke The Society.
Palermo. Reale Accademia di Scienze, Lettere e Belle Arti di Palermo. Atti,
Nuova Ser. IX. Bollettino, III, 6. The Society.
Il Naturalista Siciliano, VII, 3-12; VIII, 1. The Editor.
Passau. Naturhistorischer Verein. 14e Bericht. The Society.
Paris. Annales des Mines, XI, 4; XII,56; XIII, 1-3.
Minister of Publie Works, France.
Annales des Sciences Géologiques, XIX; XX, 1, 2. The Editor.
Annales des Sciences Naiurelles; Botanique, 7me, Ser. VI, 1-6; VII, 1-6.
Zoologie, III, 1-6; IV, 1-6; V, 5,6; VII, 1-4. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Archives de Zoologie expérimentale et générale, V, 3, 4, 2me Ser. Suppl. VI, .
cae I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ecole polytechnique. Journal, T, 57. The Director.
Journal de Conchyliologie, 3e Serie, T. XX VII, 1-4. XXVIII, 1, 2.
The Editor.
Journal de Micrographie, 1887, 15-1888, 12. The Editor.
Muséum d’ Histoire Naturelle. Nouvelle Archives, IX, 2; XI, 1. The Society.
Le Naturaliste, 2e Ser., No. 18-41. The Editor.
Revue d’Ethnographie, VI, 1-6. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Reyue géosraphique internationale, 145. The Editor.
Revue scientifique, 1886, 1888, No’s. 1-26, XLII, 1-26.
J. V. Williamson Fund.
Société d’Acclimatation. Bulletin, 4e Ser. TV, 11; V, 2, 4, 7-21.
The Society.
Société de Biologie. Compte rendu des Séances, 1887, No. 36-42; 1888,
1-33 The Society..
Société Entomologique. Annales, VI, 1-4; VII, 1-4. The Society.
Société Géologique de France. Bulletin, 3me Sér. XIV, 8; XV, 4-8; XVI.
1-4. The Society,
Société Malacologique de France. Bulletins, 1V. The Society.
Société Frangaise de Mineralogie. Bulletin, X, 7-XI, 6; Premiere Tab. Vols.
I-X, 7-9. The Society.
Société nationale d’ Agriculture de France. Bulletin, 1887, No. 9, 10; 1888,
1-7. Mémoires, 132. The Society-
Société Philomaihique. Bulletin, XI, 4, XII, 1-3. The Society.
Société Zoologique de France. Mémoires, I, 1-3. Bulletin, XII, XIII, 1-6,
The Society.
Pertlf. Scottish Naturalist, N. S. No. 18, 22. The Editor.
Philadelphia. Academy of Natural Sciences. Proceedings, 1887, III; 1888, I;
If. | Journal, 1X, 2. Publication Committee
College of Pharmicy. Alumni Association, 24th ai.nual Report.
The Society.
The Conchologists’ Exchange, II, 5—9. The Editor.
The Dental Cosmos. XXIX, 12-XXX, 1], The Editor-
Engineers’ Club. Proceedings, VI. 3, 4, 5 and Suppl. VII, 1. The Society.
American Entomological Society. Transactions, 1887, Supplementary Vol.,
XIV, 2-4; XV, 1-3. The Society.
Franklin Institute. Journal, 744-755. The Society.
The Gardener’s Monthly, 1887, Dec. 1888, Jan. The Editor.
Historical Society of Pennsylvania. Pennsylvania Magazine of History and
Biography, XII, ]—4. The Society-
The Journal of Comparative Medicine and Surgery, IX, 1-4.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Am. Journal of the Medical Sciences, 1888, Jan. to December. The Editor.
American Journal of Pharmacy, 1888, Jan. to November.
The Editor.
Medical and Surgical Keporter, LVII, 1-LIX, 21. The Editor.
490 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
The Microscopical Bulletin, Dec. 1887. 1888, Feb., Aug., October.
The Editor.
American Notes and Queries, I, 1-3. The Editor.
American Naturalist, Dec. 1887—Dee. 1888. The Editor.
Naturalist’s Leisure Hour, March—Noy. 1888. The Editor.
American Philosophical Society. Proceedings, XVII, 126,127. Transac-
tions, XVI, 2. The Society.
Polyclinic, V, 6-12; VI, 1-5. The Editor.
University 6f Penusylvania. Catalogues and Announcements, 1887-88.
The Trustees.
Zoological Society, Eighth annual report. The Society.
Pisa. Societa Malacologica Italiana. Bollettino, XIII, pp. 1-3, 49-208.
The Society.
Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali. Atti, Processi-Verbali, VI, pp. 1-10.
The Society.
Portland. Society of Natural History. Journal I, 1. Proceedings, Session 1880—
81, 9th, 11th-14th, 16th Meetings; 1881-82, 1st, 8rd, 8th, 10th and 11th
Meetings. The Society.
Port of Spain. Trinidad Official and Commercial Register and Almanack,
(Guppy). 1887-1888. The Editor.
Prag. K. B. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Bericht iiber die mathem. und natur:
wissenschaftlichen Publicationen 1888, 2° H. Sitzungbericht, 1885-87,
Jahresbericht, 1885-87. Abhandlungen, 7e. Folge, 1. Geschichte der
Gesellschaft, 1888, 2, H. The Society.
Presburg. Verein fiir Natur-und Heilkunde. Verhandlungen, n. F. H.5,6. ~
The Society.
Raleigh. Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society. Journal, 1887, I; IV, 2; 1888, 1.
The Society.
Regensburg. K. B. botanische Gesellschaft. Flora, n. R. No. 45.
The Society.
Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Berichte, H. 1, 1886-87. The Society.
Riga. Naturforscher Verein. Correspondenzblatt, 4er—-ller, 3ler Jahrg.
The Society.
Rio de Janeiro. Museo Nacional. Archivos, VII. The Director,
Observatoire. Revista, 1888, Nos. i-12. The Director.
Rochester. Academy of Sciences. Section of Microscopy; Bulletin, May 27,
1885. The Society.
Warner Observatory. History and Work, I. The Director.
Rome. R. Accademia dei Lincei. Atti, Serie Quarta. Rendiconti III, Fasc.
4-13; 2° Semest. IV, 1-13 and index, VI, 3. The Society.
Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale Vittorio Emanuele di Roma. Bollettino, 1887,
II; III, 1-8; 1888. The Librarian.
Societa Geografica Itaiiana. Bullettino, Ser. II, T. XII. 1; XXI. 10, 11, 12.
Ser. IM; Vol. 1,2-9: The Society.
Societa degli Spettroscopisti Italiani. _Memorie, XII, 2, 5-7, 9et seq. XVII.
The Society.
Sacramento. University of California. Annual report, June 30, 1887.
The Regents.
St. Anthony Park. University of Minnesota. Experiment Station of the
College of Agriculture. Bulletin, No’s. 3, 4. ‘The Director.
St. Gallen. St. Gallische naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. Bericht, 1885-86.
The Society.
Saint John. Natural History Society of New Brunswick. Bulletin, No. 7.
The Society.
St. Louis. Mercantile Library Association. Annual report, 1887. The Trustees.
St. Petersburg. K. Academie der Wissenschaften. Repertorium fiir Meteorologie,
Supplementband V and Atlas. Bulletin, XXIX, 3; XXXI, 1-4.
The Society.
Hortus Petropolitanus. Acta, X, 1]. The Director.
a
Ceieccenithe Se
eT
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 491
Hortus Universitatis Imperialis Petropolatanae. Scripta Botanica, II, 1.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Imperial Russian Geographical Society. Report, Ottchet and 2nd ed. Izves-
tiya, 1887. Beobachtungen der Rus. Polarstation an der Lenamiindung,
TiTh.,2L. Izviestiya, XXIII, 4-6; XXIV, 1, 2. The Society.
Physikalische Central-Observatorium. Annalen, 1886,1,2. The Director.
St. Peterburgskoye Obshtchestvo Yestesvo Ispytately. Trudy, XVIII. Sec-
tion of Geology and Mineralogy, XIX. Section of Zoology and Physi-
ology, XIX. The Society.
Societas Entomologica Rossica. Horae, XXI. The Society.
Salem. Essex Institute. Bulletin, XTX, 1-12. The Society.
San Francisco. California Academy of Sciences. Memoirs, II, 1. Bulletin, II, 8.
The Society.
Free Public Library. Annual report, June 30, 1888. The Librarian.
Mercantile Library Association, 35th annual report. The Librarian.
Semur. Société des sciences historiques et naturelles. Bulletin, Ye Ser. 3.
: ; The Society.
Siena. R. Accademia dei Fisiocritici. Atti IV, 1, 2,4. Bollettino, II, 2-7, V,
10. The Society.
Stettin. Verein fiir Erdkunde. Jahreshericht, 1887. The Society.
Stockholm. Entomologisk Tidskrift, VIII, I-4. The Editor
Geologiska Férening. Forhandlingar, VIII, 1-4; IX, 6,7; X, 1-*.
‘The Society.
Svenska Sallskabet for Anthropolologi och Geografi. Ymer, 1887, 1-8.
The Society.
K. Vetenskaps Akademien. Ofversigt, 1887, No. 8-10; 1888, 1-6.
The Society.
K. Vitterhets Historie och Antiquitets Akademien. Antiquarisk Tijdskrift
fomoMenige IVa IZ, 3 Vilis VAIS TS 2s xa The Society.
Sint Forschungen zur De utschen Landes und Volkskunde (I.ehmann) I,
2-8; II, 1-6; II, 1, 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Humboldt, 1888. No. 1-11. J. V. Williamson Fund.
Neues Jalirbuch fiir Mineralogie, 1880-84, 1887, I, II and V, 1888, I, 1-3;
II, 1-3. Beilage- Band. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Verein fiir vaterlandische Naturkunde in Wiirttemberg. Beilage Banca, Jahre-
shefte, 44. The Society.
Wiirttembergischer Verein fiir Handelsgeographie und Férderung deutscher
Interessen im Auslande. Jahresberichte, V. VI. The Society.
Switzerland. | Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, Jahresberichte
1886-87. The Society.
Sydney. Geographical Society of Australia. N. S. Wales and Victoria Branches.
Proceedings, I, II, Special Volume. The Society.
Royal Society of New South Wales. Journal and Proceedings, XX, XXI,
Linnean Society of N. S. W. Proc. Ist ser., 2nd ser. 4, IIT, 1. The Society.
Tasmania. Royal Society. Papers and Proceedings and Report, 1887.
The Society.
Tokio. Seii Kwai. WI,11,12; VII, 1-10. The Society.
Topeka. Kansas Academy of Sciences. Transactions, X. The Society.
Washburn Laboratory of Natural History. Bulletin, I, 7. The Society.
Toronto. Canadian Institute. Annual Report, 1886-87, V, 2; VI, 1.
The Society.
Entomological Society. Annual Report, 1887. The Society.
Toulouse. Académie des Sciences, Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres. Mémoires, 8e
Ser. IX. The Society.
Revue Mycologique, VII, 37-40. The Society.
Société d’Histoire Naturelle. Bulletin, XXI, Jan.—Sept. Tables des Matieres,
1886-88. Compte—Rendu, 23 Novy. 1887, and 1888.
The Society.
492 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Société des Sciences physiques et naturelles. Bulletin, V, 1, 2.
The Society.
Trenton. Natural History Society. Journal, I, 3. The Society.
Truro. Royal Institution of Cornwall. Journal, IX, 2,8. The Society.
Tiibingen. Botanisches Institut. Untersuchungen, H, 3. The Editor.
Der Naturforscher, XX, 27-52, XX, 1-29. The Director.
Turin. Archives Italiennes de Biologie, VIII, 8; IX, 1, 2,3; X, 1, 2. }
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Musei di Zoologia ed Anatomia comparata della R. Universita. Bollettino,
II, 27-48. The Director.
Osservatorio della Regia Universita. Bollettino, VVI. The Director.
Upsal. Regia Societas Scientiarum. Nova Acta, VIII, 2. The Society.
Observatoire de l’Université. Bulletin méteorologique, XIX.
The Director.
Utrecht. Provincial Utrechtsch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen.
Verslag, 1887... Aanteekeningen, 1887. The Society.
K. Nederlandsch meteorologisch Instituut. Jaarboek, 1887. The Sdciety.
United States. American Association for the Advancement of Science. Pro-
ceedings, XXXVI. The Society.
American Pharmaceutical Association. Proceedings, XXXV. The Society.
Department of Agriculture. Division of Entomology. Bulletins, 5, 8 (2nd
ed) Os lil eL 2. The Department.
Department of the Interior. United States Geological Survey. Mineral
Resources of the United States, Calendar Year 1886. The Department.
Venice. Notarisia, I, 8-12. The Editor.
R. Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti. Atti, Serie 6a, V, 2-9.
The Society.
L’Ateneo Veneto, Ser. XI, II, 1-5, Ser. XII, Vol. I, 1-6; Vol. XII, 1-5.
The Editor.
Vermont. State Board of Agriculture, Manufactures and Mining. 2nd biennial
. report. Montpelier, 1874. In Exchange.
Vienna. Anthropologische Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, XV, 1,4; XVII, 3, 4;
VILL The Society.
K. K. Central-Anstalt fiir Meteorologie und Erdmagnetismus. Jahrbucher, N.
F. V, 1868-X1, 1874; XIII, 1876—X XIII, 1888. The Society.
K. K. Geographische Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, X VIII, 1875—X XX, 1887.
The Society.
Embryologisches Institut der K. K. Universitat in Wien. Mittheilungen, 1887.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
K. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt. Jahrbuch, XXXVII, 2, 3,4; XXXVIII,
1, 2. Verhandlungen, 1882, 11; 1887, No. 9-18; 1888. No. 1-13.
Mineralogische und petrographische Mitthelungen, (Tschermak), IX, 4, 5,
Geax ease I. V. Williamson Fund.
K. K. Naturhistorisches Hofmuseum. *Annalen II, 1-4; III, 1-4.
The Society.
Ornis, Internationale Zeitschrift fiir die gesammte Ornithologie, III, 2-4. IV,
1-4. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Verein zur Verbreitung Naturwissenschaftlicher Kenntnisse. Schriften,
XX VII. The Society.
K. K. Zoologische-botanische Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, XXXVII, 3, 4;
XXXVIIT, 1, 2.
Zoologische Institut. Arbeiten, VII, 2, 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Washington. Chemical Society. Bulletin, No. 1. The Society.
American Monthly Microscopical Journal, VIII, 11, 12; IX, 1-6.
The Editor.
Anthropological Society. The American Authropologist, I, 1-4.
The Society.
Philosophical Society. Bulletin, Vol. 10. The Society.
1888. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 493
Smithsonian Institute. Annual Report, 1885, II. Miscellaneous Collections,
XXXI-XXXIII. The Institution.
United States National Museum. Bulletin, No. 25. Proceedings, 1887, X,
Sheets 29-45, plates. Department of the Interior.
United States Publications, Monthly Catalogue, III, 7-11, IV, 1-12; V, 8.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Worcester. American Antiquarian Society. Proceedings, IV, Title, &c. V, 1, 2.
The Society.
Wiirzburg. K. B. Julius-Maximiliens-Universitat. Fifty Theses.
The University.
Physikalisch-medicinische Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte, 1887. Verhand-
lungen, XXI. The Society.
Zoologisch-zootomisches Institut, Arbeiten, VIII, 3.
I. V. Williamson Fund.
Yokohama. Asiatic Society of Japan. ‘Transactions, XVI, 2. The Society.
Seismological Society of Japan. ‘Transactions, XI, XII. The Society.
INDEX TO GENERA, ETC.
1888.
| Anmadilllonccsnccasesns sc cccemonereien es
| PAT OMIOGHELYS cece ns so+enss\ecasesteates 12
Aspervullttmcocssreecsestons 121 Ales m4
PENS BIOGITIE 5 so83-onencaescoceooce oaoL 396
ASUATTE saceeaeat sanseuceene sense eeerene 332
IASterias toe ae ene 315, 831
INGUFGEA sees /05 exes as sevsnaeessles Seaenee 303
Atalaphiats:soccss-sccsaasceasalcemenee 98
ENEMY TIS. vemeceesieneneceacerseeseae eee 231
AOS bo.soslsneecseteceeescs sastoneoeeteee POL
Atypus....200, 203, 206, 211, 213, 217,
218
Aare liar iscs cscisectecsewccsoncvsaneserees 331
Atinieul ella... s.icsnonseocesaeeeeneee 14, 16
Avienlopecteni.......55)-sss.caseree 232, 233
Balaenasc.scvevecsseerse cores ee 101
Ballamuseect cepeeaisced-nsaaerseaenee 170, 431
Baty GrinuSe.s.cscrs-ne-semeneee aes 360
BatOcrinus sc.oscc¢-ce ce op eoncceeeee 342
| Belideusice nc sce secs: cxces sean eee 94
Belleraplonte:sessesmsateses 234, 235, 236
Bittiam isco: cea secosnwesseseeeeneeiee 332
Boehiileriase oc.) ve. been. teres 23
Bopynlisi- ok duc ceechnases sees 80, 330, 333
BOUrgWeliCrinus.s,.-'--: AZON | EOatyUS acsenccinspeeensesntse sees 200, 202
CGROMASLET 0 secea ce oesses 421, 423, 424 | Epeira...... 78, 79, 178, 175, 193-199,
ACOGVIMIDOCIINUS..cecccnc--ens cczce-s es 854 215, 425
COGIC Sopp tonto seceC uc ee CRCEEEE EELS 309) | Epidiiomms ses. c.sece assessor 324
RG OHO MASTER eos) coe seniacs cc sccccenesene TG) | LEG ENS sapenosccccaoonsteecoscon0ce chao: 101
Greprdiilals saeres o.cacsacsi ooviesse cr Wie S82) | BreasiluSses-cesessee.+cee- see 125, 166, 167
ASrOtAlOCHINIAe - we. 06s ceecseverescens SS2a| BniGhsomialeaccslesceetpoadeeceseseeeree SpE
Crotalocrinus...355, 864-366, 368-384, | Erisocrinus.............cecsessercesees 354
BSG=S 88> || MSOxXcess stance ewlees cee ccecwen neaeeeeee 169
Cracibwla Ms. .c.c.cv 225
RON eISte pa hiss cicsosivennseevecweseee> DAF ROOD |p PaPULU See .aes se -neamonseteremee ears 333
CYClOCAT dale c.ceccccesncee sence eseee 384) bye een ecoocconacoconsoncuosane 332
MBVClOSTAPSUS)...cc0secesscasseesdaeees B20) Gy Crateralamesnaeesceeeseeaeeeeereass 290
MOV Gl OSdssoccrsinyecesccosessssessasn OO A 2G a) Bextra Crimson ames piseee states 30k
RgMOCEPhAlUsS......20-..00-0000-- serve O37 | SBelIS/cc.s650s 9, 90, 92, 99, 100
Sy MOSMNGUS =<. ccc vosececesse-nsroseeese 97 Barbesigorunice. wea atausacaseuacnoden 353, 356
PREV MINA acclecsec-eesessscecscacserese 124: | Brickellacciscessscescaeeccsenecceeesss 16
MO IIAUEMENIUS.coecerasaceenc-2mos ALO, ead) || WHUCUS.e-6-crcerempesresgcaresitsscreceeels 331
BUTI OCKINUS cc. c02)- esa cessesees sores Bi57f |) LAM elie ee acscoar adoocgssctccpcscke 331, 332
REVILOCETAS 2 sec. ccs c we oeseoe. Teecasoeens OAT | Gammaruss-.eerecr es Sssexeceedsovemees 333
496 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
Gasteracanthazs 239, 240
Polothuriaccssecosscsessceeesees ee SiO: esi | Matetnav.scceecsicecessteseee 170, 331, 302
PCS PO Ate re cece ene eeste tea -eeet AZ Ge Madde potalccdesssartecenesomsee rere 303, 307
TBR SIP los cossocceeg a 300" §6;, 90, 189, 1911 *|) “Maeandrinay -.0.c..0.cccaee es secees 303, 306
ly allinia yecaasessstadnceceetcsareet eles 285) |) Mianigerinusson. cesses eeeeaee 131, 183
Eby drangeaicers.sneseacconreeneces 277, 278 | Marsupiocrinus............ 373, 374, 382
ELV ONES orerenereseneenss era cimstess San Marsupites-sase-ceseeaesees 353, 856, 360
[Dy OliEneSeseaecesceece=seeeaspeeeeteee Loi) | Mazapilite..s--s-ttsssesecrs ess ennceeeer 192
ELV PORySsetenemecscostesteeb estonia BOG |) IMCUIOAlnemecee cots eatceaslsseresntrerete 396
FL yStrikis..cuceosccccssscsesesnseevsohes- 103" | Magalonyxccc~c.cvencens sess eens 273
1B bho) Sts aap onondscoccosedecce sancesce Oo, nage) | Welam pus. ps.c~ scence cea aaee ee 330, 332
Lip pone scsi pewsws stushawen savasereme SLT" | Melania' ..2.:.csccscescoteseseeemtars 252
HLOlOpus:....cscsosss2-26-+-S40,/ 008, OOO |) MelanthOne..c..csoseseoescseoeeatens 18, 286
Tlonekenyalscne-ss2e-seeoacoseeneeecaae B06) || Mellitae se -csconussedneesereescence 317, 318
Tlyalosagdalsrscerccccs-norereoss--250, 201 || WelutsuSsss.cces-se-oeereee eee 146, 148
Hylobates........ PerestaedeesSeesise ce 94,95 | Menopomaist..::-s10-0scesenceseenees 94
Fy OCHINUS!pessescees DAT, (G45; 0G, O00) || Menoponice..ccssscssscleersenasseetes 167
Tichthiyerimidaessssessstese sees 361 | Mephitis... ...:.ss0s0es« 51, 97, 98, 258
Ichthyocrinus........ BNO G04, B00. GOL |) Mesodonivdnsscaeessdersewacceseneeee 286
Wl VANASSAoccccccanesraee ce teaeecee- 330, 3832 | Mespilocrinus..... 2.2... -c.cc-sessee 357
UNA TISsceseseccactasese 86; :89;935°94, A00%| .Mietasc.-20icsccescccwsesewseneodeteses <7 te
Mnocauliss:...v |) Millericrinuss.:.:2+-.-sedeeers eee020301-393
Wabrascsics.. eusceoeet eee ee 125: 66a Muitchelllac. 22235. ncseoteeeeee ese 393, 396
Lamium...... Soeeene heeantedenree see 13 || Mithraculus.,...2.<004-ctesssnereeeeees 318
Waminellac.ssseecses eee eae 16, 19, 25, 42 | Mnemiopsis........0ss0ssssveseurseven 82
BeatrOdectus .ccwseccsecececesccsecssocse hOO Miodiolagtc..cece-ceseos), Retdicetlasss)coscescescesttes ne 25, 40
RSH Seer cemeenncee osicodees .c ese .cnceiec sos ne Bo PSoo) | LinhOtheresn.ansssceerea reese 333
SO OMITAS PS ccceccadeasce=-rorors seme NGZ=NG5s} WINEVOpSISs. oes ecccssseneeeeceraeeenets 252
@yfehidiim\aces caves ccc cseceacessee SOvOZe! | PISOGHIMUS e.ceee sesh tees aon eae 350
Onychocrinus..°.....344, 347, 353, 357 | Platycrinus....342, 345, 348, 349, 372
WO ACHISreeeaeiareserensatssceecssse=e SG) delatyoniGhusi scents sseces 125, 330, 333
Ophidiaster....... SCORE CDEC DCOSBOBCBBED Silom ilectanaa.sodeemceqcsocencencaacerseens 79
Ophiocoma...... bb ocooosonnapoDGOctiCS SLG | Hleurocerals.....cccssseecncesessseasins 286
LO PIM OMY XA sor candascecosceerascnscsnce 317 | Pleurotoma.........0.0.-esseeoeeereee 160
Ophioneries......... eee asic'ss.esn'sie 316 | Pleurotomaria..........-.-. 237, 238; 239
RO ONGSMOMAlswe ric sereisaaeseosane scene. SIG | Blexauralcsresscdsiccsasenssnesmrasaene 308
KOE DUC Hl ttentenal ss scles o's cles eccsseasiecss 2967) Elicatocrinusr-scssservat-e-ecesesert 393, 390
ODM Acer cass ancesnssssecccccss eosin 7 Palm uliteSee.ca-eesiserspcennsesasce 131, 136
GGERESTIA se o.. aceevs ceases neseneeccesse Bao |) LOROMIAZ. sesso cee deecn-c¥ec-vsnmanan 396
NODA IMI eric tctaesclecaeaisnnes wecals'*< 180 Peecilozonites,........285, 286, 288-291
@rinthorynchus...... <..-.-.0--+---s- 190 | Polemonium............s.sseeereesees 396
Orophocrinus....... 341, 349, 380, 385 | Polymorphina.............sesersceeee 170
OFEHAGOTISCUS.......00-200eccceeeseees 165 | Polystomum......... cess seeeseeerees 127
OTE Serea sacccssescincseseses T3423 02S on onitesee.-cccesi-ceereceseeems 303, 304, ae
OTHISUM el aek awe slesn 396 = Propithecus .........--.seseeeees 89, 93, “O4
OSURGal sy ceislesieess0eie 21, 122, 123 333 | Protozoa.........ssesersceecercsseerers 73
AD eA I SERER Mer as oessisieiineaivcesessescceese SO GM etenastemjaesebecseseereemerecces 421, 422
PAChyQTapsus ......0cecssecessseeeee eee 320 — Plerogorgia.....csssesseeeserereees 308, 309
RACH Syl iveseiecniescsaeesiews.lesleielice 240 | Pterotocrinus........scececesrrreseeeee 373
Ale mOMacscn a dccisesioescesssisssess 318, 322 | Pupa.........csececcesecccerecrcecsreees 245
IBANEMOMEM Alcs nsccescse-siaceicnseas 318, 322 | Pycmosaccus......sccssscescererreseers 307
Palaemonetes......00c-+--00. SO, 330, B33 | Pyrola......scecsssseccsseesereeeeseneee 396
RAIN Sieeccecevie se seescsn nase sccsees 321 | Pyrus.:.2.....-<- SBEACOSOIOOUCE Scaanc ages 396
Palythoa Ne seve 2 eek Me ae SOW NAN cote cs cccsicasiec se esiieaisinsinsceseerinny 106
IRANO PES. 5.000. clcrese---s-000 819-333 | Ranella........:cececesssecesnrecesesere 324
PAIN Avene aisle cieis'e'nee.so seinen 185 2505 251) |) Retziaa..-..- SCR EC CORA AUODOIONOES 231, 232
PALE aiece sis iceserseesssensesses 16, 24, 25 Rhipidogorgia...... sevececrneeaees 308, 309
ReAltilaceeaececsess oscvasewoeensseces 285, 290 | RhinccerSsecsccsesscsee crrseeeseee 88, 104
498 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.
RUBIZOCrINUS..--..<6-. matt 348. 935450859) | Waimias.. ccc. -cenelsecosee cost eeeeeee 98, 99
RHOGOCHIMUS .s2-scsscccsoeensovoe senses BOA "| Daplt.s. scodsasasade taacendvensoeenenaee 99
RbOmMBOpOtacacce-seemeeweee-e-vereee Doe, | WaKid Gas cnecscc-osasesessne cts oateenas 98
Riynchonella:.;:s4ca:-cseveessa-n ante 232 Taxocrinus...344, 347, 348, 350, 353,
RipidOcrinuse.+-.ncorien-seereese ences: 354 356, 357, 358, 372
SAGENOCHIDUS os sesaecesensesenees seers 35i7 ||| echnocrinusissscerssse-c-e eee omens 354
SalCOphiluSsereeecwnleseeeeneneaesepec ee S87) | MUCEenania acne scceseseseesees heer 174, 215
ALTACE Ass sasccassecdesse-eusesedoeet 10%) Wellinas.ccscaccssssecsesteees Bocacmoce 324
SCAPNALCA teneceeessencacie=abetnrsneclecs Doon) Wexebrattla teccccsclsseccesaeeaa tenets 231
Sehizodus:tste.c-.csecssaceusesconusees Doo ||| EVEUO-tecpovssececest s